Taycan 20 99

Y1A Taycan

WKD Good to know – Driver’s Manual

WKD Y1A 99 20 10/2019 in this manual, your Porsche partner will be glad to > Notice on where you can find further important provide information concerning correct operation information on a topic. Porsche, the Porsche crest, Taycan, PASM, PCM, and care of the items concerned. PSM, Tequipment and other marks are registered trademarks of Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG. Warnings and symbols Printed in Germany. Various types of warnings and symbols are used in Reprinting, even of excerpts, or duplication of any this manual. type is only permissible with the written authorisa- Serious injury or death tion of Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG. DANGER © Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG Porscheplatz 1 Failure to observe warnings in the "Danger" category 70435 Stuttgart will result in serious injury or death. Germany Possible serious injury or WARNING On-board literature death Always keep this on-board literature in the vehicle Failure to observe warnings in the "Warning" cate- and please hand it over to the new owner if you sell gory can result in serious injury or death. your vehicle. Do you have any questions, suggestions, or ideas for Possible moderate or CAUTION your vehicle or for the on-board literature? minor injury Please write to us: Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG Failure to observe warnings in the "Caution" cate- Vertrieb Customer Relations gory can result in moderate or minor injuries. Porscheplatz 1 Possible vehicle damage 70435 Stuttgart NOTICE Germany Failure to observe warnings in the "Notice" category Equipment can result in damage to the vehicle. Because our vehicles undergo continuous develop- ment, equipment and specifications may not be as illustrated or described by Porsche in this manual. Information Items of equipment are sometimes optional or vary Additional information is indicated using the word depending on the country in which the vehicle is "Information". sold. For more information on retrofit equipment, please contact your Porsche partner. b Conditions that must be met in order to use a Because of different legal requirements in individual function. countries, the equipment in your vehicle may vary e Instruction that you must follow. from that described in this manual. Should your 1. If an instruction comprises several steps, these Porsche be fitted with any equipment not described are numbered. 1 Layout of the Manual

Driver's Manual – Digital Contents Safety and Driving Pleasure Overviews

The Driver's Manual is available in Gain an overview and find the topics Find out how to enjoy your driving Familiarise yourself with components digital form on-board in the vehicle you are looking for. pleasure safely. and controls. and as an app. > From page 5 > From page 19 > Page 3

Your first trip Topics from A – Z Technical Data Index

Get to know your vehicle and find out Find out how components and con- Look for specific figures. Get straight to the information you about the main features for your first trols work and how to operate them. > From page 308 are looking for. trip. > From page 243 > From page 24

2 Driver's Manual - Digital Further information about your vehicle is available (depending on country) in the on-board Driver's Manual in your vehicle and in the Porsche "Good to know" app: Detailed functions, video instructions, interactive graphics and keyword search function (index search).

On-board App

You can find the Driver's Manual in the Porsche You can download the Driver's Manual from the Communication Management (PCM) under: relevant app store by searching for Gut zu wis- sen, Good to know or 车主指南:

e e eBAL

Apple Disclaimer Apple, the Apple logo, Apple CarPlay, iPhone, iPod, iOS, Siri and other des- ignations of Apple are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

3 Contents HOLD function ...... 123 Luggage and Transport Intersection Assist ...... 136 Luggage compartment ...... 153 More Safety and More Driving Pleasure ...... 5 Lane Change Assist (LCA) ...... 139 Roof Transport System ...... 214 Overview Illustrations Lane Keep Assist ...... 144 Smoker's Package ...... 228 • Sensors and cameras ...... 19 Lights ...... 147 Socket ...... 229 Driver's Cockpit ...... 20 Night View Assist ...... 171 Storage ...... 243 Filler Openings ...... 23 ParkAssist ...... 176 cupholder ...... 100 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM) Overhead console ...... 22 Mobility and Breakdown Assistance • Sensors and cameras ...... 19 ...... 187 Porsche InnoDrive (PID) ...... 199 12-volt battery ...... 282 Your first trip ...... 24 Porsche Stability Management (PSM) ...... 206 Brake Fluid ...... 60 Porsche Vehicle Tracking System (PVTS) ...... 208 Car Care ...... 63 Opening and locking Charging high-voltage battery ...... 79 Alarm System ...... 54 Speed Limiter (LIM) ...... 230 Spoiler ...... 233 Coolant ...... 97 Bonnet ...... 57 Emergency Call System ...... 108 Central Locking ...... 69 Starting, driving and stopping the vehicle ...... 236 Traffic sign detection ...... 247 Flat Tyre ...... 114 Driver's Key ...... 104 Fuses ...... 117 Garage door opener (HomeLink®) ...... 121 Warn and Brake Assist (WBA) ...... 267 Windscreen Wiper ...... 279 Jack and Lifting Platform ...... 138 Rear lid ...... 211 Screenwash ...... 219 Windows ...... 277 Display and input Towing ...... 245 Air Conditioning and Ergonomics Centre console control panel ...... 76 Tyres and Wheels ...... 249 Porsche Communication Management (PCM) ...190 Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control Technical data (2-/4-Zone Climate Control) ...... 42 instrument cluster ...... 125 voice control ...... 264 Radio equipment in accordance with 2014/53/EU Airbag systems ...... 40 ...... 313 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats) ...... 87 Operation and use Radio equipment outside European countries ....303 Interior lighting ...... 134 Apple CarPlay ...... 55 Software licences ...... 287 Mirror ...... 161 Apps ...... 56 Technical Data ...... 308 Personal settings ...... 180 Device Manager ...... 102 Seat Belts ...... 220 Home screen and MyScreen ...... 124 Index ...... 316 Sun Visors ...... 244 Media ...... 157 seats ...... 223 Messages ...... 160 steering wheel ...... 241 Navigation ...... 165 Driving and Driver Assistance Systems Notifications ...... 173 Active Lane Keeping ...... 30 Over-the-Air (OTA) functions ...... 174 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...... 34 Phone ...... 182 Brakes ...... 61 Porsche Connect ...... 196 Cruise control (CC) ...... 98 Sport Chrono Stopwatch ...... 234 Driving mode ...... 106 Vehicle settings ...... 257 Emergency Stop Function ...... 112 Warning and information messages ...... 271

4 Same Driving Pleasure, More Safety

Same Driving Pleasure, More All components of the electrical system are marked e Check your vehicle regularly (at least once a with warning stickers. The high-voltage cables are month and before any long journey) to ensure it Safety orange. is in good technical condition. In particular, pay Your Porsche: Extreme performance, extreme e Do not perform any work on the high-voltage attention to the following: sportiness. A fascinating experience - no doubt vehicle electrical system, orange-coloured high- – Tyres are not damaged and have the right about it. But only if you can remain relaxed whatever voltage cables, on-board charger, high-voltage pressure and sufficient tread the situation. This is why safety for us is also a mat- heater, high-voltage battery, power electronics – Headlights, brake lights and direction indica- ter of maximum quality. or A/C compressor. tors all work Here you can find out how you can play your part in e Never damage, remove or disconnect the orange – Aerodynamic components are undamaged ensuring safety while driving your Porsche. high-voltage cables from the high-voltage ve- – Wiper blades are intact hicle electrical system. – Windscreen/windows are unobstructed Perfect technology: a prerequisite e Do not touch components of the electrical sys- without any cracks or damage to the glass tem that have been damaged, such as following – Exterior and interior mirrors are intact and for your safety correctly positioned High-quality materials and excellent workmanship an accident. e Never remove the high-voltage battery. – Sensors and cameras are without cracks or will keep your car on the road for many years to damage come. In order to achieve its full potential, the ve- Restricted perception – Cooling air ducts, sensors and cameras are hicle requires attention and care. That way, you will The vehicle produces considerably less driving and not obstructed (e.g. through films or stone also be able to rely on your Porsche in critical running noise than a vehicle with a combustion en- shields, number plate holders) situations. gine. In certain situations - in zones with traffic e Only use telephones or 2-way radios inside the calming, when reversing or parking, for example - vehicle with an external antenna connected so as Getting to know the special features of the other road users may not hear your vehicle. not to exceed the limits for electromagnetic ra- electric vehicle e Activating E-Sound. diation in the vehicle. e Drive with extreme care and attention. Checking tyres for damage Checking the vehicle for damage and correct functioning

Electrical system The voltage in the high-voltage vehicle electrical system and high-voltage battery is extremely dan- Damaged tyres may burst while you are driving. You gerous. Touching damaged high-voltage cables, the may lose control of the vehicle. on-board charger, the high-voltage heater, the high- e Depending on how often you drive and the con- voltage battery, the power electronics or the A/C A vehicle with technical defects may be the cause of ditions, but at least once a month, check tyres compressor can result in a fatal electric shock. accidents, such as due to faulty operating behaviour.

5 Same Driving Pleasure, More Safety

regularly for foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks > Please refer to chapter "Configuring Tyre Checking aerodynamic components and bulges. Remember to also check the side Pressure Monitoring (TPM) on the central walls of the tyres. display" on page 250. e If in doubt, have the tyres and the entire wheel e When a red tyre pressure warning appears on the checked by a qualified specialist workshop. instrument cluster: stop immediately in a suit- e Do not continue driving with damaged tyres. able place and check the tyres for damage. Do Have damaged tyres replaced immediately: Go to not continue driving with damaged tyres. If nec- a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recom- essary, remedy the damage with tyre sealant. mends a Porsche partner as they have trained > Please refer to chapter "Flat Tyre" on workshop personnel and the necessary parts and page 114. tools. Checking the lights Damaged or missing aerodynamic components (e.g. Adjusting the tyre pressure spoilers or underbody panelling) impair vehicle handling. e Inspect your vehicle for signs of damage. e Have damaged or missing components replaced immediately.

Keeping windows and wiper blades clean and in good working order

If lights are faulty, your vehicle is not illuminated and Excessively low or high tyre pressure irreparably hard to see in conditions of poor visibility. Other damages the tyre and the wheel, lengthens the drivers will see you too late and you could be in- braking distance and greatly increases the risk of an volved in an accident. The lights to check are: accident. If the tyre pressure is too low, power con- – Parking light, dipped beam, driving lights, high sumption can increase noticeably and the range may beam decrease. – Direction indicators, brake lights, reversing lights e Adapt tyre pressure to suit your specific tyres – Fog lights and the payload. Dirty windscreens, windows and defective wiper e Check that all lights are working, and have de- > Please refer to chapter "Tyres and Wheels" blades reduce visibility and dramatically increase the fective lights repaired immediately. on page 249. risk of an accident. > Please refer to chapter "Technical Data" on e Keep the vehicle and windscreen/windows page 308. clean. e Make sure that the settings in the Tyre Pressure e Thaw frozen wiper blades and free them from the Monitoring menu on the multi-function display windscreen. correspond to the tyres fitted on the vehicle and e Replace wiper blades regularly, or at the latest the load condition of the vehicle. when they leave streaks on the windscreen. 6 Same Driving Pleasure, More Safety

> Please refer to chapter "Windscreen Wiper" diagnostic socket that have been manufactured according to the on page 279. specifications and production requirements of Porsche. This ensures that your vehicle will re- Maintenance and modifications only by quali- main reliable and safe to drive and that no con- fied specialist workshops sequential damage will occur to your vehicle. You can obtain these parts from a Porsche partner or a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recom- mends a Porsche partner, as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. e Only use accessories that are from the Porsche The diagnostic socket is used to connect diagnostic Tequipment range or the have been tested and equipment in qualified specialist workshops. approved by Porsche. For information on Porsche External equipment (e.g. navigation units, head-up Tequipment: Contact your Porsche partner. displays) connected to the diagnostic socket can Any modification to the vehicle can adversely affect impair the function of the vehicle systems and run Information or even disable safety functions. Unauthorised work down or damage the battery (exhaustive discharge) performed during the warranty period may result in when the vehicle is turned off. The external equip- If other spare parts or accessories are used, Porsche claims being invalidated. ment and cables can obstruct clearance around the refuses to accept liability for any damage caused by e Have all maintenance and all modifications to the pedals or become caught between the pedals when their use. Even if the supplier of other spare parts or vehicle performed solely by a qualified specialist braking or changing direction. accessories is a recognised supplier, the safety of workshop. This ensures that your vehicle will re- e Do not connect any equipment to the diagnostic your vehicle may still be compromised. main reliable and safe to drive and that no con- socket. Using spare parts or accessories that are not ap- proved by Porsche may invalidate your vehicle sequential damage will occur to your vehicle. e Do not place any equipment or cables in the warranty. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner, as they driver’s footwell. have trained workshop personnel and the neces- sary parts and tools. Spare parts for your Porsche Loading, safety systems, children in the vehicle: know-how for Por- sche drivers Your Porsche can accelerate to over 100 km/h (62 mph) in just a few seconds. With this amount of power at your disposal, you should do everything to ensure safety before you set off. Therefore, put the same passion into getting reading for a trip as you do into driving. e Only use genuine Porsche spare parts for your vehicle or spare parts of an equivalent quality

7 Same Driving Pleasure, More Safety

Using seat belts correctly therefore saves > Please refer to chapter "Seat Belts" on the steering wheel or in the vicinity of the lives. page 220. airbags. e Do not route any cables of additional electrical Airbag system equipment in the vicinity of the airbag wiring. e Do not remove airbag components (e.g. steering wheel, front seats, roof trims). e Do not modify the wiring or components of the airbag system. > Please refer to chapter "Airbag systems" on page 40.

Securing all objects in the passenger Seat belts can only protect you from injury if they are compartment used correctly and in full working order. Airbag systems can only perform their protective Information function if all occupants have their seat belts fas- tened and maintain the correct seat position. Ob- Severe injuries can occur at speeds as low as jects and luggage must be stowed safely. 30 km/h (20 mph) if you are not wearing a seat belt. e Make sure that there are no persons, animals or Safety systems only protect you when working in objects between the occupants and the area into combination. For example, airbags can only provide which the airbag deploys. the right protection if the safety belt is also put on e Keep a distance from the airbags, e.g. do not lean correctly. against the inside of the doors. Always keep your feet in the footwell when driving. Do not put your e An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load in the Always fasten seat belts tightly, even on short feet on the dashboard or seat surface. journeys. passenger compartment can slide around as a result Airbag systems that have been tampered with offer of braking or acceleration as well as during changes e Use one seat belt to secure one occupant only. no protection. They may either not trigger or be of direction or an accident. This can endanger and e Remove bulky items of clothing (e.g. winter triggered in an uncontrolled manner. An airbag that injure vehicle occupants. coats). triggers in an uncontrolled manner can cause serious e Do not place the seat belts across hard or fragile injuries. Information objects (e.g. glasses or ball-point pens). e Do not use seat covers. e Do not twist the seat belts. e Do not attach any additional trims or stickers to In the event of a collision at 50 km/h (30 mph), for e Always make sure unused seat belts are com- example, unsecured objects can be thrown forwards pletely retracted. with a force up to 50 times their weight. For exam- e Pregnant drivers or passengers should position ple, a 1.5 litre bottle of water has a force of up to the lap belt well below their belly and lay the 75 kg as it flies through the interior. shoulder belt tautly over their chest. e If worn or damaged, have the belt, belt buckle or attachment points replaced.

8 Same Driving Pleasure, More Safety e Always secure items for transport. – Flaps and lids Using a child restraint system safely e Always transport objects in lockable storage – Lids of storage compartments compartments where possible. e Make sure that no persons or animals are within e Always stow loads securely, e.g. in the luggage the range of movement when moving these ve- compartment. hicle components. e Stow small items in storage compartments and close all lockable storage compartments. Never Supervising children's behaviour let objects protrude from storage compartments. e Never place objects on top of the dashboard. e Secure loads with tie-down belts (tear strength at least 700 kg). e Do not transport any heavy objects in open stor- Child restraint systems can only work if they are age compartments. correctly installed. e e Also provide your passengers with all information Only use child restraint systems that have been regarding safety measures. approved for your Porsche. e For correctly loading your Porsche and stowing Before you use a child restraint system: Read and items: follow the child restraint system manufacturer's > Please refer to chapter "Storage" on page 243. Children often cannot judge dangers correctly and instructions as well as this manual. > Please refer to chapter "Luggage compartment" may behave inappropriately in dangerous situations. > Please refer to chapter "Child Restraint Sys- on page 153. Children can accidentally trigger automatic settings tems (Child Seats)" on page 87. (e.g. seat adjustment) and suffer injury. Children will Preventing crushing hazards not be able to exit the vehicle in emergency situa- Safe and competent driving: al- tions e.g. an overheated passenger compartment. ways making the right decision This can be life-threatening, especially for small Your Porsche is an all-rounder. From Launch Control children. to the emergency braking function – once you let it e Keep children away from live or hot parts. loose, everything is possible. However, at the end of e Keep toxic materials, such as tyre sealant, out of the day, you are responsible for keeping your power reach of children. house under control. e Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended.

Persons or animals can get caught or crushed if they are in the range of movement of the vehicle parts below. These parts include the following, among others: – Adjustable front seats – Doors – Window 9 Same Driving Pleasure, More Safety

Avoid distraction Awareness of braking behaviour in rain and Responding correctly to uneven running or snow vibrations Damage to the tyres or vehicle can lead to uneven running or vibration while driving. You may lose control of the vehicle. e Reduce your speed immediately, but without braking sharply. e Stop the vehicle and check the tyres. If you can- not find a cause for the problem, continue driving carefully and have the problem fixed. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recom- If you use the displays or other components in the mends a Porsche partner as they have trained vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from the In heavy rain, while driving through water or after workshop personnel and the necessary parts and traffic and may not react in time to dangerous sit- leaving a car wash, a film of water may form on the tools. uations. For your safety, some functions are only brakes, delaying the braking action and requiring in- available when the vehicle is stationary. creased pressure on the brake pedal. Keeping tyres in safe condition e Never adjust the mirror, seat or steering wheel Moreover, after a long drive in wintry road condi- Damaged tyres can burst, especially at high speeds. while driving. The seat or steering wheel may tions, a coating may form on brake discs and pads Prevent damage to tyres by driving in a manner that move unexpectedly far. You may lose control of that significantly reduces friction and therefore also protects your tyres. the vehicle. Adjust the mirror, seat and steering the braking action. e Cross kerb edges slowly and at right angles if wheel position before driving. e Brake the brakes dry, especially before parking possible. e Only use the multi-function steering wheel, in- the vehicle. This will prevent corrosion. e Avoid driving over steep or sharp kerbs. fotainment system, etc. while driving if the traf- e Corroded brakes tend to "judder". If braking Running in new tyres fic situation permits. In case of doubt, stop the comfort is noticeably impaired, have the brake New tyres do not yet have maximum grip on the road vehicle when it is safe to do so. system checked. surface. e Do not use mobile phones or other mobile devi- e Run in new tyres at a moderate speed for the ces while driving. Suitable tyres and appropriate driving style first 200 km (125 miles). e Always use hands-free equipment. e Do not reach through the steering wheel spokes Driving with winter tyres while driving. Otherwise, you may not be able to Winter tyres are subject to maximum speeds. If you react in time to dangerous situations. exceed the maximum permitted speed, a tyre may burst. e Always observe the maximum permitted speed for the tyres you are using. e Affix a sticker showing the maximum permitted speed in the driver’s field of vision. Observe country-specific laws. > Please refer to chapter "Tyres and Wheels" on page 249.

10 Same Driving Pleasure, More Safety

Driving with summer tyres Active Lane Guidance > p. 30 Emergency braking function Parking, manoeuvring or accelerating out of bends at outside temperatures below 15 °C may result in Speed limiter > p. 230 noises. e Change to winter tyres when outside tempera- HOLD function > p. 123 tures are below 7 °C. Intersection Assist > p. 136 Assistance systems and their limitations Automatic headlights, PDLS Plus, > p. 147 dynamic high beam

Night View Assist > p. 171 You can carry out emergency braking using the electric parking brake, for example if the conven- Emergency stop function > p. 112 tional footbrake is defective. Emergency braking takes place with very high brak- ParkAssist, reversing camera, > p. 176 ing power. As a result, the traffic behind may be Surround View endangered. e Only use the emergency braking function in an > p. 187 Your Porsche is equipped with assistance systems Porsche Active Suspension Man- emergency situation and not during normal that enhance your safety and driving comfort. agement (PASM) > p. 187 driving. None of these systems can overcome the laws of e For emergency braking, press the P button. To > p. 199 physics affecting driving. Porsche InnoDrive (PID) stop braking, release the switch. e Do not be tempted to take greater risks with your > Please refer to chapter "Brakes" on page 61. > p. 206 safety. Assistance systems cannot reduce the Porsche Stability Management risk of accidents caused by an inappropriate (PSM) Driving with a loaded vehicle driving style. Porsche Vehicle Tracking System > p. 208 e Assistance systems are no substitute for your (PVTS) careful attention. Always remain attentive so that you can react appropriately to the traffic Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) > p. 249 situation. e Familiarise yourself with assistance systems be- Lane Keep Assist > p. 144 fore you use them. Here you can find the Assistance systems at a Lane Change Assist > p. 139 glance: cruise control > p. 98 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) > p. 34 The handling of your Porsche changes depending on the vehicle load. If you are using a roof transport Traffic sign detection > p. 247 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) > p. 206 system, there is also greater wind resistance. Warn and Brake Assist (WBA) > p. 267 11 Same Driving Pleasure, More Safety

e Adapt your driving style to the changed vehicle Reacting correctly to warning signals e Only work on the vehicle in the open or in well- handling. ventilated spaces. e Do not drive at a speed of more than 130 km/h e Fluid containers must be labelled appropriately (80 mph) with the roof transport system fitted and must be kept out of reach for children. and loaded. e Dispose of residues in an environmentally e Do not drive at a speed of more than 180 km/h friendly manner and according to regulations. (110 mph) with the roof transport system fitted but not loaded. Parking the vehicle safely e Do not exceed the maximum gross weight and axle load.

Driving off If the systems detect malfunctions or defective parts, your vehicle will warn you with lights or mes- sages on the instrument cluster or central display. If you ignore vehicle warning signals, the risk of acci- dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle may increase. e Familiarise yourself with the meaning of warning lights and messages before starting to drive so If the vehicle is not parked correctly, it can roll away that you can respond correctly to the warnings uncontrolled, endangering people or causing mate- Stop driving if necessary. rial damage. > Please refer to chapter "Warn- und Informa- Before you leave the vehicle: The vehicle accelerates very quickly when driving tionsmeldungen" on page 271. e Activate the parking lock and the electric parking off, particularly when using Launch Control. In cer- > Please refer to chapter "instrument cluster" brake by pressing the P button on the selector tain circumstances (poor road conditions, lack of at- on page 125. lever. If the P drive position is flashing on the in- tention, etc.) you may lose control of the vehicle or strument cluster, the parking lock is not acti- endanger other road users. Hazardous fluids vated. Press the P button on the selector lever e Adapt your speed to road and traffic conditions once again. when starting off and driving. If your vehicle switches off because its high-voltage e Only use Launch Control on public roads if road battery is fully discharged, you can still operate it and traffic conditions permit. briefly once more to park it safely. e Do not endanger other road users when driving e Press the Power button to establish operational off. readiness. e Move the vehicle out of the danger area.

Besides transmission oil, battery acid, coolant and brake fluid are also hazardous to health.

12 Same Driving Pleasure, More Safety

Just in case: safety in the event of e Observe the inspection intervals for the fire ex- e Always have work on the vehicle carried out by a a breakdown or emergency tinguisher. If the fire extinguisher is used after qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recom- the inspection interval has elapsed, functionality mends a Porsche partner as they have trained If you break down, pay attention to this information is no longer guaranteed. workshop personnel and the necessary parts and – for your own safety! e Observe the operating instructions on the fire tools. Do not use voice control in an emergency extinguisher. e Observe the safety instructions on the leaflet Towing supplied by the fire extinguisher manufacturer on the extinguisher handle. e The fire extinguisher should be checked by a specialist workshop every 1-2 years to ensure correct operation. e Have the fire extinguisher refilled after use.

Hot vehicle parts

In emergency situations, stress may cause your Danger of significant damage to the vehicle as a re- voice to change so that voice control does not rec- sult of tow-starting and push-starting. ognise your instructions. e Never tow-start or push-start the vehicle. e Do not use voice control in an emergency. e Before towing your vehicle or having your vehicle Removing the fire extinguisher towed: > Please refer to chapter "Towing" on page 245.

Vehicle parts in the chassis area and adjacent com- Flat tyres ponents get very hot while driving. The fans can start running automatically at any time. e Stop the vehicle and allow it to cool down if possible. e Keep parts of the body, clothing, long hair and jewellery away from all moving parts such as In vehicles that have one, the fire extinguisher is lo- fans. cated under the passenger seat. e Wear safety gloves that provide protection from e Hold the extinguisher with one hand and press hot parts. the PRESS button on the fire extinguisher holder Protective equipment must be worn when perform- If you drive with damaged tyres, it may not be pos- with the other hand. ing certain operations on the vehicle, such as gloves sible to steer the vehicle safely depending on your In order to ensure correct, safe operation of the fire to prevent cuts. speed. extinguisher, observe the following points: 13 Same Driving Pleasure, More Safety

e Never continue driving with a flat tyre. Before driving off: Important in- The somewhat reduced braking action requires e Park the vehicle correctly and safely, and have formation on your Porsche greater force when pressing the brake pedal. This is the problem fixed. also the case whenever the brake pads or brake > Please refer to chapter "Flat Tyre" on Breaking in the vehicle discs are replaced. page 114. Pay attention to ground clearance After a collision

Fig. 1: Safety section: Breaking in the vehicle In a new vehicle, the moving parts first have to be broken in with each other. The first 3,000 km (1,865 The vehicle has low ground clearance and can The safety systems may not be operational (e.g. miles) are required for this. The oil and fuel con- therefore easily bottom out. seat-belt pretensioners and airbags) after a collision. sumption may be somewhat higher than the speci- e Avoid steep ramps. The safety systems can then no longer protect you. fied values during this time. e Drive carefully in the following situations: e Have the safety systems checked even if they Drive as follows during the breaking-in period: – Steep uphill and downhill slopes, such as in were not triggered. e Preferably take longer trips. multi-storey car parks e Always Have triggered safety systems replaced. e Do not participate in motor racing events, sports – Kerbs and speed bumps, such as at charging Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche driving schools, or similar. pedestals recommends a Porsche partner as they have – Uneven road surfaces trained workshop personnel and the necessary Breaking in new brake pads – Lifting platforms parts and tools. e If the vehicle's undercarriage is damaged, park the vehicle safely and contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner, as they have trained workshop personnel and the neces- sary parts and tools.

New brake pads and brake discs have to be "bedded in" and therefore only attain optimal friction once the vehicle has travelled several hundred miles.

14 Same Driving Pleasure, More Safety

Driving on race circuits Replace brake fluid before driving on a race Data processing in the vehicle circuit. e Have the brake pads and brake discs checked for wear before and after driving on race circuits. tyre Tyres are also subjected to very high loads when driving on a race circuit. e Have tyres checked for wear before and after driving on race circuits. e Do not fit racing tyres. Racing tyres are not ap- Compared with driving on roads, driving on race cir- proved by Porsche. Electronic control units are installed in your vehicle. cuits involves disproportionately high vehicle loads, Some of these are required for the operational safety which pure race vehicles are able to withstand Before driving abroad of your vehicle, while others provide assistance while thanks to short maintenance and component recon- driving (driver assistance systems). Moreover, your ditioning intervals. This includes carrying out checks vehicle offers comfort and entertainment functions and replacing individual components where neces- which are also made possible through electronic sary after each race circuit use and even overhauling control units. entire assemblies after specified periods. Your vehicle has a unique chassis number. This ve- e Always make enquiries about the current stipu- hicle identification number (VIN) can be traced back lations before driving on race circuits: Contact to the present owner and to previous owners of the your Porsche partner. vehicle through the local authorities within the Following race circuit use, “cooling laps” must be European Union. There are also other ways of tracing driven in order to reduce the temperature of vehicle data collected from the vehicle back to the owner or parts subjected to particularly high thermal loads in Not all Porsche models are sold in all countries. As a driver, e.g. using the vehicle registration number. a controlled fashion. Stopping the vehicle right away result, spare parts may not be available, or the Por- would cause the component temperature to rise sche Partner may not be able to carry out all repair Storing technical data in the vehicle work. further due to stationary heat build-up. This can lead Electronic control units have data memories that can to irreparable damage to individual components. Find out the following information before driving temporarily or permanently store technical informa- abroad: Brake system tion about vehicle status, component stress, servic- – Can the vehicle be repaired if it breaks down? ing requirements, events or faults. Generally Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over time. – Does the vehicle require technical adjustments? This absorption of water lowers the boiling point and speaking, this technical information documents the – Do the headlights need to be changed for left- can considerably impair braking efficiency at high status of a component, module, system or environ- right-hand traffic? temperatures. ment such as: Brake pads and brake discs are subjected to very > Please refer to chapter "Vehicle settings" on – Operating states of system components (e.g. fill high stress when driving on a race circuit. page 257. levels) e If the brake fluid is more than 12 months old: – Status messages about the vehicle and its indi- vidual components (e.g. wheel revolutions, speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration)

15 Same Driving Pleasure, More Safety

– Malfunctions and faults in important system memories in the vehicle can be reset by a repair vehicle, the surrounding area and other systems. You components (e.g. lights, brakes) workshop in the context of repair or service can connect to the wireless network via the send – Information about events that can damage the operations. and receive unit in the vehicle or via your connected vehicle mobile devices (e.g. mobile phone). Online functions – The vehicle response in special driving situations Using functions in the vehicle can be used via this wireless network connection. (e.g. triggering an airbag, activation of the Within the scope of the selected equipment options, These include online services and applications/apps stability control system) you are able to enter information such as multimedia that are available to you through Porsche or other – Environmental conditions (e.g. temperature) and address book data or navigation destinations providers. and other settings in the vehicle comfort and info- For Porsche online services, the various functions In addition to providing the actual vehicle function, tainment functions. This data may be stored locally are described at a suitable place (e.g. the Porsche this data is used to detect and correct faults and in the vehicle or it may be contained on a device Connect website) and the related data protection enables the manufacturer to optimise vehicle func- which you have connected to the vehicle (e.g. mobile legislation information is provided. Personal data can tions. Most of this data is volatile and is only pro- phone, USB stick or MP3 player). Where this data be used for the provision of online services. The re- cessed in the vehicle itself. Only a small part of the has been stored in the vehicle, you can delete it at quired data exchange takes place via a protected data is stored in event or fault memories. Moreover, any time. This data is only sent to third parties at connection, e.g. with the Porsche IT systems set up your vehicle offers comfort and entertainment your request and particularly while using online for this purpose. Collection, processing and use of functions which are also made possible through services, only in accordance with the settings you personal data beyond that required for the provision electronic control units. have selected. of services takes place exclusively on the basis of a legal authorisation or consent. Read-out of technical data If your vehicle has the required equipment, you can control your connected mobile phone or another Usually, you can activate or deactivate the (often You can have data that is only stored locally in the mobile device using the controls integrated in the fee-based) services and functions and in some vehicle read out with the help of technical experts, e. vehicle. Picture and sound from your mobile phone cases, even the entire data connection in the vehicle. g. in a workshop, for a fee if necessary. In individual can be output via the multimedia system. Certain Excluded from this are in particular functions and cases, where statutory provisions exist to this end, information can also be transferred to your mobile services required by law. Porsche as the manufacturer can be obliged, on foot phone. This includes, depending on the relevant type If the option exists to use the online services of other of requests from state offices, to disclose data of integration, e.g. general vehicle information or providers, these are the responsibility of and subject stored by the manufacturer in the required scope, e. position data. This allows optimal use of selected to the data protection policy and terms of usage of g. to establish facts in the case of a criminal offence. apps on the mobile phone, e.g. for using a navigation the relevant provider. Porsche has no influence on When having your vehicle serviced, service network system or playing music. Active access to the ve- the data exchanged in these cases. Please therefore employees (e.g. workshops, breakdown services, hicle data via the mobile phone does not take place. obtain information from the relevant service provider manufacturers) can read out the technical informa- The type of subsequent data processing is deter- on the type, scope and purpose of such data collec- tion from the vehicle. Services include e.g. repair mined by the provider of the relevant app being tion and the use of personal data in the context of services, service processes, warranty claims and used. Whether and which settings you can configure third-party services. quality assurance measures. The data is read out for this depends on the app and the operating sys- using a legally prescribed connection for OBD (on- tem on your mobile phone. Storing data in the event data recorder (EDR) board diagnosis) in the vehicle. The data is collected, Your vehicle is fitted with an event data recorder processed and used by the relevant service network Use of online services (EDR). The EDR is a data storage device that records personnel and may be sent to Porsche in order to If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, vehicle status data in the event of a critical event, comply with product monitoring obligations or to this can be used to exchange data between your such as in an accident situation in particular. The improve quality for example. The fault and event EDR is used to determine the circumstances of such 16 Same Driving Pleasure, More Safety an event and in particular, the behaviour of the ve- The data stored in the EDR is not intended as a hicle systems. means of identifying certain people. After reading Potentially relevant status data, such as the type of out the data, however, it may be possible to assign event, accelerator/brake pedal position, steering the log files stored in the EDR to certain people, e.g. wheel angle, speed, number/position of fastened to the owner of the vehicle based on the VIN, or seat belts, transverse and lateral acceleration of the through a link to other findings from other sources. vehicle, mileage, fault memory content, a time Before reading out the data, the owner of the vehicle stamp and the vehicle identification number (VIN), in is always responsible for processing the data stored particular, is recorded for this purpose. This data is in the EDR. After reading out the log files, the rele- continually stored in a ring memory, which is over- vant user is responsible for processing them. If Dr. written again and again at five-second intervals. The Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG is given access to the log files EDR does not capture audio, image and/or video re- stored in the EDR, it uses these particularly for the cordings or position data. following purposes, if necessary: Analyses aimed at If indicators of a critical event are registered, the product improvement; correcting malfunctions, par- current memory state of the EDR is stored in a log ticularly in relation to product monitoring obligations file, i.e. the five seconds before the triggering event and for resolving liability issues. Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Por- plus 300 milliseconds afterwards. After storing data sche AG will only use log files containing personal permanently in this way, the EDR returns to ring data and/or pass these on to a third party if author- storage mode until another triggering event triggers ised to do so in accordance with data protection further permanent storage of data. The event mem- legislation. If law enforcement authorities, courts or ory can permanently store up to six log files. These other third parties are given access to the log files log files will be overwritten later by newer log files if stored in the EDR, they use these particularly for the necessary. However, log files that were stored as a following purposes, if necessary: Clarification of result of airbag/seat-belt pretensioner activity are facts relating to an accident; correction of causes of overwrite-protected because this indicates a partic- accidents in the vehicle; documentary evidence of ularly critical event, such as an accident. As soon as the fact that the vehicle was not involved in an ac- four such overwrite-protected log files are stored in cident; (accident-related) research. the event memory, a message to this effect will be Please note that using and reading out the EDR may displayed on the instrument cluster in the vehicle. be subject to local legal requirements, which can in- A device for communicating with the diagnostic in- clude access rights to the log files stored in the EDR. terface in the vehicle is required for reading out the log files that are stored permanently in the EDR. Such devices are available not just to the vehicle manufacturer and service centres, but also to law enforcement authorities and possibly to third par- ties, for example. However, some of the data stored in the log files can only be accessed by Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG as the vehicle manufacturer. The log files stored in the EDR cannot be accessed remotely.

17 Overview Illustrations On the following pages, you will find overview illustrations of all areas of the vehicle, with a brief explanation. Further information can be found on the relevant page.

18 • Sensors and cameras • Sensors and cameras A Surround View > p. 176 B Active Lane Keeping > p. 30 Lane Keep Assist > p. 144 Intersection Assist > p. 136 Dynamic high beam > p. 147 Porsche InnoDrive (PID) > p. 199 Traffic sign detection > p. 247 Warning and Brake Assist (WBA) > p. 267 C Active Lane Keeping > p. 30 Intersection Assist > p. 136 Warning and Brake Assist (WBA) > p. 267 D ParkAssist > p. 176 E Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) > p. 34 Porsche InnoDrive (PID) > p. 199 Warning and Brake Assist (WBA) > p. 267 F Night View Assist > p. 171 G ParkAssist > p. 176 H Active Lane Keeping > p. 30 Lane Change Assist > p. 139 Intersection Assist > p. 136 I Opening the tailgate using foot > p. 211 movement

19 Driver's Cockpit Driver's Cockpit A Door opener > p. 69 B Memory buttons > p. 180 Personal settings C Central locking buttons > p. 69 D Power windows > p. 277 E Light buttons > p. 147 F Overhead console > p. 22 G Exterior mirror adjustment > p. 161 H Power button > p. 236 I Steering wheel adjustment > p. 241 J Seat adjustment > p. 223

20 Cockpit Cockpit A Direction indicators and high beam > p. 147 B Voice controls, infotainment, recupera- > p. 125 tion levels C instrument cluster > p. 125 D Phone controls, infotainment, instrument> p. 125 cluster E windscreen wiper > p. 279 F Gear selector > p. 236 G Chassis and assistance settings H Sport Chrono stopwatch > p. 234 I Porsche Communication Management > p. 190 (PCM) J Automatic air vents > p. 42 K Glove box lock > p. 243 Airbag deactivation in the glove box > p. 40 L Cruise control > p. 98 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) > p. 34 Porsche InnoDrive (PID) > p. 199 Lane Keep Assist > p. 144 Active Lane Keeping > p. 30 M Mode switch > p. 106 N Electric parking brake and parking lock > p. 61 O Centre console control panel > p. 76 P Hazard warning lights > p. 147 Q Ashtray, drink holder > p. 228 R Cupholder > p. 100 S Armrest, storage compartment > p. 243

21 Overhead console Overhead console A Reading lights > p. 134 B Button for interior/reading light > p. 134 C Interior light (lighting on the control > p. 134 panel) D SOS button > p. 108 E PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF/ON warning > p. 40 light F Button for interior light > p. 134

22 Filler Openings Filler Openings A brake fluid > p. 60 B washer fluid > p. 219

23 Your first trip Your first trip Incorrect handling of the DANGER Driving an electric vehicle With Comfort Access, the vehicle opens as soon as high-voltage system the driver’s key is near the vehicle (depending on the Risks for people and WARNING country and equipment). The voltage in the high-voltage vehicle electrical objects system and high-voltage battery is extremely dan- If the vehicle is not parked correctly, it can roll away gerous. Touching damaged high-voltage cables, the uncontrolled, endangering people and objects. on-board charger, the high-voltage heater, the high- voltage battery, the power electronics or the A/C e Before leaving the vehicle, activate the electric compressor can cause a fatal electric shock. parking brake (P) and engage drive position P. All components of the electrical system are marked Driving an electric vehicle is like driving a vehicle with warning stickers. The high-voltage cables are with a combustion engine. orange. The main differences between the two drive types e Do not perform any work on the high-voltage are as follows: vehicle electrical system, orange high-voltage – The electric vehicle is powered by electric cables, on-board charger, high-voltage heater, motors. high-voltage battery, power electronics or A/C – Regenerative braking is designed for energy re- compressor. covery (recuperation) and increases the range of e Never damage, remove or disconnect the orange the vehicle. high-voltage cables from the high-voltage ve- – The high-voltage battery must be charged using hicle electrical system. a suitable charger. e Do not touch parts of the electrical system that > Please refer to chapter "Charging high-voltage Fig. 2: Unlocking doors with Comfort Access have been damaged, such as following an battery" on page 79. For further information: Please refer to accident. chapter "Central Locking" on page 69. e Never remove the high-voltage battery. Opening the vehicle For further safety-relevant issues relating to electric Depending on the equipment, the vehicle can be Drive positions vehicles: unlocked either with the driver’s key or without a key The brake pedal must be pressed while engaging the > Please refer to chapter "Same Driving Pleasure, using Comfort Access. drive position. More Safety" on page 5. Once you open the vehicle, the vehicle is ready to When the electric vehicle is ready to drive, the drive drive. positions and the engaged gear are displayed. > Please refer to chapter "Drive positions" on Information page 236. The following drive positions can be selected: e Only use the driver’s key when the vehicle is in your sight.

The doors of the vehicle can be unlocked using the driver’s key by pressing the button. 24 Your first trip

is designed as an audible sound to warn pedestrians charging cable from the electrical socket. about the vehicle. The E-Sound system cannot be e Observe the safety notes in the instructions for switched off because it is legally required. the Porsche charging equipment. b The vehicle drives at a speed of less than 20 km/ e Do not work in or on the vehicle during the h (12 mph). charging process. e Never charge the vehicle at both charge ports at Drive-away behaviour of the electric vehicle the same time. The creep function allows the vehicle to drive away automatically from a standstill when the brake pedal Unsuitable or damaged DANGER is released if drive position D or R is selected. electrical sockets and vehicle charging cables Information The use of unsuitable or damaged electrical sockets The vehicle moves (creeps) when the drive position and vehicle charging cables and improper handling is engaged. To prevent unintentional creeping, only of the high-voltage battery can cause electric release the brake when you want to drive away. shocks, short circuits, explosions, fire or burns. e Only use vehicle charging cables that have been Fig. 3: Engaging the parking lock tested and approved by the manufacturer for – To drive forward, select drive position D. Charging the high-voltage battery charging the high-voltage battery in an electric – To interrupt the supply of energy to the vehicle's Incorrect charging vehicle. DANGER drivetrain, select drive position N. e Always carry along the charging equipment that – To drive in reverse, select drive position R. is suitable for the country you are driving in. An incorrect charging process, non-observance of – After you have parked the vehicle, select drive e Only connect vehicle charging cables to electri- the generally applicable safety precautions and im- position P. cal sockets that were installed professionally. proper handling of the high-voltage battery can e Do not connect vehicle charging cables to dam- cause electric shocks, short circuits, explosions, fire E-Sound in the electric vehicle aged or dirty electrical sockets. or burns. Reduced driving noise in e Do not use a damaged vehicle charging cable. WARNING e Before starting the vehicle, remove the vehicle electric vehicles e Do not use extension cables, cable reels, multiple charging cable, close the cover and charge port sockets or travel adapters. Even when E-Sound is switched on in accordance door and store the vehicle charging cable in a e Do not modify or repair any of the electrical with legal requirements, an electric vehicle produces safe place. components. very little driving noise, which means that other road e Always observe the specified sequence when e Protect electrical sockets and plug connections users might not even hear it. There is therefore a risk charging the high-voltage battery. Do not unplug from water, moisture and other fluids and liquids. of accidents, particularly in areas with traffic calm- the vehicle charging cable from the electrical e Do not use sharp-edged or pointed objects to ing, while manoeuvring or parking. socket during the charging process. Finish remove dirt, ice and snow from the charging e Be particularly alert while driving! charging before disconnecting the vehicle socket. e Never insert objects into the charge port on the Electric vehicles are fitted with an E-Sound system. vehicle. The synthesised E-Sound is a legal requirement and

25 Your first trip

Unsecured vehicle WARNING The vehicle has either a manual or electric charge Range and charging schedule charging cable port door, depending on the equipment. > Please refer to chapter "Charging high-voltage An unsecured, incorrectly secured or incorrectly battery" on page 79. positioned vehicle charging cable can slip out of The Porsche Charging Service can be used via the place and endanger the vehicle occupants during Porsche Connect app in some countries. braking or direction changes or in the event of an accident. Information e Never transport the vehicle charging cable in the passenger compartment (e.g. on or in front of the You will find more information about Porsche Con- seats) or unsecured. nect functions (help videos, Porsche Connect oper- e Always store the vehicle charging cable in the ating instructions and questions & answers) at www. charge bag in the boot or in the storage com- porsche.com/connect and in the "Good to know" partment provided for transporting it in the boot. app (availability dependent on country).

NOTICE Information – The Porsche Connect services (except for the Risk of damage to the charging equipment and ve- Safety and Security services) offer a free, inclu- hicle from overvoltages in the power supply. sive period, which varies in length for each serv- Fig. 4: Range display e Do not charge the high-voltage battery via the ice package and country, but is always at least 3 The range of the electric vehicle is shown in the fol- vehicle charge port during a thunderstorm. months. More information about the free, inclu- lowing displays: e If possible, disconnect charging equipment from sive periods and subsequent costs along with – The instrument cluster. the mains power supply during a thunderstorm. information about the availability of individual – The central display. services for your country is available online at Porsche recommends that you use the charging www.porsche.com/connect or from your Por- equipment supplied and approved by Porsche for sche partner. Information charging. The high-voltage battery can be charged – The Porsche Connect services can be used via When route guidance is active, the navigation sys- using the charging dock or the basic wall mount. the embedded SIM card. The high-voltage battery can be charged using ei- tem can show information about the route in the – You may incur additional charges when receiving route monitor (e.g. traffic jam or charging stations). ther alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC). data packages from the Internet, depending on – The high-voltage battery can be charged using your mobile phone tariff and whether you are The following factors can affect the range of the alternating current (AC) at domestic and indus- abroad. A flat-rate data plan is recommended. electric vehicle: trial electrical outlets or at public E-charging – The availability, scope and provider of the serv- stations. – The current charge state of the high-voltage ices may vary depending on the country, model battery. – Rapid charging of the battery is possible at pub- year, device and tariff. lic E-charging stations with direct current (DC). – The current driving style. This shortens the charging time significantly. – The current temperature of the high-voltage battery; for example, the range may be reduced at lower temperatures. 26 Your first trip

– The properties of the route, including hills and cannot take over any driver assistance system tasks. – The amount of recuperated energy increases to a speed limits. e Do not use the deceleration effect of recupera- maximum when the brake pedal is pressed. A – The energy consumption of vehicle functions tion as a distance control system. higher braking response is achieved using the that are currently switched on. e Always be ready to brake and stay a safe dis- vehicle's wheel brakes. > Please refer to chapter "Air Conditioning System tance away from the vehicle in front. – The maximum amount of regenerated energy Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate e For greater braking power or for braking the ve- can be temporarily reduced in certain situations. Control)" on page 42. hicle to a standstill, press the brake pedal as For example, when the high-voltage battery is required. fully charged or when the vehicle is driven in very Increasing the range potential of the electric high or low ambient temperatures. vehicle Automatic overrun recu- – If the regenerative braking ability is reduced, a WARNING message to this effect will appear in the central Note the following points for improving the range: peration limited or not display. – Anticipatory driving and recuperative braking can available The standard regenerative braking level that occurs increase energy recovery. The maximum overrun recuperation is limited. – Do not carry unnecessary objects in the vehicle. when the accelerator pedal is released can be con- The detection capability of the sensors can be im- Too much weight in the vehicle reduces energy figured between a low and high setting. paired due to being dirty, bad weather conditions savings. > Please refer to chapter "Energy recovery (recu- (rain, snow, ice, fog, spray) and unfavourable road peration)" on page 237. – Driving with the windows closed reduces the conditions (loose gravel, reflective objects). Vehicles vehicle's drag. In tube 2 on the instrument cluster, the Power meter up ahead may not be adequately detected or may shows the current amount of energy regenerated. – Check that the tyre pressure is correct. The right not be detected at all. > Please refer to chapter "instrument cluster" on tyre pressure reduces the vehicle's rolling page 125. resistance. If automatic overrun recuperation (Auto setting) is The total amount of regenerated energy for the cur- – Limited use of vehicle functions increases energy not available, such as if sensors are dirty, a message rent trip and the regenerated energy for previous savings. to this effect will appear in the instrument cluster. e Do not use automatic overrun recuperation in journeys or trips can be displayed in the central > Please refer to chapter "Tyres and Wheels" on display. conditions of poor visibility and bad road page 249. > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Communication conditions. > Please refer to chapter "Air Conditioning System Management (PCM)" on page 190. Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate The recuperation mode can be set using the instru- Control)" on page 42. ment cluster in the vehicle. Setting the Advanced Climate Control air- > Please refer to chapter "instrument cluster" on conditioning system Recuperation with the electric vehicle page 125. Risk of damage to the air Unsuitable use of – Recuperation occurs when the accelerator pedal NOTICE WARNING vents. recuperation is released while driving. – Depending on the recuperation mode, the elec- e Do not fasten objects (e.g. mobile phone cradles, Recuperation is a system that is used only for energy tric motor brakes the vehicle when the accelera- plug-in air fresheners) to the air vents. recovery. It is not a driver assistance system and tor pedal is released. Feeding energy back e Do not impede the electrical adjustment of the (recuperation) into the high-voltage battery in- air vents (e.g. by blocking the slats). creases the range of the vehicle.

27 Your first trip

The front air vents in the dashboard can be adjusted using the touch control panel in the centre console. As an optional feature, the rear air vents are adjusted using the rear control panel.

Fig. 5: Air-conditioning control panels > Please refer to chapter "Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control)" on page 42.

Leaving and locking the vehicle When you leave the vehicle and take the driver's key with you, the vehicle is locked automatically and switches off completely. If the Power button is pressed for longer than 3 seconds, the vehicle is switched off manually. For more information: Please refer to chapter "Central Locking" on page 69.

28 Topics On the following pages you will find topics listed in alphabetical order.

29 Active Lane Keeping

A Active Lane Keeping e Keep your hands on the steering wheel at all passive at any time. times in order to always be ready to steer. B e Drive with extreme care. General safety instructions e Always be prepared to take over the driving tasks e Always grip the steering wheel with both hands. C (accelerating or braking) yourself. If a warning Lack of attention WARNING message appears on the instrument cluster, take System malfunction with D WARNING over control of the vehicle yourself immediately. a warning message E Active Lane Keeping is designed for use on motor- e Drive with extreme care. e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and If a system fault occurs, Active Lane Keeping may F ways and well-surfaced country roads only. The in- creased comfort offered by Active Lane Keeping the area around the vehicle. switch off automatically. The status display disap- G should not induce you to risk your safety. Responsi- e Adapt your driving speed to road and weather pears and a warning message appears on the in- strument cluster. H bility for staying in lane and correctly assessing the conditions. traffic situation always lies with the driver. The fol- e Drive with extreme care. Restricted environment I lowing situations may arise: WARNING e Always grip the steering wheel with both hands. monitoring e J – In the event of heavy braking, corrective steering Always be prepared to take over the driving tasks (accelerating or braking) yourself. interventions may fail to take place. The environment monitored by the sensors (e.g. K e If a warning message appears on the instrument – Supporting steering interventions may be re- camera, radar, ultrasound) may be restricted by dif- cluster, take over control of the vehicle yourself L duced or not take place at all during active ferent influencing factors (e.g. rain, snow, ice, heavy steering by the driver. immediately. M water spray, oncoming headlights, dirt or damage). – The system cannot detect the entire surrounding Steering interventions may fail to take place or un- N area. Steering interventions may fail to take expected steering interventions may occur as a place. System limitations O result. – The system cannot interpret the surrounding Driving situations with e Drive with extreme care. WARNING P area correctly Unwanted steering interventions risk of accidents e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and may occur. Q the area around the vehicle. – Steering interventions alone may not be suffi- There are some driving situations in which the sys- e Clean the front camera lens, front radar and ul- cient to keep the vehicle in the driving lane due tem cannot guarantee active lane guidance. There is R trasound sensors regularly and keep them free of to lane grooves, winding roads, inclined road therefore a risk of accidents when using the system! S surfaces or crosswinds. The driver must actively snow and ice. These include the following driving situations: e Do not cover the field of vision of the sensors. T steer in such situations. – when increased attention is required on the part e Check the windscreen for damage in the area of – It is possible that the system will not function as of the driver U the camera lens at regular intervals. expected in uncertain traffic situations such as – during sporty driving V turn-off lanes, motorway exits, construction Unexpected system – in adverse weather conditions (e.g. fog, snow or sites or urban traffic. Steering interventions may WARNING W behaviour heavy rain) fail to take place or may not make sense. – in unfavourable road conditions (including poor X – It is possible that the system will remain active in In some situations, corrective steering intervention or unclearly marked roads) unwanted or unexpected situations, or switch to is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane. Fur- – in areas with roadworks Y passive mode unexpectedly. thermore, the function can change from active to – when approaching humps and dips Z – in urban traffic 30 Active Lane Keeping

– on winding and narrow country roads around the vehicle and helps the driver to keep the Behaviour if there is no steering activity A – in uncertain traffic situations such as junctions vehicle in the selected lane. The driver's steering behaviour is monitored when B or tollbooths – When the system is active, the driver can set a Active Lane Keeping is switched on and active. If – off-road or on unpaved or slippery roads preferred position within the lane. When the there is no steering activity (e.g. hands not on the C driver keeps the vehicle at the desired position The system does not always keep the vehicle in the steering wheel or only resting lightly), a warning ap- D centre of the lane or in a central position behind the for several seconds, the system ends lane centre pears on the instrument cluster. The system guidance and starts driving at the selected offset last vehicle in the line. prompts the driver to actively take over the steering. E position. The shift in position is reset again when If the driver does not react to the takeover prompt, Active Lane Keeping does not react to people and the system becomes passive or is switched off the system switches to passive mode. For vehicles F animals or vehicles crossing lanes or oncoming ve- (e.g. by activating the direction indicator, chang- with activated emergency stop function:1 the vehicle G hicles in the same lane. These are not detected as ing lanes or braking). can be slowed to a standstill. obstacles by the sensors. – The system always prioritises the lane markings H e Never use Active Lane Keeping in the specified over other objects (e.g. vehicles). In some cases, Display elements I situations. this may mean that the driver has to position the e Do not use Active Lane Keeping to steer the ve- vehicle in the centre of the lane in order to acti- J hicle around obstacles lying on the road. vate the system. Activation of the system out- K side the centre of the lane is prevented so that the driver does not feel a strong movement on L Information the steering wheel immediately after the system M If there is a fault in the system or if Active Lane is activated. Keeping does not function as described in this sec- – The driver is responsible for moving to the side of N tion, do not use the assistance function. Visit a the road to create a lane for emergency vehicles. O qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recommends In such situations, the driver can switch off the a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop system or override it using the steering wheel. P personnel and the necessary parts and tools. Behaviour when the direction indicator is Q activated R Responding to warning messages Activating the direction indicator alerts the system S Always heed any warning and information messages to the driver's intention to change lanes. Active Lane displayed in the vehicle. Keeping therefore does not intervene in steering in T > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information this case. U messages" on page 271. Lane Change Assist, on the other hand, assists the Fig. 6: Active Lane Keeping display driver when changing lanes by also activating the V direction indicator. A Display of lane markings Operating principle B Active Lane Keeping status display > W Active Lane Keeping uses the front camera as well as Please refer to chapter "Lane Change Assist front and rear radar to continuously scan the area (LCA)" on page 139. X Y Z 1. Available in some countries. 31 Active Lane Keeping

A Status display symbols Selecting and deselecting Active Lane Keeping 1. Press button S on the control stalk. B Symbol Meaning The options menu for the driver assistance sys- C tems appears on the instrument cluster. D No Active Lane Keeping is switched off. 2. Select Active Lane Keeping using the rotary display knob on the steering wheel and press to confirm. E – or – F Active Lane Keeping is switched on and passive. e e Assistance e Active Lane Keeping G H Active Lane Keeping is switched on Information and active. I Active Lane Keeping can be deactivated at any time by pressing the brake or by steering to override it. J Active Lane Keeping and Lane Keep K Assist are switched on and both are passive. L M Active Lane Keeping and Lane Keep Assist are switched on and both are N active.

O Active Lane Keeping is active and P Lane Keep Assist is passive. Q Active Lane Keeping is passive and R Lane Keep Assist is active, e.g. when S ACC status is "Ready". T U Switching Active Lane Keeping on V and off Active Lane Keeping can only be activated when W Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) or Porsche InnoDrive (PID) is activated. Active Lane Keeping can be X switched on and off when ACC or PID is activated. It Y can be selected or deselected using the control stalk, on the instrument cluster and on the central Z display. 32 Active Lane Keeping

Additional information A Comparison of Lane Keep Assist and Active B Lane Keeping C D Position Lane Keep Assist Active Lane Guidance Lane Keep Assist + Active Lane Keeping E F Status icon G Lane centre guidance no Yes Yes H I Lane departure warning Yes no Yes J Steering intervention to prevent lane Yes no no K departure (lane edge guidance) L Speed range approx. approx. 0 - 210 km/h (0 - 130 mph) See individual function 65 - 250 km/h (40 - 156 mph) M N ACC dependence no Only in conjunction with active ACC See individual function O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

33 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Covered radar sensor Foot placed on the ac- A Adaptive Cruise Control WARNING WARNING celerator pedal B (ACC) Covering the radar sensor can adversely affect or The system does not brake automatically when the C General safety instructions disable the function of the system. foot is placed on the accelerator pedal. Placing the D e The radar sensor must always be kept free of foot on the accelerator may override cruise and dis- Lack of attention WARNING E dirt, ice and snow. tance control. e When the system is activated, remove your foot F The increased comfort offered by the system should from the accelerator pedal. G not induce you to risk your safety. The driver remains responsible when driving, such as by keeping a safe Inadequate braking WARNING H distance or driving at an appropriate speed, even power during automatic I when the system is activated. The system cannot braking by the system replace the driver's attentiveness. If the system detects that braking assistance is re- J e Drive with extreme care. quired on the part of the driver, a warning signal K e If the system-related deceleration is insufficient, sounds and a warning symbol appears on the in- slow the vehicle down immediately using the strument cluster. In this case, the braking power of L footbrake. the system is not sufficient to prevent a collision. M e Make sure that it is possible to take over control of the vehicle at all times. e You must brake immediately in this case. N Unsafe traffic situations O WARNING and unfavourable road System limitations P conditions Unfavourable road and WARNING Q Fig. 7: Location of the radar sensor weather conditions Use of the system may cause accidents if the cur- Damage to the radar R rent situation does not permit driving safely at an WARNING Radar sensor vision can be impaired by rain, snow, adequate distance from the vehicle in front and at a sensor S ice, fog, loose gravel or spray. Vehicles in front will constant speed. Shocks or damage to the bumper, wheel housings or not be detected properly or may not be detected at T When driving in turn-off lanes, motorway exits or in underbody, e.g. through parking collisions, may all. U areas with roadworks, the vehicle can accelerate to move the sensors. This may impair performance of Reflective objects such as ice, heavy rain, crash bar- the set speed. the Adaptive Cruise Control. riers or tunnel entrances may impair the functional- V e Do not use the system in heavy traffic, where e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche ity of the radar sensor. A message indicating that the W there are road works, in built-up areas, on private recommends a Porsche partner as they have system is not available will appear on the instrument or field tracks, or in areas with traffic calming. cluster. X trained workshop personnel and the necessary e Switch off the system temporarily when driving parts and tools. e Do not use the system under such conditions. Y on turn-off lanes, motorway exits or in areas with roadworks. Z

34 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Undetected vehicles or WARNING Vehicles changing lanes or cutting in and Cornering and stationary vehicles A objects narrow vehicles B The radar sensor detects a narrow, cone-shaped C area in front of your vehicle. As a result, vehicles or objects may not be detected in time or cannot be D detected in the following situations: E – in the case of vehicles that change lanes or cut in – in the case of vehicles with a small cross-section F or narrow vehicles G – when driving into and out of bends – in the case of stationary vehicles H – in the case of vehicles with large overhangs I – in the case of pedestrians, cyclists and animals J – in the case of objects on the road – in the case of oncoming vehicles and cross traffic K e Take action and brake if necessary. L e Drive with extreme care and always pay attention M to the traffic conditions and vehicle Fig. 9: Cornering (C) and stationary vehicles (D) surroundings. Fig. 8: Vehicles changing lanes or cutting in (A) and narrow N vehicles (B) When driving into and out of bends, vehicles will not be detected or will be detected too late, or the sys- O A vehicle changing lanes or cutting in will not be tem will react to vehicles in adjacent lanes. P detected until it is completely in the same lane. A stationary vehicle or obstacle that appears sud- A narrow vehicle will not be detected or will be de- denly in the detection field of the radar sensor, such Q tected too late. as after a vehicle in front changes lanes or at the end of a traffic jam, can only be detected by Adaptive R Cruise Control (ACC) to a limited extent. S T U V W X Y Z

35 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

A Vehicles with large overhangs The speed of the vehicle can be increased at any Display elements time by pressing the accelerator. The stored desired B speed and distance are retained and restored after C the accelerator pedal is released. The speed of the vehicle can be reduced at any time by braking. This D will switch the system to passive operating E condition. F Controls G H Fig. 10: Vehicles with large overhangs I If there is a vehicle in front with a long overhang, such as a timber lorry, the radar sensor may not de- J tect the end of the vehicle or may detect it K incorrectly. L Responding to warning messages M Always heed any warning and information messages displayed in the vehicle. Fig. 12: ACC display N > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information A Own speed messages" on page 271. O B Setting the desired speed C Speed of vehicle in front P Operating principle D Vehicle detected in front E Desired distance from the vehicle in front Q Adaptive cruise control (ACC) operates between ap- F Status display and desired speed prox. 30 and 210 km/h (20 and 130 mph) to auto- R matically maintain a selected speed and distance Fig. 11: Control stalk for driver assistance systems Status display symbols S without you having to use the accelerator pedal. If a vehicle travelling at less than the selected speed R Switch systems on/off and open the options menu T is detected in the same lane, ACC automatically S Open the options menu (when the system is switched Symbol Meaning maintains a specific distance. Adaptive cruise con- on) U 1 Set/increase the desired speed trol applies the brakes if the distance to the vehicle ACC is passive. V 2 Reduce the desired speed ahead becomes too short, and it accelerates if the 3 RESUME: Resume control, adopt speed W distance increases. 4 CANCEL: Interrupt control If the vehicle in front stops, ACC will slow down to a X stop; it will automatically resume driving again if the ACC is passive at the set desired Y vehicle in front starts moving again within 15 sec- speed. onds. Otherwise, automatic speed control and dis- Z tance control can be resumed by the driver.

36 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Symbol Meaning – The set desired speed and the set desired dis- The set desired speed is deleted. A tance are retained. The desired distance is stored. B ACC is active at the set desired – Control is active again after releasing the accel- speed. erator pedal. Activating ACC C b ACC switched on. D Switch ACC on and off 1. Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed A vehicle was detected ahead while The system that was selected last is always using the accelerator pedal. E the desired speed was set. A vehicle switched on. The system is initially in passive mode 2. Briefly press the control stalk forward (position F symbol is displayed instead of the when switched on. It must first be activated before 1) and release the accelerator pedal. G cruise control symbol. the control function starts working. ACC is active. Switching the ACC on The current driving speed is set as the desired H speed. b No driver assistance system has been switched I Operating states on yet. The current desired speed is green in the status dis- 1. Press the R button on the control stalk. play and is automatically maintained unless a slower J Passive vehicle is detected ahead. The options menu for the driver assistance sys- This mode is set after switching on and when ACC is K tems appears on the instrument cluster. active after pressing the brake pedal and after 2. If ACC is not already selected, select ACC using Changing the desired speed L pressing down the control stalk (CANCEL). the rotary knob on the steering wheel and press The set desired speed can be changed by pressing – The status display F is grey. M to confirm. the control stalk. – There is no control. ACC is switched on and passive. b ACC is active. N – The set desired speed and the set desired dis- O tance are retained. Switching from an already activated driver assis- Increasing the speed tance system to ACC e Press the control stalk forward (position 1): P Active 1. Press the S button on the control stalk. – Brief press = 1 km/h (1 mph) increments Q This mode is set after setting the speed, after re- The options menu for the driver assistance sys- – Press and hold = 10 km/h (6 mph) suming control (RESUME) and after temporarily tems appears on the instrument cluster. increments R overriding control by pressing the accelerator pedal. 2. Select ACC using the rotary knob on the steering Reducing the speed S – The status display F is green. wheel and press to confirm. e Pull the control stalk (position 2): – Speed and distance to the vehicle ahead are ACC is switched on and passive. – Brief pull = 1 km/h (1 mph) increments T controlled. – Pull and hold = 10 km/h (6 mph) increments U Information The set desired speed is indicated by the outer line Temporarily passive at the edge of the speedometer and appears blue in V The last selected driver assistance system is re- This mode is set while the accelerator pedal is the status display F. The display turns green as soon W pressed when ACC is active. tained even after switching it off and operational as the set desired speed is reached. readiness is restored. – A message indicating that ACC is passive ap- X pears in the instrument cluster. Changing the desired distance Y – The status display F is grey. Switching off ACC The desired distance from the vehicle in front can be Z – There is no control. e Press the R button on the control stalk. set in 5 stages. Stage 3 is recommended. The 37 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

A distance depends on the driving speed. It reduces as Displaying the distance from the vehicle in The system is passive while the accelerator the vehicle slows down and increases as it speeds front pedal is pressed (operating status temporarily B up. The shorter the distance from vehicle in front D, the passive). C larger the vehicle displayed in area E. The longer the 2. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. D distance from vehicle in front D, the smaller the ve- The system is active. hicle displayed in area E. E Interrupting and resuming speed Symbol Suitable for Distance at 120 F km/h (75 mph) and distance control G If the system is interrupted, it switches to passive Speedy driving in approx. 33 m (≙ standby mode and remains in standby until it is ac- H lines of traffic 1 sec.) tivated again manually. I Interrupting control J e Press the brake pedal. Driving in stop- approx. 47 m – or – K and-go traffic (≙ ap- e Press the control stalk down (CANCEL). L prox. 1.4 sec.) The system is passive. The desired speed and distance settings remain stored. M Corresponds to approx. 60 m The status display changes from green to grey. N "two seconds (≙ ap- Fig. 13: Setting the desired distance time headway" prox. 1.8 sec.) O Information P Increasing the desired distance Driving on coun- approx. 73 m When the vehicle is stationary, the speed and dis- e Press rocker switch Z upwards. try roads (≙ ap- tance control can only be cancelled using the control Q Another segment is shown in desired distance prox. 2.2 sec.) stalk. R display E. Resuming control S Driving in sparse approx. 87 m Reducing the desired distance traffic (≙ ap- e Tap the control stalk up (RESUME). T e Press rocker switch Z downwards. prox. 2.6 sec.) The system is active. The desired speed and A segment disappears in desired distance display distance settings are applied again. U E. The status display changes from grey to green. V Overriding speed and distance Information W control temporarily Information X When the system display is not active, pressing Speed and distance control can be overridden tem- ACC can be activated even while the vehicle is sta- rocker switch Z for the first time displays the main porarily by pressing the accelerator pedal. This is tionary by tilting the control stalk upwards. Y menu for the driver assistance system without useful while overtaking, for example. changing the desired distance. Z b ACC is active. 1. Press the accelerator. 38 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Braking to a standstill and driving e Press the control stalk up (RESUME). A – or – off again B e Press the accelerator pedal briefly. If the vehicle in front stops, your vehicle will slow down and come to a stop within the control limits of Driving off manually when the system is passive C the system if distance control is active. b No obstructions detected in front. D e Press the control stalk up (RESUME). E Information F When distance control is active or while the vehicle is held, the brake pedal may feel different and you G may hear hydraulic noises. This behaviour is normal H for the system. It is not a fault. I

Driving off again automatically J Driving off when there is K WARNING an obstacle L The vehicle may start driving again in stop-and-go M traffic even if there is an obstacle between your ve- hicle and the vehicle in front. This can result in a N collision. O e Brake immediately in this case. P After your vehicle is automatically braked to a Q standstill, the system assists the driver in driving off again automatically within 15 seconds. R A message on the instrument cluster informs the S driver that the vehicle is ready to drive off. T Driving off manually U Several seconds after the vehicle is automatically braked to a standstill, the message indicating read- V iness to drive off disappears. The vehicle must then W be driven off again manually. X Driving off manually when the system is active b No obstructions detected in front. Y Z

39 Airbag systems

A Airbag systems Airbags protect the head, pelvis and upper body, injuries. while simultaneously damping the motion of the Incorrect seat position or e Do not modify the wiring or components of the B DANGER driver and passengers in the impact direction in the incorrectly stowed load airbag systems. C event of frontal impact or side impact. e Do not route any cables of additional electrical The front airbags are installed under the padded D Airbag systems can perform their safety function equipment in the vicinity of the airbag wiring only if all occupants are wearing seat belts and are steering wheel on the driver’s side and in the dash- harnesses. E sitting in the correct position. Objects and luggage board on the passenger’s side. e Do not attach any additional trims or stickers in must be stowed safely. The side airbags on the front seats are located in the the vicinity of the airbags. F side of the seat side bolsters. The side airbags of the e e Do not use protective seat covers. Always fasten the seat belts. rear seats (depending on the equipment) are located G e e Do not remove airbag components. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or in the side bolster. objects between the driver or passengers and H The head airbags are located in the side roof frame. the area into which the airbag inflates. I The knee airbags for the driver and passenger are e Always hold the steering wheel by the outer rim. Recognising faults located below the dashboard. J e For airbags to give effective protection, they Faults are indicated by the red airbag warning light Each of the airbags can trigger depending on the must be a certain distance from the driver or on the instrument cluster. K angle of impact and force of impact. passengers. Select a seat position that is not Consult a qualified specialist workshop in the fol- No activation of already L unnecessarily close to the airbags. DANGER lowing cases: e triggered airbag systems M Do not lean against the inside of the doors (air- – The warning light does not come on when the bag inflation area). vehicle is switched on. Airbag systems can be triggered only once. N e Objects must not protrude out of the door stor- or e Have triggered airbag systems replaced O age compartments. – The warning light does not go off after readiness e Do not transport heavy objects on or in front of immediately. for operation has been established. P the seats. e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche or e recommends a Porsche partner as they have Q Do not place objects on top of the dashboard. – The warning light comes on while driving. e Keep the glove box closed while driving. trained workshop personnel and the necessary Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they e Always keep your feet in the footwell when driv- parts and tools. R have trained workshop personnel and the necessary ing. Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat S Malfunction due to air- parts and tools. cushion. DANGER T e Share all the information in this section with your bags that have been tampered with U passengers. V Airbag systems that have been tampered with offer no protection. They may either not trigger or be W Function of the airbag system triggered in an uncontrolled manner. An airbag that In conjunction with the seat belts, the airbags are a triggers in an uncontrolled manner can cause serious X safety system designed to provide the vehicle occu- Y pants with maximum protection from injury in an accident. Z

40 Airbag systems

Switching off the passenger A airbag B C D E F G H Fig. 14: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF/ON indicator I Passenger airbag DANGER J switched off K The passenger airbag will not be triggered in an ac- cident if it is switched off. Fig. 15: Switching off the passenger airbag L e Only switch off the passenger airbag if a child The passenger airbag is switched off using a key M restraint systems is fitted on the passenger seat. switch in the glove box, which is operated with the e Switch the passenger airbag back on once the emergency key. N child restraint system has been removed. e Only switch off the passenger airbag if a child O restraint systems is fitted on the passenger seat. Failure or malfunction of P DANGER > Please refer to chapter "Child Restraint Systems the passenger airbag (Child Seats)" on page 87. Q If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF light does not R come on when operational readiness is established S and the passenger airbag is switched off, there may be a fault in the system. T e Do not install a child restraint system on the U passenger seat. e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche V recommends a Porsche partner as they have W trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. X Y Z

41 Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control)

A Air Conditioning System B Advanced Climate Control C (2-/4-Zone Climate Control) D Brief overview – Air conditioning E system F Central display G H The air-conditioning system can be operated using the central display, the centre console control panel I and the rear display, depending on equipment. J The preconfigured automatic modes Diffused and Focussed provide fully automatic climate control. K This brief overview does not replace the compre- L hensive descriptions provided under "Air Condition- M ing System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control)". Safety messages and warnings, in N particular, are not replaced by this brief overview. O > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Communication Management (PCM)" on page 190. P Fig. 16: Brief overview of the central display Q What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? R Call up Air conditioning menu in the central display – Central display: Touch e Air conditioning – S . – or – T – Centre console control panel: Touch the Air U conditioning softkey. V Switch Air conditioning menu Use menu area A. – W Select preconfigured automatic modes Select automatic mode (see B). > p. 46 X – Diffused Y – Focussed Z Set Individual automatic mode b C is selected. > p. 46 42 Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control)

What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? A B – Touch Adjust air distribution (see D). – Touch the required type of climate control (ad- C just strength of the air flow, see E). D – Touch Adjust footwell temperature (see F). E Switch air conditioning on and off in the entire Touch G. > p. 46 F vehicle G Switch Eco mode on and off Touch H. > p. 49 H > Switch cooling function on and off Touch I. p. 48 I

Switch upper ventilation panel on and off b C is selected. > p. 47 J Touch J. K

Change air flow direction b C is selected. > p. 46 L Touch K and move the selected air vent. M N Centre console control panel O > Please refer to chapter "Centre console control P panel" on page 76. Q R S T U V W Fig. 17: Brief overview of centre console control panel X Y Z

43 Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control)

A What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? B Defrost windscreen Touch the A softkey. > p. 51 C Switch on heated rear window and exterior mirror Touch the B softkey. > p. 51 D heating E Show/hide Air conditioning menu in the central Touch the C softkey. – F display G Switch air-recirculation mode on and off manually Touch the D softkey. > p. 50 H I Switch maximum cooling output on and off - A/C Touch the E softkey. > p. 48 MAX mode J > K Switch on automatic mode Tap the F softkey in the middle. p. 46 L > p. 48 Set the temperature Tap or swipe the G softkey up (warmer) or down M (colder). N Set air quantity manually > p. 48 O Tap or swipe the F softkey up (more) or down (less). P Q Use air conditioning settings for the entire vehicle Touch the H softkey. > p. 50 – SYNC mode R S T U V W X Y Z

44 Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control)

Rear passenger touch screen (depending on A equipment) B C D E F G H I J

Fig. 18: Brief overview of rear passenger touch screen K L What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? M Set the temperature > p. 48 Tap A up (warmer) or down (colder). N > p. 48 O Set air quantity manually Tap B up (more) or down (less). P Switch rear air-conditioning system on and Touch C. – Q off R Adjust the air distribution Touch D. > p. 49 S Call up settings Touch E. – T U Air Conditioning System distribution and air quantity fully automatically in The air-conditioning system can be operated using V Advanced Climate Control (2/4- automatic mode. the central display, the centre console control panel Automatic mode is deactivated as soon as the set- and the rear display, depending on the equipment. W Zone Climate Control) tings for the function selected are adjusted man- The air conditioning system operates most effec- Depending on factors such as the passenger com- ually. In this case, automatic climate control still tively with the windows closed. X partment temperature, sunlight and air quality, the regulates the functions that have not been modified If heat accumulates in the passenger compartment: Y air-conditioning system adjusts the temperature, air manually. e Briefly air the interior by opening the windows. Z

45 Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control)

A Depending on the outside temperature and humid- Switching air conditioning on and Central display ity, condensation may escape from under the ve- off B hicle. This is system-dependent and is not a defect. 1. e Air conditioning e Ventilation e C If the battery charge of the high-voltage battery is Switching air conditioning on and off in the Individual less than 10%, the air conditioning functions are in- entire vehicle 2. Select the desired settings. D itially restricted and then switched off. E The cooling function switches off automatically at Central display The front and rear climate zones can be switched to temperatures below approx. 2 °C and cannot be automatic mode independently of each another. F e e Air conditioning e Ventilation e OFF switched on, even manually. Centre console control panel If the OFF notification appears on the centre G Setting the temperature temporarily to a lower or console control panel and on the touch display higher value does not cool or heat the passenger e Touch the softkey for the required climate in the rear, the outside air supply is interrupted H compartment to the desired temperature more zone on the centre console control panel or on and the air-conditioning system is switched off. I quickly. the rear passenger touch screen. Reducing the air flow to the rear air-conditioned When automatic mode is active, the soft- J Enabling the intake of fresh air areas or switching the rear air conditioning system key lights up blue. Air flow and air distribution K e Keep the fresh-air intake between the wind- off does not improve passenger comfort in the front are automatically controlled. screen and the bonnet free from snow, ice and air-conditioned areas. The automatic system can be controlled manually if L leaves. necessary. The manual setting is retained until you M Switching on automatic mode touch the relevant softkey again or until you touch 2-zone climate control N the softkey. The temperature, air flow, air distribution and type of Selecting preconfigured automatic modes O climate control can be set individually for the left There are two preconfigured automatic modes. and right climate zones. The air vents in the rear can Adjusting front air vents P – Diffused: Draught-free setting with low air flow. be opened and closed manually. The direction of the – Focussed: Stronger ventilation in the passenger There are air vents on the dashboard and in the front Q air flow can also be adjusted. compartment. The air flow is clearly noticeable. and rear centre console. In the preconfigured auto- matic modes Diffused and Focussed, the opening of R 4-zone climate control Central display the air vents and the air flow direction are controlled S The temperature, air flow, air distribution and type of automatically. In the automatic mode Individual, au- 1. e Air conditioning e Ventilation climate control can be set individually for the front tomatic control for each climate zone can be regu- T left, front right, rear left and rear right climate 2. Select the desired automatic mode for the rel- lated manually in the central display as required. U zones. The footwell temperature can also be indi- evant climate zone. Risk of damage to the air vidually adjusted in the front zones. NOTICE V vents. Configuring automatic mode Individual W e Do not fasten objects (e.g. mobile phone cradles, – Individual: Temperature, air quantity and air dis- plug-in air fresheners) to the air vents. X tribution can be adjusted individually. e Do not impede the electrical adjustment of the Y air vents (e.g. by blocking the slats). Z

46 Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control)

Opening and closing front air vents The adjustable air vents are shown by a white Switching the upper ventilation panel on and A circle in the central display. off B 2. Select the desired air vent. C The selected air vent now turns blue. D 3. Adjust the air vane in the desired direction. The air vents are automatically adjusted to the se- E lected position by touching anywhere you want in F Fig. 19: Opening and closing front air vents the vehicle interior display. G Central display Adjusting air distribution H 1. e Air conditioning e Ventilation e I Individual Adjusting front air distribution The adjustable air vents are shown by a white Central display J circle in the central display. K 2. Select the desired air vent. 1. e Air conditioning e Ventilation e L The slider for adjusting the air vent is displayed. Individual e M The selected air vent now turns blue. 2. Select the air distribution for the corresponding 3. Adjust the opening of the air vent using the climate zone: Fig. 21: Upper ventilation panel N slider. The air flows to the windscreen and to The ventilation panel on top of the dashboard pro- O vides additional ventilation for the vehicle interior. the side windows. P Changing front air flow direction The air flows from the centre air vent The ventilation panel can be activated or deactivated and side vent. separately in automatic mode Individual. The air- Q conditioning system adjusts the air flow The air flows to the footwell. automatically. R Central display S T e e Air conditioning e Ventilation e Individual e U Fig. 20: Changing front air flow direction The icon turns blue when the function is V Central display switched on. W The upper ventilation panel is activated separately in e e e 1. Air conditioning Ventilation the preconfigured automatic modes Diffused and X Individual Focussed. Y Z

47 Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control)

A Setting type of front climate When the function is switched on, the icon turns blue. B control The strength of the air flow can be individually ad- C justed relative to the overall interior temperature for Switching maximum cooling out- D the front climate zones. put on and off - A/C MAX mode E Central display In A/C MAX mode, the passenger compartment is cooled at maximum power. F 1. e Air conditioning e Ventilation e Centre console control panel Fig. 23: Setting the rear temperature G Individual e e Touch the A/C MAX softkey. H 2. Select the type of climate control for the de- Increasing and decreasing the temperature When A/C MAX mode is active, the soft- sired climate zone. Centre console control panel or touch display in the I key lights up blue. The air-conditioning system rear works at maximum cooling output. J Setting footwell temperature (de- e Tap or swipe the softkey of the respective cli- K pending on equipment) Setting the temperature mate zone up (warmer) or down (colder). L The footwell temperature can be individually ad- The temperature can be adjusted to between 16 °C The selected temperature is indicated in the justed relative to the overall interior temperature for and 29.5 °C. Recommendation: 22 °C. display of the respective climate zone. M the front climate zones. Setting the temperature temporarily to a lower or If LO or HI appears on the display, the system is op- N Central display higher value does not cool or heat the passenger erating at maximum cooling (LO) or heating (HI) O compartment to the desired temperature more power. Automatic mode is switched off. 1. e Air conditioning e Ventilation e quickly. P Individual e Setting the air flow Q 2. Select the desired footwell temperature for the R relevant climate zone. S T Switching the cooling function on and off U The cooling function cools and dries the air. V In automatic mode, the cooling function is always Fig. 22: Setting the front temperature activated. The cooling output is automatically W controlled. Fig. 24: Setting the air flow in the front X Central display Y e e Air conditioning e Ventilation e A/C Z

48 Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control)

Impaired vision with air WARNING The adjustable air vents are shown by a white A flow OFF circle on the rear passenger touch screen. B The windows can mist up if the air flow setting is 2. Select the desired air vent. C OFF. The selected air vent now turns blue. e D In order to increase the air flow again, tap the 3. Adjust the air vent in the desired direction. softkey up or switch on automatic mode again. E Setting air distribution in the rear F Fig. 25: Setting the air flow in the rear Setting air vents in rear (depend- (depending on the equipment) G ing on equipment) Increasing and decreasing the air flow Touch display in rear H Risk of damage to the air Centre console control panel or touch display in the NOTICE 1. A/C MENU e vents. I rear 2. Select the air distribution for the relevant climate zone: J e Tap or swipe the softkey of the respective cli- e Do not fasten objects (e.g. mobile phone cradles, plug-in air fresheners) to the air vents. The air flows from the central vent. mate zone up (more) or down (less). K e Do not impede the electrical adjustment of the The selected air flow is indicated in the display The air flows to the footwell. air vents (e.g. by blocking the slats). L as a white circular arc. The longer the circular M arc is, the more air flows into the passenger Setting climate control in the rear compartment. N Opening and closing rear air vents (depending on equipment) Tapping the softkey switches back to automatic Touch display in rear The strength of the air flow can be individually ad- O mode. 1. CLIMATE MENU justed relative to the overall interior temperature for P If the air flow has been reduced so much in all the The adjustable air vents are shown by a white the rear climate zones. climate zones that OFF appears on the air-condi- Q circle on the rear passenger touch screen. tioning displays, the outside-air supply will be inter- Touch display in rear rupted and the air-conditioning system switched off. 2. Select the desired air vent. R 1. CLIMATE MENU e Deactivating OFF mode in the rear from the front The slider for adjusting the air vent is displayed. S 2. Select the type of climate control for the de- With 4-zone air conditioning, OFF mode can be de- The selected air vent now turns blue. T activated using the central display. sired climate zone. 3. Adjust the opening of the air vent using the > Please refer to chapter "Setting rear climate U slider. zones from the front" on page 50. V The SYNC function does not deactivate OFF mode in Switching Eco mode on and off the rear. Changing rear air flow direction When Eco mode is switched on, the air-conditioning W system operates particularly energy efficiently. Touch display in rear When the rear seat is unoccupied, the air condition- X 1. CLIMATE MENU ing in the rear is switched off. The level of comfort in Y the vehicle may be reduced in order to improve the Z

49 Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control)

A range (e.g. the passenger compartment may take air quality. At outside temperatures below approx. 5 When the function is switched off, the longer to heat up or cool down). °C, air-recirculation mode is deactivated automati- softkey lights up white. B If the Range driving programme was selected, ECO cally to prevent the windows from misting. PLUS mode can be switched on. Passenger com- C Central display partment ventilation is active to a limited extent in Using air conditioning settings for D ECO PLUS mode. All other air conditioning functions e e Air conditioning e Air quality e entire vehicle – SYNC mode are significantly reduced or switched off and cannot E When the function is switched on, the icon be selected in order to optimise energy consump- turns blue. Switching SYNC mode on and off on the F tion. Selecting another function ends ECO PLUS centre console control panel G mode and switches to ECO mode. The configured settings are retained. This does not affect the Range Switching air-recirculation mode e Touch the SYNC softkey. H driving programme. When SYNC mode is active, the on and off manually SYNC softkey lights up blue. Only the driver I > Please refer to chapter "Driving mode" on page 106. Impaired vision in man- display remains visible. The remaining climate WARNING J > Please refer to chapter "Charging Planner (avail- ual air-recirculation zones are changed to the driver's settings. able in some countries)" on page 169. mode Touch the SYNC softkey again to deactivate K SYNC mode. L Central display In extended manual air recirculation mode, the win- dows may mist up. As no fresh air is supplied, the Recommended air-conditioning settings for M e e Air conditioning e Ventilation e ECO driver can get tired and become less attentive. lone drivers e Do not switch on manual air-recirculation mode N e For maximum passenger compartment comfort, for an extended period. O Switching the ioniser on and off it is recommended that you activate SYNC mode b Vehicles with an ioniser. via the centre console control panel. P In regions with poor air quality – such as in large Switching air-recirculation mode on manually SYNC lights up blue. Q cities – ionisation can help achieve better air quality Centre console control panel in the passenger compartment. Storing air-conditioning settings R Ionisation itself does not produce any odour. e Touch the softkey. The selected air conditioning setting can be actively S Central display When the function is switched on, the softkey stored on the driver's key. T lights up blue. > Please refer to chapter "Personal settings" on e e Air conditioning e Air quality e page 180. U When the function is switched on, the icon Switching air-recirculation mode off manually V turns blue. Setting rear climate zones from Centre console control panel W the front Switching automatic air-recircu- e Touch the softkey. With 4-zone climate control, the climate zones in X lation on and off – or – the rear can be adjusted using the central display. Y In automatic air-recirculation mode, the outside-air Touch the softkey. 1. e Air conditioning e REAR Z supply is automatically controlled depending on the 2. Adjusting the setting as required. 50 Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control) defrosting windscreen Switching the heated rear window be adjusted individually. To provide the greatest A and exterior mirror heating on and possible comfort, the vehicle intelligently controls precooling/heating as required in accordance with B off the outside temperatures. This is independent of C whether precooling/heating was activated via a Timer, the driver's key, the Porsche Connect App or D by selecting the Precool/heat function in the central E display. Precooling/heating starts max. 60 minutes before the desired departure time. F The Precool/heat function enables climate control G (depending on equipment) for: – the passenger compartment H Fig. 26: defrosting windscreen – the exterior mirrors I – the rear window Switching defrost mode on J Fig. 27: Heated rear window / exterior mirror heating – the seats e Touch the softkey. softkey – the steering wheel. K The softkey lights up orange. Switching on heated rear window and exterior This occurs regardless of whether the vehicle plug is L The air flows to the windscreen and the front connected or not. mirror heating M side windows. The available range is reduced when precooling/ The windscreen is demisted or defrosted as e Touch the softkey. heating is switched on. N quickly as possible. The softkey lights up orange. > Please refer to chapter "Charging high-voltage O To achieve maximum defrosting efficiency, the air is Depending on the outside temperature, rear window battery" on page 79. directed exclusively to the windscreen. and exterior mirror heating switches off automati- P 4-zone air conditioning: The air conditioning control cally after approx. 5 to 20 minutes. Information panel in the rear is disabled. Q Switching off heated rear window and exteri- The exterior mirrors and rear window are automati- R Switching defrost mode off or mirror heating cally heated at low temperatures while the vehicle is charging or if a timer was set in order to de-ice the S e Touch the softkey. e Touch the softkey. windows and mirror glass. – or – The softkey lights up white. T Touch the softkey. Precooling/heating can also be programmed and U When the function is switched off, the soft- Using precool/heat timer and switched on using the Porsche Connect App. V key lights up white. precooling/heating > Please refer to chapter "Apps" on page 56. W b High-voltage battery is sufficiently charged (at least 25%). X b Vehicle switched off. Y The Precool/heat function controls the air flow and air distribution automatically. The temperature can Z

51 Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control)

A Switching on precooling/heating Information The selected Precool/heat function is maintained for up to 10 minutes after the set air conditioning peri- Central display B The precool/heating power is reduced to the maxi- od. The automatic mode can be adapted after op- mum charging power while charging. C 1. e Air conditioning e Maintain temp. erational readiness has been established. If preconditioning is started, the full precool/heating > Please refer to chapter "Air Conditioning System D 2. Touch Precool/heat. power is available irrespective of the charging Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate power. During active charging with a very low E 3. Touch On. Control)" on page 42. charging power, preconditioning can cause the high- F Precooling/heating switches off automatically after voltage battery to become discharged. Deactivating the precool/heat timer 60 minutes at the latest when the vehicle is ready to G Central display drive or when the vehicle is stationary. H Switching off precooling/heating Centre console control panel 1. e Air conditioning e Maintain temp. Central display I 2. Touch Manage timers. J 1. e Air conditioning e Maintain temp. 3. Deactivate the option. K 2. Touch Precool/heat. This does not stop precooling/heating that has al- ready started. L 3. Touch Off. M This also stops precooling/heating, which was initi- Setting precooling/heating individually ated by a precool/heat timer. N Setting air conditioning zones on the central display Programming and activating precooling/ O 1. e Air conditioning e Maintain temp. heating via a precool/heat timer P Fig. 28: Activating preconditioning The interior temperature can be precooled/heated 2. Air conditioning zones Q up to the departure time using the precool/preheat 3. Activate the desired air conditioning settings. 1. Touch the softkey. timer. R The vehicle seats are heated or ventilated (depend- 2. Touch the A softkey. The timer can be set to start once (single timer) or at S regular intervals (recurring timer). ing on equipment). Depending on the outside tem- During preconditioning, the air conditioning settings perature, the vehicle automatically controls the T of the last selected precool/heat timer are used au- Central display vehicle seat settings. If driver seat heating is active, tomatically. If there is no precool/heat timer in the the steering wheel will also be heated (depending on U e e central display, the last used air conditioning set- 1. Air conditioning Maintain temp. equipment). V tings for the air-conditioning system are adopted. 2. Touch Manage timers. Setting target temperature on the central display W 3. Set the days or date and time of the desired 1. e Air conditioning e Maintain temp. X departure time and activate the Timer entry. 2. Touch Temperature. Y 4. Set the air conditioning zones, temperature and seat activation individually. 3. Set the temperature you want using the slider. Z

52 Air Conditioning System Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate Control)

During precooling/heating, the vehicle regu- A lates the interior temperature to the set target temperature. B C Setting Precool/heat with remote unlocking on the central display D E 1. e Air conditioning e Maintain temp. F 2. Activate Precool/heat with remote unlocking. When you unlock the vehicle, 5-minute pre- G cooling/heating starts. H This function can be activated twice per stationary I phase when unlocking the vehicle to prevent inad- vertent activation. J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

53 Alarm System

A Alarm System Switching off the alarm system if Anti-theft protection B it is triggered Before leaving the vehicle, always: Operating principle e Unlock the vehicle. e Close the windows. This will also prevent a false C The alarm system monitors the following alarm – or – alarm by the interior surveillance system. D contacts: e Press the power button and turn on the vehicle. e Activate the parking lock and the parking brake – Alarm contacts in doors, front lid and boot lid by pressing the P button on the selector lever. E – Interior surveillance: Movement in the passenger Deactivating interior surveillance e Close the glove box. F compartment when the vehicle is locked, such as e Close all storage compartments. attempted theft by breaking a window and inclination sensor e Remove valuables, car papers, phone and house G – Inclination sensor: Inclination of the vehicle (e.g. If people or animals are remaining in the vehicle, the keys from the vehicle. H attempt to tow the vehicle) passenger compartment monitoring system and in- e Close doors, bonnet and tailgate. clination sensor, together with SAFELOCK when – diagnostic socket e Lock the vehicle. I locking the vehicle, can be deactivated (country- J dependent). Switching the alarm system on > Please refer to chapter "Central Locking" on Immobiliser K and off page 69. In every driver’s key, there is a transponder (elec- tronic component) with a stored code. L e The alarm system is activated after approx. 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked. Alarm system function indication The immobiliser can only be deactivated and the ve- M e The alarm system is deactivated when the ve- hicle rendered ready for operation with an authorised The locking condition is indicated by the indicator driver’s key. N hicle is unlocked. lights in the front doors flashing at different In addition, you can also use the central display to frequencies. O specify whether the passenger compartment moni- P toring system and inclination sensor should remain Alarm system is activated inactive when locking the vehicle. The indicator lights flash rapidly when the vehicle is Q being locked, then flash in normal mode. e e Setting e Vehicle e Vehicle locking R system e Interior surveillance Alarm system is activated, interior surveil- S lance and inclination sensor are switched off T Information The indicator lights flash rapidly while you are lock- ing the vehicle, go out for 28 seconds and then flash U If you unlock the vehicle with the emergency key in in normal mode. V the door lock, you must turn on the power button within 15 seconds of opening the door to prevent Faults in the central locking system and alarm W the alarm system from being triggered. system Depending on the country, the time until triggering X During locking of the vehicle, the indicator lights of the alarm system may differ. Y flash rapidly, light up continuously for 28 seconds and then flash in normal mode. Z

54 Apple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay A B Operating Apple CarPlay using Siri voice recognition C D Starting Siri E b Siri has been enabled in the settings of the iPhone you are using. F b No phone call active. G b Park Assist not active. b Voice control not active. H I J K L M N Fig. 29: Steering wheel with voice control button O 1. Press and hold the button on the steering P wheel. 2. Say your desired voice command. Q R Ending Siri b Siri active and waiting for a voice command. S e Press the button on the steering wheel. T A fading acoustic signal sounds. U For information on voice control: > Please refer to chapter "voice control" on V page 264. W X Y Z

55 Apps

A Apps b WiFi enabled on the mobile phone. in some countries. Following installation, the appro- b WiFi function enabled on the PCM. priate content package can be downloaded for the B Various apps are available for your vehicle, depend- ing on the country (download from Apple App Store relevant vehicle. e e e e C or GOOGLE® Play Store). 1. Devices WiFi settings Touch Please refer to chapter "Driver's Manual - Digital" on Allow internet access. page 3. Setting and operating D DANGER while driving 2. Check the PCM WiFi access data: e E Devices e Connection assistant e Connect Charging app F Setting and operating apps while driving may dis- with PCM hotspot. The Charging app, together with the Porsche ID tract you from the traffic situation. You may lose The PCM device name and WiFi password are card, allows access to the Porsche Charging Service G control of the vehicle. shown on the central display. for fast and easy charging. The Porsche Charging e Service allows you to use charging stations in many H Only use and manage apps when the vehicle is 3. Enter the displayed PCM WiFi access data in stationary. European countries – irrespective of the provider I the WiFi settings on the device. and with convenient invoicing through Porsche. A connection to the PCM's wireless Internet J More information is available at www.porsche.com/ Information access is established. connect K More information about Porsche Connect (help vid- 4. Touch e Apps . L eos, Porsche Connect operating instructions and Available content of the Porsche Connect App Porsche 360+ app questions & answers) can be found at www.porsche. is displayed. M With the Porsche 360+ app, the Porsche Lifestyle com/connect and in the "Good to know" app (avail- Assistant can be reached 24 hours a day, 365 days a ability dependent on country). Communication between vehicle and Porsche N Connect App can be disabled. year. You can ask lifestyle-related questions (e.g. find out about a newly opened trendy restaurant in O > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Connect set- tings" on page 197. your home town, get information about making a hair P Porsche Connect App appointment or buying concert tickets). Porsche Connect App provides for the networking of Further information is available at www.porsche. Q Information vehicle and mobile phone com/connect R Personal POIs (Points of Interest), destinations from As the Porsche Connect App app can be used to ac- the address book or calendar entries can be trans- S cess vehicle-specific data and other functions, we Porsche Road Trip app ferred to the PCM from the mobile phone. Depend- recommend that you protect this data to prevent The Porsche Road Trip app can be used to plan and T ing on the country, music tracks can be accessed unauthorised access by third parties. Use of the app book complete trips with all stopovers (for example, using the music streaming function if the necessary may incur additional costs with your service provider the best viewing points, restaurants and hotels along U app has been installed and an account created. since the data is transmitted via mobile communi- the route as part of the customised itinerary). V cations networks. Connecting Porsche Connect App to the PCM More information is available at www.porsche.com/ connect W via WiFi and opening in the Zentraldisplay X b Porsche Connect App is installed on your mobile Porsche "Good to know" app phone (download from Apple App Store or GOO- The multi-media Driver's Manual is available for dig- Y ® GLE Play Store). ital devices for vehicles from model year 2013 on- Z b Porsche Connect App started. wards in the "Good to know" app, which is available

56 Bonnet

Bonnet Unlocking the bonnet with the driver's key Unlocking bonnet with Comfort Access A (keyless) B Unlocking and opening the bonnet C NOTICE D

Risk of damage to the bonnet or windscreen wipers. E e Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not F folded forwards when opening the bonnet. G e Always switch off windscreen wipers before opening the bonnet (wiper stalk in position 0). H I Unlocking the bonnet using the centre con- J sole control panel or central display The bonnet can be unlocked using the lid screen on K the centre console control panel or using the central L display. b M Parking lock and parking brake are activated. Fig. 30: Opening the bonnet with the driver's key N Centre console control panel e Press the button. Fig. 31: Opening the bonnet with Comfort Access b Vehicles with Comfort Access. O e e The bonnet and the vehicle doors are unlocked. b Driver's key is located in the front area of the The bonnet is unlocked. P vehicle. Central display e Place your hand between the Porsche Crest and Q the number plate. Either move your hand in a b Ready for operation. R forward and backward movement or make a e e Setting e Vehicle e Bonnet, tailgate swiping action. S and charging ports e Open bonnet The bonnet is unlocked. T The bonnet is unlocked. Opening the bonnet U b Bonnet unlocked. V W X Y Z

57 Bonnet

A B C D E F G H I J K

L Fig. 32: Unlocking the bonnet Fig. 33: Emergency unlocking of the bonnet – connect pos- Fig. 34: Emergency unlocking of the bonnet – connect itive pole negative pole M 1. Lift the bonnet up slightly and release the safety latch (arrow). 1. Use the emergency key to unlock the vehicle at 5. Use the black jump lead to connect the negative N 2. Open the bonnet completely. the door lock. Please refer to terminal of the donor battery to the joint of the O chapter "Emergency unlocking and emergency door arrester B. locking of doors" on page 74. 6. Press the button on the driver's key for ap- P Closing the bonnet 2. Remove the plastic cover from the left-hand fuse prox. 2 seconds. The bonnet is unlocked and the 1. Lower the bonnet and allow it to fall into the lock. box. alarm system is deactivated. Q Press the bonnet closed with the palm of your 3. Pull out positive terminal A (red) in the fuse box. 7. Disconnect the negative lead first, then the pos- hand in the area of the lock. R 4. Use the red jump lead to connect the positive itive lead. 2. Check that the bonnet has engaged correctly in terminal of the donor battery to the positive ter- 8. Push positive terminal A into the fuse box and fit S the lock. minal A in the fuse box. the plastic fuse box cover. T If the bonnet is not closed properly, a warning message appears on the instrument cluster Information U when the vehicle is moving. Pedestrian protection V If the vehicle was locked, the alarm horn from the Sensors in the front bumper detect a collision with a alarm system will sound when the negative terminal pedestrian or similar object. The rear side of the W Perform emergency unlocking of bonnet then pops up to reduce the force of the the bonnet is connected. X impact. In the event of a discharged 12V battery, the bonnet Y can only be unlocked using an external battery. > Z Please refer to chapter "12-volt battery" on page 282. 58 Bonnet

Pedestrian protection CAUTION A not triggered B Following a collision without triggering pedestrian C protection, the system may be faulty. e Have the pedestrian protection system checked, D even if it was not triggered. E e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have F trained workshop personnel and the necessary G parts and tools. H I Closing the bonnet after pedes- trian protection is triggered J If pedestrian protection is triggered, a message ap- K pears in the instrument cluster. L The bonnet cannot be pressed closed again after it has been triggered. The pedestrian protection com- M ponents must be replaced. N 1. Adapt your driving style to the situation. 2. Have the pedestrian protection system replaced O immediately. P e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have Q trained workshop personnel and the necessary R parts and tools. S Pedestrian protection system fault T A warning message appears on the instrument clus- ter in the event of a fault. U e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche V recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary W parts and tools. X Y Z

59 Brake Fluid

A Brake Fluid 1. Remove the plastic cover in front luggage compartment. B Responding to a warning message > Please refer to chapter "Installing and re- C If the brake fluid level is too low, the warning light moving the plastic cover in the front luggage compartment" on page 155. D appears on the instrument cluster and a warning message is displayed. If the warning light comes on 2. Read off the brake fluid level on the brake fluid E and the pedal travel is greater, this may also indicate reservoir. The fluid level must always be between the MIN and MAX markings. F a fault in the brake system. e Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and do not Have the brake fluid topped up if the brake fluid G continue driving. level is below the MIN marking: Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recommends a e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche H Porsche partner as they have trained workshop recommends a Porsche partner as they have personnel and the necessary parts and tools. I trained workshop personnel and the necessary 3. Install the plastic cover in front luggage J parts and tools. > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information compartment. K messages" on page 129. > Please refer to chapter "Installing and re- moving the plastic cover in the front luggage L Checking the brake fluid level compartment" on page 155. M N Changing brake fluid Regular checking and changing the brake fluid are O part of servicing. P e Do not change the brake fluid yourself. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche Q recommends a Porsche partner as they have R trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. S > Please refer to chapter "Driving on race circuits" T on page 15. U V W X

Y Fig. 35: Brake fluid reservoir Z

60 Brakes

Brakes delayed and increased foot pressure may be hours. The recuperation system is activated again A required. automatically afterwards. B General safety instructions e Check the brakes after washing the vehicle. e For this reason, keep further back from the ve- Brake pads and brake discs C Blocked pedals Wear on different components of the brake system WARNING hicle in front and “dry” the brakes by applying D them at intervals. Make sure that the traffic be- (e.g. brake pads and brake discs) depends on the Unsuitable or improperly secured floor mats can re- hind you is not affected. driving style and the conditions of use and cannot be E expressed in actual miles on the road. strict pedal travel or interfere with pedal operation. F Reduced braking action Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient condi- The accelerator pedal may be inadvertently actuated WARNING or the brake pedal blocked. This can result in an un- tions (e.g. temperature and humidity) can cause the G expected increase in speed or make braking more brakes to squeal. After a long drive over salted or gritted roads, a H difficult. coating may form on the brake discs and pads that Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB) I e Only use floor mats that are suitable for the significantly reduces friction and therefore the brak- The values communicated by Porsche are based on vehicle. J ing effect as well. normal operation adapted to the traffic situation. e Secure floor mats properly and do not place them The brake discs will unavoidably start to corrode if Wear increases considerably when the vehicle is K loosely on the floor. your vehicle is parked for an extended period. The driven on race tracks or as a result of aggressive e Do not lay several floor mats on top of each brakes will tend to "judder" as a result. driving. L other. e If braking comfort is noticeably impaired: e Before driving your vehicle in this way (e.g. on M e Ensure that the floor mats are securely fitted Go to a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche rec- race circuits), ask your Porsche partner about again after they have been removed, such as for N ommends a Porsche partner as they have trained currently applicable guidelines. cleaning. workshop personnel and the necessary parts and O tools. Porsche Surface Coated Brake (PSCB) No brake force boosting P WARNING The brake disc friction surface of PSCB brakes has a For information on brake fluid and checking the specific look and cannot be compared with a stand- Q The brake booster is ready for operation only while brake fluid level: ard brake disc. When a vehicle is driven normally > R the engine is running. For this reason, much greater Please refer to chapter "Brake Fluid" on page 60. according to the prevailing traffic situation, a shiny force has to be applied to the pedal when braking chrome-like friction surface covered with fine cracks S appears. Wear, cracks and darkening of the shiny while the engine is switched off or if there is a defect Operating principle T in the brake booster. silver friction surface increase when the vehicle is driven in this way. These visual changes have no e Vehicles with defective brakes must not be Bedding in and cleaning the brakes U relevant effect on brake function and are partially towed. The vehicle has a braking recuperation system that V feeds some of the braking energy back into the high- diminished after driving several thousand kilometres. e Before driving your vehicle in this way (e.g. on Water film on brake voltage battery. In order to bed in the wheel brake, W WARNING race circuits), ask your Porsche partner about discs the recuperation system is deactivated briefly on new vehicles or after changing the brake pads and currently applicable guidelines. X In heavy rain, when driving through water or after this reduces the range. To assist in cleaning the Y leaving a car wash, the braking action may be brakes, the recuperation system is deactivated for a short time after standstill times of more than 6 Z 61 Brakes

A Activating the emergency braking B function Severe deceleration C WARNING D Emergency braking takes place with very high brak- E ing power. The following traffic may be endangered F and control over the vehicle may be lost. e Only use the emergency braking function in an G emergency situation. H e Do not use the emergency braking function to stop the vehicle when driving normally. I If the vehicle cannot be stopped by conventional J braking, you can decelerate sharply and stop the ve- K hicle using the electric parking brake. e Press and hold the P button next to the selector L lever. M The brake warning light starts to flash. N To deactivate the emergency braking function: e Release the P button. O P Responding to warning messages Q Brake pad wear limit If the wear limit of the brake pads is reached, a R warning symbol is displayed on the instrument S cluster. > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information T messages" on page 271. U e Have brake pads replaced immediately. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche V recommends a Porsche partner as they have W trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. X Y Z

62 Car Care

Car Care – Charge port possible range and increases charging times as the A – Electrical components (e.g. high-voltage battery) battery ages, among other things. B General care instructions and plug connections The following measures can be taken to reduce bat- tery ageing and wear: Water film on brake – ParkAssist sensors C WARNING e discs – (Radar) sensors of the Adaptive Cruise Control If possible, avoid exposing the vehicle to tem- D (ACC) and other assistance systems peratures of over 30 °C for long periods, e.g. as a In heavy rain, when driving through water or after – Cameras result of parking it in direct sunlight. E leaving a car wash, the braking action may be de- e Ensure that the temperature of the vehicle is – Windscreen wipers F layed and increased foot pressure may be required. between approx. -20 °C and +30 °C during the No vehicle is absolutely leak-proof. Water may leak charging process. G e Check the brakes after washing the vehicle. into the passenger compartment during cleaning. e For this reason, keep further back from the ve- e If possible, begin charging the high-voltage bat- e Always read the operating instructions provided H hicle in front and “dry” the brakes by applying tery via the Charging Planner and use the Timer by the equipment manufacturer. them at intervals. Make sure that the traffic be- or Profile function to charge the battery with al- I e Always observe a minimum distance of 50 cm ternating current (AC). hind you is not affected. J when cleaning. Being closer may trigger the tail- e Use the Timer or Profile function to program a Regular and expert care helps to maintain the value gate release button and accidentally open the maximum high-voltage battery charge of 85% K of your Porsche and can be a precondition for the tailgate. for daily use of the vehicle without any long-dis- upholding of claims under the vehicle warranty. e Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of the tance driving. L Porsche recommends car care products from Por- above-mentioned components. e At ambient temperatures above 30 °C, connect M sche Tequipment. e Never point the cleaning jet directly in openings. the vehicle to the mains and charge the high- N e Follow the instructions for use on the packaging Cover the openings before washing. voltage battery with alternating current (AC). of care products. e Do not use high-pressure cleaners or steam Use the Timer or Profile function. O e Keep care products out of reach of children. cleaners to clean decorative films. e In ambient temperatures above 35 °C, avoid us- P e Dispose of care products in accordance with e Never use high-pressure cleaners or steam ing "Range" drive mode immediately after regulations. cleaners with a round jet nozzle. A high-pressure charging with 150 kW direct current (DC) in or- Q To ensure that the vehicle’s condition is expertly cleaner or steam cleaner fitted with a round jet der to maximise cooling of the high-voltage R checked and that the guarantee remains valid for the nozzle will damage your vehicle. The tyres are battery. full period: Contact your Porsche partner. The dealer particularly susceptible to damage. S Notes on leaving the vehicle unused for long will prepare a condition report and will certify the T level of care of the vehicle. periods High-voltage battery care For idle periods of two weeks or longer: U NOTICE e Do not park the vehicle with a discharged high- V General care instructions voltage battery; connect it permanently to the High-pressure cleaners and steam cleaners can The high-voltage battery is subjected to a physical mains supply instead. W damage the following components: and chemical ageing and wear process. This reduces e Make sure that the high-voltage battery is X – Tyres the capacity of the high-voltage battery over its life charged to between 20% and 50% throughout – Logos, emblems, decorative foils cycle depending on the pattern of use and the envi- Y ronmental conditions, which reduces the maximum – Painted surfaces Z

63 Car Care

A the idle period. The Profile function can be used for this purpose to prevent soot, grease, oil and Risk What do you need to for this purpose, for example. heavy metals from entering the environment. B remember? e Make sure that the ambient temperature is be- e Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or C tween 0 °C and 20 °C in the vehicle's location. when the body is hot. Damage to external e Fold in exterior e mirrors. D If it is not possible to connect the vehicle perma- If washing by hand, use a car shampoo, plenty of parts nently to the mains supply: water and a soft sponge or washing brush. e Retract an ex- E e Charge the high-voltage battery halfway (to a e To start washing the vehicle, wet the paintwork tended spoiler. charge level of 50%) before parking the vehicle. thoroughly and rinse off heavy dirt. e Remove roof trans- F e Check the charge level every three months and e After washing the vehicle, rinse it thoroughly port system G recharge if necessary so that the charge level with water and rub it dry with chamois-leather. completely. e Close charge port H does not drop below 20%. Do not use the same chamois for rubbing dry as e Make sure that the ambient temperature is be- you use for cleaning the windscreen and doors. I tween 0 °C and 20 °C in the vehicle's location. windows. e Lock the vehicle. e Avoid using the Porsche Connect smartphone J e app. Establishing a connection between the app Cleaning in car washes Damage to wheels Check the dimen- K and the vehicle activates the high-voltage sys- sions of the car NOTICE wash guide rail. L tem and therefore discharges the high-voltage and 12-volt batteries. The wider the rim M Optional add-on parts or parts that project beyond and the lower the tyre height, the Washing the vehicle the contours of the vehicle may be damaged in car N washes. greater the risk of The best protection for the vehicle against the damage. O damaging effects of the environment is frequent e Please consult the car wash operator before us- P washing and preservation. The longer road salt, road ing automatic car washes. Scratches on high- e Do not clean with dust, industrial dust, insect remains, bird excrement gloss or silk-gloss the wheel-cleaning Q and tree exudations (e.g. resin, pollen) etc. are al- wheels brushes in the car Risk What do you need to R lowed to remain on the vehicle, the more harmful wash. their effect. No vehicle is absolutely leak-proof. remember? S Water may leak into the passenger compartment e during cleaning. Windscreen wipers Switch windscreen Caring for paintwork T wipers off. Observe the following points in order to ensure that can start moving and e U the vehicle is washed thoroughly without damaging become damaged in Do not operate NOTICE the paintwork: the car wash. headlight cleaning V system in car e The vehicle underbody should be washed thor- Dust particles on painted surfaces can damage the washes. W oughly at the end of the gritting season at the paintwork if not properly dealt with. X latest. Unintentional opening e Lock vehicle e Do not rub dust with a dry cloth. e Wash the vehicle only at washing areas provided of the charge port door Y Z

64 Car Care

NOTICE Caring for wiper blades Cleaning the panoramic solid glass roof A e Dust off the window regularly on the inside using NOTICE B The matt effect of bodywork sections may be lost if a clean, soft cloth. not looked after properly. e For stubborn dirt, clean the window with window C The graphite coating on the wiper blades can be cleaner, rinse with clean water and then dry us- e Do not use preservatives or polishes on compo- D damaged if they are not cleaned properly. ing a clean, soft cloth. nents with a matt effect paint finish. e Ensure that the cleaning jet does not hit the E Front side window coating wiper blades. F Preserving paintwork e Do not clean wiper blades with a cloth or sponge. The front side windows have a water-repellent (hy- The paint surface will dull over time due to weath- e Clean wiper blades with clear water only. drophobic) coating, which reduces soiling of the G ering and should therefore be regularly protected windows. This coating is subject to natural wear and H with a paint preservative after washing the vehicle. Windscreen wiper blades that are in perfect condi- can be renewed. This keeps the paint shiny and elastic, and prevents tion are vital for a clear view. e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche I e Clean the windscreen with window cleaner at dirt from adhering to the paint surface and industrial recommends a Porsche partner as they have J dust from penetrating the paint. regular intervals, especially after washing the trained workshop personnel and the necessary vehicle in a car wash. parts and tools. K e If extremely dirty (e.g. due to insect residues), Polishing paintwork L Paint polish should only be used to clean the paint- clean the windscreen using a sponge or cloth. Repairing the underbody work when the original shine can no longer be ob- The wiper blades should be replaced twice a year M (before and after the cold season) or if wiper per- protection tained using preservatives. N formance deteriorates or the blades are damaged. The vehicle underbody is lastingly protected against Removing marks chemical and mechanical effects. Damage to the O protective coating while driving cannot be ruled out. Remove tar spatters, traces of oil, insects, etc. as Cleaning windows e Porsche recommends that you have the vehicle P soon as possible using an insect remover and wash inspected at regular intervals by an qualified the area carefully afterwards as they discolour the Cleaning the windscreen, side windows and Q specialist workshop and the protective coating paint if left to work on it over time. rear window restored as necessary Contact your Porsche R e Clean all windows regularly, inside and out, using partner. Repairing minor paint damage a window cleaning agent. S Have minor paint damage (cracks, scratches or e Do not dry the windows with the same chamois T stone damage) repaired immediately before corro- leather you use for the painted surface. Residue sion begins. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. from preservatives could impair visibility. U Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they e Remove insect residues with insect remover. V have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. W If traces of corrosion have already formed, these X must be thoroughly removed. An anti-corrosion pri- mer must then be applied to these spots, followed Y by top-coat paint. Z

65 Car Care

A Cleaning decorative films Care of wheels Cleaning door, cover, lid and win- Cleaning agent film on B WARNING dow seals NOTICE brake discs C NOTICE Risk of damage through detachment of the decora- If cleaning agent (e.g. wheel cleaning agents) comes D tive films during cleaning. into contact with the brake discs, the film that forms Unsuitable cleaning and care products can damage on the brake discs may impair braking performance. E e Do not use polish or hot wax. the lubricant coating on the inner door seals. e Make sure that no cleaning agent comes into F e Do not use high-pressure cleaning equipment or e Do not use any chemical cleaning agents or steam cleaners. contact with the brake discs. solvents. G e Use a soft sponge, pH-neutral soap and plenty of e If cleaning agent has come into contact with the e Do not use any preservative agents. H water. brake discs, clean the brake discs thoroughly with a strong jet of water. To ensure proper cleaning of your vehicle, please I e Paying attention to any road users behind you, observe the following: e Wash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salt and grit) J Cleaning headlights, lights, plastic dry the brake discs by applying the brakes. from all seals regularly using warm soapy water. K components and surfaces, sen- Metal particles (e.g. brass or copper in brake dust) e If there is a risk of frost, protect the outer door sors and cameras must not remain too long on alloy wheels. Contact seals and the lid and flap seals from freezing us- L corrosion can cause pitting. ing a suitable care product. NOTICE M Cleaners with an oxide-removing effect or wrong pH value, as are commonly used for other metals, as N Cleaning agents can seep into the controls or well as mechanical tools and products, will damage Caring for leather switches, for example, and damage them. Unsuitable the surface and are therefore unsuitable. O NOTICE cleaning agents can damage the plastic surfaces. e Use only acid-free cleaners for alloy wheels (pH P e Do not spray water and interior window cleaner value between 4 and 10). Products with the The leather may become damaged by the use of directly onto the interior plastic components. wrong pH value can destroy the surface of the Q unsuitable cleaning agents and care products, and e Clean headlights, lights, plastic components and wheels. by inappropriate treatment. R surfaces, radar sensors for assistance systems e If possible, wash the wheels every two weeks e Do not use aggressive cleaners or hard cleaning S and vehicle cameras using only clean water and a with a sponge or washing brush. If the wheels are little washing-up liquid or window cleaning exposed to road salt, grit or industrial dust, objects. e T agent for interior windows. Use a soft sponge or weekly cleaning is necessary. Ensure that perforated leather does not get wet on the reverse side. U a soft, lint-free cloth for this purpose. e e Clean the centre console with touch-sensitive Remove water drops from the leather V buttons using a microfibre cloth only. immediately. W e Never use other chemical cleaners or solvents. To ensure proper cleaning and care of your vehicle, X please observe the following: e Clean all types of leather regularly to remove fine Y Z

66 Car Care

dust using a soft, damp, white woollen cloth or a difficult. Cleaning fabric linings A commercially available microfibre cloth. e Only use floor mats that are suitable for the Fabric linings on pillars, roofliner, and sun blinds, etc. B e Remove heavy soiling (not water or moisture vehicle. must only be cleaned using suitable cleaning agents, stains) with a leather cleaning agent. Read the e Secure floor mats properly and do not place them suitable dry foam and a soft brush. C instructions for use on the containers. loosely on the floor. D Porsche recommends car care products from e Do not lay several floor mats on top of each Caring for Race-Tex Porsche Tequipment. other. Never use leather care products to clean Race-Tex E e Treat cleaned leather only with a leather care e Ensure that the floor mats are securely fitted microfibre covers. For regular care, it is sufficient to product. F again after they have been removed, such as for clean the cover with a soft brush. Strong abrasion or cleaning. G Cleaning seats with seat ventilation rubbing when cleaning will create a lasting change to the surface. H Stains resulting from rainwater or moisture may oc- To ensure proper cleaning of your vehicle, please e When lightly soiled, dampen a soft cloth with observe the following: cur on the perforated leather of the seats. water or a pH neutral soap solution and wipe off I e Clean using a vacuum cleaner or a brush that is Removing water and moisture stains the dirt. not too soft. J b Seat heating and seat ventilation is switched off. e When heavily soiled, dampen a soft cloth with e Remove heavy dirt and stains using a stain K b No direct sunlight. lukewarm water or thinned white spirit and dab remover. off the dirt from the outside in. 1. Dab the entire seat and backrest surface using a Porsche recommends car care products from L Steering wheels with Race-Tex microfibre covers clean, fine-pored sponge and distilled water. Porsche Tequipment. M Make sure that the perforated leather does not may be soiled more frequently due to the constant To protect carpets, the Porsche range of accessories get wet on its reverse side. skin contact. includes floor mats in the correct size and with the N e When lightly soiled, wet a soft cloth with a pH 2. Allow the seat cover to dry completely at room appropriate fasteners. O temperature out of direct sunlight. Do not switch neutral soap solution and wipe the outer steering on seat heating and seat ventilation. wheel rim with this. P Cleaning airbag covers e When heavily soiled, the outer steering wheel rim 3. Once dry, wipe the seat cover with a dry, lint-free Q cloth. Improper cleaning can be cleaned by rubbing/dabbing it lightly with DANGER a soft cloth and a commercially available up- R holstery foam cleaner in accordance with the in- Cleaning carpet and floor mats Unsuitable cleaning and care agents can penetrate structions provided by the foam manufacturer. S Blocked pedals into the airbag system. Improper handling can dam- WARNING T age the airbag system. In the event of an accident, Cleaning seat belts the airbag systems may not be triggered. U Unsuitable or improperly secured floor mats can re- To ensure proper cleaning of your vehicle, please e Do not make any adjustments to individual com- strict pedal travel or interfere with pedal operation. observe the following: V ponents such as the steering wheel covers, the The accelerator pedal may be inadvertently actuated e Use mild detergent for soiled seat belts. W or the brake pedal blocked. This can result in an un- dashboard, the front seats and the door and e When drying, avoid direct sunlight. ceiling panels. expected increase in speed or make braking more e Only use suitable cleaning agents. X e Do not use cleaning agents or other liquids in the e Do not dye or bleach seat belts. The belt fabric Y area of the airbags. could be weakened, thus affecting safety. Z

67 Car Care

A Cleaning screens and touch B displays

C NOTICE D Unsuitable cleaning and care agents and incorrect E treatment can damage screens and touch displays. F e Do not use solvents such as methylated spirits, G thinner, petrol, acetone, alcohol (ethanol, meth- anol or isopropyl alcohol) or even scouring H agents to clean the PCM. e I Do not spray cleaning agents or other liquids di- rectly onto screens and touch displays. The J electronics can be damaged irreparably if water K leaks in. Instead dampen a cloth and wipe the screen carefully. L To ensure proper cleaning of your vehicle, please M observe the following: N e Screens and touch displays are susceptible to scratching. From time to time, clean the screens O and touch displays carefully with a dry, clean and P soft cloth (microfibre cloth). Do not exert too much pressure on the surface while cleaning. Q e Remove finger prints with a slightly damp cloth R or a mild cleaning agent. S Laying up a vehicle T If the vehicle is to be laid up for an extended period U of time: Contact your Porsche partner. They will be glad to give you information and advice about the V necessary measures, e.g. corrosion prevention, care, maintenance and storage. W X Y Z

68 Central Locking

Central Locking A B Brief overview: opening and lock- ing doors from outside C D This brief overview does not replace the complete E information provided under "Central locking system". Safety messages and warnings, in particular, are not F replaced by this brief overview. G H I J K Fig. 36: Driver’s key Fig. 37: Comfort Access L What do I want to do? What do I have to do? What happens? Where? M

Unlock With driver's key: The hazard warning lights flash once. > p. 71 N e Press the button on the driver’s The door handles extend. O key. The doors and tailgate can be opened. P With Comfort Access: Q e Grasp into the handle recess of the door handle. R Lock With driver's key: The hazard warning lights flash twice. > p. 72 S e Press the button on the driver’s The door handles retract. T key. The doors and boot are locked and U With Comfort Access: cannot be opened from inside by e Touch proximity sensor A on the pulling the door opener (SAFELOCK). V door handle. The alarm system is triggered in the W event of an attempt to open from the inside. X Y Z

69 Central Locking

A What do I want to do? What do I have to do? What happens? Where? B Lock if persons/animals are remain- With driver's key: The hazard warning lights will flash > p. 72 C ing in vehicle e Press the button on the driver's twice briefly and then once for a lon- D e Switch off SAFELOCK and the key twice (within approx. 2 ger time. alarm system’s interior seconds). The door handles retract. E surveillance. With Comfort Access: The doors and tailgate are locked but F e Touch proximity sensor A on the can be opened from inside by pulling G door handle twice (within approx. the door opener. The alarm is trig- 2 seconds). gered if the door opener is pulled from H the inside.

I > Switch off the alarm system’s alarm e Press the button on the driver’s The alarm sound is switched off. p. 54 J sound key. K – or – Press the power button to turn on L the vehicle. M N Using the central locking system Information If the door handles are extremely dirty, the Comfort Depending on equipment, the vehicle can be un- Access function may be impaired. O locked and locked either with the driver’s key or e Only use the driver’s key when the vehicle is in > Please refer to chapter "Car Care" on page 63. P without a key using Comfort Access. your sight. You can use the central display to specify whether Deactivating Comfort Access using the driv- Q only the driver’s door or the entire vehicle should be Information er's key R unlocked when unlocking the vehicle. To ensure that the vehicle cannot be unlocked and All doors can be unlocked irrespective of the se- The factory settings of the vehicle are described in started by unauthorised third parties, the Comfort S lected setting: this section. Access functions can be deactivated temporarily using the driver’s key. T e Press the button on the driver's key twice e Press the button and the button simulta- U within 5 seconds. Comfort Access1 neously and keep them pressed until the indica- V Vehicles with Comfort Access can be unlocked and tor light on the driver's key lights up locked without using the driver's key. However, the continuously. W driver's key must always be carried, e.g. in your trouser pocket. X Y Z 1. The Comfort Access system is state-of-the-art. We cannot, however, entirely rule out the possibility of the key codes for the radio keys being intercepted and used to open the vehicle and steal it. 70 Central Locking

Deactivation at the driver's key is confirmed Unlocking doors with proximity sensor in door Information A when the indicator light on the driver's key lights handle up continuously. To save the battery, unnecessary comfort functions B The Comfort Access function is activated automati- are progressively switched off. The vehicle can then C cally when you press the buttons on the driver's key be unlocked using the driver's key. again. D e Do not expose the driver's key to a high level of E electromagnetic radiation. Comfort Access may Unlocking the doors when approaching the be impaired. vehicle F b Vehicles with Comfort Access. G Unlocking doors b Function activated. b Carry the driver's key with you, e.g. in your trou- H Unlocking the doors with the driver's key ser pocket. I The central locking can be configured such that the doors are automatically unlocked when you ap- J proach the vehicle (from a distance of approx. 2 m). K The prerequisite for this is that the driver's key was at least approx. 6 m away from the vehicle after the L last locking operation. M 1. Approach the vehicle. Fig. 39: Unlocking doors with Comfort Access N The hazard warning lights flash once. b Vehicles with Comfort Access. The vehicle unlocks depending on the setting, O b Function activated. and the door handles extend. P b Carry the driver's key with you, e.g. in your trou- 2. Grasp into the handle recess of the door handle. ser pocket. Do not touch the proximity sensor on the front of Q b The doors can be unlocked on the side of the the door handle in the process. R vehicle where the driver’s key is located. 3. Pull the door handle. 1. Grasp into the handle recess of the door handle. S Do not touch the proximity sensor on the front of T the door handle in the process. The hazard warning lights flash once. U Fig. 38: Unlocking the doors with the driver's key The vehicle unlocks depending on the setting, V 1. Press the button. and the door handles extend. W The hazard warning lights flash once. 2. Pull the door handle. The vehicle unlocks depending on the setting, X and the door handles extend. Y 2. Pull the door handle. Z

71 Central Locking

A Unlocking doors from inside Information doors and windows cannot be opened from inside (SAFELOCK). Locked doors make it more difficult for B If the vehicle is de-energised, e.g. the high-voltage helpers to access the inside of the vehicle in the case C battery is flat, or if the door opener is pulled too of an emergency. quickly, the door opener may have to be activated e Make sure that no persons or animals are inside D twice. the vehicle when locking it. E e Release the door opener and pull again. SAFELOCK (country-dependent) is a component of F Unlocking the vehicle automatically the interior surveillance and disables the door open- ers and central locking button on the locked vehicle G The vehicle is unlocked automatically when a door is in order to make attempted break-ins more difficult. opened. H SAFELOCK activated: Doors cannot be opened from I inside by pulling the door opener. The alarm system Information is triggered in the event of an attempt to open from J the inside. – The door handles retract 45 seconds after the K doors, bonnet and tailgate are closed. The vehicle If persons or animals are remaining in the vehicle, deactivate SAFELOCK if the vehicle is locked. L remains unlocked. – If the vehicle is unlocked and if a door, the bon- M net or the tailgate is not opened within 45 sec- Locking doors with the driver's key Fig. 40: Central locking button in the door panel onds, the vehicle is locked again automatically. b Parking lock and parking brake activated. N b e Press the button in the door panel. All doors are closed. O – or – e Press the button once. Information P Pull door opener. The hazard warning lights flash twice. All doors and the tailgate are unlocked. The door In the event of an accident in which the airbag is The door handles retract. Q handles extend. triggered, the entire vehicle is unlocked automati- Deactivating SAFELOCK when the vehicle is locked R The indicator light on the button goes out. cally in order to enable helpers gain access to the vehicle. The hazard warning lights are also activated e Press the button twice within 2 seconds. S The hazard warning lights will flash twice briefly Information automatically. T and then once for a longer time. The doors cannot be opened from inside if the ve- The door handles retract. U hicle was locked with SAFELOCK activated or using Locking doors The doors are locked, but can be opened from V the emergency key. inside by pulling the door opener. Using SAFELOCK e Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle that W the alarm system will be triggered if the door is Locking the doors from WARNING opened. X outside

Y When you lock the doors from outside, ensure that Z no persons or animals are still in the vehicle as the

72 Central Locking

Information The door handles retract. Locking doors from inside A Deactivating SAFELOCK when the vehicle is locked The vehicle cannot be locked fully if the doors, bon- B e Touch proximity sensor A on the door handle net or tailgate are not fully closed. A warning tone C sounds and the hazard warning lights do not flash. twice within 2 seconds. The hazard warning lights flash slowly once. D The door handles retract. E Information The doors are locked, but can be opened from If the key is inside the vehicle when you lock it, the inside by pulling the door opener. F vehicle is unlocked again. Several warning tones e Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle that G sound and the vehicle flashes 4 times. The vehicle the alarm system will be triggered if the door is will only be locked if a door, the bonnet or the tail- opened. H gate is not opened within approx. 45 seconds and I can only be unlocked using a second key. Information e Make sure that the driver’s key is not left inside J the vehicle when locking it. – The vehicle cannot be locked fully if the doors, bonnet or tailgate are not fully closed. A warning K tone sounds and the hazard warning lights do not L Locking doors with proximity sensor in door flash. handle M – The driver's key must be outside the vehicle Fig. 42: Central locking button in the door panel when locking the vehicle doors, otherwise the N vehicle doors cannot be locked. b Doors closed. e Press the button in the door panel. O All doors and the tailgate are locked. P The door handles retract. The indicator light on the button comes on. Q The doors can only be opened from inside by R pulling the door opener. S Automatic locking T b Function activated. Fig. 41: Comfort Access U The vehicle is locked automatically from a speed of b Vehicles with Comfort Access. approx. 9 mph (15 km/h). V b Parking lock and parking brake activated. W b Carry the driver's key with you, e.g. in your trou- ser pocket. X b All doors are closed. Y e Touch proximity sensor A on the door handle. The hazard warning lights flash twice. Z

73 Central Locking

A NOTICE Automatic locking of the vehicle from a speed within 15 seconds to prevent the alarm system from of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h). being triggered during an emergency release. B Extended door handles can be damaged in car e e Setting e Vehicle e Vehicle locking Performing emergency door unlocking C washes. systems e Lock doors when driving e Hold the driver's key at the top right of the rear D e Lock the vehicle before starting the car wash. window and press the button at the same E Folding exterior mirrors in and out time. F Activating and deactivating child automatically If the vehicle still cannot be unlocked: lock b Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors 1. Remove the emergency key from the driver's key. G in and out. > Please refer to chapter "Using the emergency The rear doors can be prevented from opening from H key" on page 104. inside. The child locks are activated in conjunction e e Setting e Vehicle e Vehicle locking 2. Pull and hold the door handle on the driver's door. I with child protection. system e Fold in exterior mirrors when locking 3. Insert the emergency key with the round edge > Please refer to chapter "Disabling controls in the J upwards into the door lock (right-hand drive: rear – child protection" on page 278. with the round edge facing downwards). K A warning message appears on the instrument clus- Emergency unlocking and emer- 4. Turn the emergency key anti-clockwise until you ter in the event of a child lock fault. gency locking of doors L feel initial resistance and then firmly turn it fur- > Please refer to chapter "instrument cluster" on ther as far as it will go. M page 125. 5. Turn the emergency key back to its initial posi- N tion again and remove it. Setting up central locking O 6. Pull the door handle from the closed position Settings for central locking behaviour can be ad- past the point at which there is tangible P justed via the central display. resistance. Q Door can be opened. Door unlocking (driver door only, side-selec- 7. You must press the power button to turn on the R tive, all doors) vehicle within 15 seconds to prevent the alarm system from being triggered. S e e Setting e Vehicle e Vehicle locking systems e Door unlocking T Information U Unlocking the doors when approaching the The time it takes to trigger the alarm system differs V vehicle depending on the country. b W Vehicles with Comfort Access. e e e e X Setting Vehicle Vehicle locking Fig. 43: Emergency unlocking/emergency locking system e Automatic unlocking when Y approaching If the driver's key remote control does not work, the doors can also be unlocked and locked without the Z remote control. You must turn on the power button 74 Central Locking

Performing emergency door locking Performing emergency locking of the doors if A the central locking system has failed B Information b Perform this procedure for the passenger's door and the rear doors. C Only emergency lock the doors when the engine has been switched off. D e Unlock the doors before starting to drive. E

1. Remove the emergency key from the driver's key. F > Please refer to chapter "Using the emergency G key" on page 104. 2. Pull and hold the door handle on the driver's door. H 3. Insert the emergency key with the round edge I upwards into the door lock (right-hand drive: with the round edge facing downwards). J 4. With the driver's door open, turn the emergency K key clockwise until you feel initial resistance and then firmly turn it further as far as it will go. L 5. Turn the emergency key back to its initial posi- M tion again and remove it. The door can be opened. N 6. Close the driver's door. Fig. 44: Performing emergency locking of the passenger's O 7. Check that the vehicle is locked. door P 1. Open the door. Q Information 2. Unclip and remove cover. In the event of a central locking fault, all functional 3. Remove the emergency key from the driver's key. R locks in the central locking system can be locked via 4. Turn the lock outwards using the emergency key. S the lock in the driver's door. 5. Refit the cover. e Have faults in the central locking system 6. Pull and hold the door handle. T repaired. 7. With the door open, turn the emergency key U e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche clockwise until you feel initial resistance and recommends a Porsche partner as they have then firmly turn it further as far as it will go. V trained workshop personnel and the necessary 8. Turn the emergency key back to its initial posi- W parts and tools. tion again and remove it. 9. Close the door. X 10.Check that all doors are locked. Y The doors can be opened from inside by pulling Z the door opener. 75 Centre console control panel

A Centre console control panel B Brief overview of the centre con- C sole control panel D This brief overview does not replace the compre- E hensive descriptions. In particular, safety messages F and warnings are not replaced by this brief overview. G H I J K L Fig. 45: Upper area of the centre console control panel Fig. 46: Lower area of the centre console control panel M What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where?

N Showing and hiding the menu bar e To show and hide the menu bar (see A), swipe – O from top to bottom in the centre console con- trol unit. P – or – Q Tap (see C).

R Displaying the quick filter (e.g. Navigation, Media, b Menu bar displayed. – S Phone, Settings, Apple CarPlay) on the centre 1. Select the desired quick filter (e.g. Phone ) display T by tapping. The selected quick filter is displayed in the central U display. V Operating the air-conditioning system e Using the control panels on the centre console > p. 42 W control panel (see B). X Navigating back e Tap the handwriting panel (see D) to navi- – Y gate back on the central display. Z

76 Centre console control panel

What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? A B Using the remote control e Use the handwriting panel (see E) via gestures > p. 78 to navigate on the central display. C

Entering text or characters b The keyboard or input field is displayed on the > p. 78 D central display. E e Write your desired text or characters in the handwriting panel (see E). F G Displaying the lid screen e Use F. > p. 57 > p. 211 H I Displaying charge screen e Use G. > p. 79 J Adjust the volume e Tap / in the quick access bar or swipe – K vertically with two fingers in the handwriting L panel. M Muting: by pressing and holding . N Displaying ParkAssist > p. 176 e Tap in the quick access bar (see H). O ParkAssist is displayed on the central display. P Switching displays off or shutting PCM down e Tap in the quick access bar (see H). – Q The following options are available on the central R display: – Switching off the central display S – Shutting down PCM T

Configuring the centre console control panel In the central display: – U e Tap e Settings e Centre console control V panel. W X Y Z

77 Centre console control panel

A Using the centre console control D Vertical swiping (scroll and switch) right to left (for menu languages written right to left, note the writing direction). B panel Swipe vertically across the handwriting The central display can be controlled via the centre panel using one finger. Example: Scroll ver- C 2. Confirm the entry with in the centre console console control panel. The centre console keypad tically through lists in the central display. control panel and jump to the list of results. D provides haptic feedback during operation. E Zoom 3. The cursor can now be moved freely using re- E mote control via the centre console control Move two fingers further apart on the panel in the central display. F handwriting panel to enlarge a section of the You can select a result or other functions. G map view in the central display. H Entering characters I J K Fig. 47: Using the centre console control panel L M A Touch (select) Briefly touch the centre console control N panel or handwriting panel using one finger. O Example: Tap on a function or tick/untick a checkbox. P Q B Long press Long-touch the centre console control panel Fig. 48: Freehand entry R or handwriting panel using one finger. S b The keyboard or input field is displayed on the C Swipe central display. T Swipe horizontally across the handwriting 1. Write the desired text or characters directly U panel using one finger. Example: Scroll hori- with your finger (handwriting recognition). V zontally through lists in the central display. – To enter a space, swipe your finger from left to right (for menu languages written right to W left, note the writing direction). X – To delete a space, swipe your finger from Y Z

78 Charging high-voltage battery

Charging high-voltage shocks, short circuits, explosions, fire or burns. it in the luggage compartment. A battery e Only use vehicle charging cables that have been B tested and approved by the manufacturer for NOTICE Charging the high-voltage battery charging the high-voltage battery in an electric C vehicle. Risk of damage to the charging equipment and ve- D Incorrect charging e DANGER Always have the charging equipment with you hicle from overvoltages in the power supply. that is required for the country you are driving in. E e Do not charge the high-voltage battery via the e Only connect vehicle charging cables to electri- An incorrect charging process, non-observance of vehicle charge port during a thunderstorm. F cal sockets that were installed professionally. the generally applicable safety precautions and im- e If possible, disconnect charging equipment from e Do not connect vehicle charging cables to dam- G proper handling of the high-voltage battery can the mains power supply during a thunderstorm. aged or dirty electrical sockets. cause electric shocks, short circuits, explosions, fire H e Do not use a damaged vehicle charging cable. or burns. e Do not use extension cables, cable reels, multiple Care instructions for the high-voltage battery I e Before starting the vehicle, remove the vehicle sockets or travel adapters. Please refer to chapter "Car Care" on page 63. J charging cable, close the cover and charge port e Do not modify or repair any of the electrical door and store the vehicle charging cable in a components. Instructions for charging the high-voltage K safe place. e Protect electrical sockets and plug connections battery e Always observe the specified sequence when L from water, moisture and other fluids and liquids. e Ensure that the temperature of the vehicle is charging the high-voltage battery. Do not unplug e Do not use sharp-edged or pointed objects to M the vehicle charging cable from the electrical between approx. –20 °C and +30 °C during the remove dirt, ice and snow from the charging charging process. N socket during the charging process. Finish socket. e charging before disconnecting the vehicle If possible, begin charging the high-voltage bat- O e Never insert objects into the charge port on the tery using the Charging Planner and use the charging cable from the electrical socket. vehicle. Timer or Profile function to charge the battery P e Observe the safety notes in the instructions for with alternating current (AC). the Porsche charging equipment. Q Unsecured vehicle e Use the Timer or Profile function to program a e Do not work in or on the vehicle during the WARNING charging cable maximum high-voltage battery charge of 85% charging process. R for daily use of the vehicle without any long-dis- e Never charge the vehicle at both charge ports at An unsecured, incorrectly secured or incorrectly S tance driving. the same time. positioned vehicle charging cable can slip out of e If required, a battery charge of 100% can be T place and endanger the vehicle occupants during programmed before starting long journeys. Unsuitable or damaged braking, changes of direction or in the event of an U DANGER e electrical sockets and At ambient temperatures of over 30 °C, connect accident. V vehicle charging cables the vehicle to the mains and charge the high- e Never transport the vehicle charging cable in the voltage battery with alternating current (AC). passenger compartment (such as on or in front W The use of unsuitable or damaged electrical sockets Use the Timer or Profile function. of the seats) or unsecured. and vehicle charging cables and improper handling e At ambient temperatures of over 35 °C, avoid X e Always store the vehicle charging cable in the using "Range" drive mode immediately after of the high-voltage battery can cause electric Y charge bag in the luggage compartment or in the charging with in excess of 150 kW direct current storage compartment provided for transporting Z

79 Charging high-voltage battery

A (DC) in order to maximise cooling of the high- Opening and closing the charge voltage battery. B port door

C Instructions for the charging equipment NOTICE e More information about the charger and about D the web application is found under "E-Perform- Risk of damage to the charge port door from foreign E ance" at the following web address: https:// objects and ice. www.porsche.com. F e Check the charge port door for possible foreign e Only use vehicle charging cables that have been objects and ice before opening and closing it. G tested and approved for charging the high-volt- Fig. 49: Charging the high-voltage battery e age battery in an electric vehicle (the charging If the charge port door is damaged, visit a quali- H plug standardised in accordance with IEC Charging with alternating current (AC) at do- fied specialist workshop. Porsche recommends a I 62196-2, SAE J1772 or GB/T 20234-2 and the mestic and industrial electrical outlets or at Porsche partner as they have trained workshop charging process in accordance with IEC public E-charging stations personnel and the necessary parts and tools. J 61851-1, SAE J1772 or GB/T 18487 (modes 2 The high-voltage battery in the vehicle can be > Please refer to chapter "Car Care" on page 63. and 3)), and comply with national standards and K charged with alternating current (AC) via the charge The vehicle has either a manual or electric charge legislation. port on the driver's side (LHD: 4, RHD: 3). Depending L port door, depending on the equipment. Vehicle charging cables without protection on the country and equipment, there is another AC M (standardised in accordance with IEC 61851-1, charge port on the passenger's side (LHD: 3, RHD: SAE J1772 or GB/T 18487 (mode 1)) are not Opening and closing the manual charge port 4). Both charge ports have the same charging power. door N supported. When you are using one charge port, the other b Vehicle with a manual charge port door. O e Only use charging cables with a maximum length charge port is disabled. b Vehicle unlocked or driver's key near the charge of 30 m. To reduce the charging time, Porsche recommends port door (depending on the equipment). P e Porsche recommends that you use charging charging at industrial electrical outlets, at E-charg- b Parking lock and parking brake activated. Q equipment supplied and approved by Porsche ing stations 2 or at the wall box 1. Only charge the together with the charging dock or the basic wall high-voltage battery at domestic electrical outlets 1 R mount. Refer to the separate instructions for the if no other charging option is available. S Porsche charging equipment and the vehicle charging cable used. Rapid charging with direct current (DC) at T public E-charging stations U The high-voltage battery in the vehicle can be charged with direct current (DC) 5 at a charging V station via the charge port on the passenger's side W (LHD: 3, RHD: 4). This shortens the charging time significantly. X Porsche recommends charging with direct current Y (DC) if you want to charge the high-voltage battery in the shortest possible time. The shortest charging Z times are achieved using the Charging Planner.

80 Charging high-voltage battery

Opening and closing the electric charge port door Inserting the vehicle plug into the A on the outside of the vehicle vehicle charge port and starting B the charging process C b Parking lock and parking brake activated. b Charge port door open. D b Vehicle charging cable connected to the mains E power supply. 1. Refer to the separate instructions for the Por- F sche charging equipment and instructions of the G vehicle charging cable used. H I J K

Fig. 50: Opening and closing the manual charge port door on L the outside of the vehicle M 1. Press on the rear part of the charge port door to open it. Fig. 51: Opening the charge port door N Charge port door opens. e Move your hand along the underside of the fin to O 2. Press on the rear part of the charge port door open it. until it engages securely to close it. Charge port door opens. P e Move your hand along the underside of the fin to Q Opening and closing the electric charge port close it. door Charge port door closes. R If the electric charge port door is open, it will close Fig. 52: Vehicle plug inserted Opening and closing the electric charge port door S automatically after 120 seconds, 10 seconds after 2. Insert vehicle plug A fully into the charge port using the centre console control panel T removing the vehicle plug or immediately after lock- until it clicks audibly into place. For heavy vehicle ing the vehicle. 1. Touch e . plugs, you may need to lift the vehicle plug U b Vehicle with an electric charge port door. slightly to ensure that it locks. V b Vehicle unlocked or driver's key near the charge 2. Select the desired charge port door. The vehicle plug is locked and the charging port door (depending on the equipment). Charge port door opens or closes. process is started. Release button ring B indi- W b Parking lock and parking brake activated. cates whether the vehicle plug is locked and also shows the charge level of the high-voltage X battery. Y Z

81 Charging high-voltage battery

A > Please refer to chapter "Display of the charge Information B Meaning and locking status on the vehicle charge port" on B page 82. – Observe the specified sequence for charging the Vehicle plug inserted and locked. C high-voltage battery. pulsates The high-voltage battery is being Information – End the charging process before disconnecting charged. D the vehicle cable from the electrical socket. E – If the vehicle plug is inserted when the vehicle is – Observe the safety instructions for charging the Vehicle plug inserted and locked. started, the vehicle plug remains locked. high-voltage battery. lights F up Charging process completed and – If gear D is selected during charging, the charg- target battery charge level reached. G ing process is interrupted. The charging process is resumed after approx. 20 seconds if the ve- Display of the charge and locking Vehicle plug inserted and locked. H hicle plug is not removed. status on the vehicle charge port flashes Charging paused due to pro- I – If the charge timer or profile function is activated grammed timer and profile settings. while charging using alternating current (AC), the The release button ring indicates whether the ve- J charge timer or profile function controls when hicle plug is locked and also shows the charge level An error occurred while charging the the charging process starts and this may not of the high-voltage battery. lights K high-voltage battery. start immediately after you insert and lock the up L vehicle plug. B Meaning M If the charging process was not started: Off The vehicle plug is not inserted or no e Check that the vehicle plug is inserted correctly. N connection to the mains supply is e Refer to the separate instructions for the Por- Finishing the charging process established. O sche charging equipment and the instructions and removing the vehicle plug or for the vehicle charging cable used and the in- P from the vehicle charge port Vehicle plug inserted: Vehicle in idle structions on the charging station. Q 1. Unlock the vehicle. state. To detect the current con- e Remove and insert the vehicle plug again. 2. Press release button B on the vehicle charge nection status and battery charge – or – R port. level, press the or button on 1. Turn the vehicle off and get out. S The vehicle plug is unlocked. If a charging proc- the driver's key. 2. Remove the vehicle plug from the vehicle charge ess was started, it will be stopped. port. T 3. Pull vehicle plug A from the vehicle charge port Vehicle plug inserted and locked. 3. Close the doors, windows and charge port door, within approx. 20 Sekunden. lights lock the vehicle and leave the keyless comfort U up 4. Disconnect the vehicle charging cable from the access response area. V power supply and store it in a safe place. 4. Wait approximately 5 minutes. Do not use the Vehicle plug inserted and locked. 5. Close the charge port door. app to access the vehicle during this time. W Communications setup and pulsates 5. Insert the vehicle plug into the vehicle charge dismantling X port and start the charging process again. Y Z

82 Charging high-voltage battery

Using the Immediate Charge Using the charge level display 1. e Load e Timer A function 2. Editing the Timer . B b Vehicle plug inserted. 3. Programme the date and departure time. If you C use the selected timer regularly, activate Re- Central display D peat and select weekdays. 1. e Charging e Overview 4. Programming the target charge. E 2. Activate Charge Immediately. 5. Activate charging. F The high-voltage battery is being charged. 6. Activate parking pre-climatisation if required. G H Centre console control panel 7. Activating thetimer. Fig. 53: Charge level display I 1. Touch the softkey. The battery charge condition display indicates the Deactivating the timer J 2. Touch the Charge Immediately softkey. current charge level of the high-voltage battery in the central display and the centre console control 1. e Charging e timer K The high-voltage battery is being charged. panel. 2. Deactivating the timer. L Using the charging functions in Programming and activating the timer M Starting charging using the timer the central display. b Departure time in the future. b N The charging functions Timer and Profile can be The Timer function ensures that the high-voltage Timer programmed and activated. used to programme various parameters for the battery is charged to a specified charge level at a b Vehicle plug inserted. O charging process on the central display. Both func- programmed departure time. The passenger com- The timer function defines the charging process, P tions are only available when charging with alternat- partment can be also precooled/heated by the de- which then starts automatically. The high-voltage ing current (AC). parture time by selecting the Precool/heat option. battery will be charged before the programmed de- Q parture time. Use the Timer or Profile function to programme a > Please refer to chapter "Air Conditioning System R maximum high-voltage battery charge of 85% for Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate The high-voltage battery may not be fully charged if daily use of the vehicle. The high-voltage battery is Control)" on page 42. parking pre-climatisation is programmed. S always charged to the minimum charge level pro- At some public charging stations, the charging T grammed in the Profile function, even if a charge process cannot be started if a departure timer has Ending charging with the timer timer is active. been programmed. b Vehicle plug inserted. U More information on the charger and the web appli- b Timer function activated. V cation is available under "EPerformance" at the fol- e Press the release button. lowing web address: https://www.porsche.com. High-voltage battery charging stops. W e If charging is ongoing, wait until the ring has X disappeared from the release button. Y Z

83 Charging high-voltage battery

A Programming and activating the charging Edit existing profile . Charging times profile B 3. Programme thename and select the location. Charging powers and times depend on various fac- b Departure time in the future. tors, which may increase charging times consider- C The Profile function ensures that the high-voltage 4. Programming the minimum charge level. ably compared to the values indicated: D battery is charged to a programmed minimum 5. Activate optimised charging. – Customer-specific installation, e.g. socket used. charge level at a specified departure time, such as to – or – – Power output of the country-specific energy E use specific energy rates. Setting and activating your preferred charging infrastructure. F Programming and activating the general charging times and programming preferred charging – Settings for charging current limiting on the profile times. control unit. G – Fluctuations in the mains voltage. The high-voltage battery is charged automatically to 6. Activate thecharging profile. H the programmed charge level during the specified – Ambient temperature of the vehicle and the charging times when the vehicle is charged using charging equipment. I alternating current (AC) and provided that no timer Deactivate the profile – Temperature of the high-voltage battery and J or location-dependent charging profile is active. control unit. 1. e Charging e Profile – Charge level of the high-voltage battery. K 1. e Charging e Profile 2. Deactivate theprofile. – Age of the high-voltage battery and number of L charges completed. 2. Editing the general charging profile . – Passenger compartment temperature precool- M Starting charging using the profile 3. Programming the minimum charge level. ing/heating activated. b Profile programmed and activated. N – Current-carrying capacity of the vehicle plug. 4. Activating optimised charging. b Vehicle plug inserted. O – or – The profile function defines the charging process, The amount of energy taken from the mains power supply is greater than the amount of energy stored P Setting and activating your preferred charging which then starts automatically. The high-voltage times and programming preferred charging battery will be charged to the specified charge level during charging of the high-voltage battery. The Q times. within the programmed charging time. reasons for this include physical charging losses and the use of energy to control the temperature of the 5. Activating the general charging profile. The high-voltage battery may not be fully charged R depending on the minimum charge level high-voltage battery. For physical and chemical reasons, the charging S Programming and activating the location-depend- programmed. speed decreases as the charge level approaches ent charging profile T Stopping charging using the profile 100%. U 1. e Charging e Profile b Vehicle plug inserted. The predominant use of fast charging columns (DC) b Profile function activated. causes charging times to increase in the long term. V 2. Select Add new profile. e e Press the release button. A maximum charging power of 50 kW should be – or – selected for regular charging with direct current W High-voltage battery charging stops. (DC). e If charging is ongoing, wait until the ring has X e Charging with alternating current (AC) is recom- disappeared from the release button. Y mended at home. Using an industrial electrical outlet (AC) will allow you to achieve higher Z

84 Charging high-voltage battery

efficiency and a significantly lower charging du- 1. Remove the emergency release tool from the tool A ration than charging using a household socket. kit. B 2. Guide the metal hook of the emergency release Performing an emergency release tool under the rear section of the charge port C door. D of the charge port door 3. Position the emergency release tool and pull to If the charging tray is faulty, the charge port door open. E can be opened manually. 4. Insert the metal hook of the emergency release e F Never perform an emergency release of the tool into the tappet opening and turn the emer- charge port doors on both sides at the same time gency release tool approx. 45 degrees towards G or when one charge port door has already been the front of the vehicle, applying slight pressure. opened correctly. H 5. Removing the tappet. I Performing an emergency release of the 6. Carry out charging. manual charge port door 7. Close the charge port door after charging. J To have the unlocking mechanism of the charge port After an emergency release of the manual charge door checked: K port door, the vehicle can be charged via this charge e port door using alternating current (AC) or direct Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche Fig. 55: Emergency release of the electric charge port door L current (DC). The charge port door located opposite recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary 1. Remove the emergency release tool from the tool M is locked automatically. kit. parts and tools. N 2. Guide the metal hook of the emergency release Performing an emergency release of the tool behind the charge port door cover. O 3. Position the emergency release tool and pull to electric charge port door P After an emergency release, the vehicle can only be loosen the charge port door from its anchor. charged using alternating current (AC). 4. Carry out charging. Q 5. Place the charge port door cover on the anchor R and push until it engages securely to close it. To have the unlocking mechanism of the charge port S door checked: T e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have U trained workshop personnel and the necessary V parts and tools. W X Y Fig. 54: Emergency release of the manual charge port door Z

85 Charging high-voltage battery

A Performing an emergency release B of the vehicle plug If the vehicle plug cannot be released (e.g. due to a C malfunction), an emergency release must be carried D out. The availability of the vehicle plug emergency re- E lease depends on the country. F G H I J K L M N O P Q Fig. 56: Performing an emergency release of the vehicle plug R 1. Open the driver or passenger door. S 2. Reach into the space between the driver or pas- T senger door and wing. Pull the knob up to the point of resistance. U The vehicle plug is unlocked. If a charging proc- V ess was started, it will be stopped. 3. Pull the vehicle plug from the vehicle charge port W within approx. 20 seconds. X 4. Close the charge port door. Visit a workshop. Y Z

86 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

Child Restraint Systems passenger seat or if the seated passenger is a small A or light person, there is a risk of serious or fatal injury B (Child Seats) from the passenger airbag deploying. Improper use of child re- DANGER e Always check whether the passenger airbag C straint systems needs to be switched off before installing a child D Risk of serious or fatal injury resulting from the im- restraint system in the passenger seat. e E proper use of child restraint systems. Adjust the backrest angle of the passenger seat so that there is solid contact between the pas- Child restraint systems that are not suitable for the F senger seat and child restraint system. vehicle type or that are not properly installed in the G vehicle do not provide adequate protection in the > Please refer to chapter "Ensuring correct instal- event of an accident. lation position of child restraint systems" on H e Always refer to the separate installation instruc- page 91. I tions for the respective child restraint system. > Please refer to chapter "Switching off the pas- J e When using a child restraint system, always senger airbag" on page 41. comply with the legal regulations that apply in e Always switch off the seat heating if child re- K your country. straint systems are installed. Fig. 58: Airbag warning sticker on the sun visor L e Use only child restraint systems recommended e Before installing a child restraint system in which by Porsche. These restraint systems have been the child sits forward-facing, adjust the relevant e Never remove, deface or render illegible airbag M headrest as high as possible. warning stickers A or warning signs. tested and adapted to suit the interior of Porsche N vehicles and the corresponding child weight If the headrest on the rear seat prevents you classes. Other systems have not been tested and from installing the child restraint system even Using child restraint systems correctly O when adjusted to its highest position, the head- 1. Use a child restraint system of the correct could increase the risk of injury. P e Switch off the passenger airbag if a child re- rest must be removed. The headrest must always weight and height category. straint system is installed in the passenger seat. be re-installed once the child restraint system > Please refer to chapter "Using child restraint Q has been removed. systems of the correct weight and size class" Porsche recommends Porsche Tequipment child re- > Please refer to chapter "Removing and in- on page 88. R straint systems. For information on installation stalling headrests on rear seats" on 2. Use the correct installation position for child re- S options: page 226. straint systems. T e Contact your Porsche partner. > Please refer to chapter "Ensuring correct in- > Please refer to chapter "Ensuring correct instal- stallation position of child restraint systems" U lation position of child restraint systems" on on page 91. V page 91. 3. Install the child restraint system securely. Child restraint system in > Please refer to chapter "Installing child re- W DANGER the passenger seat straint systems" on page 93. X The passenger airbag offers protection only for per- Y sons of a certain minimum height and minimum Z weight. If a child restraint system is installed in the Fig. 57: Airbag warning sticker 87 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

A Using child restraint systems of Classification of child restraint systems into Classification of child restraint systems by weight classes size classes B the correct weight and size class e In addition the suitable weight and size class, al- A ISO/F3: front-facing, full-height child restraint C Children in group 0 and 0+: up to 13 kg so check the correct installation position. system (secured with i-Size system, ISOFIX system and D > Please refer to chapter "Ensuring correct instal- B ISO/F2: front-facing, reduced-height child re- vehicle seat belt) lation position of child restraint systems" on straint system E page 91. Children in this group are carried in child restraint B1 ISO/F2X: front-facing, reduced-height child systems facing backward. F restraint system Whenever possible, these child restraint systems B2 ISO/B2: front-facing child restraint system G should be installed on the rear seats. with backrest H C ISO/R3: rear-facing, full-size child restraint Children in group I: 9 to 18 kg system I (secured with i-Size system, ISOFIX system or ve- D ISO/R2: rear-facing, reduced-size child re- hicle seat belt) J straint system Children in this group must be carried in child re- E ISO/R1: rear-facing, child restraint system for K straint systems facing forward. In exceptional cases, infants children in this weight group can also be carried in F ISO/L1: left side-facing child restraint system L special child restraint systems that are facing back- (baby carrier) M ward. Whenever possible, these child restraint sys- G ISO/L2: right side-facing child restraint system tems should be installed on the rear seats. (baby carrier) N e Observe the scope of application of the child re- O Children in group II: 15 to 25 kg straint system as well as the manufacturer's in- (secured with the vehicle seat belt) P stallation and operating instructions for the child Children in this group must be carried in child re- restraint system being used. Q straint systems facing forward. Whenever possible, Fig. 59: Example of ECE child restraint system sticker these child restraint systems should be installed on R Weight class Size category Child re- A Size category the rear seats. straint S B "Universal" or "semi universal" marking system C Weight class Children in group III: 22 to 36 kg T (secured with the vehicle seat belt) e In the case of child restraint systems with semi Group 0: 0 to F ISO/L1 U universal approval, please refer to the vehicle Children in this group must be carried in child re- 10 kg straint systems facing forward. Whenever possible, V type list provided with the relevant child restraint G ISO/L2 system or available on the Internet. these child restraint systems should be installed on W the rear seats. E ISO/R1 X Group 0+: 0 C ISO/R3 Y to 13 kg Z

88 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

Weight class Size category Child re- A straint B system C D ISO/R2 D E ISO/R1 E

Group I: 9 to A ISO/F3 F 18 kg G i-Size child B ISO/F2 H restraint sys- B1 ISO/F2X tems 1 I B2 ISO/B2 J C ISO/R3 K

D ISO/R2 L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1. Country-dependent 89 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

A Recommended child restraint systems B Weight class Manufacturer Secured with the vehicle seat belt Secured with i-Size and ISOFIX system 1 C D Type Authorisation Porsche part Type Authorisation Porsche part number number number number E Group 0 and 0+: up to Britax-Römer Porsche Baby E1 04301146 955.044.805.84 Porsche Baby- E1 04301146 955.044.805.84 F 13 kg Seat G0+ seat ISOFIX G0+ only in conjunc- G only in conjunc- tion with: tion with: Base H 955.044.805.97 ISOFIX 1 I Group I: 9 to 18 kg Britax-Römer Porsche Junior E1 04301199 955.044.806.13 Porsche Junior E1 04301199 955.044.806.13 J Seat ISOFIX G1 Seat ISOFIX G1 K 2, 2, 1

L Group II: 15 to 25 kg Britax-Römer Porsche Junior E1 04301169 955.044.806.19 Porsche Junior E1 04301198 955.044.806.18 M Plus G2 + G3 Plus ISOFIT G2 + G3 1 N Group III: 22 to 36 kg Britax-Römer Porsche Junior E1 04301169 955.044.806.19 Porsche Junior E1 04301198 955.044.806.18 O Plus G2 + G3 Plus ISOFIT G2 P + G3 1 Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1. There is no i-Size or ISOFIX system available for the passenger seat. 2. Not permissible for use on the centre rear seat (vehicle with 3 rear seats) because this seat is not suitable for installation of child restraint systems with support leg. 90 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

Ensuring correct installation posi- i-Size and ISOFIX are standardised anchorage sys- A tion of child restraint systems tems for child restraint systems which are available on a country-dependent basis. ISOFIX child restraint B systems and i-Size child restraint systems which are C approved in accordance with ECE-R 129 and ECE-R 44 can be attached to the i-Size anchorage points. D E F G H I J K

Fig. 61: Seat numbering for installation of child restraint L systems in vehicles with 2 rear seats M A Left-hand drive vehicle with 2 rear seats B Right-hand drive vehicle with 2 rear seats N Fig. 60: Seat numbering for installation of child restraint systems in vehicles with 3 rear seats Overview of how child restraint systems can be used O A Left-hand drive vehicle with 3 rear seats in accordance with standard ECE-R 16. P B Right-hand drive vehicle with 3 rear seats Q R S T U V W Fig. 62: ISOFIX and i-Size symbols X A Symbol for attachment of an ISOFIX child restraint sys- tem (country-dependent) Y B Symbol for attachment of an i-Size child restraint sys- tem (country-dependent) Z

91 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

A Secured with i-Size system Secured with the vehicle seat belt Secured with ISOFIX system B Permissible installation positions ac- 4 and 6 3, 4, 5 1 and 6 4 and 6 C cording to seat numbering D Seat numbering for installation of child restraint systems 1 3 2 4 3 5 4, 1 6 3 E F Secured with the vehicle seat belt No Yes Yes Yes Yes G ISOFIX installation position No No Yes No Yes

H i-Size installation position No No Yes No Yes I Sideward-facing child restraint systems No No No No No J K Largest suitable rear-facing child restraint system No R2 R3 R2 5 R3

L Largest suitable forward-facing child restraint system No F3/B2 F3 F2X 5 F3/B2 M No: Seat is not suitable for installation of a child restraint system of this group. N

O Overview of installation of child restraint X: Seat is not suitable for child restraint sys- P systems on the passenger seat tems of this group. U / L: Suitable for forward-facing child restraint When installing child restraint systems of the Uni- Q versal (U) or "semi universal" (L) approval categories systems in the “Universal” or "semi univer- sal" approval categories, which are secured R on the passenger seat, check whether the passenger airbag needs to be switched off using the table with the seat belt for adults and are ap- S below. proved for use with this group. T For information on the approval category, please re- fer to the orange certification mark on the child re- U straint system. V W X 1. Seat 5 is only available for vehicles with 3 rear seats and is only suitable for installing child restraint systems secured with the vehicle seat belt. 2. Always check whether the passenger airbag needs to be switched off. Y 3. This installation position is suitable for child restraint systems with support leg. Z 4. This installation position is not suitable for child restraint systems with support leg. 5. Secured with the vehicle seat belt. 92 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

Group Passenger airbag switched on 1 Passenger airbag switched off A B Group 0: X U / L 0 to 10 kg C D Group 0+: X U / L 0 to 13 kg E F Group I: X U / L 9 to 18 kg G Backward-facing H

Group I: U / L U / L I 9 to 18 kg J Forward-facing K Group II: U / L U / L L 15 to 25 kg M Group III: U / L U / L N 22 to 36 kg O P Installing child restraint systems Switching passenger airbag on and off Q Passenger airbag Baby carriers DANGER switched off R Left or right-facing child restraint systems from size categories F and G (e.g. baby carriers) should not The passenger airbag will not be triggered in an ac- S generally be used on any of the seat versions. cident if it is switched off. T Porsche recommends Porsche Tequipment child re- e Only switch off the passenger airbag if a child straint systems (e.g. Porsche Babyseat ISOFIX G0+). restraint system is fitted on the passenger seat. U e Switch the passenger airbag back on once the V child restraint system has been removed. W X Y Z 1. Adjust the passenger seat to the rearmost upper position. 93 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

A 3. Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into When the passenger airbag is switched off, the the key switch. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator stays on when B 4. Using the emergency key, switch the passenger readiness for operation is established. C airbag off (switch position OFF) or on (switch Passenger airbag switched on position ON). D When the passenger airbag is switched on, the Risk of serious or fatal PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator comes on for E DANGER injury due to the passen- approx. 1 minute when readiness for operation is F ger airbag triggering established and then goes off. inadvertently Failure or malfunction of G DANGER the passenger airbag H If the emergency key is left in the key switch during driving, it may inadvertently turn in the key switch If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator does not I due to vibration, possibly triggering the airbag. come on when readiness for operation is established J e Never leave the emergency key in the key switch and the passenger airbag is switched off, there may while driving. K be a fault in the system. 5. Remove the emergency key from the key switch. e Do not install a child restraint system on the L Fig. 63: Switching off the passenger airbag 6. Close the glove box. passenger seat. M b Vehicle switched off. e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche 1. Open the glove box. recommends a Porsche partner as they have N PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF/ON indicator 2. Remove the emergency key from the driver's key. trained workshop personnel and the necessary O > Please refer to chapter "Driver's Key" on parts and tools. P page 104. Installing child restraint system with vehicle Q NOTICE seat belt R Risk of damage to the key switch and airbag system Installing child restraint system on rear seats with S e Only turn the emergency key when it is inserted vehicle seat belt 1. Adjust the backrest angle of the passenger seat T fully into the key switch. so that there is solid contact between the pas- It must be possible to turn the key switch with- Fig. 64: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF/ON indicator senger seat and child restraint system. U out exerting excessive force. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF/ON indicator is lo- 2. Adjust the passenger seat to the rearmost upper V e Only switch the passenger airbag on or off when cated on the overhead console. position. the vehicle is switched off. W Lamp check > Please refer to chapter "seats" on page 223. X Once readiness for operation is established, the 3. If possible, adjust the seat belt guide on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF/ON indicator comes on backrest of the child restraint system so that it is Y for approx. 5 seconds for a lamp check. Z Passenger airbag switched off

94 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

in front of and underneath the belt outlet on the Installing child restraint system on the rear seats Installing child restraint system with support leg A B-pillar of the vehicle. B 4. Make sure there is a comfortable distance be- tween the passenger seat and the passenger C sitting behind it and if necessary, adjust the passenger seat as required. D 5. Make sure to leave a comfortable space between E the child's feet and legs and the dashboard and if necessary, adjust the passenger seat as required. F Installing child restraint system on rear seats with G vehicle seat belt H e For booster seats with no backrest, make sure that the booster seat is touching the rear seat I backrest. J Installing child restraint system with i-Size or K ISOFIX system L > Please refer to chapter "Using child restraint M systems of the correct weight and size class" on Fig. 65: i-Size or ISOFIX anchorage system on rear seats Fig. 66: Installing child restraint system with support leg page 88. (country-dependent) N 1. Install the child restraint system with ISOFIX or i- e Always refer to the separate installation instruc- The retaining lugs A of the i-Size or ISOFIX anchor- Size anchorage correctly using the retaining lug tions for your child restraint system. O age system for the child restraint system are located A. P under the marked protection caps on the seat > Please refer to chapter "Installing child re- cushion. straint system with i-Size or ISOFIX system" Q 1. Remove the protection caps of the i-Size or ISO- on page 95. FIX anchorage system if necessary and put them 2. Position the support leg in accordance with the R in a safe place. child restraint system manufacturer's S 2. Secure the child restraint system to retaining instructions. T lugs A as described in the instruction manual for 3. Ensure that the child restraint system is posi- the child restraint system. tioned flush against the rear seat. U 3. Pull the child restraint system to check that both anchorage points are properly engaged. Installing child restraint system with top tether V e When using a child restraint system with top 4. Ensure a comfortable distance between the front W passenger seat and a passenger sitting behind it. tether, the top tether must be attached at the anchorage points on the back of the rear seat To prevent it from rotating, the child restraint sys- X backrests. tem must be additionally secured with the support Y leg or top tether. Z

95 Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)

A 2. Install the child restraint system with ISOFIX or i- Size anchorage correctly with the retaining lug A. B > Please refer to chapter "Installing child re- C straint system with i-Size or ISOFIX system" on page 95. D 3. Guide the top tether B through the headrest. The E headrest can be removed for ease of installation. > Please refer to chapter "Removing and in- F stalling headrests on rear seats" on G page 226. H I J K

L Fig. 67: Anchorage points for top tether M 1. Open the top tether cover. N O P Q R

S Fig. 69: Securing child restraint system with i-Size or ISOFIX T top tether 4. Fasten the top tether to the anchorage point on U the rear of the backrest and tighten the top V tether. W X

Y Fig. 68: Installing child restraint system with top tether Z

96 Coolant

Coolant The coolant provides year-round protection from A coolant tank corrosion and freezing down to –37 °C. Regular WARNING checking of the coolant level is part of servicing. B e Porsche recommends Glysantin® G40® (alterna- C The coolant tank is pressurised and contains hot tively: antifreeze in accordance with G12++/VW coolant. Coolant can spray out suddenly when the TL 774 G). D coolant tank is opened. e ViGo to sit a qualified specialist workshop. Por- E e Never open the cap of the coolant tank. Go to a sche recommends a Porsche partner, as they F qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recom- have trained workshop personnel and the neces- mends a Porsche partner, as they have trained sary parts and tools. G workshop personnel and the necessary parts and H tools. e Take care when working near hot vehicle parts. I J NOTICE K If the vehicle continues to move after the warning L light is displayed, there is a risk of damage. M e Park the vehicle and allow it to cool. e Have the fault remedied without delay. Contact a N qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recom- O mends a Porsche partner, as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and P tools. Q R NOTICE S A drop in coolant level indicates a vehicle defect, T such as leaks in the coolant system. U e Never add coolant yourself. e Have the cause remedied without delay. Contact V a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recom- W mends a Porsche partner, as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and X tools. Y Z

97 Cruise control (CC)

A Cruise control (CC) Controls Display elements B General safety instructions Status display symbols C Unsafe traffic situation WARNING Symbol Meaning D and unfavourable road conditions E Cruise control is passive. F Use of the cruise control may cause an accident if the current traffic situation does not permit driving G safely at an adequate distance from the vehicle in H front and at a constant speed. Cruise control is passive. Control is interrupted and the desired speed is e Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic, on I still displayed. twisting roads or in unfavourable road conditions J (e.g. wintry or wet conditions, varying road Cruise control is active at the set de- surfaces). K sired speed. L Responding to warning messages M Always heed any warning and information messages Fig. 70: Control stalk for driver assistance systems displayed in the vehicle. Switching cruise control on and N R Switching systems on/off and opening the options > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information off O menu messages" on page 271. S Open the options menu (when the system is switched The system that was selected last is always P on) switched on. The system is initially in passive mode Operating principle 1 Set/increase speed when switched on. It must first be activated before Q 2 Reduce speed the control function starts working. Cruise control (CC) maintains the selected speed 3 RESUME: Resume control R between approx. 30 km/h and 240 km/h (20 and 4 CANCEL: Interrupt control Switching on cruise control S 150 mph) without the user having to press the b No driver assistance system has been switched accelerator. on yet. T 1. Press the R button on the control stalk. U The options menu for the driver assistance sys- tems appears on the instrument cluster. V 2. If cruise control is not already selected, select CC W using the rotary knob on the steering wheel and press to confirm. X Cruise control is switched on and passive. Y Z

98 Cruise control (CC)

Switching from an already activated driver assis- Increasing the speed Cruise control operation is interrupted auto- A tance system to cruise control e Push the control stalk forward (position 1): matically in the following situations: B 1. Press the S button on the control stalk. – Press briefly = 1 km/h (1 mph) increments – The vehicle speed is above or below the set The options menu for the driver assistance sys- – Press and hold = 10 km/h (6 mph) speed for a certain time. C increments tems appears on the instrument cluster. – Porsche Stability Management (PSM) is active. D 2. Select CC using the rotary knob on the steering Reduce speed wheel and press to confirm. e Pull the control stalk (position 2): Resuming control E Cruise control is switched on and passive. – Pull briefly = 1 km/h (1 mph) increments e Press the control stalk up (RESUME). F The operating status appears grey in the status dis- – Pull and hold = 10 km/h (6 mph) increments Cruise control accelerates or brakes the vehicle play. There is no speed stored. The new maximum speed is displayed on the instru- to the stored speed. G ment cluster. H Information Information I The last selected driver assistance system is re- J tained even after switching it off and operational The speed can be increased using the accelerator readiness is restored. pedal as usual. This does not change the stored val- K ue; it is resumed after the accelerator pedal is L Switching cruise control off released. e Press the R button on the control stalk. M The memory is cleared and the readiness symbol N disappears. Interrupting and resuming cruise control O Activating cruise control Following deactivation, cruise control switches to P b standby mode and remains in standby until it is ac- Cruise control switched on. Q b Speed is higher than 30 km/h (20 mph) tivated manually again. 1. Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed R Interrupting control using the accelerator pedal. S 2. Briefly press the control stalk forwards (position e Press the control stalk downwards (CANCEL). 1). – or – T e Press the brake pedal. Cruise control is active. U The current driving speed appears green in the sta- – or – V tus display and is maintained automatically. e Select position N. Cruise control is passive. The set value for the W desired speed remains stored. The status display Changing the desired speed X The desired speed can be increased or decreased by changes from green to grey. pressing the control stalk. Y b Cruise control active. Z

99 cupholder

A cupholder Using front cupholders B Using cupholders C Spilled hot drinks D CAUTION

E Hot drinks can cause scalding if spilled. F e Only use lidded containers that fit. e Never put overfull containers in the cupholder. G e Do not use for hot drinks. H e Only use the cupholder for the storage of drinks as intended. I

J NOTICE K Risk of damage from spilled drinks. L Fig. 72: Cupholders in the rear armrest e Only use lidded containers that fit. M e Never put overfull containers in the cupholder. b Vehicles with 3 rear seats. Fig. 71: Front cupholder e Unlocking and opening armrests. N There is a cupholder in the front centre console and O another in the front armrest.

P Using the rear cupholders Q There are two additional cupholders in the rear armrest. R S T U V W X Y Z Fig. 73: Cupholders in the rear armrest

100 cupholder b Vehicles with 2 rear seats. A e Open the armrest. B Stowing bottles C e Stow bottles in the storage compartments in the D doors. E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

101 Device Manager

A Device Manager e The Connection Assistant will help you to con- – Switching WiFi on or off. – Allowing internet access: Activate the PCM B nect devices or media sources: e Devices Opening the Device Manager e Connection assistant WiFi hotspot and allow a data connection for WiFi devices. C The Device Manager provides an overview of the – Allowing internet access: Display and set up available devices and of their connection status. D Pairing a new device via the PCM WiFi access data. This data is re- E e e Devices Bluetooth® quired to be able to connect a device (e.g. – or – mobile phone) to the PCM via WiFi and to use F e e a WiFi hotspot. Touch the or in the status area (de- 1. Touch Devices Connection assistant e – Data connection settings: G pending on the connection status). Connect new telephone/Connect new music player. – Display online data traffic H – Reset online data counter 2. Select the device from the list. I Displaying connection status A 6-digit Bluetooth® code is generated and dis- J played on the central display and device. Interfaces Colours and meanings of the symbols USB interfaces (type C) are located in the front ® K – Blue symbol: Connection is active. 3. Compare the Bluetooth code on the central armrest and in the rear. The USB interfaces in the – White symbol: Connection is possible, not yet display and device. rear can only be used for charging purposes. L active. 4. If the Bluetooth® code in the PCM and on the M – No symbol: Connection is not possible. device match, confirm. N If the mobile phone has been successfully con- Available functions nected, it appears in the device overview. O – Telephone: Mobile phones® connected via For information on operating Porsche Bluetooth.Please refer to chapter "Phone" on P Communication Management (PCM): page 182. Q > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Communication – Music: External media sources connected via Management (PCM)" on page 190. R Bluetooth®.Please refer to chapter "Media" on page 157. S Device Manager settings – Data: Data connection established via the T access point.Please refer to chapter "Porsche e Touch e Devices e . Connect" on page 196. U The following settings are available (country- V – WiFi: WiFi devices connected via the PCM dependent): WiFi hotspot. Please refer to chapter "Porsche – Telephone settings: Please refer to W Connect" on page 196. chapter "Phone" on page 182. X – Apple CarPlay: iPhone connected via the USB – Bluetooth settings: Fig. 74: USB charge ports in the rear port or wirelessly with access to Apple CarPlay. – Switching Bluetooth on or off. Y Please refer to chapter "Apple CarPlay" on – Modifying the Bluetooth name of the PCM. Z page 55. – WiFi settings:

102 Device Manager

Connecting an external device via USB Technical data on supported media and file formats: A > Please refer to chapter "Technical Data" on B page 308. C D E F G Fig. 75: Interfaces in the armrest H 1. Open the armrest. I 2. Connect an external device, e.g. iPod®, USB storage medium, to the USB interface A. J 3. Under Media e Play select the desired media K source. L > Please refer to chapter "Media" on page 157. 4. Adjust the volume on the external device and in M the central display, as required. N Notes on ports and externally O connected devices P – If a storage device contains a large number of Q files, folders or playlists, it may take longer to load media tracks for the first time. R – Audio files are automatically displayed with S stored additional information (e.g. artist, title, al- bum cover) during playback. If this information is T not available on the medium in question, an U available Internet database is used. Despite this, certain additional information may not be V displayed. W – Do not use USB extension cables or adapters. These impair the functionality. X – USB hubs are not supported. Y – Porsche will not assume any liability for damaged or lost files or media. Z 103 Driver's Key

A Driver's Key Using the emergency key B Using the driver's key Removing emergency key C D Information E e Only use the driver’s key when the vehicle is in F your sight. G The Porsche Crest on the driver's key lights up when the driver's key is actuated. The crest on the driver's H key may light up while driving even without actuat- I ing it. Data of relevance for servicing and maintenance is J stored on the driver's key while driving. The Porsche K Crest on the driver's key may therefore light up without being actuated. For more information on L storing and reading out the data on the driver's key: Fig. 76: Driver's key M e Contact your Porsche partner. A Unlocking the vehicle The remote control may not work for the following B Lock the vehicle N reasons: C Unlocking the bonnet and vehicle D Opening the tailgate and unlocking the vehicle Fig. 77: Removing emergency key O – Radio waves can cause transmission interference e Push the emergency key out of the driver's key (also radio contact between the driver's key and There is an emergency key integrated in every driv- P upwards. vehicle, such as in vehicles with Comfort er's key. The driver's keys can be used to operate all Access). Q of the vehicle locks. Insert the emergency key – The remote control is malfunctioning due to a e Take care of your driver's keys: Do not part with e Insert the emergency key into the driver's key R fault. them except under exceptional circumstances. until latched. S – The battery in the driver’s key is flat. e Do not leave the driver's key in the vehicle. T e Ensure that you do not store the driver’s key to- gether with electronic devices that are switched U on (e.g. mobile phone, notebook, charging cable). V Store the driver's key somewhere else if necessary. W X Y Z

104 Driver's Key

Replacing battery in driver's key Change the battery (CR 2032, 3 V) e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche A recommends a Porsche partner as they have Internal chemical burns 1. Remove the emergency key. WARNING trained workshop personnel and the necessary B or death from swallowing 2. Unclip the two-part driver's key housing to the parts and tools. the lithium button cell right and left. C e Register all driver's keys belonging to the vehicle 3. Turn the battery cover anti-clockwise to open it, D The driver's key contains a lithium button cell and remove it. again. (battery). 4. Replace the battery (check the polarity). E Swallowing the battery can lead to internal chemical 5. Replace the battery cover and turn it clockwise Information F burns within two hours and thus to death. to close it. A total of eight driver's keys can be taught. G e Keep children away from removed or new Ensure that the emergency key can be pushed in. batteries. 6. Press the driver's key housing up from below and H e Keep the driver's key away from children. Chil- clip it in place. Information I dren may open the driver's key and remove the 7. Insert the emergency key. e If a driver's key is lost or stolen, have a Porsche battery. partner disable this driver's key in the vehicle and J e If the battery has been swallowed or inserted in- Starting the vehicle with dis- change the mechanical locks if necessary. K to a bodily orifice, seek medical attention charged driver's key battery or ra- e You should notify your insurance company of the immediately. L dio interference. loss or theft of driver's keys or of the production of additional or replacement keys. Malfunctions of wireless communication between M Information the vehicle and the driver's key, or a discharged N e Observe the disposal instructions for batteries. driver's key battery can disable detection of the driver's key. O When the battery in the driver's key needs to be re- To switch on the vehicle in this case, proceed as P placed, a message appears on the instrument clus- follows: ter. The Porsche crest on the driver's key no longer 1. Place the driver's key in the rear cupholder in the Q lights up when the driver's key is used. centre console. Hold the driver's key in the 12 R o'clock position against the wall of the cupholder. 2. Press the power button and turn on the vehicle. S T Ordering and storing replacement U keys V Driver's keys can only be ordered from a Porsche partner. This can take a long time. W e Always have a replacement key available. X e Keep the replacement key in a safe place, but under no circumstances in or on the vehicle. Y Fig. 78: Changing battery To register new driver's keys for the vehicle: Z

105 Driving mode

A Driving mode Configuring INDIVIDUAL driving B The vehicle offers driving modes that are coordi- mode nated to different requirements and driving In INDIVIDUAL driving mode, settings for chassis C conditions. systems and E-Sound can be combined on the basis D RANGE of the existing driving modes. The combination The control systems are designed for efficient, con- stored can be retrieved by turning the mode switch E sumption-optimised driving. to INDIVIDUAL or via the central display. F NORMAL The control systems are designed for day-to-day Fig. 79: Button for SPORT drive mode Selecting and storing settings under G driving with an emphasis on comfort. Activating SPORT drive mode: INDIVIDUAL SPORT H e Press the SPORT button. e e Drive e e Individual drive mode Adjusts the control systems more towards higher SPORT drive mode has been activated. configuration I performance and greater dynamism during day-to- The corresponding button lights up blue. J day driving. The selected settings become activated when INDI- SPORT PLUS Deactivating SPORT drive mode: VIDUAL driving mode is selected. K Maximum performance for racetrack-like operation. e With SPORT drive mode activated, press the L INDIVIDUAL SPORT button again. Configuring RANGE drive mode SPORT drive mode is deactivated and NORMAL M Driving mode for individual adjustments. The following settings can be changed in RANGE drive mode is activated. drive mode: N Selecting drive mode Selecting driving mode using the mode Air conditioning O switch Sets the air conditioning mode: ECO or ECO PLUS. Information P b Vehicles with Sport Chrono package. > Please refer to chapter "Air Conditioning System Q NORMAL drive mode is automatically active after Advanced Climate Control (2-/4-Zone Climate operational readiness has been established. Control)" on page 42. R Speed limitation S Selecting the drive mode via central display Sets the maximum speed for efficient and con- T sumption-optimised driving. The speed can be e e Drive e e Drive mode U limited to between 90 km/h – 140 km/h (56 mph – 87 mph) and is displayed on the instrument cluster. V Selecting SPORT drive mode via the centre The speed limiter can be interrupted by initiating a Fig. 80: Drive mode on the steering wheel kickdown. In this case, the speed limiter is deacti- W console control vated temporarily, and the display on the instrument b Vehicles without the Sport Chrono package. e Turn the mode switch to the left or to the right to X the desired drive mode. cluster turns grey. The speed limiter is activated again as soon as the vehicle speed drops to below Y The selected drive mode is displayed on the in- strument cluster. the set limit. Z

106 Driving mode

Route-based adaptation For further information on PIRM: The selected settings are activated when RANGE A > Please refer to chapter "Charging Planner (avail- drive mode is selected. When route guidance is active and the Porsche In- B telligent Range Manager (PIRM) is activated, the air able in some countries)" on page 169. conditioning and speed limit are adapted as required Information C Selecting and storing settings under RANGE for the current route. If a change is initiated by PIRM, D "Auto" appears in the speed limit display on the in- When RANGE drive mode is active, the chassis strument cluster. e e Drive e e Range drive mode height cannot be changed and the PSM SPORT and E PSM OFF settings are not available. The changes are only made for the current route. The configuration F previously selected settings are not lost. G Overview of the vehicle setup in H the selected drive mode The table below shows only some of the available I driving settings for the relevant drive modes. J e Please refer to the relevant section for further information on the individual vehicle functions. K L Driving mode RANGE NORMAL SPORT SPORT PLUS M Launch Control cannot be activated cannot be activated Can be activated Can be activated N Basic boost recuperation setting Off Off On On O

Medium Medium P Chassis height Low Depending on driving Depending on the Low Q speed driving speed R Electric Sport Sound Normal Normal Normal Sport S T Air conditioning Eco or Eco Plus Normal Normal Normal U Additional information settings, such as the selected drive mode. An atten- Responding to warning messages V tive driving style and restrained use of energy-in- Always heed any warning and information messages W Range tensive loads have a positive effect on the available displayed in the vehicle. The range depends, among other things, on the range. > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information X driving style, the climatic conditions, the use of en- messages" on page 271. Y ergy-intensive loads and the selected vehicle Z

107 Emergency Call System

A Emergency Call System process the data transmitted by the emergency call Triggering an emergency call via SOS button system for determination of the necessary rescue B Different emergency call systems may be used de- pending on model, country and equipment. Help can measures (for example, the current position of the C be requested via the emergency call system in an vehicle is not automatically communicated). If the vehicle battery is disconnected or defective, an D emergency or in dangerous situations. Despite activated private mode, location information integral battery ensures that the emergency call E for the vehicle can be transmitted in the event of a system remains available for at least one hour for queries from the emergency call centre. F breakdown or emergency call as well as theft. G Legal emergency call Information H b Legal emergency call system (for example EU When the cover flap is open, the SOS button can be eCall). I pressed accidentally, thereby activating an emer- b Mobile phone network available. gency call unintentionally. J b The emergency call system is operational (ap- e The cover flap for the SOS button must be kept proximately 20 seconds after turning on the K closed during driving. vehicle). e Only press the SOS button in an emergency. L M Information Fig. 81: SOS button and indicator light N The emergency call system does not require a mo- bile phone logged on in the vehicle as it features an A SOS button O independent mobile communications module. B Indicator light P The emergency call system is activated by default Information Q upon vehicle delivery. Under unfavourable conditions, an emergency call to No emergency call can be placed when the vehicle is R an emergency call centre cannot be ensured (e.g. no turned off. S mobile phone network available). Due to technical or organisational restrictions that lie outside the area of 1. Open the cover plate by pressing on it. T influence of Porsche (e.g. vehicle outside of country 2. Press SOS button A for at least 1 second. If the U coverage of the legal emergency call system or no SOS button is pressed again for at least 1 second public emergency call infrastructure available), it within 6 seconds, the emergency call is V might not be possible to make an emergency call to cancelled. W the specified public emergency call centre under Indicator light B flashes green while the call to certain circumstances. In countries outside the the emergency call centre is being established. X scope of the legal emergency call system, an at- 3. If the circumstances allow, wait in the vehicle Y tempt will made in such cases to place an emer- until the connection to the emergency call centre gency call to an alternative public emergency call has been established. Z centre. This public emergency call centre cannot

108 Emergency Call System

Indicator light B flashes green when the call to Flashes green Active emergency call context of the applicable legal provisions. The A the emergency call centre has been established. emergency call system is not traceable and there is – emergency call is B If queries from the emergency call centre remain established and data no permanent tracking of the vehicle. Any data col- unanswered, rescue measures can be initiated transmission to emer- lected is deleted immediately after the data C automatically. transmission. gency call centre The following data is transmitted: D Information Lights up orange Active automatic – Vehicle identification number E emergency call – – Vehicle type If the indicator light flashes, but the emergency call F emergency call is es- – Vehicle drive type centre cannot be heard via the loudspeaker, the – Vehicle GPS position data G loudspeaker may be defective, for example. You can, tablished and data however, still be heard by the emergency call centre. transmission to emer- – GPS position data of the route shortly before the H gency call centre emergency call is triggered – Log file of automatic activation of the emergency I Indicator light status display call system Automatic emergency call J – Time of the triggered emergency call K Indicator light Status – Manually or automatically activated emergency Information call L – Number of persons in the vehicle Off Emergency call system No automatic emergency call can be placed when M is off the vehicle is turned off. – Direction of travel N Lights up green Emergency call system A connection to the emergency call centre is estab- Emergency call is ready for operation O lished automatically immediately after triggering of b Mobile phone network available. the airbags. The automatic emergency call cannot be P b The emergency call system is operational (ap- Lights up or flashes Error – emergency call prevented by pressing SOS button A. proximately 20 seconds after turning on the red not or only restrictedly Q If queries from the emergency call centre remain vehicle). possible1 unanswered, rescue measures can be initiated. R Data transmission Information S During an emergency call, person and vehicle-re- The emergency call system does not require a mo- T lated data for determination of the necessary rescue bile phone logged on in the vehicle as it features an U measures is transmitted to the emergency call independent mobile communications module. centre, provided that this is available. V Under unfavourable conditions, an emergency call to The collection and transmission of the data to W emergency service control centre is solely for the an emergency call centre cannot be ensured (e.g. no purpose of using the emergency call system within mobile phone network available). X the specified emergency situations and in the Y Z 1. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. 109 Emergency Call System

A Due to technical or organisational restrictions that lie Triggering an emergency call via SOS button Indicator light B flashes green while the call to outside the area of influence of Porsche (e.g. vehicle the emergency call centre is being established. B outside of the emergency call country coverage), it 3. If the circumstances allow, wait in the vehicle C may be that no emergency call to the designated until the connection to the emergency call centre emergency call centre can be established under has been established. D certain circumstances. In this case, if legally per- Indicator light B flashes green when the call to E missible an emergency call to an alternative public the emergency call centre has been established. emergency call centre is established. A public If queries from the emergency call centre remain F emergency call centre may not be able to process unanswered, rescue measures are initiated G the data transmitted by the emergency call system automatically. to determine necessary rescue measures (for exam- H ple, the current position of the vehicle is not auto- Information I matically communicated). If the vehicle battery is disconnected or defective, an If the indicator light flashes, but the emergency call J integral battery ensures that the emergency call centre cannot be heard via the loudspeaker, the K system remains available for at least one hour for loudspeaker may be defective, for example. You can, queries from the emergency call centre. however, still be heard by the emergency call centre. L M Information Fig. 82: SOS button and indicator light Indicator light status display N When the cover flap is open, the SOS button can be pressed accidentally, thereby activating an emer- A SOS button B Indicator light Indicator light Status O gency call unintentionally. P e The cover flap for the SOS button must be kept Off Emergency call system closed during driving. Information Q is off e Only press the SOS button in an emergency. No emergency call can be placed when the vehicle is Lights up green Emergency call system R turned off. is ready for operation S 1. Open the cover plate by pressing on it. T 2. Press SOS button A for at least 1 second. If the U SOS button is pressed again for at least 1 second within 6 seconds, the emergency call is V cancelled. W X Y Z

110 Emergency Call System

Lights up or flashes Error – emergency call – Severity of the accident A – Orientation of the vehicle during the accident red not or only restrictedly B possible1 – Vehicle menu language C Flashes green Active emergency call D – emergency call is established and data E transmission to emer- F gency call centre G

Automatic emergency call H I Information J No automatic emergency call can be placed when K the vehicle is turned off. L A connection to the emergency call centre is estab- M lished automatically immediately after triggering of the airbags. The automatic emergency call cannot be N prevented by pressing SOS button A. O If queries from the emergency call centre remain unanswered, rescue measures are initiated P automatically. Q Data transmission R When an emergency call is made, any available data S is transmitted to the emergency call centre to de- termine the rescue measures required. This can T include: U – Current vehicle location – Position data of the route immediately before the V emergency call W – Vehicle identification number – Vehicle type X Y Z 1. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. 111 Emergency Stop Function

A Emergency Stop Function Responding to warning messages In the speed range from 210 km/h (130 mph) to 250 km/h (156 mph): B Always heed any warning and information messages General safety instructions displayed in the vehicle. – Lane Keep Assist is active and the driver does not C > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information react to the takeover prompts from Lane Keep Lack of attention and Assist. D WARNING messages" on page 271. failure to detect objects – Lane Keep Assist is switched off and the emer- gency stop function does not detect any steer- E The system can only assist the driver within the Operating principle ing, braking or accelerator pedal activity. F limits of the system, but it cannot replace the driver. The system monitors the steering, accelerator and The assistance offered by the system should not in- brake pedal activity of the driver and provides sup- If Active Lane Guidance is deactivated in the speed G duce you to risk your safety. port in the speed range from 0 km/h (0 mph) to ap- range below 65 km/h (40 mph), the emergency stop H Nor can the system prevent an accident under all prox. 210 km/h – 250 km/h (130 mph – 156 mph) function is not available. 1. These warnings prompt the driver to take control of I circumstances. The driver is always responsible for an appropriate response. If the emergency stop function is active, it will ini- the vehicle: tiate visual, acoustic or haptic warnings in stages – Driver instructions in instrument cluster J The system cannot detect the following situations: and will brake the vehicle to a standstill. – Warning signals K – Persons, cyclists and animals The following conditions must be met for the – PCM muting – Objects on the road L switched-on emergency stop function to be active: – Jerking belt – Oncoming vehicles and cross traffic In the speed range from 0 km/h (0 mph) to – Warning jerks and gentle braking M e Drive with extreme care. 65 km/h (40 mph): If the driver still fails to act, the emergency stop N e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and – Active Lane Guidance is active and the driver function executes an emergency stop: the area around the vehicle. does not react to the takeover prompts of Active O Lane Guidance. – The hazard warning lights are activated. – The seat belt is tensioned. P In the speed range from 65 km/h (40 mph) to – The windows are closed. System limitations 210 km/h (130 mph): Q – The seat side bolsters are inflated (depending on The function may be limited, unresponsive or deac- – Active Lane Guidance is active and the driver the equipment). R tivate automatically in the following situations: does not react to the takeover prompts of Active – The vehicle is braked to a stop in its own lane. – If the driver actuates the accelerator pedal, brake Lane Guidance. S Additional warning jerks are executed as this or steering. – Active Lane Guidance is switched off, Lane Keep happens. T – If driving systems such as Lane Keep Assist, Ac- Assist is active and the driver does not react to U tive Lane Keeping, ACC or PID are limited. the takeover prompts from Lane Keep Assist. After the vehicle has come to a standstill, the park- – If the radar sensors or the windscreen in the area – Active Lane Guidance is switched off, Lane Keep ing lock and parking brake are activated, the doors V of the camera are damaged or soiled. Assist is switched off and the emergency stop are unlocked, the interior lighting is activated and an emergency call2 and equipment. W function does not detect any steering, braking or accelerator pedal activity. To drive on again, select drive position D or R. X Y Z 1. The specified speed range depends upon various factors, e.g. drive power, tyre type, loading, road surface, uphill and downhill gradients etc. 2. is triggered depending on the country 112 Emergency Stop Function

Overriding the emergency stop A function B The emergency stop function can be overridden while driving. This temporarily deactivates the sys- C tem. This also happens when the does this driver D without knowing it. Override the emergency stop function by: E e Move the steering wheel F – or – e Pressing the brake pedal G – or – H e Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal. I Activating and deactivating the J emergency stop function K L e e Assistance e Basic assistance e Emergency Stop Function M N Information O The emergency stop function is activated automati- P cally after operational readiness has been established. Q R S T U V W X Y Z

113 Flat Tyre

Temporarily repaired A Flat Tyre WARNING Filling in tyre sealant tyres B Depending on the model and vehicle equipment, the Flammable and harmful vehicle may come with either a tyre sealing com- WARNING Damaged tyres with tyre sealing compound can sealant C pound kit or a spare wheel. burst or lose pressure if the vehicle is driven at an The sealant is highly flammable and harmful to D inappropriate speed or under continuous load. health. Responding to Tyre Pressure e Sealing the tyre with tyre sealing compound is E e Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited Monitoring warning messages only an emergency solution to enable you to when handling tyre sealant. F If the Tyre Pressure Monitoring system has detected drive to the nearest specialist workshop. e Avoid contact with skin, eyes and clothing. a severe pressure loss, a message appears on the e Use tyre sealing compound only for cuts or G e Keep tyre sealant away from children. instrument cluster. Pressure loss can be an indica- punctures no larger than 4 mm. e Do not inhale vapours. H tion of damage to the tyres. e Never use tyre sealing compound if the rim is e I Stop in a suitable place and check the indicated damaged. In the event of contact CAUTION tyre for damage. e Have the tyre replaced by a specialist workshop with tyre sealing J > Please refer to chapter "Tyres and Wheels" on as soon as possible. Inform the specialist work- compound: K page 249. shop that the tyre contains tyre sealing compound. Irritation or allergic reactions after contact with tyre L Parking the vehicle safely e Tyres must not be repaired. sealant. M 1. Stop the vehicle as far away from the driving lane e Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering e Avoid contact with skin, eyes and clothing. speeds. N as possible. The vehicle must be parked on a firm e If tyre sealing compound gets on your skin or into and flat surface that is skid-proof. e Do not drive faster than the maximum permitted your eyes, thoroughly rinse the affected part of O 2. Switch hazard warning lights on. speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). your body immediately with plenty of water. e Read and follow the safety and operating in- P 3. Activate the parking brake. e Change soiled clothing immediately. 4. Straighten the front wheels. structions, which can be found in the separate e Consult a doctor immediately in the event of an operating instructions for the tyre sealing com- Q 5. Get all passengers to leave the vehicle. Pay at- allergic reaction. pound and compressor. e R tention to the traffic as they do so. If tyre sealant is swallowed, thoroughly rinse out 6. Set up the warning triangle at a suitable the mouth without delay and drink plenty of S In the event of a flat tyre, tyre damage can be tem- distance. porarily sealed using the tyre sealant provided in the water. Do not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor T 7. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling vehicle. immediately. away, e.g. by means of wedges under the wheels The tyre sealant set and the compressor that goes U Failure to detect pres- on the diagonally opposite side. with it are located in the front luggage WARNING sure loss in the tyre V > Please refer to chapter "Jack and Lifting Plat- compartment. form" on page 138. > W Please refer to chapter "Luggage compartment" A tyre pressure sensor that is soiled with tyre sealant on page 153. cannot determine the tyre pressure correctly. X Sealing defective tyres e When the defective tyre is changed, have the Y b Vehicles with tyre sealant. tyre pressure sensor replaced as well. Z

114 Flat Tyre

The filler bottle is open. Changing tyres A 3. Unscrew valve cap from the tyre valve F. > Please refer to chapter "Changing tyres and B 4. Remove valve insert E from the tyre valve with wheels" on page 252. valve turner D. C If a replacement valve insert is not available, Updating the Tyre Pressure Monitoring tyre D keep the valve insert in a clean, dry place. settings after changing a wheel 5. Remove plug C from the filler hose B. > Please refer to chapter "Tyres and Wheels" on E 6. Push the filler hose onto the tyre valve. page 249. F 7. Hold the filler bottle higher than the level of the tyre valve and squeeze it forcefully until the bot- Using the spare wheel G tle is completely emptied into the tyre. b Vehicles with a spare wheel. H 8. Pull the filler hose off the tyre valve. Changed vehicle 9. If available, screw the replacement valve insert or WARNING I handling alternatively valve insert E with valve turner D J firmly into the tyre valve. The use of a spare wheel can impair vehicle handling. K Inflating the tyres e The spare wheel must be used only over short Fig. 83: Filling in tyre sealant > Read and follow the operating instructions on the distances in cases of emergency. L A Filler bottle compressor. For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the M B Filler hose 1. Remove the compressor from the right-hand box wear indicators appear (webs in the tyre grooves, C Filler hose plug in the front luggage compartment. N D Valve turner 1.6 mm high). E Valve insert > Please refer to chapter "Luggage compart- e Never deactivate the Porsche Stability Manage- O ment" on page 153. F Tyre valve ment (PSM) system. P 2. Connect the compressor to a plug socket in the e Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering Preparing to fill vehicle and inflate the tyre to at least 2.5 bar ( speeds. Q 1. Leave the object that caused the puncture in the 36 psi). If this tyre pressure cannot be reached, The admissible maximum speed is R tyre. the tyre is too severely damaged. You must not 80 km/h (50 mph) and must not be exceeded 2. Remove the tyre sealant and the enclosed sticker continue driving with this tyre. due to changed vehicle characteristics and wear. S from the left-hand box in the front luggage 3. Screw valve cap onto the tyre valve F. e Do not use a spare wheel from a different vehicle T compartment. type. > Please refer to chapter "Luggage compart- Checking pressure e Do not fit the spare wheel from your vehicle on a U ment" on page 153. e Check the tyre pressure after driving for approx. different vehicle. V 3. Affix the sticker in the driver’s field of vision. 10 minutes. If the tyre pressure is less than e Only fit one spare wheel on the vehicle at any Filling in tyre sealant 1.5 bar (22 psi), do not continue driving. time. W > Please refer to chapter "Technical Data" on > Follow the separate operating instructions for page 308. The collapsible spare wheel is located in the boot. X using the tyre sealant. > Please refer to chapter "Changing a wheel" on Y 1. Shake filler bottle A. page 255. 2. Screw filler hose B onto the filler bottle. Z

115 Flat Tyre

A > Please refer to chapter "Inflating tyres" on page 251. B C After using the collapsible spare wheel e Stow the spare wheel in the boot again for D transport. E If the spare wheel is defective: F e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche G recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary H parts and tools. I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

116 Fuses

Fuses Depending on the equipment, further fuse boxes are 1. Switch off the load with the defective fuse if A located at various locations in the vehicle, which are possible. Short circuit B WARNING only accessible to a specialist workshop. 2. Open the relevant fuse box cover. 3. If necessary, carefully remove the purple plastic C Working on the electrical system of the vehicle can Fuse ratings strip over the fuses. D result in a short circuit. Short circuits can cause 4. Remove the fuse from its slot using the plastic fires. Colour Amperage gripper D in order to check it. A blown fuse can E e Disconnect the negative terminal on the 12-volt be identified by the melted metal strip. rating F lithium battery for all work on the electrical 5. Insert the new fuse. Only use fuses with the system. Light brown 5 A same rating as the fuse you are replacing. G 6. Fit the purple plastic strip back into place. > Please refer to chapter "12-volt battery" on H Brown 7.5 A If the same fuse blows repeatedly, the cause of the page 282. fault must be corrected immediately. I Improper intervention Red 10 A WARNING e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche J and incorrect recommends a Porsche partner as they have accessories blue 15 A trained workshop personnel and the necessary K parts and tools. Improper intervention in the fuse box and the use of Yellow 20 A L the incorrect accessories can result in damage and M malfunctions in electrical and electronic systems. White / clear 25 A e Do not attempt to replace any electrical compo- N nents except the fuses (e.g. relays) listed here. Green 30 A O e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have Blue-green 35 A P trained workshop personnel and the necessary Q parts and tools. Orange 40 A e Only use accessories that have been approved by R Porsche. For information on approved accesso- Checking and changing fuses S ries: Contact your Porsche partner. The numbering of the fuse slots is embossed on the T fuse holder. U Checking and changing fuses Unassigned fuse slots are not listed in the following overviews. V In order to prevent damage to the electrical system due to short circuits and overloads, the individual W circuits are protected by fuses. X Fuse boxes are located in the footwell and at the outer ends of the dashboard on the driver and pas- Y senger sides. Z

117 Fuses

A Opening the fuse box on the No. Load Right fuse box B dashboard on the left side 8 Instrument cluster No. Load C 9 Card reader ETC toll system (availability 1 Smartphone tray D dependent on country): E 2 PCM 10 Digital/stopwatch F 3 Central display 12 Heated steering wheel G 4 Central display H 5 Audio interfaces I Opening the fuse box on the J dashboard on the right-hand side 6 Fresh air fan K 7 PCM control unit

L 8 Gear selector M 12 diagnostic socket N Fig. 84: Left fuse box O A 1–12 fuses (dependent on equipment) B Plastic gripper P Q Left fuse box R e Carefully lever off the cover starting from the underside and remove it. S No. Load T U 2 Rear air conditioning, seat heating control unit in the rear V Fig. 85: Right fuse box 3 Air conditioning control unit W A 1–12 fuses (dependent on equipment) B Plastic gripper X 5 Steering column electronics control unit e Y Carefully lever off the cover starting from the 6 Control unit for steering column underside and remove it. Z adjustment

118 Fuses

Opening the fuse box in the left No. Load No. Load A footwell B 8 Radio-controlled parking control unit 11 Front left door control unit (left-hand drive), charge port sensor C 12 BCM control unit (left-hand drive) (right-hand drive) D

9 Overhead console Row C E 10 BCM control unit (left-hand drive) F No. Load G 11 Wireless data transfer control unit (left- 1 Wireless data transfer control unit (left- hand drive) H hand drive) I 12 Communication box 3 BCM control unit (left-hand drive) J

Row B 4 Diagnostic socket (left-hand drive) K L No. Load 6 Front left radar sensor control unit M 7 Fig. 86: Opening the fuse box in the left footwell 1 Driver assistance systems control unit Brake booster control unit (left-hand N drive) Row A 2 Rear left door control unit O 8 Interior mirror 3 Heating circuit control unit (left-hand P No. Load drive) charge ports (right-hand drive) 9 Communication box Q 1 Heating circuit coolant pump 4 Windscreen wiper (left-hand drive) 10 Right voltage supply terminal 15 (right- R hand drive) 2 Heating circuit coolant pump S 5 PSM control unit 11 Rear voltage supply terminal 15 (right- T 3 Cooling circuit relay 7 Seat belt, front left hand drive) U 5 BCM control unit (left-hand drive) 8 BCM control unit (left-hand drive) V 6 BCM control unit (left-hand drive) W 9 BCM control unit (left-hand drive) X 7 Light/rain sensor 10 Left headlight electronics Y Z

119 Fuses

A Opening the fuse box in the right No. Load No. Load B footwell 9 Airbag control unit 10 Wireless data transfer control unit (right- C hand drive) 10 Seat belt, front right D 11 Radar sensor control unit, front right E 11 Charge port sensor (left-hand drive), ra- dio-controlled parking control unit (right- F hand drive) Row C G 12 BCM control unit (right-hand drive) No. Load H 1 Diagnostic socket (right-hand drive) I Row B J 2 Gateway control unit K No. Load 3 Brake booster control unit (right-hand L 1 Gateway control unit drive) M 2 Wireless data transfer control unit (right- 4 BCM control unit (right-hand drive) N Fig. 87: Opening the fuse box in the right footwell hand drive) 5 Front pulse-controlled inverter O Row A 3 Heating circuit control unit (right-hand P drive), charge ports (left-hand drive) 6 Ioniser No. Load Q 4 Right headlight electronics 7 Power supply left, terminal 15 (left-hand R 1 BCM control unit (right-hand drive) drive) 5 BCM control unit (right-hand drive) S 3 BCM control unit (right-hand drive) 8 Power supply rear, terminal 15 (left-hand T 6 BCM control unit (right-hand drive) drive) 4 Windscreen wiper (right-hand drive) U 7 Night View Assist control unit 9 DC/DC converter 5 BCM control unit (right-hand drive) V 10 Electric power steering control unit 8 Driver assistance systems front camera W 6 Rear right door control unit 12 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) X 9 Front PDCC control unit 7 Assistance systems control unit Y Z 8 Front right door control unit

120 Garage door opener (HomeLink®)

Garage door opener Information Shortly before reaching a HomeLink® system with A ® assigned GPS coordinates, the relevant profile is (HomeLink ) For information on the compatibility of your vehicle’s displayed automatically and proposed for execution. B HomeLink® system with the original hand C General Safety Instructions transmitter: Programming garage door opener e Contact your Porsche partner. D Pinching, crushing or b Ready for operation. WARNING e Visit www.homelink.com or call the free knocking against the op- b Vehicle is aligned towards the receiver and E HomeLink® hotline (0)0800 046 635 465 or (0) erated equipment within range of the receiver (signal is transmit- 08000 HOMELINK. F ted in direction of travel). Risk of accidents when using or programming the G garage door opener if persons or animals are within Information Programming a new garage door opener the range of movement of the equipment that is H being operated. e Before selling your vehicle, remember to delete 1. e HomeLink® e Teach new profile I e When using or programming the HomeLink® the garage door opener signals. 2. Follow the instructions displayed. J system, ensure that no persons, animals or ob- jects are within the range of movement of the K Using the garage door opener Synchronising systems with changeable code equipment that is being operated. L e Observe the safety notes for the original remote Manually executing the taught HomeLink® For systems with a rolling code, synchronisation of the HomeLink® system is also required. This starts M control. profile automatically after teach-in. A second person makes b Ready for operation. programming easier. N Operating principle b Vehicle is aligned towards the receiver and O within range of the receiver (signal is transmit- With the HomeLink® system, up to eight remote- ted in direction of travel). Information P controlled items (e.g. for garage doors / entry gates If you have not been able to successfully assign sig- Q to your property, security systems, house lights) can 1. e HomeLink® be operated from the vehicle via profiles in the cen- nals to the buttons even though you have carefully R tral display. 2. Select the desired profile. followed the instructions in this section and the op- erating instructions for the original remote control: > Observe the instructions for the original remote If the existing HomeLink® profiles are assigned to S e Contact your Porsche partner. control. GPS coordinates, the profiles are filtered on the basis e T of the current vehicle position. Make sure that the battery in the remote control for the garage door opener is new. If the battery U HomeLink® Automatically executing profiles voltage is inadequate, faults may occur in signal transmission. The system in the vehicle then V b Ready for operation. learns an incorrect code, which cannot be reliably W b Vehicle is aligned towards the receiver and recognised. within range of the receiver (signal is transmit- e Check the compatibility of the vehicle's X ted in direction of travel). HomeLink® system with the original hand ® Y b GPS coordinates assigned to HomeLink profile. transmitter. Z

121 Garage door opener (HomeLink®)

A Managing learned profiles B Renaming learned profiles; adding or deleting C GPS coordinates D 1. e HomeLink® E 2. Select the button for the respective profile. F 3. Select the desired option. G Deleting a learned profile H I 1. e HomeLink® J 2. Swipe to drag the profile you wish to delete from the profile list. K L Deleting all learned profiles M e e HomeLink® e e Delete all Home- N Link® profiles O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

122 HOLD function

HOLD function Operating principle Information A The HOLD function assists the driver when stopping B General Safety Instructions and driving off on upward slopes. The vehicle is au- When the HOLD function is active, the driver may tomatically prevented from rolling back away from feel a difference in the brake pedal, and hydraulic C Loss of control over the WARNING the desired direction of travel. noises may be heard. vehicle D When the HOLD function is active, the indicator This behaviour is normal for the system. It is not a fault. Despite the HOLD function, responsibility for stop- light on the instrument cluster comes on. E ping and starting on gradients lies with the driver. When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is operating F When stopping and starting on slippery surfaces, e. normally, the HOLD function actively holds the ve- g. icy or loose substrate, the HOLD function cannot hicle at a standstill following automatic braking. G be guaranteed to provide assistance. The vehicle can If the driver seat belt is unfastened and the driver H roll away. door is opened while the HOLD function is active, the parking lock and parking brake are activated I e Always adjust your driving style to the road sur- automatically. face and the vehicle load; use the footbrake if J necessary. If the vehicle is held on an upward slope, you can drive off in the usual way. K If the HOLD function is not working, the driver can no longer be assisted when driving off on L Activating the HOLD function gradients. M e Hold the vehicle with the footbrake. b Drive position D or R selected. e Press the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to N Slight rolling back on a standstill. WARNING O uphill slopes The HOLD function is activated. The vehicle is held stationary even without pressing the brake pedal. P If the vehicle comes to a standstill on steep gra- Q dients without the driver applying the footbrake, the Information vehicle can roll back until the HOLD function stops it. R In this situation it is possible to reduce the roll-back The HOLD function can also be activated, irrespec- by applying the footbrake. tive of the gradient, by quickly flooring the pressed S e Increase the braking force with the footbrake to brake pedal while the vehicle is stationary. Changing T support stopping. the drive position will not deactivate the HOLD function in this case. U V Responding to warning messages Always heed any warning and information messages W displayed in the vehicle. X > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information messages" on page 271. Y Z

123 Home screen and MyScreen

A Home screen and MyScreen > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Communication Management (PCM)" on page 190. B Configuring Home screen C 1. e e Modify sorting D 2. Select, hold and move the desired tile to any E position via drag & drop. F 3. Touch Confirm. G The main applications Navigation, Media, Phone, H Setting and Apple CarPlay cannot be moved. I Configuring MyScreen J K L M N O Fig. 88: Areas of MyScreen P The different areas of the second page of the Home Q screen (MyScreen) can be personalised.

R 1. Swipe to the left in the Home screen . S MyScreen is displayed.

T 2. e Configure MyScreen U 3. Select, hold and move the desired category into V any area (see A, B, C) via drag & drop. W 4. A tile can be removed by replacing it with an- other tile. X For information on operating Porsche Y Communication Management (PCM): Z

124 instrument cluster instrument cluster A B Instrument cluster overview C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R Fig. 89: Instrument cluster S

The fully digital instrument cluster is divided into 3 Using the tube menu Tube 1 – Speed & Assist display T tubes (C) and has capacitive touch buttons (A) on You can toggle between tubes and select menu op- Information on assistance systems and vehicle-re- U the outer edges (light, vehicle settings and ◊-but- tions using the multi-function steering wheel. lated information is shown in the left tube 1. V ton). The temperature, time and date can be dis- > Please refer to chapter "Operating the instru- played between the outer tubes and the capacitive ment cluster" on page 129. Tube 2 – Power meter W touch buttons (B). There are various warning and List entries are displayed in different colours: Information on the drive power, speed, battery indicator lights (F) on the lower edge of the instru- X – White: List entry available charge level and navigation is shown in the middle ment cluster. Additional warning and indicator lights – Blue: List entry selected tube 2. The tube display can be changed and ex- Y can be found in areas D (Assistance & Systems) and panded to tubes 1 and 3 in some cases: E (Driving & Entertainment). – Grey: List entry not available. Z

125 instrument cluster

A – Power meter (can be personalised and – Delay When certain warning lights appear, an additional configured) – Date acoustic signal sounds. B – Night View Assist – Phone In response to certain events, additional messages C – Map – Station/track appear in the instrument cluster that have high pri- ority for the driver or serve information purposes. D – Extended map (Full HD map across all three – Arrival tubes) – Driving time and distance These messages must be acknowledged before the E – Reduced view tube menu can be opened. Identification for location of charge port door > Please refer to chapter "Operating the instru- F The current electric drive power (from "12 o'clock" ment cluster" on page 129. to "6 o'clock" position) and the current recuperation The vehicle has up to two charging G > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information capacity (from "12 o'clock" to "9 o'clock " position sockets (one on the driver's side and one messages" on page 271. H anti-clockwise) is shown in the Power meter. The on the passenger's side, depending on display can be activated and deactivated. country and vehicle equipment). The ar- The following warning and indicator lights are avail- able depending on the vehicle equipment: I > Please refer to chapter "Instrument cluster dis- row points towards the side of the ve- J play content" on page 131. hicle on which the direct current (DC) Warning light if there is no steering charge port door is located. activity K Tube 3 – Car & Info display Please refer to chapter "Charging high- ▶ Actively take over steering. L Information on navigation, driving programme and voltage battery" on page 79. ▷ Please refer to chapter "Active Lane media as well as messages are shown in the right Keeping" on page 30. M tube 3. Incoming calls can also be displayed in this Warning and indicator lights ▷ Please refer to chapter "Lane Keep As- sist" on page 144. N tube. Configuring the information area NOTICE Coolant temperature warning light O You can select four of the many items of vehicle in- The coolant temperature is too high. P formation for display in tube 3. Faults are indicated by the warning lights. The cor- ▶ Do not keep driving. Stop safely in a suitable place. responding warning light only goes out when the Q Central display ▶ Turn the vehicle off and allow it to cool cause of the fault has been rectified. down. R e Touch e Setting e Displays e Consult a qualified specialist workshop in the fol- ▶ Check the radiators and air guides in S Instrument cluster e Customised view. lowing cases: and around the vehicle for obstructions. – The warning light does not come on briefly when Check the coolant level. T – Current charge state High-voltage – Battery temperature High-voltage switched on. ▶ Have the fault remedied immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.1 U – Electrical system voltage 12-volt – The warning light comes on or flashes when the vehicle is switched on or is in motion. ▷ Please refer to chapter "Coolant" on – GPS altitude V page 97. – Compass e Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they W – Lateral acceleration have trained workshop personnel and the neces- sary parts and tools. X – Longitudinal acceleration Y Z 1. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. 126 instrument cluster

Porsche Active Suspension Manage- Critical charge level warning light Warning light indicating that a critical A ment (PASM) warning light The high-voltage battery charge level is drive or charging system is defective The Porsche Active Suspension Man- 7% or less. A critical defect has been detected in the B agement (PASM) function could be ▶ Charge the high-voltage battery vehicle’s drive or charge system. faulty. immediately. ▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in a suit- C Limited and adapted driving possible. ▷ Please refer to chapter "Charging high- able place. D ▶ Adapt your driving style to the voltage battery" on page 79. ▶ Do not keep driving. Stop safely in a E situation. Charge level warning light suitable place and shut off the vehicle. ▶ Have the fault rectified immediately at The high-voltage battery charge level is ▶ Call a roadside assistance service or F a qualified specialist workshop.1 20% or less. have your vehicle towed. ▷ Please refer to chapter "Porsche Active ▶ Charge the high-voltage battery as ▶ Have the fault remedied immediately G Suspension Management (PASM)" on soon as possible. at a qualified specialist workshop.1 H page 187. ▷ Please refer to chapter "Charging high- Warning light indicating that a drive or Airbag warning light voltage battery" on page 79. charging system is defective I Airbag system could be faulty. Warning light indicating a critical high- A defect has been detected in the ve- J ▶ Have the fault remedied immediately voltage battery defect hicle’s drive or charging system. at a qualified specialist workshop.1 A critical defect has been detected in the Limited and adapted driving possible. K ▷ Please refer to chapter "Airbag sys- high-voltage battery. ▶ Adapt your driving style to the L tems" on page 40. ▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in a suit- situation. Seatbelt warning light able place. ▶ Have the fault remedied promptly at a M 1 Seatbelt is not fastened or is fastened ▶ Do not keep driving. Stop safely in a qualified specialist workshop. N incorrectly. suitable place and shut off the vehicle. Central warning light ▶ Fasten seatbelt correctly. ▶ Call a roadside assistance service or At least one warning message is dis- O ▷ Please refer to chapter "Seat Belts" on have your vehicle towed. played or saved. P page 220. ▶ Have the fault remedied immediately ▷ Please refer to chapter "Warning and Brake system warning light at a qualified specialist workshop.1 information messages" on page 271. Q If the warning light is on constantly or is Warning light indicating a high-voltage Brake pad wear warning light R flashing: The brake system is faulty. The battery defect Brake pads are worn. brake fluid level may be too low. A defect has been detected in the high- Limited and adapted driving possible. S ▶ Have the fault remedied immediately voltage battery. ▶ Have the brake pads replaced by a T at a qualified specialist workshop.1 Limited and adapted driving possible. qualified specialist workshop as soon as ▷ Please refer to chapter "Brakes" on ▶ Adapt your driving style to the possible.1 U page 61. situation. ▷ Please refer to chapter "Brakes" on V ▷ Please refer to chapter "Brake Fluid" on ▶ Have the fault remedied promptly at a page 61. page 60. qualified specialist workshop.1 W X Y Z 1. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. 127 instrument cluster

A Electric parking brake warning light Porsche Stability Management (PSM) the event of pressure loss in one or more If the warning light is on constantly or is failure. tyres, a fault or a temporary malfunction B flashing: The electric parking brake is on. Limited and adapted driving possible. of the Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) If the warning light is flashing: The brake C ▶ Avoid hard acceleration, deceleration system. system is faulty. and curving speeds in extreme driving ▶ Adapt your speed and driving style and D ▶ If the fault occurs frequently or con- situations speed to the situation. Avoid any heavy tinuously, have it remedied at a qualified ▶ If the fault occurs frequently or con- braking or steering manoeuvres. E 1 specialist workshop. tinuously, have it remedied at a qualified ▶ Stop safely in a suitable place and shut F ▷ Please refer to chapter "Porsche specialist workshop.1 off the vehicle: Check the indicated tyre Stability Management (PSM)" on ▷ Please refer to chapter "Porsche for damage. Add sealant if necessary. G page 206. Stability Management (PSM)" on Set the correct tyre pressure at the next H ▷ Please refer to chapter "Brakes" on page 206. opportunity. page 61. ▶ If the fault occurs frequently or con- I Steering system warning light Anti-lock brake system warning light The steering system could be faulty. tinuously, have it remedied immediately J Anti-lock brake system (ABS) or Porsche Limited and adapted driving possible. at a qualified specialist workshop.1 Stability Management (PSM) failure. The ▶ Adapt your driving style to the E-Sound warning light K brake booster could be defective. situation. E-Sound deactivated. L Limited and adapted driving possible. ▶ Have the fault remedied promptly at a ▶ Drive extremely carefully, as other road ▶ Avoid any abrupt braking if at all pos- qualified specialist workshop.1 users may not be able to hear your ve- M sible. Allow for a longer braking distance. AWD system warning light hicle while driving under electric power. ▶ Have the fault remedied promptly at a ▶ Have the fault remedied promptly at a N 1 A defect has been detected in the ve- qualified specialist workshop. hicle’s AWD system. qualified specialist workshop.1 ▷ Please refer to chapter "Porsche O Limited and adapted driving possible. ▷ Please refer to chapter "Vehicle set- Stability Management (PSM)" on P ▶ Adapt your driving style to the tings" on page 257. page 206. situation. Distance warning light Q Porsche Stability Management warning ▶ Have the fault remedied promptly at a Safety hazard by driving too closely to light 1 R qualified specialist workshop. the car in front. Warning light is flashing: controlled Restricted drive power warning light ▷ Please refer to chapter "Warn and Porsche Stability Management (PSM) S Drive power is restricted. The high-volt- Brake Assist (WBA)" on page 267. braking process. Please refer to T age battery may not be sufficiently chapter "Porsche Stability Management charged or is at its operating tempera- U (PSM)" on page 206. ture limits, such as in very cold outdoor Warning light is flashing continuously: V temperatures. Tyre pressure warning light W During the learning process for newly X fitted wheels or tyre pressure sensors, the warning light may flash or light up in Y Z 1. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. 128 instrument cluster

Warn and Brake Assist warning light HOLD function indicator light Warning and information A Warn and Brake Assist operation is The HOLD function is activated. The ve- limited. hicle is automatically held stationary. messages B Limited and adapted driving possible. ▷ Please refer to chapter "HOLD func- In response to certain events, messages appear on ▶ Adapt your driving style to the tion" on page 123. the instrument cluster that have high priority for the C situation. Operational readiness indicator light driver or serve information purposes. These mes- D ▶ If the fault occurs frequently or con- sages must be acknowledged before the tube menu Vehicle is ready to drive. E tinuously, have it remedied at a qualified ▷ Please refer to chapter "Starting, driv- can be opened. specialist workshop.1 ing and stopping the vehicle" on > Please refer to chapter "Operating the instru- F ▷ Please refer to chapter "Warn and page 236. ment cluster" on page 129. G Brake Assist (WBA)" on page 267. Dynamic High Beam Assist indicator > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus light messages" on page 271. H (PDLS Plus) warning light Dynamic High Beam Assist is switched I Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus on. High beams are switched on and off Operating the instrument cluster (PDLS Plus) operation is faulty. automatically depending on the traffic J Setting and operating Limited and adapted driving possible. situation. WARNING ▶ Adapt your driving style to the ▷ Please refer to chapter "Lights" on while driving K situation. page 147. Setting and operating the multi-function steering L ▶ If the fault occurs frequently or con- High beam indicator light wheel, infotainment system, etc. while driving may M tinuously, have it remedied at a qualified The high beams are switched on. 1 distract you from the traffic situation. You may lose specialist workshop. ▷ Please refer to chapter "Lights" on control of the vehicle. N Lights warning light page 147. e Only operate these components while driving if O Vehicle lighting may be faulty. Rear fog light indicator light Limited and adapted driving possible. The rear flog lights are switched on. the traffic situation allows you to do so safely. P e ▶ Adapt your driving style to the ▷ Please refer to chapter "Lights" on In case of doubt, safely pull out of traffic and only situation. page 147. carry out extensive operations and settings while Q ▶ Have the fault remedied promptly at a the vehicle is stationary. Direction indicator, left qualified specialist workshop.1 R Lane Change Assist indicator light The instrument cluster is only active when the igni- S tion is switched on. For safety reasons, some func- Lane Change Assist is onPlease refer to T chapter "Lane Change Assist (LCA)" on Direction indicator, right tions are only available when the vehicle is page 139. stationary. U Night View Assist indicator light V Night View Assist is onPlease refer to chapter "Night View Assist" on W page 171. X Y Z 1. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. 129 instrument cluster

A > Please refer to chapter "voice control" on Selecting one of several options page 264. B Option is selected. C D – Recuperation button Option is not selected. e Press button D to gradually adjust the recupera- D tion mode. Activating and deactivating a function E – or – Function is activated. Press and hold button D to switch on automatic F recuperation. Function is deactivated. G > Please refer to chapter "Energy recovery (recu- peration)" on page 237. H Adjusting view on the instrument cluster The content that is displayed can be configured: I E – Go back one or more selection levels in the menu selection, acknowledge e e e e J Setting Display settings Instru- notifications ment cluster K e Press Back button E. > Please refer to chapter "Notifications" on L Fig. 90: Operating the instrument cluster with the multi- page 173. function steering wheel M F – Scroll and select menus and functions in N A – Adjusting the volume and muting the audio source the tubes O e To scroll: Turn the rotary knob F up or down to e Adjusting the volume: Turn rotary knob A up- scroll through the menu of the respective tube. P wards or downwards. e Select/Enter: Press rotary knob F. e Mute: Press rotary knob A. Q G – Accepting and ending a call R B – Calling up a stored function e Press button G. To exit, press and hold button G. S Assigning quick access buttons > Please refer to chapter "Phone" on page 182. T The button on the steering wheel and in the instru- ment cluster can be assigned individually. H – Switching between the tubes U e Press and hold button B (◊ button) to adjust the e Press button H. V settings in the central display. > W Please refer to chapter "Vehicle settings" on Selecting options and activating page 257. functions X C – Calling up voice control A preceding symbol indicates whether an option is Y selected or a function is activated. e Press button C. Z

130 instrument cluster

Instrument cluster display content A

Certain displays are only available when the vehicle B is stationary. C Not all functions are explained in detail in this Driv- D er's Manual. The examples clearly demonstrate the operating principle and clarify the menu structure. E On the first level, the menu is displayed by turning F the rotary knob up/down. On the second level, push the rotary knob and you will then be able to scroll G through the menu. Press the Back button to exit the H second level and view the display content. Fig. 91: Instrument cluster display content I Tube Display What can I do?/What is displayed? Where? J

1 e Assistance systems Activate and display Lane Keep Assist - > p. 144 K active lane guidance. > p. 30 L

Choose between Porsche InnoDrive, > p. 199 M Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) or > p. 34 N Speed Limiter (LIM) and display it. > p. 230 O 1 e Traffic signs Display up to 3 current traffic signs. > p. 247 P

1 e G-Force Display the current and maximum lon- – Q gitudinal and lateral acceleration forces R in the form of a circular diagram and reset them. S T 1 e All-wheel Display the current torque distribution – between the front and rear axle in the U form of bar diagrams. V 1 e Tyre info Display the current tyre pressure and > p. 249 W pressure difference. X 1 e PDCC Display roll stabilisation status. – Y Z 1 e Mileage Display odometer. – 131 instrument cluster

A Tube Display What can I do?/What is displayed? Where? B 2 e Range display Display remaining range. > p. 168 C The charge level of the high-voltage D battery is also indicated by a symbol. Meaning: E – White symbol: Charge level greater F than 20% – Yellow symbol: Charge level less G than 20% H – Red symbol: Charge level less than 7% I J 2 e Speedometer Display the speedometer. –

K 2 e Power meter / Map display / Night The instrument cluster display view > p. 125 L View Assist can be changed and expanded using the tubes: M – Display Power meter (standard N view) – Display Night View Assist with O thermal image detection P – Show and adapt the map display – Show and adapt the extended map Q (Full HD map) R – Display reduced view S 3 e Navigation Display and select navigation informa- > p. 165 T tion (turn-off instructions, etc.).

U 3 e Trip Display and reset driving data (average – V fuel consumption, range, driving time, etc.). W X 3 e Media Display current media (e.g. radio). > p. 157

Y 3 e Sport Chrono > p. 234 Z

132 instrument cluster

Tube Display What can I do?/What is displayed? Where? A B 3 e Sport Chrono Measure times with the stopwatch. > p. 234 C e > 3 Drive mode Display selected driving programme. p. 106 D 3 e Telephone If a phone is connected, incoming calls > p. 182 E are shown, for example. F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

133 Interior lighting

A Interior lighting – after readiness for operation is established – after locking the vehicle B Adjusting brightness The interior lighting is switched off again in the fol- C lowing situations depending on the fade-out dura- D Central display tion selected: – after all doors are closed E e e Settings e Vehicle settings e Light and – automatically approx. 10 minutes after the inte- visibility e Interior lighting e Brightness Ad- F rior lighting is switched on justing the brightness of the interior lighting. Fig. 93: Operating reading lights G Setting the fade-out duration for the interior lighting H Switching front and rear interior lighting on Switching interior lighting on and and off e e Settings e Vehicle settings e Light and I off e Press the C button. visibility e Interior lighting e Set the fade-out J duration. Switching reading lights on and off K Front reading lights L e Press the A or B button. Switching ambient lighting on and M Rear reading lights off N e Press the D button above the relevant door. Switching ambient lighting on and off

O Adjusting brightness 1. e Comfort e Ambient lighting. P e Press and hold the button for the relevant light for at least 1 second until the desired brightness 2. Activate switching lighting on. Q is achieved. R Setting colour of ambient lighting Switching interior lighting on and off S automatically 1. e Comfort e Ambient lighting. T 2. Select Colour. e e Settings e Vehicle settings e Light and visibility e Interior lighting e Activate interior U Fig. 92: Operating interior lighting 3. Set the desired light colour. lighting during locking or unlocking. V A Button for front left reading light B Button for front right reading light When it is dark, the interior lighting is switched on in W C Button for front and rear interior lights the following situations: X – When the vehicle is unlocked or a door is opened – After turning off the vehicle Y The interior lighting is dimmed and switched off Z again in the following situations: 134 Interior lighting

Adjusting brightness of ambient lighting A Setting the brightness throughout the passenger B compartment C 1. e Comfort e Ambient lighting. D 2. Touch Overall brightness. E 3. Set the desired brightness value. F Setting the brightness in individual passenger G compartment areas H 1. e Comfort e Ambient lighting. I 2. Touch Cupholder, Doors, Centre console or J Footwell. K 3. Set the desired brightness value. L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

135 Intersection Assist

A Intersection Assist include: In the event of a potential collision, the system warns the driver via the instrument cluster and the B – Pedestrians and animals are not detected. General Safety Instructions – Cyclists may not always be detected. central display by means of visual and acoustic sig- C nals as well as a brief warning jolt where necessary. Restricted detection – Vehicles approaching very fast or very slowly WARNING D around the vehicle may not always be detected in time. – Highly reflective surroundings (e.g. steel bridges, Display elements E Detection of the area around the vehicle by the sen- railings) can cause incorrect warnings or prevent F sors (e.g. camera, radar) may be restricted by differ- warnings from being issued. ent influencing factors (e.g. rain, snow, ice, heavy – Crossing objects that give rise to acceleration or G water spray, oncoming headlights, dirt or damage). changes in driving style (e.g. sudden turn-offs) H As a result, warnings might not be activated. can trigger incorrect warnings or prevent warn- e Drive with extreme care. ings from being issued. I e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and – If your vehicle is not facing in the direction of the J the area around the vehicle. driving lane when turning off (but is inclined di- e Clean the front camera lens and front radars agonally, at a right angle to it or sharply upwards K regularly and keep them free of snow and ice. or downwards), approaching vehicles may not be L e Do not cover the sensors. detected or may not be detected in time. e Check the windscreen for damage in the area of – When your vehicle pulls away from a stationary M the camera lens at regular intervals. position, a turn-off may under certain circum- N stances not be recognised or recognised late. No warning jolt The system's assumed move straight ahead can O WARNING result in the issue of a false collision warming. P e Drive with extreme care. When PSM is switched off, no warning jolt is trig- e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and Fig. 94: Intersection Assist display on the instrument cluster Q gered ahead of a possible collision. In this case, the the area around the vehicle. system only warns the driver by issuing a visual and R If the system detects a possible collision, it can warn acoustic warning. the driver by issuing a warning tone and displaying a S e Adapt your driving style and driving manoeuvres Responding to warning messages warning in the instrument cluster. T to the current situation. Always heed any warning and information messages In the event of a possible collision, red arrows indi- displayed in the vehicle. cate the direction from which the cross traffic is U > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information approaching. messages" on page 271. V System limitations – This is indicated in the central display only when ParkAssist is activated. System is subject to W WARNING limited availability Operating principle – The display in the instrument cluster only ap- X Intersection Assist monitors the areas to the front pears when the ACC main menu is activated. The assistance provided by the system cannot be and sides of the vehicle at intersections and exits. Y guaranteed in certain situations. Such situations This monitoring is performed by the camera and ra- Z dar sensors integrated into the vehicle.

136 Intersection Assist

Switching Intersection Assist on A and off B Intersection Assist can be switched on and off on the central display. C b Drive position D selected. D b Speed is not higher than approx. 30 km/h. E e e Assistance e Junction Assist F Intersection Assist is automatically active after op- G erational readiness has been established. H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

137 Jack and Lifting Platform

A Jack and Lifting Platform equipment, e.g. a jack or lifting platform. This can result in serious injury and damage. B raising the vehicle e Set the vehicle to the medium level and switch C off the levelling system before hoisting the D vehicle. E Lifting the vehicle WARNING F G If a PASM or hot vehicle warning message is dis- played, there is a risk of injuries and damage to the H vehicle if the vehicle is hoisted. I e The vehicle must only be hoisted when cool. e If a PASM warning message is displayed, you J should not perform any work on the chassis K yourself. Call in a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they L Fig. 96: Rear jacking point for jack and lifting platform have trained workshop personnel and the neces- Insufficiently secured sary parts and tools. M WARNING vehicle. N A vehicle that is not secured or that is incorrectly e e Setting e Vehicle e Additional chassis O Fig. 95: Front jacking point for jack and lifting platform secured may move unintentionally or tip or fall off settings e Deactivate chassis adjustment P lifting equipment, e.g. jack or lifting platform. This before using a jack Q can result in serious injury and damage. e The vehicle must be raised using the jack only R when on a solid and level surface. S e Raise the vehicle only at the prescribed jacking points on the vehicle underbody. T e Always place the vehicle on solid supports when U working under the vehicle. e Activate the electric parking brake when working V on the vehicle while it is switched on. W Control operation of the WARNING X levelling system Y A vehicle on which the levelling system is activated Z can move unexpectedly or tip or fall off lifting

138 Lane Change Assist (LCA)

Lane Change Assist (LCA) off. It is therefore possible that vehicles that are A already moving or are driving off are not detected B General safety instructions or are only detected late. Vehicles already lo- cated immediately next to your vehicle and C Lack of attention WARNING therefore outside of the detection range of the sensor may also not be detected. D – The rear collision warning does not respond to Even with Lane Change Assist and Rear Turn Assist, E cross traffic, small cross-section vehicles, nar- absolute care and attention on the part of the driver row vehicles, and objects that are not recognised F is still required while driving. Ultimately, the driver is as vehicles. still responsible for changing lanes. G e Keep the direction of travel and the relevant area e Keep the direction of travel and the relevant area H around the vehicle in view at all times. around the vehicle in view at all times. I Vehicles not detected WARNING J K Vehicles cannot or may not be detected by the sys- L tem in time in the following situations: – The view of the radar sensors may be reduced in M adverse weather conditions (rain, snow, ice, N heavy spray), in tight bends, and when ap- proaching crests. O – Lane Change Assist will only warn of approach- P ing vehicles or vehicles in the blind-spot area from a speed of approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). Q – Vehicles that approach at high speed from be- R hind or vehicles that are falling back. – If the vehicle is not facing in the direction of the S driving lane when turning, but is facing diago- T nally or at right angles to it, approaching vehicles can no longer be detected by the radar sensors. U – In the case of the Rear Turn Assist, it is possible V that, owing to the small differences in speed be- tween your vehicle and moving or stationary ob- W jects, fixed objects (e.g. a metal post) may also X trigger a warning, or that slow-moving vehicles are not detected. Y – The Rear Turn Assist is activated when driving Z

139 Lane Change Assist (LCA)

A System limitations Information Operating principle B – Only Rear Turn Assist is available at speeds be- Lane Change Assist (LCA) warns the driver about low 15 km/h (9 mph). When driving off, the To ensure that Lane Change Assist can work vehicles approaching from behind or those in the C driver is therefore only supported by monitoring properly: blind-spot area. This applies both when overtaking e Do not cover the radar sensors on the rear D of the area behind the vehicle on the side where other vehicles and when your vehicle is being the direction indicator was actuated. bumper (e.g. with stickers). Also remove any dirt, overtaken. E – Lane Change Assist and Rear Turn Assist are not snow and ice from this area. Lane Change Assist measures the distance and available if the system detects that the radar e Do not cover the warning indicator in the exterior speed difference of detected vehicles compared to F sensors are covered. mirror (e.g. with stickers). your vehicle using the radar sensors integrated in the G – The rear collision warning may be switched off if e Subsequent painting of the bumper may lead to a rear bumper. The radar sensors capture an area of up reduction in the sensor range owing to the to 70 m to the rear and in the blind-spot area. H there is a malfunction in the Lane Change Assist. – The radar sensors cover the adjacent lane to the thicker coating layer. The electrical properties As soon as the direction indicator is activated for a I left and right. Other lanes are not covered by the may also differ from those of the approved lane change regarded as critical, the warning indica- paints. tor in the respective exterior mirror lights up brightly J radar sensors. – The radar sensors can sometimes detect other and briefly several times. The system therefore pro- K objects (e.g. high or raised crash barriers), not vides assistance separately for both sides of the just vehicles. vehicle. L When slowly overtaking another vehicle (speed dif- M Information ference of less than approx. 15 km/h (9 mph)), the warning indicator lights up as soon as this vehicle is N If the position of the radar sensors was changed fol- in your blind-spot area and is detected by Lane O lowing an accident, for example, this can impair the Change Assist. If there is a greater speed difference, function of Lane Change Assist. this is not indicated in the exterior mirror. P e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche Rear Turn Assist is always automatically switched to Q recommends a Porsche partner as they have standby together with Lane Change Assist. The trained workshop personnel and the necessary driver is supported by Rear Turn Assist until the Lane R parts and tools. Change Assist speed range is reached after driving S off. When the direction indicator is on, Rear Turn Assist T detects objects located next to and behind your ve- U hicle, but only at the side on which the indicator has been activated. If a potential hazard is detected, the V Fig. 97: Radar sensors in the rear bumper respective warning indicator on the exterior mirror W lights up. If your own calculated driving path crosses Responding to warning messages that of a detected vehicle on the side of the vehicle X Always heed any warning and information messages on which the indicator has been activated, the cor- displayed in the vehicle. responding warning indicator on the exterior mirror Y > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information will flash brightly and briefly several times. Z messages" on page 271.

140 Lane Change Assist (LCA)

Rear collision warning Additional information A If the radar sensors in the rear of the vehicle detect B vehicles travelling behind, the system calculates the Driving situations probability of a rear-end collision. The following driving situations describe possible C scenarios and the associated Lane Change Assist If a collision risk is detected, the hazard warning D lights come on to alert the driver in the vehicle trav- and Rear Turn Assist warning indicators. elling behind to the imminent danger situation. E Vehicles approaching quickly In this case, the hazard warning lights could flash F faster than they normally would when switched on manually. G H Display elements I Lane Change Assist provides information by means of two indicator levels, an information level and a J warning level, which are activated accordingly de- pending on whether or not the direction indicator K has been set. Fig. 98: Warning indicator on the exterior mirror L M Information stage Switching Lane Change Assist on If the direction indicator is not set, Lane Change As- N sist informs you about detected vehicles that are and off considered critical for a possible lane change. The Lane Change Assist can be switched on and off in O warning indicator on the respective mirror lights up the central display. P dimly. e e Assistance e Lane Change Assist Q Warning stage When Lane Change Assist is active, the sym- Fig. 99: Vehicle approaching fast R If the direction indicator is on and Lane Change As- bol appears on the instrument cluster. sist has detected a vehicle on this side that it re- A – Warning indicator in exterior mirror does not S light up gards as critical, the warning indicator in the exterior T mirror on this side will briefly flash brightly multiple Setting display brightness of Lane The sensors do not detect a vehicle. Warning indi- times. You should check the driving situation again Change Assist cator in exterior mirror does not light up. U by looking in the exterior mirror and looking over The brightness of the display in the exterior mirror is B – Warning indicator lights up in the information V your shoulder. adjusted automatically to the ambient brightness. stage The basic brightness can also be adjusted. A fast approaching vehicle – in the left lane in the W example – is detected. This vehicle is already re- X e e Assistance e e Assistance system garded as critical for changing lanes due to the sig- settings e Lane Change Assist e LED nificant speed difference, even though it is still a Y brightness good distance away. Warning indicator in the exte- rior mirror lights up. Z 141 Lane Change Assist (LCA)

A C – Warning indicator flashes in the warning stage the warning indicator in the exterior mirror light up. 15 km/h (9 mph)) – in the right lane in the example If the direction indicator is switched on in driving You are alerted to all vehicles detected by Lane – is detected. Warning indicator in the exterior mir- B situation B, the warning indicator in the exterior Change Assist when they are in the blind-spot area ror lights up. C mirror flashes briefly several times. Lane Change at the latest. C – Warning indicator flashes in the warning stage Assist alerts you to the fact that you may have C – Warning indicator flashes in the warning stage D If the direction indicator is switched on in driving overlooked a vehicle. If the direction indicator is switched on in driving situation B, the warning indicator in the exterior E situation B, the warning indicator in the exterior mirror flashes briefly several times. Lane Change Vehicles approaching slowly mirror flashes briefly several times. Lane Change Assist alerts you to the fact that you may have F Assist alerts you to the fact that you may have overlooked a vehicle. G overlooked a vehicle. Vehicles falling back quickly H Vehicles falling back slowly I J K L M N O P Q R Fig. 100: Vehicle approaching slowly S A – Warning indicator in the exterior mirror does not light up T Fig. 102: Vehicle falling back quickly A slowly approaching vehicle – in the left lane in the Fig. 101: Vehicle falling back slowly U example – is detected. Due to the small speed dif- A – Warning indicator in the exterior mirror does ference and the large distance, the warning indicator A – Warning indicator in the exterior mirror does not light up V in the exterior mirror does not light up. not light up The overtaken vehicle is not yet detected. Warning W B – Warning indicator lights up in the information The overtaken vehicle is not yet detected. Warning indicator in the exterior mirror does not light up. stage indicator in the exterior mirror does not light up. B – Warning indicator in the exterior mirror does X The slowly approaching vehicle is now closer. Warn- B – Warning indicator lights up in the information not light up Y ing indicator in the exterior mirror lights up. Only stage The vehicle on the right that is falling back fast when Lane Change Assist regards the speed differ- The vehicle on the right that is falling back slowly (speed difference of more than approx. Z ence and distance as critical for changing lanes does (speed difference of less than approx. 15 km/h (9 mph)) – in the right lane in the example 142 Lane Change Assist (LCA)

– is detected, but is not regarded as critical for If the relevant direction indicator is switched on in A changing lanes because it is falling back fast. Warn- driving situation A, the warning indicator in the ex- ing indicator in the exterior mirror does not light up. terior mirror lights up. Turn Assist alerts you to the B C – Warning indicator in the exterior mirror does fact that you may have overlooked a vehicle. C not light up C – Warning indicator flashes in the warning stage D If the direction indicator is switched on in driving If, in driving situation B, the driver has initiated situation B, the warning indicator in the exterior turning off by steering to the corresponding side and E mirror is still not activated. this results in his own calculated driving path cross- ing that of a detected vehicle, the warning indicator F Pulling away to turn off in the exterior mirror flashes briefly several times G and then lights up. This warns you of a potential collision with a vehicle that may have been H overlooked. I Driving around bends J When driving around a bend, Lane Change Assist K may react to a vehicle driving in the next lane but one and the warning indicator in the exterior mirror Fig. 104: Lane width and detection area L may light up. M Lane Change Assist cannot detect vehicles in tight bends. N e Be particularly careful when driving around O bends. P Lane width Q When driving on narrow lanes, the detection area may cover even more lanes, particularly when driving R at the edge of a lane. In such situations, vehicles S Fig. 103: Pulling away to turn off driving two lanes away may be detected and Lane T A – Warning indicator in the exterior mirror does Change Assist may switch to the information or not light up warning stage. U The direction indicator has not been actuated. The Likewise, when driving on very wide lanes, vehicles V rear turn assist is therefore not active after driving in the adjacent lane may not be detected as they are off and the motorbike located in the blind spot is not outside the detection area. W detected. A fast approaching vehicle may not be detected as well. Warning indicator in the exterior X mirror does not light up. Y B – Warning indicator lights up in the information stage Z 143 Lane Keep Assist

A Lane Keep Assist place. or the functional status can suddenly change from active to passive. Risk of accident! Such situations B e Drive especially carefully and keep your hands on General safety instructions the steering wheel at all times in order to always include: C be ready to steer. – when increased attention is required on the part Lack of attention D WARNING e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and of the driver the area around the vehicle. – during sporty driving E The system can assist the driver within its limits to e If a warning message appears on the instrument – in adverse weather conditions (e.g. fog, snow or F keep the vehicle in its lane, but it does not drive it- cluster, take over control of the vehicle yourself heavy rain) self. The driver remains responsible at all times when immediately. – in unfavorable road conditions (including road G driving, e.g. for staying in the lane, despite Lane surface state, pot holes, dirty road surface) Insufficient corrective H Keep Assist being active. The system is no substi- WARNING – in areas with roadworks tute for attention on the part of the driver. steering intervention – when approaching humps and dips I e Drive especially carefully and keep your hands on – in urban traffic Corrective steering intervention alone may not be the steering wheel at all times in order to always J sufficient to keep the vehicle in the driving lane in – on winding and narrow country roads be ready to steer. K the case of track ruts, winding roads, inclined road e Do not use the system in these situations. e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and surfaces or crosswinds. L the area around the vehicle. Impaired camera view e e If a warning message appears on the instrument In such situations, assist by steering actively. WARNING M e cluster, take over control of the vehicle yourself Drive with extreme care. e N immediately. Always hold the steering wheel with both hands. Camera vision can be impaired by various factors (e. e g. rain, snow, ice, heavy spray, oncoming headlights O Adapt your driving speed to road and weather conditions. Information or damage). Under certain conditions, the camera P e Do not attach any objects to the steering wheel. cannot detect the lane markings, or cannot detect e If there is a fault in the system or if Lane Keep them correctly. In this case, no steering intervention Q No or very little steering Assist does not function as described in this or unexpected steering intervention can occur. WARNING section, do not use Lane Keep Assist. Visit a R intervention Steering intervention can only take place on the side qualified specialist workshop. where a lane marking has been detected. Other road S In the event of heavy braking, corrective steering in- Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they structures or objects may also be incorrectly identi- have trained workshop personnel and the neces- T tervention may fail to take place. Likewise, in the fied as lane markings. This can lead to unexpected or case of active steering by the driver, corrective sary parts and tools. U steering intervention can be reduced or may not take V System limitations W Physical limits and sys- WARNING X tem limits Y In some situations, the system may not detect the lane properly, the corrective steering intervention Z may not be sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane,

144 Lane Keep Assist missing steering interventions/acoustic warnings. Operating principle the relevant direction. If the steering intervention is A overridden by the driver, an additional warning is e Drive with extreme care. B e Keep the direction of travel and the lane lines in provided via a warning signal (if enabled). view at all times. C Behaviour if there is no steering activity e Clean the camera lens regularly and keep it free D from snow and ice. The driver's steering behaviour is monitored when e Do not cover the camera lens. Lane Keep Assist is switched on and active. If there E is no steering activity (e.g. hands not on the steering e Check the windscreen for damage in the area of F the camera lens at regular intervals. wheel or only resting lightly), a warning appears on the instrument cluster. The system prompts the G driver to actively take over steering. If the driver Fig. 105: Windscreen camera System is subject to limited availability does not react to the takeover prompt, the system H The system may enter into a passive status in the The Lane Keep Assist helps the driver to keep the switches to a passive state. I following situations: vehicle in the lane. To do this, the system uses front J – The vehicle speed is below the activation speed camera A to detect the course of the road ahead Controls of approx. 65 km/h (40 mph). based on the lane markings and initiates corrective K steering intervention to keep the vehicle in the lane – The markings of the current lane are not de- whenever it nears a detected lane marking and is in L tected. (e.g. in the case of snow, dirt, wet, on- danger of leaving the lane. The driver can override coming headlights or a vehicle close ahead). M the steering intervention at any time, however. – The quality of the lane markings is not suffi- If the vehicle crosses a lane marking without using N ciently good for activation of Lane Keep Assist. the direction indicator, the system can provide the O – The radius of a bend is too small. driver with an acoustic warning. To do this, the – The distance to the nearest lane marking is too acoustic warning must be enabled in the central P great. display. The system will not issue a warning or steer – The lane markings are too close to the vehicle. if the driver uses the direction indicator before Q – Temporarily in conjunction with an extremely crossing a lane marking. In such situations, it inter- R dynamic driving style. prets the lane change as intentional. – The direction indicator is actuated. The system is designed for driving on motorways S – The system has detected that your hands are not and well-surfaced country roads and works in a T on the steering wheel. speed range of approx. 40 mph (65 km/h) - 156 mph (250 km/h). U Responding to warning messages V Always heed any warning and information messages Vehicles with Lane Change Assist Fig. 106: Control stalk for driver assistance systems If the vehicle is equipped with Lane Change Assist, W displayed in the vehicle. R Switch driver assistance system on/off > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information the active system warns the driver through correc- S Select driver assistance systems X messages" on page 271. tive steering intervention when changing lanes in a potentially critical situation. Steering intervention Y also occurs if the direction indicator is actuated for Z

145 Lane Keep Assist

A Display elements Lane Status Meaning B Keep display Assist C display D The lane markings can E also be detected on one F side.

G Lane Keep Assist per- H forms a corrective steer- ing intervention (example I on the right). J If Active Lane Guidance is also activated, a combined K indicator may be displayed for both functions in- L stead of the Lane Keep Assist icon. M Fig. 107: Lane Keep Assist display Switching Lane Keep Assist on N A Display lane markings (only in vehicles with Adaptive and off O Cruise Control (ACC)) 1. Press button R on the control stalk. B Status display P Driver assistance systems are on 2. Press button S on the control stalk. Q System status icons The selection of driver assistance systems ap- R pears on the instrument cluster. Lane Status Meaning 3. Select Lane Keep Assist using the rotary push S Keep display button on the steering wheel and press to T Assist confirm. display U Setting acoustic warning Lane Keep Assist is V The acoustic warning can be switched on and off. switched on and passive. W The warning tone volume can also be selected. X e e Assistance e e Assistance system Lane Keep Assist is settings e Lane departure warning Y switched on and active Z on both sides.

146 Lights

Lights A B Brief overview Lights C This brief overview does not replace the compre- D hensive descriptions. Safety messages and warn- ings, in particular, are not replaced by this brief E overview. F G H I J K L M N O Fig. 108: Light control panel P What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? Q Switch on automatic headlights > p. 148 e Press the button. R The button lights up green. The pilot light lights up white. Automatic headlights and the Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus, depending on S equipment) are switched on. T

Switch on parking light e Press the button. – U Number plate light, instrument lighting and side lights are switched on. V

Switching on dipped beams manually b Operational readiness established. – W e Press the button. X The button lights up green. The indicator light goes out. Dipped beams are switched on. Automatic headlights, daytime driving lights and the Porsche Y Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus, depending on the equipment) are switched off. Z

147 Lights

A What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? B Switch on rear flog light e Press the button. – C Switch exterior lights off completely e Press the button for approx. 2 seconds. > p. 148 D The green lighting of the button goes out. All exterior lights remain switched off completely E until a speed of 10 km/h or a driven distance of 100 m has been exceeded. F G General safety instructions obscured, e.g. motorways The button lights up green. The pilot light lights up white. Driving without lights – where there are road users with poor lighting, e.g. H WARNING cyclists The dipped beams are switched on automatically in I – on narrow bends, steep crests or hollows the following situations: If you drive without lights, this may significantly re- – in poorly lit villages and towns – Dusk J strict your visibility and also the ability of other road – where there are strong reflectors, e.g. signs. – Darkness K users to see your vehicle. – where the windscreen in the camera area is – Driving through tunnels e L Carefully monitor the automatic headlights and misted, dirty, icy or covered with stickers. – Rain switch the dipped beam headlights on manually e Drive with extreme care. When low beams are switched on automatically, the M if necessary. e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and button lights up green. The pilot light lights e Observe the laws on driving with dipped beam N the area around the vehicle. up. headlights in the specific country. e If necessary, manually adjust the high beam to O the light, visibility and traffic conditions. Lack of attention when Information P WARNING driving with dynamic Fog is not recognised. Q high beam Responding to warning messages e In the event of fog, switch on the dipped beams Always heed any warning and information messages R and rear fog light manually. In spite of dynamic high beam, it is always the driv- displayed in the vehicle. S er’s responsibility to manually adapt high beam ac- > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information cording to light conditions, visibility and traffic messages" on page 271. Switch exterior lights off completely T conditions during driving, for example. The system is e Press the button for approx. 2 seconds. U not a substitute for careful attention on the part of Switching automatic headlights/ The green light in the button goes out. the driver. Manual intervention may be required in V exterior lights on and off The automatic lights are switched on again in the the following situations: following situations1: W – in unfavourable weather conditions, such as rain, Switching on automatic headlights – from a speed of 10 km/h (6 mph) fog, snow, ice, heavy spray X e Press the button. – when a distance of more than 100 m has been – on roads where oncoming traffic is partly driven after switching off the exterior lights Y Z 1. Country-dependent 148 Lights

Information clearly, depending on the speed of the vehicle and Dynamic high beam can be activated or deactivated A the extent to which the steering wheel is turned. on the central display: The vehicle’s exterior lights can mist up depending B on temperature and humidity. This misting will Situational lighting distribution e e Setting e Vehicle e Light and visibility C evaporate after a sufficient distance has been driven. Depending on the country, situational lighting con- e Exterior lights e Dynamic high beam D trol adapts the light distribution of the dipped and high-beam headlights to urban, country-road or Information E Adjusting Automatic Coming motorway driving. F Home lights To avoid impairing the detection performance: Adverse weather lights e Do not cover the camera area on the interior b Automatic headlights switched on. G When the fog lights are switched on, the dipped mirror with objects (e.g. stickers). The following lights may be switched on for a certain H e The camera must always be kept free of dirt, ice period to allow you to get in and out of your vehicle beam distribution changes at a speed of less than approx. 60 km/h (38 mph). The light beam becomes and snow. with improved visibility in darkness: I wider and reduces glare. When the last vehicle door is closed or after unlock- J ing the vehicle, the following lights are switched on: Dynamic high beam Porsche Dynamic Light System K – Daytime running lights Plus (PDLS Plus) with LED-Matrix – Dipped beams when approaching L headlights – Front and rear side marker lights M – Number plate light b Automatic headlights switched on. PDLS Plus LED-Matrix headlights also include the N These are switched off again when operational PDLS Plus functions. readiness is switched on or the automatic headlights O are switched off. Dynamic high beam P The duration of the off delay can be set on the cen- tral display. Q Fig. 109: Windscreen camera e e Setting e Vehicle e Light and visibility R Light sources of other road users can be detected by e Exterior lights e Fade-out duration S camera A in the vicinity of the interior mirror. Their detection continuously adjusts the light/dark limit of T the driving light in several phases between dipped- Porsche Dynamic Light System U Plus (PDLS Plus) with LED beam and full-high beam illumination. The stage is selected in such a way that the light/dark limit of the headlights V driving light reaches the next recognised vehicle. Fig. 110: Windscreen camera b Automatic headlights switched on. Dynamic high beam is switched on or off at speeds W between 30 km/h (20 mph) and Light sources and other road users can be detected X Dynamic cornering lights 60 km/h (37 mph)), depending on the navigation by means of the camera (A). Depending on the po- Above a speed of around 5 km/h (3 mph), the dip- data. Full high-beam illumination is switched to dip- sition of other vehicles, the speed and other envi- Y ronmental and traffic conditions, the individual LED ped beam or high-beam headlights are swivelled in ped beam when the camera detects street lights. Z the direction of the curve to illuminate the road more segments of the high beam headlights are activated 149 Lights

A or deactivated. The beam in the relevant area in front b Oncoming traffic with detected headlights. Operating direction indicators and of the vehicle is low, the rest remains high. This en- The light distribution is briefly changed so that the B the high-beam stalk sures that the environment is lit without dazzling lane being driven on is illuminated brightly. This C other road users. draws the direction of vision onto the lane being Dynamic high beam is switched on or off at speeds driven on. The driver is less dazzled by the oncoming D between 30 km/h (20 mph) and traffic. E 60 km/h (37 mph)), depending on the navigation data. Full high beam illumination is switched to dip- Signage glare reduction F ped beam when the camera detects street lights. b Dynamic high beam is switched on. G The dynamic high beams can be activated or deac- The glare of reflective traffic signs and other signage tivated in the central display: can – particularly when driving with high beams – H cause the driver to be dazzled. e e e e I Setting Vehicle Light and visibility The signage glare reduction briefly dims individual Fig. 111: Operating direction indicators, high beam and e e headlight flasher Exterior lights Full beam adaptation on LED segments of the vehicle's low or high beam J vehicle recognition headlights in a targeted manner. The driver is 1 Direction indicator / left parking light K dazzled less due to reflecting traffic signs and other 2 Direction indicator / right parking light signage. 3 High beams L Information 4 Headlight flasher M To avoid impairing the detection performance: Automatic headlight calibration Operating direction indicators e Do not cover the camera area on the interior b No object in the field of vision that could be af- N mirror with objects (e.g. stickers). fected by the headlights during calibration. e Push the stalk past pressure point 1 or 2. The O e The camera must always be kept free of dirt, ice b Vehicle positioned as straight as possible in front direction indicator remains active until the stalk and snow. of a projection surface, such as a wall (distance is returned to the initial position manually or au- P > 5 m). tomatically due to steering wheel movement. Q b Engaging comfort direction indication Passing lights Dipped beam on when vehicle stationary. b Test run performed automatically when low e Push the stalk once to pressure point 1 or 2. R b No oncoming traffic. beams are activated. The direction indicators flash three times. b Vehicle ahead. S Automatic headlight calibration starts on its own if e In order to interrupt comfort direction indication, e Operate the direction indicator for overtaking T the conditions are right (depending on ambient press the stalk in the opposite direction. while driving. lighting, a good projection surface). The LED seg- U The area next to the vehicle ahead is illuminated ments of the headlight are automatically activated Switching high beam on and off brightly. This makes it easier to see the road and deactivated repeatedly from right to left during b Vehicles without Porsche Dynamic Light System V ahead. calibration and detected by the camera (A). Plus (PDLS Plus). Passing lights are automatically deactivated W Calibration is used to check headlight alignment and – or – again when the turn signal is deactivated or if does not replace manual headlight adjustment. Dynamic high beam deactivated. X oncoming traffic is detected. Y Switching on Encounter lights e Push the stalk once to pressure point 3. Z b No vehicle ahead. 150 Lights

The indicator light lights up. Switching off manually Deactivating hazard warning lights after A e Push the stalk once to pressure point 4. emergency braking Switching off B e Push the stalk once to pressure point 4. The indicator light goes out. If the vehicle is travelling at a speed of more than approx. 70 km/h (43 mph) and is braked fully to a C The indicator light goes out. Operating the headlight flasher standstill, the hazard warning lights are activated D automatically. The brake lights flash during braking. e Briefly push the stalk once to pressure point 4. Switching dynamic high beam on and off e Press the hazard warning light button on the E b Vehicles with Porsche Dynamic Light System The indicator light comes on briefly. centre console to deactivate the hazard warning F Plus (PDLS Plus). lights. The hazard warning lights are deactivated b Automatic headlights switched on. Switching parking lights on and off automatically when the vehicle begins to move G b Dynamic high beam activated. b Operational readiness switched off. again. H e Press the stalk past pressure point 2 or 1 to Switching on switch on the right or left parking light. Hazard warning lights following an accident I e Push the stalk once to pressure point 3. When the parking light is switched on, a mes- The hazard warning lights are activated automati- J The indicator light lights up. sage appears on the instrument cluster after the cally in the event of an accident in which the airbag Vehicles with LED headlights: Changes are made door is opened. is triggered. K automatically in several stages between dipped- L beam and full high-beam illumination. Switching hazard warning lights Activating overseas mode Vehicles with LED Matrix headlights: Depending When you cross the border into a country where M on various factors, such as the position of other on/off traffic drives on the other side of the road, the light vehicles and speed, the individual LED segments N distribution of the headlights must be adapted. of the high beam headlights are activated or O deactivated. Adaptation of the light distribution normally occurs automatically based on the navigation data. If high beam are partly or fully activated, the in- P After conversion, a message appears in the instru- dicator light comes on. ment cluster every time the ignition is turned on and Q Switching off the vehicle is ready for operation. R e Push the stalk once to pressure point 4. If conversion does not occur automatically, this can S The dynamic high beam can only be deactivated also be performed manually on the central display: Fig. 112: Switching hazard warning lights on and off T when the indicator light is on. e e Setting e Vehicle settings e Light and If the dynamic high beam was deactivated or if the U Switching hazard warning lights on and off visibility e Exterior lights e Inverted setting of requirements for the dynamic high beam are not dipped beam met, high beam can be switched on and off e Press the hazard warning light button on the V manually. centre console. e Readjust headlights on the return journey. W All direction indicators and the button flash. Switching on manually X e Push the stalk twice to pressure point 3. Changing bulbs The vehicle's exterior and interior lights are fitted Y The indicator light lights up. with LEDs. The LEDs cannot be replaced individually. Z

151 Lights

A Removing and installing lamps involves a great deal of effort. B e Always have faulty bulbs and lamps replaced or C repaired by a qualified specialist workshop. Por- sche recommends a Porsche partner as they D have trained workshop personnel and the neces- E sary parts and tools.

F NOTICE G Abrasion and excessive temperatures can cause H damage to the headlights. I e Do not install any coverings (e. g. stone guards or J films) in the headlight area. K Information L On vehicles featuring LED Matrix headlights, the M bonnet has to be open in order to check the dipped N beam setting. e Adjustment of the headlights should only be O performed at a qualified specialist workshop us- P ing suitable adjustment equipment. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have Q trained workshop personnel and the necessary R parts and tools. S T U V W X Y Z

152 Luggage compartment

Luggage compartment occupants. Securing loads with tie-down belts A e Never transport unsecured objects (accident, e Do not use elastic belts or straps to tie down a B Stowing loads braking, cornering). load. e Always carry loads in the luggage compartment, e Do not route belts and straps over sharp edges. C Changed vehicle han- WARNING never in the passenger compartment (e.g. on or e dling when vehicle is Cross the belts over the load. D in front of the seats). e loaded Only tighten the belts manually. Do not use ad- e Support the load at the seat backrests wherever ditional tensioning aids (ratchet). E Vehicle handling changes depending on the vehicle possible. Always engage the backrests. e Observe the instructions and information for the F load. e Only transport heavy objects when the backrests tie-down belts. G e Adapt your driving style to the changed vehicle are upright and engaged. handling. e Place the load behind unoccupied seats when- Opening and closing the bonnet H e Do not exceed the maximum gross weight and ever possible. and tailgate I axle load. e Store heavy objects as far as possible from the > Please refer to chapter "Bonnet" on page 57. floor with light objects behind them. J Unsecured, incorrectly e Do not transport any objects on the rear shelf. > Please refer to chapter "Rear lid" on page 211. WARNING secured or incorrectly e On unoccupied rear seats, the backrests can be K positioned load additionally secured using the seat belts. To do L this, cross the outer seat belts and fasten them As a result of braking, changes of direction or in an to the respective opposite belt buckles. M accident, unsecured or incorrectly positioned loads e Do not transport any heavy objects in open stor- N can slide out of place and endanger vehicle age compartments. e Always keep lockable storage compartment O covers closed when driving. P

Incorrect tyre pressure Q WARNING R An incorrect tyre pressure can impair driving safety. S e Adapt the tyre pressure to the load. T e After you change the tyre pressure, you must al- so update the setting for Tyre Pressure U Monitoring. V The maximum permissible load on the luggage W compartment floor is 200 kg. The weight must be evenly distributed over the entire luggage X compartment. Y Z

153 Luggage compartment

A Removing and stowing the tyre Removing the tool kit and tyre filling compressor B sealing compound, tool kit and e Remove the cover from plastic box C and take C equipment for minor repairs out the desired equipment. D E F G H I J K

L Fig. 115: Plastic box for tool kit and tyre filling compressor M A Tool box B Emergency release tool for the charge port door N C Open-ended spanner D Tyre filling compressor O Fig. 113: Plastic boxes in the front luggage compartment Fig. 114: Plastic box for tyre sealant, towing lug and first-aid E Screwdriver kit (country-dependent) F Wrench socket for security wheel bolts P A Warning triangle (country-dependent) B Plastic box for tyre sealant, towing lug and first-aid kit A Tyre sealant Q (country-dependent) B Towing lug R C Plastic box for tool kit and tyre filling compressor C First-aid kit (country-dependent) S Removing the warning triangle (country- T dependent) U The warning triangle A is located on the back of the luggage compartment. V Removing the tyre sealant, towing lug and W first-aid kit (country-dependent) X e Remove the cover from the plastic box B and Y take out the desired equipment. Z

154 Luggage compartment

Installing and removing the plastic Installing the plastic cover in the front lug- Opening and closing the boot floor A cover in the front luggage gage compartment Opening the luggage compartment floor B compartment C Removing the plastic cover in the front lug- D gage compartment E F G H I J K L M

Fig. 117: Closing the plastic cover N Fig. 118: Opening the boot floor 1. Insert the plastic cover with the guides at the O rear edge and lay it on the holders. Lower the e Lift the boot floor by the tab. P plastic cover in the front. Fig. 116: Detaching and lifting the plastic cover 2. Ensure that the centring pins on the underside of Closing the luggage compartment floor Q the cover engage in the respective guides. e Lower the boot floor using the tabs. 1. Lift the plastic cover until the latch audibly Press the cover downwards at the handle re- R disengages. cesses until the latch audibly engages. S 2. Pull the plastic cover forwards slightly and lift at Using the ski bag the front. Skis or snowboards can be transported safely with- T out damaging the passenger compartment. 3. Remove the plastic cover. U NOTICE V

Risk of damage to the ski bag from sharp edges on W the load (e.g. snowboard). X e Protect sharp edges on the load. Y Z

155 Luggage compartment

A Storing a snowboard or skis in the ski bag Using tie-down rings B C D E F G H I J K L M Fig. 119: Using the ski bag Fig. 120: Using tie-down rings N The ski bag is stored in the gear bag for it in the Tie-down straps can be fastened to the tie-down O luggage compartment. rings to secure the load in the boot to prevent it from P 1. Fit edge protectors to the snowboard or skis. slipping. 2. Place the snowboard or skis into the ski bag and e Make sure that all rings are equally loaded when Q close the ski bag. The skis must be positioned securing a load. with the tips at the front in the ski bag. The ski R bag zip must be pointing towards the rear of the Information S vehicle. The tie-down rings are not designed to restrain a T 3. Fasten the skis using the tightening strap. The ski bindings must be behind this band. heavy load in an accident. U 4. Fold down the pass-through cover between the V rear seats. 5. Hook the spring hooks of the tension straps into W the tie-down rings. X 6. Tighten the tension straps. Y Z

156 Media

Media A B Brief Overview – Media C This brief overview does not replace the compre- D hensive descriptions. Safety messages and warn- ings, in particular, are not replaced by this brief E overview. F For information on operating Porsche Communication Management (PCM): G > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Communication H Management (PCM)" on page 190. I J K Fig. 121: Playing media L What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? M Connecting a media source – Connect an external device via Bluetooth®. > p. 102 N – Connect an external device via USB. O Playing media e Open the desired menu option in the quick filter – P bar (see A) e Select the desired station/track. Q Selecting a media source e On the filter bar (see B), e Select the desired – media source. R S Find a station/track/album (the search includes all e e e e – Media on the filter bar (see B) T available media sources) Enter the desired station/track. U Select media source/reception range – e e Media e Play (see A) e on the filter bar V (see B), select a media source (e.g. Radio). W Displaying media source content / reception range e e Media e List (see A) e on the filter bar – X (see B), select a media source (e.g. Radio). Y Z

157 Media

A What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? B Play/pause music e Touch e Media e Play (see A) e or – C (see E). D Play next/previous station/track – E e Touch e Media e Play (see A) e or (see E). F > G Storing a station as a favourite e Long-press and hold a station e Touch . p. 158 H – or – Touch e Media e Play (see A) e . I

J Display station/track list e e Media e List (see A) – K Depending on the selected media source, further subfolders such as Playlists, Artists are available. L

M Activate online station tracking e e Media e (see F) e Online station – 1 N tracking . If the reception is poor, stations are automati- O cally received online, and Online appears beside P the station name. Q Playing media Other functions during media playback Storing and editing a favourite R b e e Available radio and media sources Media Play selected. Storing a favourite S In addition to the functions from the brief overview, The radio supports the FM and DAB (digital radio) the following functions are available: T frequency ranges. e e Media e List e Press the desired sta- – Display current playlist: tion for a longer time e Touch . U Depending on equipment, the following media sour- ces are available: external devices via USB or Blue- – Activate random playback: – or – V tooth®, online media services, online radio. Touch e Media e Play e , – Repeat track: W Technical data on supported media and file formats: > Please refer to chapter "Technical Data" on X page 308. Y Z 1. Prerequisite: A data connection is established. Porsche Connect Services activated. 158 Media

Organising favourites A

1. e Media e Favourites e e Adapt B sorting of favourites C 2. Press the desired station for a longer time and D move to the desired position (drag & drop). E Deleting a favourite F

1. e Media e Favourites G 2. Press the desired station for a longer time. H The delete symbol will appear. I 3. Touch the delete symbol. J K Changing media settings L e e Media e e Selected the desired M setting. N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

159 Messages

A Messages Replying to or forwarding text message/e- mail B Displaying and editing messages 1. e Message e Text messages/E-mail C You can read text messages and e-mails, have the D messages read out to you or use the numbers con- 2. Select the text message/e-mail that you want tained in the messages for making phone calls. The to reply to/forward. E mobile phone may not support all functions. You will 3. Touch e Reply/Forward. F find further information on these settings in the op- erating instructions for the mobile phone. G The Message function is displayed in the Home Editing messages H screen when a mobile phone is connected. e e Message e Text message/e-mail folder e I Information e Select the desired setting. J – If the mobile phone is only able to display the K text message stored in the device memory, the text message received in the vehicle may not L appear in the mobile phone message list. Other- M wise, received text messages are stored on the SIM card. N – Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) is not O supported by the PCM. P Q Writing text messages/e-mails

R 1. e Message e Text messages/E-mail

S 2. Touch . T 3. Add the recipient (by entering the number or U selecting a contact). V 4. Enter text using the input field and confirm with OK. W 5. Touch Send. X Y Z

160 Mirror

Mirror NOTICE Adjusting exterior mirrors A B Using the exterior mirrors Risk of damage to the exterior mirrors when washing C Incorrect assessment of the vehicle in car washes. WARNING traffic situation due to e Fold in exterior mirrors before using the car D distorted representation wash. E of surroundings in exte- rior mirrors F

Vehicles or objects appear smaller in convex mirrors G and further away than they are in reality. This may H lead to incorrect assessment of the driving situation and an accident. I e Take account of distortion when estimating the J distance of vehicles behind you and when K parking. e Use the interior mirror for judging distance as L well. M Fig. 123: Adjusting exterior mirrors Escaping electrolyte fluid N CAUTION b Ready for operation. – or – O Electrolyte fluid may escape from a broken mirror. Vehicle switched off, driver’s or passenger's door P This fluid causes irritation to the skin and eyes. not yet opened (for a maximum of 10 minutes). e In the event of contact with the skin or eyes, Fig. 122: Exterior mirror operation 1. Press button A for the left exterior mirror and Q immediately rinse off the electrolyte fluid using A Exterior mirror selection on the left side button B for the right exterior mirror. R clean water. B Exterior mirror selection on the right side When the symbol on the selected button is e Seek medical attention from a doctor if C Adjusting exterior mirrors illuminated red, the corresponding exterior mirror S D Folding exterior mirrors in and out (depending on necessary. glass can be adjusted. equipment) T 2. Move the exterior mirrors to the correct position by pressing the adjustment button C. U NOTICE If the electric function fails V Risk of damage to paintwork, leather, plastic com- e Adjust the mirrors by pressing on the mirror W ponents and clothing. surface. X Electrolyte fluid can only be removed while it is still wet. Y e Clean affected parts with water. Z

161 Mirror

A Folding exterior mirrors in and out Folding exterior mirrors in and out from the Information outside B The exterior mirrors can be folded in when the ve- The exterior mirrors will not fold out automatically C hicle is locked. after the ignition is switched on if they were folded in manually beforehand using button D. D e Press and hold the button on the driver's key for at least 1 second. E In vehicles with Komfortzugang: Touch the prox- Storing exterior mirror settings F imity sensor on the door handle of the driver's side for at least 1 second. In vehicles with memory package, individual exterior G The exterior mirrors fold in. mirror settings can be stored on the memory but- tons on the driver’s door and on the driver's key. H Folding exterior mirrors out automatically > Please refer to chapter "Personal settings" on I e Press the power button and turn on the vehicle. page 180. The exterior mirrors fold out automatically. J Switching automatic anti-dazzle K Folding exterior mirrors in and out automati- cally (depending on equipment) function of exterior mirrors on and L The automatic folding in and out function of the ex- off M terior mirrors can be activated in the central display. The exterior mirrors change to anti-dazzle position Fig. 124: Folding exterior mirrors in and out automatically in synchronisation with the interior N Activating function mirror. Folding in exterior mirrors manually O e e e Vehicle settings e Vehicle locking > Please refer to chapter "Switching automatic e Swivel the mirror housing diagonally upwards by e anti-dazzle function of exterior mirrors on and P system Fold in exterior mirrors when locking hand as far as it will go. off" on page 162. Q Folding out exterior mirrors manually Folding exterior mirrors in automatically Swivelling down mirror glass as a R e Swivel the mirror housing diagonally downwards b Function activated. parking aid S by hand as far as it will go. > Please refer to chapter "Vehicle settings" on In vehicles with a memory package, the mirror on the page 257. T Folding exterior mirrors in and out electrically passenger's side swivels down slightly to show the e (depending on equipment) Lock the vehicle. kerb area when reverse gear is engaged. U The exterior mirrors fold in. b Maximum speed of approx. 50 km/h (30 mph). V e Press button D. Folding exterior mirrors out automatically W Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. b Function activated. e Unlock the vehicle. X If the electrical folding function fails The exterior mirrors fold out. e Y Fold mirror in or out manually. Z

162 Mirror

The symbol for adjusting the exterior mirror Dimming interior mirror manually A on the passenger's side lights up. B 2. Press button B for adjusting the exterior mirror on the right-hand side (on a right-hand drive ve- C hicle press button A ). D The mirror glass on the passenger's side swivels downwards. E Individually adjusting the position of the lowered F mirror glass: G e Move the exterior mirror glass to the required position by pressing adjustment button C. H In vehicles with a memory package, this setting is I stored on the memory buttons in the driver door or on the driver's key. J For information on retrieving and storing vehicle K settings: Fig. 125: Swivelling down mirror glass as a parking aid > Please refer to chapter "Personal settings" on L page 180. M Swivelling mirror glass downwards Fig. 126: Dimming interior mirror manually automatically Moving mirror glass to its initial position N When the mirror is being adjusted, the anti-dazzle Downward swivelling of the passenger side mirror The mirror glass swivels back to its initial position: lever A must point towards the passenger O glass can be activated on the central display. – after a certain time delay if the vehicle is shifted compartment. out of reverse gear, or P Activating the function e Basic setting – swivel lever towards the passen- – immediately if the vehicle reaches a speed of ger compartment. Q more than 15 km/h (9 mph). e e e Vehicle settings e Light and e Low beam position – swivel lever towards the R visibility e Reversing options e Lowering the Moving the mirror glass on the passenger’s side to windscreen. mirror glass while reversing its initial position manually: S e Press button A for the exterior mirror on the b Vehicle switched on. Using the automatic anti-dazzle T driver’s side. b Reverse gear engaged. mirror function U b Function activated. The exterior and interior mirrors each automatically change to the dimmed position as soon as bright V Swivelling down mirror glass manually light shines onto the mirror face of the interior W On vehicles with a memory package, the mirror glass mirror. on the passenger's side can be swivelled The mirrors do not dim when reverse gear is en- X downwards. gaged or when interior lighting is switched on. Y 1. Engage reverse gear. Z

163 Mirror

A Likewise, the incident light onto the interior mirror or coming through the windscreen to the front light B sensor must not be restricted by stickers. C e Do not affix any stickers to the windscreen in front of the interior mirror or on the rear window. D e Do not transport any luggage on the rear shelf. E Escaping electrolyte fluid CAUTION F G Electrolyte fluid may escape from a broken mirror. This fluid causes irritation to the skin and eyes. H e In the event of contact with the skin or eyes, I immediately rinse off the electrolyte fluid using J clean water. e Seek medical attention from a doctor if K necessary. L M NOTICE

N Risk of damage to paintwork, leather, plastic com- O ponents and clothing. Electrolyte fluid can only be removed while it is still P wet. Q e Clean affected parts with water. R S T U V W X Y Z

164 Navigation

Navigation A B Brief Overview - Navigation C This brief overview does not replace the compre- D hensive descriptions. Safety messages and warn- ings, in particular, are not replaced by this brief E overview. F For information on operating Porsche G Communication Management (PCM): > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Communication H Management (PCM)" on page 190. I J K Fig. 127: Entering/searching for a destination L What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? M

Find a destination/enter a destination address e e Navigation e – N Suggestions are displayed in the content and O interaction area (see D). P Input options (see A) Q – Voice input – Search area: Search along the route or R nearby S 1 – Search (availability dependent on country) : T Internet search – Google search (availability dependent on U country)1Internet search via Google V W Select previous destination e On the filter bar (see B), select . – X Y Z 1. Prerequisite: A data connection is established. Porsche Connect services and Online navigation services are activated. 165 Navigation

A What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? B Select a destination from contacts e On the filter bar (see B), select . – C Filter search results e Search results can be filtered in the filter bar – D (see B). E – Recent destinations – Favourites F – Contacts G – E-Charging H – Parking I Additional filters (e.g. points of interest) can be displayed in the filter bar under Options (see B). J K Start route guidance e e Navigation e e Enter destination e – L Touch Start route guidance.

M Stop route guidance e Touch e Navigation e Stop on the map N display. O Add destination to Favourites e e Navigation e e Enter a destination – P or select from a list of suggestions (see D) e Q in the content and interaction area (see D) e . R Favourites are marked with a in the map view. S T Activate online navigation e e Setting e Select Porsche Connect e – Porsche Connect Services settings. Information U about the services purchased and the contract V duration is displayed. W X Y Z

166 Navigation

What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? A B Configuring navigation announcements e e Navigation e e Navigation settings – e Select navigation announcement volume. C D Use Porsche Connect services (e.g. online map b Data connection established. Porsche Connect > p. 196 update) services activated. Further information on Por- E sche Connect can be found at F > www.porsche.com/connect G Risk of accident through WARNING Choosing a destination from a Planning a tour (entering a disregarding road traffic H laws map stopover) I A tour consists of one destination and a maximum of If a recommended driving instruction contradicts the 1. Select e Navigation . eight stopovers. J road traffic laws in force, the country-specific traffic 2. Touch the destination on the map for longer. K regulations always apply. The driver is always re- Entering and starting a tour sponsible for road safety. 3. Touch the address displayed to start route L navigation. e e e e Always pay attention to the traffic situation. 1. Navigation Enter the destina- tion e Start. M e Adapt your speed and driving style to the visibil- N ity, weather, road and traffic conditions. Alternative routes 2. e Navigation e e Enter or select a Up to 3 routes are displayed in the map view. For stopover e e Add as a stopover. O Risk of accident owing to WARNING vehicles with Charging Planner (available in some P system-related inaccur- countries), an alternative route is also calculated for 3. Start tour. acies and malfunctions the Normal and Range driving modes. Q Incorrect directions and malfunctions cannot be Editing a tour 1. Select e Alternative routes in the map view. R ruled out during satellite-based navigation. The You can reorganise the stopovers at a later time. driver is always responsible for driving the vehicle. 2. Available alternative routes are displayed. b Tour started. S e Always pay attention to the terrain. T 3. Tap an alternative route to select it. e Select the symbol for the relevant stopover The selected route is highlighted. under Options e Edit route, then drag to the U 4. Select Start to start the route guidance. desired position. V > Please refer to chapter "Selecting drive mode" on W page 106. Configuring map content X 1. e Navigation e (links on sidebar) Y 2. Activate/deactivate the desired map content Z (availability dependent on country): 167 Navigation

A – North up: The map always faces north. – Greyed-out warning symbols: Traffic disruption Trip overview – 3D map: Show or hide the 3D map view (other- which is not on the selected route. B wise 2D view). The following traffic flow information is displayed: C – Google Earth: Show or hide the satellite view on – Free lines: freely flowing traffic D the map. – Yellow lines: Bumper-to-bumper traffic – Range: Show or hide range on the map. – Orange lines: Slow-moving traffic E Changing map settings – Red lines: traffic jam F – Dark red lines: Traffic jam and roads closed G 1. e Navigation e e Navigation settings In addition, notifications regarding roadworks, acci- e Map settings dents, black spots etc. are displayed. H 2. Activate/deactivate the desired map content I (availability dependent on country): Avoiding traffic disruptions J Traffic disruptions can be automatically avoided or Fig. 128: Information in the trip overview – Auto zoom: Activate or deactivate the auto zoom displayed in route guidance. K function in the map. When route guidance is active, the trip overview can – Display points of interest: Show or hide points of e Activate e Navigation e e Route be opened by touching the area A. It displays infor- L interest on the map. options e Dynamic reroute/Refer to traffic mation about the current route plan: M – 3D buildings: Show or hide the 3D map view announcements. – Arrival time and charge state at destination (see (otherwise 2D view). A) Radio stations or online content providers are re- N – Show speed limits (availability depends on the – Delays, e.g. due to traffic jams; the extent of the sponsible for traffic notices. For that reason, no li- delay is also shown (see B) O equipment): Show or hide speed limits on the ability can be accepted for the completeness and – Stopover (see C) map. correctness of the information. P – Day and night view: Select map view mode. – Charging station with charging time2 (see D) Q The following traffic flow information is displayed: R Display traffic information – Blue: Freely flowing traffic – Yellow: Slow-moving traffic 1 S Displaying traffic information on the map – Red: Traffic jam T You can display the following traffic information on the current location or on the selected route on the Display additional information U map: e Select, for example, delays due to traffic jams V – Coloured warning symbols: Imminent traffic disruption on the selected route. If route guid- (see B) in the map or in the trip overview. W ance is not active, all current traffic disruptions The central display detail area provides addi- X are highlighted in colour. tional information about this message. Y Z 1. Prerequisite: A data connection is established. Porsche Connect services activated. 2. Prerequisite: Charging Planner active (availability dependent on country). 168 Navigation

Charging Planner (available in Manually adding a charging station If the Permit adaptation to range option is activated, A some countries) Charging stations can be added manually as stop- PIRM can also fall below the set speed limit and can change the air-conditioning settings if needed. B If a destination is entered that is out of range, the overs and as the final destination. > The settings can still be changed manually. driver will be informed by a sound and a notice. The Please refer to chapter "Planning a tour (entering C > Please refer to chapter "Configuring RANGE drive Charging Planner will then automatically add neces- a stopover)" on page 167. mode" on page 106. D sary charging stations to the route. Charging sta- The charging duration for the manually added tions with a charging power of min. 50 kW are charging stations is calculated, and the automati- E cally added charging stations are adjusted. The high- selected, taking into account driving and charging Display map view and navigation F times. voltage battery is preconditioned to achieve opti- mum charging power. information on the instrument G If an alternative route is selected, the Charging cluster Planner automatically adjusts the driving mode to Manually added charging stations are displayed as H the route (Normal or Range), and a corresponding blue flags in the map view, and automatically added For information on operating the instrument cluster: notice appears on the monitor. charging stations are displayed as white flags. > Please refer to chapter "Operating the instru- I ment cluster" on page 129. > Please refer to chapter "Alternative routes" on J page 167. Activating/deactivating the Charging Planner Displaying and configuring the map display The charging stations and the associated charging K e e Navigation e e Route options e time are displayed in the route monitor. 1. Select map view on the instrument cluster Charging Planner L The high-voltage battery is preconditioned to (Power meter). achieve optimum charging power. The high-voltage battery is preconditioned to > Please refer to chapter "Tube 2 – Power me- M The Charging Planner can also be displayed in the achieve optimum charging power. ter" on page 125. N Porsche Connect app, and the data can then be 2. Select the desired view option via the multi- transferred from the mobile phone to the PCM. Porsche Intelligent Range Manager (PIRM) function steering wheel: O > Please refer to chapter "Apps" on page 56. (available depending on the equipment) – Man. zoom: Adjust zoom factor of the map P b Charging Planner activated. display. Displaying details on charging stations b Data connection established. – Auto zoom: The map scale is adjusted Q b PIRM activated in Porsche Connect Services. automatically. R e e Navigation e e Edit route Der Porsche Intelligent Range Manager (PIRM) is an – 3D map: Three-dimensional map display. S The following details about individual charging sta- extension of the Charging Planner for the Range – North up: The map always faces north. tions are constantly updated and can be displayed: driving mode. – Map info: If no map view is selected in the Car & T – Name of the charging station If route guidance with a driving mode other than Info display on the instrument cluster, the map is displayed automatically in the event of a naviga- U – Battery charge condition when reaching the Range is selected, PIRM will search for a faster al- tion event. charging station ternative for the route in the Range driving mode. If V PIRM finds a suitable route, a message will appear – Arrow info: If the menu is Navigation not se- – Arrival time at the charging station on the monitor. lected in the Speed & Assist display on the in- W – Distance to the charging station If a route with the Range driving mode is selected, strument cluster, the menu is displayed X – Charging duration PIRM will adjust the settings for Range to the route. automatically in the event of a navigation event. – Battery charge condition when reaching the Y destination Z

169 Navigation

A Displaying navigation information in the in- strument cluster B e Select Navigation the menu in the Speed & As- C sist display on the instrument cluster. D > Please refer to chapter "Instrument cluster overview" on page 125. E F Changing navigation settings

G e e Navigation e e SET NAV e Select H the desired setting. I Toll devices J Secure toll devices on the inside of the windscreen K only outside of the field of vision. b L Vehicle with thermal insulation glazing M N O P Q

R Fig. 129: Attaching toll devices S Secure toll devices at the marked position on the T inside of the windscreen in order to guarantee opti- mum reception. U V W X Y Z

170 Night View Assist

Night View Assist – In poor weather conditions, such as heavy rain, 250 km/h (156 mph). The camera image is dis- A snowfall and icing, camera operation and conse- played with the person marked in red. B General safety instructions quently the detection of a collision hazard may The pedestrian warning is output if a pedestrian is be impaired. standing or moving onto the driving lane. On vehicles C Lack of attention and WARNING – Unintentional pedestrian and animal warnings with LED-Matrix headlights, the endangered person failure to detect objects may be triggered in complex driving situations is flashed at in order to enhance recognition. When D via Night View Assist owing to internal limitations of the system. this warning is given, it may still be possible to pre- E e vent a collision by the driver avoiding the pedestrian Night View Assist is a support system and cannot Keep the direction of travel and the relevant area F around the vehicle in view at all times. or braking sharply. The warning time varies depend- warn of an impending collision under all circum- ing on the traffic situation and the driver's behaviour. stances. Risk of accident! G Responsibility for timely braking and appropriate Responding to warning messages Animal warning H vehicle lighting for the situation always lies with the Always heed any warning and information messages A warning is also issued within the limitations of the I driver. displayed in the vehicle. system prior to an impending collision with large e Drive with extreme care. > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information wild animals such as deer outside urban areas. In this J e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and messages" on page 271. case, the system warns the driver visually and audi- K the area around the vehicle. bly. The camera image with the animal marked in red Operating principle is also displayed in order to support the driver in lo- L Night View Assist re- cating the danger. CAUTION The thermal imaging camera in the front bumper M stricted or not available The animal warning is triggered if an animal is lo- provides a thermal image of the surroundings, which N can be displayed on the instrument cluster. The cated in the projected driving lane or is in danger- Shocks or damage to the bumper, e.g. through ously close proximity. In urban areas, the animal system can detect persons and animals beyond the O parking bumps, can move the sensors. This may im- warning is automatically deactivated in order to pair performance of the system. area illuminated by the headlights and highlight P these in the camera image. prevent false warnings from being caused by e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche leashed dogs, for example. Night View Assist detects persons and animals when Q recommends a Porsche partner as they have it is sufficiently dark and at an ambient temperature trained workshop personnel and the necessary of under 28 °C. R parts and tools. Because the thermal imaging camera is only sensi- S tive in the heat radiation range, the image in the T camera may differ significantly from the image as System limitations perceived by the human eye. U The system has re- Night View Assist offers the following functions: WARNING V stricted availability Pedestrian warning W The assistance provided by the system cannot be If the system detects a possible collision with a pe- X guaranteed in certain situations. Such situations destrian, it can warn the driver by means of a warn- include: ing tone and an appropriate display in the instrument Y – Pedestrians and animals cannot always be cluster on the vehicle speed range up to Z detected. 171 Night View Assist

A Display elements Switching Night View Assist on Information B and off e If windscreen is very dirty, repeat wash. C Switching Night View Assist on and off via e Persistent dirt (e.g. insect remains) should be removed regularly. D the central display

E e e Assistance e Basic assistance e Night Information View Assist F The system has an internal heater which automati- G cally heats the camera when below a certain tem- Information perature to prevent or melt icing. H Deactivation will only disable the warning feature I and the marking of pedestrians and wildlife. It is still J possible to display the image on the instrument cluster. K L Setting the warning time and pic- M Fig. 130: Night View Assist ture contrast N The warning time for the collision warning and the 1 Pedestrian and animal warning O 2 Thermal imaging display picture contrast of the Night View Assist can be set in the central display. P Symbols e e Assistance e e Assistance system Q settings e Night View Assist R Symbol Meaning

S Indicates when the camera image is Clean Night View Assist camera T displayed that, owing to the prevail- The thermal imaging camera of the Night View As- ing ambient conditions (outside tem- sist in the front bumper must be cleaned at regular U perature and brightness), the system intervals. V cannot reliably detect persons or ani- b Dipped beam activated. mals and no warning function is e Press under the wiper stalk. W available. The symbol is also dis- X played when the system is switched off. Y Z

172 Notifications

Notifications A B Brief overview - Notifications C This brief overview does not replace the compre- D hensive descriptions. Safety messages and warn- ings, in particular, are not replaced by this brief E overview. F For information on operating Porsche Communication Management (PCM): G > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Communication H Management (PCM)" on page 190. I J K Fig. 131: Areas in the Notifications main menu L What do I want to do? What do I have to do? M Display notifications e Touch in the main menu. N O Filter notifications e Touch in the main menu e e.g. Vehicle (see A) in the quick filter bar. P Open notification e Select in the main menu e e.g. All (see A) e Notification (see C). Q Notification is displayed in the detail area (see B). R

Configure how content is displayed e in the main menu e S T Opening notifications – Display of all existing notifications. Changing notification settings U – Display of vehicle notifications. e Touch in the main menu. e e Setting e Notification centre e Select V – Display of notifications for the connected the desired setting. mobile phone. W Filtering notifications – Display of information notifications. X The notifications can be filtered in the quick filter bar (see A). The content is divided into the following Y areas: Z

173 Over-the-Air (OTA) functions

A Over-the-Air (OTA) functions > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Connect e Confirm installation of the update with Yes. settings" on page 197. The installation progress is displayed in the B Using OTA functions that are available depending on the country, the PCM and vehicle can be updated central display. C over the air, such as by using updates or Function on Install update After successful installation, a one-time mes- When ready for installation, a notification of the D Demand (FoD). sage will appear in the central display. The ve- In addition, the vehicle can identify maintenance and current update appears once. Please refer to hicle can be fully used again. E repair requirements via Smart Service. This is dis- chapter "Notifications" on page 173. e For information on the update or to determine a F played in My Porsche and in the PCM and transferred Function on Demand (FoD) to the Porsche partners defined in My Porsche. desired installation time, select Updates on G A breakdown can be reported and Porsche Assis- your home screen. Activating Function on Demand (FoD) tance contacted using the breakdown call function H b via the PCM or the Porsche Connect app. Porsche NOTICE The data connection has been successfully I Assistance can identify various problems and reme- established. dy these directly, using OTA access if required, or b Porsche Connect services and any individual J Usage restrictions during the update. prepare the required repair measures. services are activated in My Porsche. Readiness for operation is blocked. Displays and ve- 1. Purchase the desired FoD service in My Porsche. K hicle functions (e.g. comfort functions or anti-theft Information After the purchase is complete, a one-off mes- L functions) may temporarily be disabled. sage will appear on the central display. A notifi- M You will find more information on the Porsche Con- e Park the vehicle safely. cation will also appear concerning the FoD nect functions (help videos, Porsche Connect oper- e Follow any requests in the central display, such service. N ating instructions and questions & answers) at www. as exiting the vehicle with all passengers. Please refer to chapter "Notifications" on O porsche.com/connect and in the "Good to know" e Do not use the vehicle during the update. page 173. app (availability dependent on country). e Only use the vehicle after installation. 2. Activate the FoD service in the message or under P Only one installation process can be started. This the notification on the central display ( in the Q main menu). Update installation process cannot be interrupted. The in- R stallation time depends on the content of the up- date. An installed update cannot be reversed. Deactivating Function on Demand (FoD) Download update S b Update successfully downloaded. b The data connection has been successfully Updates are automatically downloaded in the back- T b Vehicle switched off. established. ground. All PCM and vehicle functions are fully usa- b b Parking lock and parking brake activated. Porsche Connect services and any individual U ble during downloading. The download is paused services are activated in My Porsche. when the vehicle is switched off and automatically b Battery charged sufficiently. V b FoD service has been purchased in My Porsche resumed when it is switched on. The download time and activated in the vehicle. depends on the connection quality. After completion W Information b Private mode is deactivated. of the download, the installation can be started. > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Connect X b Data connection is successfully established. The installation time is automatically shifted if the confirmation for installation is missing or with Install settings" on page 197. b Porsche Connect services and any individual Y later. 1. Deactivate the desired FoD service in My services are activated in My Porsche. Porsche. Z b Private mode is deactivated. 174 Over-the-Air (OTA) functions

After deactivation is complete, a one-off mes- – Vehicle type temporarily disabled. A sage will appear on the central display. A notifi- – Fault codes and other data for localising the fault e Park the vehicle safely. B cation will also appear concerning the FoD e Follow any requests in the central display, such service. Triggering a breakdown call as exiting the vehicle with all passengers. C Please refer to chapter "Notifications" on b e e e Do not use the vehicle while online measures are page 173. Phone Keypad is selected. D performed. 2. Deactivate the FoD service in the message or 1. Press Breakdown call switch. e Use the vehicle only after online measures are E under the notification on the central display ( Select to end the test emergency call. completed. F in the main menu). 2. If circumstances allow, wait in the vehicle until G the connection to Porsche Assistance has been Fault in OTA function Breakdown Call established. H Help can be requested via the breakdown call in the Faults may occur while using OTA features (such as case of breakdowns or accidents. The breakdown call can also be triggered via the us- installing updates or accessing the vehicle during a I b Mobile phone network available. ing the Porsche Connect App (availability dependent breakdown call). J b on country). The severity of the fault caused and its consequen- The breakdown call system is ready for operation K (approx. 20 seconds after turning on the ces are shown in the central display. Accessing the vehicle vehicle). > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information L b b Private mode is deactivated. Breakdown call triggered. messages" on page 129. b M > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Connect" on The vehicle data was transferred successfully to NOTICE page 196. Porsche Assistance. N b Online measures available. Damage and usage restriction due to failed OTA O Information If possible, Porsche Assistance can write access to the vehicle. Porsche can make adjustments to the function. P The breakdown call system does not require a mo- software of individual control units in the vehicle. The vehicle's readiness for operation may be Q bile phone registered in the vehicle as it has its own Allow write access to the vehicle blocked, depending on the severity of the fault mobile phone module. caused. Displays and vehicle functions cannot work R 1. Observe the instructions in the central display correctly. Due to technical or organisational restrictions out- and grant access with Yes. S e When the vehicle is ready for operation: Adapt side of Porsche's control (e.g. no roaming or no ac- 2. Follow the instructions in the central display. your driving behaviour to the situation. T tive data connection), it may not be possible to e establish a breakdown call to Porsche Assistance. Online measures are performed. If the vehicle is not ready for operation: Call a U roadside assistance service and have your ve- V Data transmission NOTICE hicle towed. e Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist In the event of a breakdown call, data to determine W workshop. Porsche recommends a Porsche part- the necessary measures can be transmitted to Por- Usage restrictions during write access. ner as they have trained workshop personnel and X sche Assistance, if available. This can include: Readiness for operation is blocked. Displays and ve- the necessary parts and tools. – Current vehicle location hicle functions (e.g. comfort functions, driver assis- Y – Vehicle identification number tance systems or emergency functions) may be Z

175 ParkAssist

A ParkAssist Information Distance measurement B General Safety Instructions other ultrasound sources (e.g. pneumatic brakes of C other vehicles, sweeping machines and jack ham- Lack of attention when WARNING mers) can interfere with the detection of obstacles. D manoeuvring or parking E The increased comfort offered by ParkAssist must Responding to warning messages F not induce you to risk your safety. Even when the Always heed any warning and information messages system is active, the driver is still responsible for G displayed in the vehicle. taking due care when parking and when assessing > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information H obstacles. The system cannot replace the driver's messages" on page 271. attentiveness. I e Make sure that no persons, animals or obstacles Operating principle J are within the manoeuvring area. When the driver is parking and manoeuvring the ve- K hicle, ParkAssist indicates the distance between the Dirty sensors or cameras vehicle and an obstacle by visual and audible means. L WARNING The visual ParkAssist parking aid is displayed in the M central display. Obstacles in front of and behind the Dirty sensors or cameras can prevent obstacles and Fig. 132: Ultrasonic sensors for distance measurement obstructions from being detected. vehicle are displayed using differently coloured N fields. These fields show the shape of the obstacles The ultrasonic sensors (A) on the front and rear e Sensors and cameras must always be kept clean O and their distance from the vehicle. bumper measure the distance from the closest ob- and free of ice and snow. stacle. A detected obstacle is signalled by the fol- P lowing sounds: Q – Intermittent tone: An obstacle was detected. System limitations – Decreasing intervals: Approaching the obstacle. The system cannot detect the following obstacles: R – Continuous tone: Distance less than approx. 30 S – sound-absorbing obstacles (e.g. wintry condi- cm. tions, powder snow, clothing made from fabric, T skin or fur) Activating ParkAssist U – sound-reflecting obstacles (e.g. glass surfaces, flat painted surfaces) Automatically V – very thin obstacles (e.g. thin posts) ParkAssist is activated automatically at speeds of up – obstacles above and below the sensors W to approx. 15 km/h and during readiness for opera- X tion in the following cases: b Reverse gear is engaged. Y – or – Z

176 ParkAssist b Distance in front less than approx. 80 cm. Colour Distance at Distance at e e Assistance e e Assistance system A – or – settings e ParkAssist front rear B b Rolling backwards is detected. Red < 40 cm < 40 cm C Manually reversing camera D Red with con- < 30 cm < 30 cm Risk of injury due to dis- ParkAssist can be activated manually in the central WARNING display: tinuous tone torted representation E F e e Assistance e ParkAssist Symbol Meaning The objects shown by the camera appear distorted. The reversing camera image does not show the G Deactivate ParkAssist for the current complete area behind the vehicle. Display in the central display H parking manoeuvre. Deactvation is e Always pay attention to the entire vehicle cancelled if a speed of 15 km/h is surroundings. I exceeded or if gear R is selected e Make sure that no persons, animals or obstacles J again. are within the manoeuvring area. K Switch off audio playback. The reversing camera facilitates monitoring of the area behind the vehicle during parking manoeuvres. L The reversing camera image is displayed on the M central display. N For information on operating the central display: > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Communication Activating the reversing camera O Management (PCM)" on page 190. Automatically The reversing camera is activated automatically in P Deactivating ParkAssist the following cases when operational readiness is Q established. e Press the P button. b Reverse gear is engaged. R – or – S Adjusting the ParkAssist volume b Rolling backwards is detected. T Fig. 133: ParkAssist display e e Assistance e e Assistance system Manually e U Colour Distance at Distance at settings ParkAssist The reversing camera can be activated or deacti- front rear vated manually in the central display: V e e e W White Distance to obstacles that are Switching off automatic activa- Assistance ParkAssist not in the path of the vehicle. tion of ParkAssist X The automatic activation of ParkAssist can be Y Orange < 120 cm < 180 cm switched off when approaching an obstacle. Z

177 ParkAssist

A Information entire area around the vehicle. b Reverse gear is engaged. – or – B e Always pay attention to the entire vehicle In addition to the camera image, guide lines are surroundings. b Rolling backwards is detected. C superimposed on the rear camera view as well. e Make sure that no persons, animals or obstacles Manually These guide lines indicate the direction the vehicle D are within the manoeuvring area. can follow with the steering wheel in the current 1. e Assistance e ParkAssist E position. The guide lines change as the position of the front wheels changes. 2. Select the desired view. F The symbol for the active view is highlighted in blue. G Deactivating reversing camera Symbol Meaning H Automatically I b Speed is higher than 15 km/h. Parking J Manually Switch view by touching the front or e Press the P button. rear camera symbol. K L Cleaning the reversing camera Panorama Switch the view by touching the front M e Press the button on the vehicle rear once briefly on the camera display. or rear camera symbol. N 3D view O Information – Switch the perspective by touch- P e If windscreen is very dirty, repeat wash. Fig. 134: Position of Surround View cameras ing one of the side camera e Persistent dirt (e.g. insect remains) should be symbols. Q A Camera in the centre of the front bumper – Select the all-round view by removed regularly. B Camera in both exterior mirrors R C Camera between the number plate lights in the tailgate touching the camera symbol at the bottom of the screen and by S Surround View Surround View provides a bird's eye view of the ve- turning the perspective 360° by Risk of injury due to dis- hicle and covers the area around the vehicle. Using swiping the camera image. T WARNING torted display the cameras, obstacles or markings are detected, U along with the exact position of the vehicle. When Clean the reversing camera. V The objects detected by the camera appear dis- Surround View is active, the courtesy lighting is torted. Many of the screen windows do not show the switched on for better illumination. W Activating Surround View X Automatically Y b ParkAssist is active. Z – or –

178 ParkAssist

Information A In addition to the camera image, guide lines are B superimposed on the front and rear camera views. C These guide lines indicate the direction the vehicle can follow with the steering wheel in the current D position. The guide lines change as the position of E the front wheels changes. F G Deactivating Surround View Automatically H b Speed is higher than 15 km/h (9 mph). I Manually J e Press the P button. K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

179 Personal settings

Retrieving automatic A Personal settings CAUTION Managing accounts settings for seats, exte- B Ergonomic settings can be manually saved and re- Up to 7 accounts can be registered and managed in trieved via the memory buttons in the driver door. In rior mirrors and steering the central display. One guest account is available; it C addition, individual accounts that automatically wheel cannot be deleted. D store and retrieve ergonomic and comfort settings Parts of the body may be pinched or crushed if the The driver's personal settings are saved in the can be registered via the central display. Both func- settings are activated in an uncontrolled manner. account. E tions can be used independently of one another. When you start the system for the first time, the e Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended. Set-up wizard is displayed in the central display; this F e Automatic retrieval of the ergonomic settings will guide you through important configuration Saving and retrieving personal can be cancelled if necessary by pressing a G steps. We recommend that you run the Set-up settings memory button, a seat adjustment button or the H wizard fully to create the first account correctly. A When the vehicle is turned off, the settings previ- central display. Porsche ID (Porsche Connect user) is required to set I ously made are saved automatically to the selected up and use an account.Please refer to chapter "Using account and linked to the driver's key used. The set- Porsche Connect" on page 196. J tings are loaded automatically when the door is un- Storing and loading comfort You can switch between registered accounts at any locked. During this process, the account linked with K settings time via the central display when the vehicle is the driver's key is detected. If you and others use the Due to the various usage options, the features de- switched on. L vehicle, it is advantageous to use one account and scribed here are not available in all models, countries Driver detection occurs automatically via the driver's driver's key per person. If necessary, the accounts and equipment versions. key. A driver's key is always automatically assigned M can be changed manually. to the active account. N Ergonomic settings affect: Storing comfort settings seat, exterior mirror and steering wheel settings. O e When the vehicle is switched off and locked, the Information Additionally, up to three ergonomic settings can be previously made settings are automatically P manually saved and retrieved via the memory but- saved in the account. More information about Porsche Connect (help vid- tons in the driver door. eos, Porsche Connect operating instructions and Q e If the switch is made from an active account to Comfort settings (depending on the country) affect questions & answers) can be found at www.porsche. another account, the comfort settings are over- the following: com/connect and in the "Good to know" app (avail- R written. The ergonomic settings are not Ergonomic, air conditioning, light, vision, assistance- ability dependent on country). overwritten. S system, instrument cluster and infotainment T settings. Loading comfort settings Managing accounts U e Unlock the vehicle. Information The accounts can be managed in the central display. V The account settings are loaded. > Please refer to chapter "Using Porsche Connect" Some functions cannot be personalised (e.g. the – or – on page 196. W b charge timer, time zones or precooling/preheating). Vehicle is stationary. If the activated personalization settings do not X e Change account via the central display. match the current driver, we recommend switching to another, registered account. We recommend us- Y ing your own account. If necessary, a new account Z can be created and the vehicle settings then

180 Personal settings adjusted. This avoids inadvertent adjustment of ve- A hicle settings in the first selected account. B Storing and retrieving ergonomic C settings D Storing ergonomic settings on the memory E buttons F G H I J K L Fig. 135: Driver door memory buttons M 1. Press the SET button. N The inscription on the button lights up. 2. Press the relevant memory button 1, 2 or 3 O within 10 seconds. P The settings are stored. Storage is acknowledged acoustically (driver door Q only) and the lighting on the SET button goes out. R Retrieving ergonomic settings with the mem- S ory buttons T e Press and hold the relevant memory button 1, 2 or 3 until all settings are retrieved. U – or – V b Vehicle switched off. b The driver door is open. W e Briefly press the relevant memory button 1, 2 or X 3. The settings are automatically applied. Y Z

181 Phone

A Phone B Brief Overview – Phone C This brief overview does not replace the compre- D hensive descriptions. In particular, safety messages E and warnings are not replaced by this brief overview. F For information on operating Porsche Communication Management (PCM): G > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Communication H Management (PCM)" on page 190. I J K Fig. 136: Dialling a number (keypad) L M What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where?

N e e e Connecting a phone via Bluetooth® Touch Devices Connection assistant > p. 183 O e Connect new telephone. P e Selecting the currently connected mobile phone in the status area. The two devices already con- Q Switch between two connected mobile phones nected are displayed e Select the desired mo- – R bile phone. S Establishing a data connection > p. 196 T U Activate the function in the central display: e V Wireless mobile phone charging Phone e e Telephone settings e General > p. 185 settings e Cableless charging. W e Stow the mobile phone in the smartphone tray. X e e e e Dial number Phone Keypad (see A) Touch – Y (see B) Z

182 Phone

What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? A

e Trigger an emergency call using SOS button in B Select emergency call > p. 108 the overhead console. C D e e Phone e Favourites (see A) e Add Store contact as favourite favourite e Select the desired contact from the > p. 184 E list e Touch . F Display call list e e Phone e Call list (see A) – G H Display a contact e e Phone e Contacts (see A) – I Display messages e Touch e Message. > p. 160 J K e e e e Listen to mailbox Phone Keypad (see A) Press and – hold button 1 (see B). L M Accept/reject a call e Touch Accept or Reject . – N

e Touch in the footer or Phone menu. O – or – End a call – P Press the button on the multi-function steering wheel. Q R Various use options are available depending on vehicle. interfere with technical equipment. S model, country and equipment. The features de- e Only make or receive calls using hands-free e Always comply with instructions as well as legal scribed here are therefore not available in all models, equipment. requirements and local restrictions. T countries and equipment versions. U Risk of accident due to Danger of injury WARNING WARNING using mobile phone Connecting a mobile phone via V Bluetooth® W Using mobile phones while driving may distract from Mobile phones must be switched off in certain dan- the traffic situation. You may lose control of the ger areas, e.g. near petrol stations, fuel depots, X chemical plants or during blasting work. They may Connecting a new mobile phone b Bluetooth® function of the mobile phone is acti- Y vated and is visible to other devices. Z b Bluetooth® function of the PCM activated. 183 Phone

A > Please refer to chapter "Device Manager" on 1. Search for available devices in the mobile Phone e e Phone settings e Select the page 102. phone's Bluetooth® menu. desired device. B 2. Select the PCM from the list of available devices. C 1. Tap e Devices e connection assistant e The Bluetooth® device name of the PCM can be Connect new telephone. displayed in the e Devices e e Blue- Displaying connection status D The following displays may appear in the status area 2. Select a mobile phone from the device list. tooth settings e Bluetooth name. depending on the model, country and equipment: E A 6-digit Bluetooth® code is generated and dis- Connecting to registered mobile phones No phone connected. F played both on the central display and mobile b ® phone. The mobile phone's Bluetooth function is No data connection available (possible G activated. 3. Compare the Bluetooth® code on the central causes: no connection, poor network b Bluetooth® function of the PCM activated. H display and mobile phone. quality, interruption of the data connec- > Please refer to chapter "Device Manager" on tion during a voice connection). I 4. If the Bluetooth® code in the mobile phone page 102. Data connection via the LTE mobile match, confirm. J phone network. When the phone is successfully connected, the 1. Tap or in the status area (depending on Data connection via the UMTS/HSPA K numeric input (Keypad menu) is displayed in the connection status). mobile phone network (3G). the central display. A list with a maximum of 20 registered mobile L Data connection via the EDGE mobile phones will be displayed. M phone network (GSM). Information 2. Select a mobile phone from the list. Reception field strength of the mobile N The mobile phone is connected via Bluetooth®. – Depending on the Bluetooth® capability of the phone network for the phone function. O mobile phone, it is possible to access the content Data connection via external WiFi Connecting and using a second mobile phone hotspot. P of the phone book, call lists and messages. It is also possible to transfer a current call to the b A mobile phone is already connected to the PCM. Q mobile phone after stopping the vehicle and Storing and editing a favourite continue it outside the vehicle if the mobile 1. Tap or in the status area (depending on R phone supports this function. the connection status). Storing a favourite S – You will find an overview of compatible mobile 2. Select a mobile phone from the list or connect a phones on the Porsche website for your country 1. e Phone e Favourites new mobile phone. T under: Models e Your model (e.g. 911 Carrera) e 2. Select a contact from Last contacted and move U Download Brochures e Via Bluetooth®. Both connected mobile phones can receive calls, but only the active mobile phone can to Favourites via drag & drop. V make calls. W Connecting a mobile phone (Windows® and 3. Select the currently connected device on the Organising favourites iOS operating system) right in the status area in order to switch be- X 1. e Phone e Favourites For mobile phones with Windows® or iOS operating tween the two connected mobile phones. Y systems, we recommend initiating the connection The two devices already connected are 2. Select the desired contact and move to the de- from the mobile phone: displayed. sired position via drag & drop. Z b Bluetooth® function of the PCM activated. – or – 184 Phone

Deleting a favourite b Second phone call is on hold. The smartphone tray in the armrest is used to con- A nect to the vehicle's external antenna and has a USB 1. e Phone e Favourites e Tap to activate the call on hold and put the port for charging the mobile phone and for connect- B previously active call on hold instead. ing to the PCM. Using the external antenna ensures 2. Select the desired contact and move upwards C less radiation in the vehicle and better reception from the Favourites display area via drag & quality for a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth®. D drop. Displaying phone information in b – or – Keypad/code lock on the mobile phone is E the instrument cluster activated. If available, tap the icon. e Select the desired function in the Car & Info dis- e Insert the mobile phone into the smartphone F play on the instrument cluster: holder with its back facing the side wall. G Functions during a phone call > Please refer to chapter "instrument cluster" > Please refer to chapter "Interfaces" on page 102. on page 125. H b e e Phone Keypad selected. – Incoming call: Accept or Reject the incoming call Wireless mobile phone charging I using the phone buttons on the steering wheel. Muting the microphone J – Last calls: Display a list of the last numbers di- (availability dependent on b Active phone call. alled using the phone button and rotary knob on country) K the steering wheel. The wireless charging function can be activated or e Tap to mute the microphone. L – Conference: Make other calls or add the partici- deactivated in the central display. pants to a conference call during an active phone Metal objects in the M Holding a call call using the rotary knob and phone button on CAUTION smartphone tray N b Active phone call. the steering wheel. For information on operating the instrument cluster: Metal objects that are located between the phone O e Tap . > Please refer to chapter "instrument cluster" on and the charging pad during wireless mobile phone P charging can become very hot and cause personal e To resume the call, tap . page 125. injury and damage to property. Q Stowing a mobile phone (avail- e Do not place any objects between the mobile R Starting a conference call phone and the charging pad. b Active phone call. ability dependent on country) S b Function activated ( e Phone e e T 1. e Add a new call (enter a number or select a Telephone settings e General settings e contact) e Cableless charging). U b Wireless charging according to Qi standard sup- V 2. Tap to activate the conference call. ported by the mobile phone. W 3. Tap to disconnect the conference call. e Insert the mobile phone into the smartphone holder with its back facing the side wall. X Switching between two conversations The symbol appears in the status area of the Y (swapping) central display. Fig. 137: Smartphone tray in the armrest Z b First phone call is active. 185 Phone

A Charging performance can vary according to mobile phone. B C Information D A magnetic alternating field is used for wireless E charging. Reactions such as irritation of the sensory organs or malfunction of active implants (such as F pacemakers, infusion pumps or neurostimulators) or G interference with passive implants (such as artificial joints) are possible. H e Always observe a minimum distance of 10 cm I from the charging pad. The continuous exposure limits according to IC- J NIRP1998 are met at this distance. K e Implant users should consult a specialist if they have any questions. L M Changing phone settings N General settings O P e e Phone e e Telephone settings e Select desired setting. Q R Managing contacts

S e e Phone e Contacts e e Select de- T sired setting. U V W X Y Z

186 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM)

Porsche Active Suspension – Can be selected manually in the "Sport Plus" Selecting chassis setup A chassis setup Management (PASM) B Lift Selecting chassis setup using buttons General safety instructions – Increases the ground clearance by approx. C 20 mm compared to the "Medium" level. D Responding to warning messages – Can be selected at speeds of up to approx. E Always heed any warning and information messages 30 km/h (19 mph) and is deselected automati- displayed in the vehicle. cally at higher speeds. F – Used to drive over obstacles. > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information G messages" on page 271. Lower – Reduces the ground clearance by approx. 10 mm H Operating principle compared to the "Medium" level. Fig. 138: PASM button I The PASM system actively adjusts the chassis dy- – Can be selected manually. b Ready for operation. J namics. Your vehicle may be equipped with one of Low e Press button (repeatedly). the following versions: – Reduces the ground clearance by approx. 22 mm K – PASM with steel suspension. compared to the "Medium" level. Selecting chassis setup via the central display L – PASM with selectable air suspension and level- – Used for sporty driving. b Ready for operation. ling system – Can be selected manually. M The adjustable chassis system individually sets the – Selected automatically when the "Sport Plus" e e Drive e Chassis N appropriate damper force level for each wheel. chassis setup is active or when RANGE drive The last selected chassis setup is shown on the in- O 3 different chassis setups can be selected at the mode is active. strument cluster. It remains effective even when the push of a button: P When RANGE drive mode is active, a range-opti- vehicle is no longer ready for operation. – Normal: comfort setup mised chassis setup is selected and the low level is Q – Sport: sporty setup applied. Chassis setup selection is locked in RANGE Display Chassis setup – Sport Plus: very sporty shock setup, such as for drive mode. R driving on the race circuit. None Normal S PASM with selectable air suspension and lev- Sport T elling system U The levelling system provided with the air suspen- sion automatically balances load changes and main- Sport Plus V tains a constant ride height. The following chassis W heights are available: Medium X – Standard level in the "Normal" and "Sport" chas- Selecting the chassis height Y sis setups b Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM) with air suspension and levelling system Z

187 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM)

Control operation of the A Selecting chassis height via the central Display Chassis height WARNING display levelling system B b Ready for operation. Lower A vehicle on which the levelling system is activated C can move unexpectedly or tip or fall off lifting e e Drive e Chassis height D equipment, e.g. a jack or lifting platform. This can Low result in serious injury and damage. E Selecting chassis height "Lift" using the e Set the vehicle to the medium level and switch button F off the levelling system before hoisting the The chassis height "Lift" can be selected using the Information vehicle. G button on the instrument cluster in order to increase H ground clearance quickly. The vehicle will not be lowered with the door open. > Please refer to chapter "Jack and Lifting Plat- form" on page 138. I The selected level is set after closing the door. J e e Setting e Vehicle e Additional chassis Information settings e Deactivate chassis adjustment K before using a jack Frequent level changes can cause the compressor to L overheat. In this case, the compressor must cool for M several minutes before the levelling system is fully Information functional again. The vehicle adjusts automatically N to the selected level when the compressor cools The levelling system is switched on automatically at Fig. 139: Lift button speeds of more than approx. 7 km/h (4 mph). O down. b Ready for operation. P e Press the button. Switching the levelling system off Additional information Q The selected chassis height is displayed on Lifting the vehicle R the instrument cluster. WARNING Lowering the vehicle after leaving it unused for long periods The last selected chassis height is shown on the in- S If a PASM or hot vehicle warning message is dis- b strument cluster. This is retained even after the ve- Porsche Active Suspension Management played, there is a risk of injuries and damage to the T hicle has been turned off. (PASM) with air suspension and levelling system vehicle if the vehicle is hoisted. If the vehicle is left unused for several weeks, the U Display Chassis height e The vehicle must only be hoisted when cool. ride height may be lowered. The vehicle will com- V e If a PASM warning message is displayed, you pensate for this lowering automatically once opera- None Medium tional readiness has been established. This process W should not perform any work on the chassis yourself. Call in a qualified specialist workshop. may take several minutes depending on the vehicle. X Lift Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they During this time, ground clearance is reduced. Y have trained workshop personnel and the neces- sary parts and tools. Z

188 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM)

Levelling after parking the vehicle A b Porsche Active Suspension Management B (PASM) with an air suspension and levelling system C The ride height may be adjusted automatically in or- D der to balance the vehicle load after the vehicle is parked. E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

189 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

A Porsche Communication B Management (PCM) C Brief Overview – PCM D This brief overview does not replace the complete E descriptions provided in this section. F Safety messages and warnings, in particular, are not G replaced by this brief overview. H I J K L Fig. 140: Areas of the central display M What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? N O Switch on the PCM e Switch on the vehicle. – > P Shut down PCM e Touch in the centre console control panel e p. 76 Q Touch Shut down PCM in the central display. R > Switch off central display e Touch in the centre console control panel e p. 76 S Touch Switch off central display in the central display. T U Adjust the volume e Turn volume control (rotary knob) on the multi- > p. 129 function steering wheel. V – or – W Touch / on the quick access bar. X – or – Swipe the handwriting panel vertically with two Y fingers. Z

190 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? A

Mute: Press the volume control (rotary knob) on the B multi-function steering wheel briefly or press longer C on . D e > Remote operation of central display Use the handwriting panel via gestures to navi- p. 76 E gate in the central display. F Use Global search e Enter search text in search area A or use voice – input. G H Display time, connection and status symbols, use e Use status area B. > p. 194 I options The relevant settings (e.g. Ioniser) can be called up directly by selecting the status symbols. J

> K Adapt sorting of apps b selected. p. 124 e In status area B, touch e Adapt sorting of L apps. M

> N Open MyScreen e Swipe to the left in the Home screen . p. 124 O MyScreen is displayed. P Configure My Screen > p. 124 b MyScreen is displayed. Q e In status area B, touch e Configure My Screen . R S Use content from the main and sub-menus e Use main menu C and content and interaction > p. 194 area E. T U Open messages e Touch a message in message area D. > p. 173 V Context-dependent display area e Use extended display area F. – W Call up Set-up wizard When you start the PCM for the first time, the Set- – X up wizard is displayed and guides you through im- Y portant steps for configuring the PCM. Calling up Set-up wizard manually: Z

191 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

A What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? B e e Setting e Set-up wizard C Activate/deactivate Private mode (available in > p. 196 D e Touch e Setting e Porsche Connect some countries) settings e Private mode. E F Display service interval e Touch e Service . – G The display indicates when the next service is due. H Change system and vehicle settings > p. 257 I e Touch e Setting e System/Car.

J Display vehicle information e Touch (see C) e Drive. – K Display notifications e > p. 173 L Touch in the main menu C. M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

192 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

Central display A B C D E F G H I J K L M Fig. 141: Control elements of the central display N O A – Home Screen & MyScreen C – Fast filter search/Global search (sub op- F – Connection and status symbols P > Please refer to chapter "Home screen and erating area) > Please refer to chapter "Device Manager" on MyScreen" on page 124. Depending on the menu selection, a menu bar ap- page 102. Q pears with further menu items in this area (quick fil- R B – Main menu (main operating area) ter bar). The global search is displayed here in the G – Content and interactive area The main menu is divided into three main areas: Home Screen. S – Homescreen/ MyScreen H – Options and the most important settings T D – Time/Temperature depending on content and interactive area – Vehicle Settings > Please refer to chapter "Setting time or temper- Using options, context-specific settings for the re- U – Notifications ature display" on page 194. spective display can be made per screen. V > Please refer to chapter "Opening menus" on W page 194. E – Filter bar I – Detail area Depending on the menu selection, a filter bar The detail area displays additional information on the X appears. content area. Y Z

193 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

A Important information on A Touch (select) Calling up sub-menu B operation Briefly tap the central display with your fin- e Tap the menu item in the quick filter bar (e.g. The Porsche Communication Management (PCM) is ger. Example: Tap on a function or tick/un- Drive). C the central control unit. tick a checkbox. D For safety reasons, some functions are only available Opening the settings for each menu item when the vehicle is stationary. B Long press b Desired menu is selected. E Touch the central display with your finger Setting and operating WARNING for longer. Example: Confirming a destina- e Tap options. F while driving tion on the map (Navigation). Settings and other functions of the respective G content or interactive area are displayed. Setting and operating the multi-function steering H wheel, infotainment system, etc. while driving may C Swipe Swipe horizontally across the central display I distract you from the traffic situation. You may lose Setting time or temperature control of the vehicle. using one finger. Example: Scrolling through display J e Only operate these components while driving if lists horizontally. K the traffic situation allows you to do so safely. e Touch time or temperature in the status D Vertical swiping (scroll and switch) e In case of doubt, safely pull out of traffic and only area to adjust the display. L carry out extensive operations and settings while Swipe vertically across the central display To adjust the central display: M the vehicle is stationary. using one finger. Example: Scrolling through content vertically. N e e Setting e Display settings O Operating the central display Zoom Entering text and characters P E Briefly tapping the central display twice en- As soon as you can enter text or characters, e.g. for Q larges that section. entering a navigation destination or search term, an input field appears. Touching a search result will R F Briefly tapping the central display using two zoom in on the results list. S fingers reduces the size of that section. T G Moving two fingers further apart on the U central display enlarges the section. V W Fig. 142: Operating the central display Opening menus Opening main menu X e Tap the menu in the main operating area (e.g. Y ). Z

194 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)

> Please refer to chapter "Centre console control A panel" on page 76. B Opening Driver's Manual in C Zentraldisplay D b Vehicle is stationary. Fig. 143: Central display keyboard E A Back e e eBAL F B Current cursor position C Auto-correction and suggested results G D Search area (availability dependent on country) H E Toggle between entry of letters/numbers and special characters Fig. 144: Freehand entry I F Insert space G Zoom in on results list b The keyboard or input field is displayed in the J H Delete entry central display. I Results list K e Write text and characters directly with your There are various options for entering text and finger (handwriting recognition). L characters: For information on handwriting entry: M Entry using the keyboard Please refer to chapter "Centre console control pan- N el" on page 76. 1. Touch the input field. O The central display keyboard appears. Entry via voice input P Text and numbers can also be entered using voice 2. Enter the desired text or characters. control (e.g. for dialling a phone number or entering a Q 3. To enter accents, umlauts, etc. press the de- navigation destination). R sired letters for longer. For information on using voice control: A window then opens containing accents, um- > Please refer to chapter "voice control" on S lauts, etc. for these letters. page 264. T U Entry using the handwriting panel Using the central display via the V The handwriting panel in the centre console control handwriting panel panel has handwriting recognition and allows you to Use the handwriting panel of the centre console W write text and characters directly with your finger. control panel via gestures to navigate in the central X display. For information on using the centre console control Y panel: Z

195 Porsche Connect

A Porsche Connect Information about the data package booked is connection status), e e select WiFi settings displayed in some countries. e Configure vehicle hotspot. B Due to the various use options, the features de- scribed here are not available in all models, countries When a data package has been fully used, a message 2. Accessing WiFi access data PCM: e Setting C and equipment versions. appears automatically on the central display. e Connection assistant e Connect to D Depending on the country, the data connection can be established via the embedded SIM card or an ex- vehicle hotspot E ternal WiFi hotspot. The currently active data con- Establishing a data connection via The PCM device name and WiFi password are nection is shown in the status area of the central an external WiFi hotspot (avail- shown on the central display. F display and in the device manager. able in some countries) 3. Enter the PCM WiFi access data in the device G > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Communication b Mobile phone WiFi hotspot or public hotspot WiFi settings or scan the QR code displayed in H Management (PCM)" on page 190. available. the PCM with the device. > Please refer to chapter "Device Manager" on A connection to the PCM's wireless Internet I page 102. 1. In the or status area (depending on the access is established. J connection status), e e select WiFi settings Establishing data connection via e Search for external WiFi hotspot. K Using Porsche Connect embedded SIM card (available in A search is performed for WiFi networks and L the results are displayed. A data connection is required in order to use Porsche some countries) Connect services. M b Private mode is deactivated. 2. Select a WiFi hotspot (e.g. public hotspot or the mobile phone’s personal hotspot) and enter N > Please refer to chapter "Activating Privacy mode Information (available in some countries)" on page 198. WiFi access data in the PCM. When entering the data, pay attention to upper and lower case. O The data connection is established automatically More information about Porsche Connect (help vid- when operational readiness is established. A connection is established to the external WiFi eos, Porsche Connect operating instructions and P hotspot. questions & answers) can be found at www.porsche. Q com/connect and in the "Good to know" app (avail- Information ability dependent on country). Activating the PCM WiFi hotspot R If a data connection cannot be established, check S the following: (available in some countries) Activating Porsche Connect services – Private mode is deactivated. Up to eight WIFi devices can be connected to the T Before starting to use the Porsche Connect services – The vehicle is in an area with sufficient network vehicle hotspot. for the first time, they must be activated. U reception (not a coverage blackspot). b Data connection successfully established via in- tegrated SIM card (available in some countries). e Activate Porsche Connect Services under www. V e Restart the PCM if necessary. b Corresponding data package booked at www. porsche.com/connect. W porsche.com/connect. Show data volume Using services in the navigation system and X 1. In the or status area (depending on voice control system e e e Y Setting Privacy and Porsche – Online search function for entering navigation Connect settings e Remaining data volume destinations and for loading portal POIs and Z display other POI categories from My Porsche

196 Porsche Connect

– Additional map display. changed, the Porsche ID must be confirmed and Information A – Real-time Traffic provides information on acci- the security code entered. B dents, construction works, traffic jams and other – Login without security code: When operational – The Porsche Connect service package offers a incidents from the Internet. readiness is established or the account is wide range of Porsche Connect services for a C – Online voice search changed, it is only necessary to confirm the Por- free, inclusive period, which may vary in length sche ID. for each service and country. More information D Logging in Porsche ID (Porsche Connect user – Automatic login: When operational readiness is about the free, inclusive periods and subsequent E ID) established or the account is changed, the Por- costs along with information about the availabil- ity of individual services for your country is F The Porsche ID is a verified e-mail address that is sche ID is logged in automatically without need- available online at www.porsche.com/connect used as the Porsche Connect username in My ing to be reconfirmed. G – Delete account: The Porsche ID is deleted from or from your Porsche partner. Porsche, the Porsche Connect Store and Porsche H Connect App. the vehicle. – Depending on the country, Porsche Connect Services can be used via the embedded SIM or b Porsche Connect A user (Porsche ID) is regis- – Deregister account: The Porsche ID is deregis- I the external WiFi hotspot. tered in My Porsche. tered from the vehicle. The guest account is – You may incur additional charges when receiving J b Porsche ID security code created in My Porsche activated. data packages from the Internet, depending on and known. K Using Porsche apps your mobile phone tariff and whether you are You must log in with the Porsche ID in the vehicle to abroad. A flat-rate data plan is recommended. L use some Porsche Connect services. Logging in al- > Please refer to chapter "Apps" on page 56. – The availability, scope and provider of the serv- lows you to access personal My Porsche settings in M ices may vary depending on the country, model the vehicle. year, device and tariff. N 1. e Setting e Accounts e Create account O 2. Enter Porsche ID and My Porsche password and P touch Next to confirm. Porsche Connect settings Q 3. Enter the security code from My Porsche. Displaying service overview User is logged in and the symbol appears in R e e e the status area. Setting Privacy and Porsche S Connect settings e Select overview of all Porsche Connect services. T Managing your Porsche ID (Porsche Connect Information about the services purchased and U user) contract duration is displayed. b Porsche ID (Porsche Connect user) is logged in. V Granting remote access authorisation e e Setting e Accounts e Select account W b Main user logged into the vehicle at least once. e e Complete action: X Remote access authorisation is required to use – Log in using security code: When operational service control programmes in My Porsche or the Y readiness is established or the account is Porsche Connect App (available in some countries) Z in the vehicle. Remote access authorisation is 197 Porsche Connect

A granted automatically as soon as the main user logs into the vehicle for the first time. B e e C Check registered accounts under: Setting e Accounts D E Activating Privacy mode (available in some F countries) Communication between the vehicle and the G Porsche Connect App as well as My Porsche is sup- H pressed when privacy mode is active. No vehicle- specific information is transmitted. This means that I no vehicle settings can be configured using the app J or My Porsche. b Remote access authorisation granted. K L e e Setting e Privacy and Porsche Connect settings e Privacy mode M Privacy mode can be activated or deactivated N globally, for individual services or for service groups. O > Please refer to chapter "Apps" on page 56. P Despite activated private mode, location information for the vehicle can be transmitted in the event of a Q breakdown or emergency call as well as theft. R e Please inform all persons using the vehicle that communication may be disabled. S T U V W X Y Z

198 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

Damage to the radar Porsche InnoDrive (PID) control of the vehicle. WARNING A sensor and camera Covered front camera or B General safety instructions WARNING Shocks or damage to the bumper, wheel housings or radar sensor C Lack of attention underbody, such as through parking collisions, may WARNING Covering the front camera or radar sensor can ad- move the sensors. Stone damage in the area of the D versely affect or disable the function of the system. camera on the interior mirror can impair the camera E The increased comfort offered by the system should e Always keep the radar sensor and camera area A view. This can adversely affect the system. not induce you to risk your safety. The driver remains on the interior mirror free of dirt, ice and snow. e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche F responsible when driving, such as by keeping a safe e Do not cover camera area A on the interior mirror recommends a Porsche partner as they have G distance or driving at an appropriate speed, even with objects (e.g. stickers). trained workshop personnel and the necessary when the system is activated. The system cannot parts and tools. H replace the driver's attentiveness. I e Drive with extreme care. Foot placed on the ac- WARNING e If the system-related deceleration is insufficient, celerator pedal J slow the vehicle down immediately using the K footbrake. The system does not brake automatically when the e Make sure that it is possible to take over control foot is placed on the accelerator pedal. Placing the L of the vehicle at all times. foot on the accelerator may override cruise and dis- tance control. M Unsafe traffic situations e When the system is activated, remove your foot N WARNING and unfavourable road from the accelerator pedal. O conditions Braking behaviour at WARNING P Use of the system may cause accidents if the cur- Stop and Yield signs rent situation does not permit driving safely at an Q adequate distance from the vehicle in front and at a The system assists the driver when approaching R constant speed. Stop and Yield signs if they are stored in the navi- The system assists the driver when turning off and gation data. This will only slow down the vehicle but S driving on exits. If conditions are particularly poor, Fig. 145: Location of the radar sensor not brake it to a standstill. T unwanted driving situations may arise. e You should brake to a standstill when approach- U The vehicle may accelerate to the set speed in areas ing Stop signs and, where the traffic situation near construction sites. requires it, when approaching Yield signs as well. V e Do not use the system in heavy traffic, in the vi- W cinity of construction sites or in built-up areas. e When turning off and driving on exits while the X system is active, be sure to indicate in good time, Y take particular care and, if necessary, take Z Fig. 146: Windscreen camera 199 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

Detecting traffic light A WARNING Information – in the case of oncoming vehicles and cross traffic signals B e Take action and brake if necessary. In some cases, the system automatically identifies e The system does not detect traffic light signals. Drive with extreme care and always pay attention C that driver intervention is necessary. In such cases, a to the traffic conditions and vehicle e You should take control of the vehicle at traffic corresponding message appears in the instrument surroundings. D lights that require your vehicle to brake and stop. cluster. E ° Vehicles changing lanes or cutting in and F Inadequate braking WARNING System limitations narrow vehicles power during automatic G Unfavourable road and braking by the system WARNING H weather conditions If the system detects that braking assistance is re- Radar sensor vision can be impaired by rain, snow, I quired on the part of the driver, a warning signal ice, fog, loose gravel or spray. Vehicles in front will sounds and a warning symbol appears on the in- J not be detected properly or may not be detected at strument cluster. In this case, the braking power of K all. the system is not sufficient to prevent a collision. Reflective objects such as ice, heavy rain, guardrails L e You must brake immediately in this case. or tunnel entrances may impair the functionality of M the radar sensor. A message indicating that the sys- The system is switched WARNING tem is not available will appear on the instrument N off. cluster. O The system switched off if the following situations e Do not use the system under such conditions. P arise: – PSM is deactivated. Undetected vehicles or Q WARNING – The driver’s door is opened. objects – The driver’s seat belt is unfastened. R The radar sensor detects a narrow, cone-shaped – Drive position N or R is selected. Fig. 147: Vehicles changing lanes or cutting in (A) and nar- S area in front of your vehicle. As a result, vehicles or row vehicles (B) – The parking lock or parking brake is activated. objects may not be detected in time or cannot be T Vehicles changing lanes will not be detected until – While driving on private roads and field tracks or detected in the following situations: on streets where traffic calming measures are in they are completely in the same lane and within the U – in the case of vehicles that change lanes or cut in place (e.g. residential streets). detection range of the sensors. – in the case of vehicles with a small cross-section V – Where the vehicle is in a position that cannot be or narrow vehicles detected clearly by the system. W – when driving into and out of bends – In a country that has not been enabled. – in the case of stationary vehicles X – At a speed limit of under 30 km/h. – in the case of vehicles with large overhangs Y e You need to take control of the vehicle in such – in the case of pedestrians, cyclists and animals situations. Z – in the case of objects on the road

200 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

Cornering and stationary vehicles Vehicles with large overhangs braking until your vehicle is stationary and starts A driving again automatically as soon as the vehicle in front drives off again. A detected vehicle and the fact B that the vehicle has started driving again will be in- C dicated on the instrument cluster. D In bends E Navigation data and vehicle information is used to adapt the speed to the road ahead. F Tight bends detected in advance are displayed on G Fig. 149: Vehicles with large overhangs the instrument cluster and the speed of the vehicle is reduced in good time. The speed calculated for the H If there is a vehicle in front with a long overhang bend is also indicated through the speed prediction I (such as a timber lorry), the radar sensor may possi- system. If no bend ahead warning is displayed, the bly not detect the end of the vehicle or detect it speed will only be reduced slightly or will not be re- J incorrectly. duced at all. Vehicle handling in bends is also influ- K enced by the driving mode selected. Responding to warning messages L Always heed any warning and information messages At roundabouts, junctions and on uphill and M Fig. 148: Cornering (C) and stationary vehicles (D) displayed in the vehicle. downhill slopes > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information N When driving into and out of bends, vehicles will not When navigation is active or when the driver indi- messages" on page 271. be detected or will be detected too late, or the sys- cates in good time, PID reduces the speed before the O tem will react to vehicles in adjacent lanes. vehicle starts to change direction. A corresponding P A stationary vehicle or obstacle that appears sud- Operating principle display appears on the instrument cluster. denly in the detection range of the radar sensor, Porsche InnoDrive (PID) is a driver assistance sys- Q such as after a vehicle in front changes lanes or at tem that assists the driver when driving on well- Information the end of a traffic jam, can only be detected by surfaced country roads and motorways. R Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) to a limited extent. Using navigation data as well as data from radars When route guidance is active in the navigation S and cameras, PID detects both the area directly system, PID always orients itself according to the around the vehicle and the route ahead, determines proposed route. If route guidance is not active, it T adapts to the most plausible route. the best possible driving strategy in advance and U adapts the speed accordingly. V PID can assist the driver in the following situations: On roads with speed limits W Vehicle driving ahead PID uses navigation data and data from cameras (traffic sign recognition) to automatically detect the X If a vehicle was detected ahead, PID brakes if the speed limit within the system limits and changes the vehicle is driving slower than the set desired speed desired speed accordingly. Y and keeps the distance from the vehicle ahead con- stant in the preselected range. PID can continue Z 201 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

A Speed limits detected in advance are displayed on Controls Display elements the instrument cluster and the speed of the vehicle B is reduced in good time. If a speed limit is not de- C tected in advance, the speed will not be reduced until the vehicle is driving past the detected traffic D sign. E Consideration of speed limits is active automatically when PID is activated. F G At Stop and Yield signs When approaching Stop and Yield signs, a message H appears in the instrument cluster and the speed is I reduced if the traffic signs are stored in the naviga- tion data. It is up to the driver, however, to brake the J vehicle to a standstill. K If the driver accidentally continues driving at a Stop sign, PID switches to passive mode and can be acti- L vated again afterwards by the driver. M If the driver continues driving at a Yield sign, PID re- mains active, passes the Yield sign at a reduced Fig. 150: Control stalk for driver assistance systems Fig. 151: PID display N speed and accelerates again to the previously set R Switch systems on/off and open the options menu A Own speed O speed as soon as the traffic situation allows it. The S Open the options menu (when the system is switched B Event up ahead: Display on speedometer and via sym- previously set speed can be resumed again immedi- on) bols (or one of the symbols) P ately by pressing RESUME. 1 Set/increase the desired speed C Set speed 2 Reduce the desired speed D Status display Q 3 RESUME: Resume control, adopt speed/confirm speed limit R 4 CANCEL: Interrupt control Status display symbols S Symbol Meaning T U PID is passive. V W PID is passive at set desired speed. X Y Z

202 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

Symbol Meaning Temporarily passive Information A This mode is set while the accelerator pedal is B PID is active at set desired speed. pressed when PID is active. The last selected driver assistance system is re- – A message indicating that PID is passive appears tained even after switching it off and operational C readiness is restored. on the instrument cluster. D – The status display is grey. PID is active. A speed limit was de- – There is no control. Switching off PID E tected ahead or the set desired speed – The stored target speed and selected target dis- e Press the R button on the control stalk. F was not yet reached. tance are retained. The set desired speed is deleted. – Control is active again after releasing the accel- The desired distance is stored. G A vehicle was detected ahead while erator pedal. H the desired speed was set. A vehicle Activating PID I symbol is displayed instead of the Switching PID on and off b PID switched on. speedometer symbol. J The system that was selected last is always Setting the current driving speed as the desired switched on. The system is initially in passive mode speed K when switched on. It must first be activated before 1. Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed Operating states the control function starts working. L using the accelerator pedal. Passive Switching the PID on 2. Briefly press the control stalk forward (position M b No driver assistance system has been switched This mode is set after switching on and when PID is 1) and release the accelerator pedal. N on yet. active after pressing the brake pedal and after PID is active. The current speed is set as the desired O pressing down the control stalk (CANCEL). 1. Press the R button on the control stalk. speed, shown in the status display and automatically maintained unless a slower vehicle is detected – The status display is grey. The options menu for the driver assistance sys- P tems appears on the instrument cluster. ahead. – There is no control. 2. If PID is not already selected, select PID using Q – The desired speed stored and desired distance Setting the detected speed limit as the desired the rotary knob on the steering wheel and press set are retained. speed R to confirm. b Consider speed limits activated. PID is switched on and passive. S Active e Press the control stalk upwards (RESUME) and This mode is set after setting the desired speed, Switching from an already activated driver assis- release the accelerator pedal. T after resuming control (RESUME) and after tempo- tance system to PID PID is active. The current detected speed limit is U rarily overriding control by pressing the accelerator 1. Press the S button on the control stalk. set as the desired speed, shown in the status pedal. The options menu for the driver assistance sys- display and automatically maintained unless a V – The status display is green or blue. tems appears on the instrument cluster. slower vehicle is detected ahead. W – The speed and distance from the vehicle in front 2. Select PID using the rotary knob on the steering are regulated subject to the recognised speed wheel and press to confirm. X limit (if activated) and the road ahead. PID is switched on and passive. Y Z

203 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

A Information Changing the desired distance The set speed limit is displayed in the status display in blue. B > Please refer to chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control – Speed limits are only considered when PID is (ACC)" on page 34. C activated. Setting the maximum speed – The set maximum speed is adopted for roads On roads with no speed limit or if no speed limit has D with no speed limit. Overriding speed and distance control temporarily been detected, the maximum speed will be set as E – When the system is active, it is also possible to the desired speed. If a speed limit is detected, the > Please refer to chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control switch the driver assistance system using the S following applies: F button. The newly selected system is in passive (ACC)" on page 34. – If the maximum speed is above the speed limit, mode after switching. G the speed limit will be set as the new desired H Interrupting and resuming cruise speed. control and distance control – If the maximum speed is below the speed limit, I Changing the desired speed > Please refer to chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control the maximum speed will be set as the new de- The set desired speed or the detected speed limit (ACC)" on page 34. sired speed. J can be changed by pressing the control stalk. K b PID is active. Setting the maximum speed Braking to a standstill and driving L Increasing the speed e e Assistance e e Assistance system e Push the control stalk forward (position 1). off again settings e Porsche InnoDrive e Maximum M – Press briefly = 1 km/h (1 mph) increments > Please refer to chapter "Adaptive Cruise Control speed – Press and hold = 10 km/h (6 mph) (ACC)" on page 34. N The maximum speed set remains active until it is increments O reset, even with a change of driver or when the ve- Reduce speed Activating and deactivating con- hicle is restarted. P e Pull the control stalk (position 2). sideration of speed limits Q – Pull briefly = 1 km/h (1 mph) increments Additional information – Pull and hold = 10 km/h (6 mph) increments e e Assistance e e Assistance system e e R settings Porsche InnoDrive Consider speed Example of how Porsche InnoDrive works limits S Resetting the changed desired speed to the The example below compares two scenarios when detected speed limit T driving into a city with a 50 km/h (30 mph) speed e Briefly push the control stalk up (RESUME). Manually considering a detected speed limit limit - one scenario with the Consider speed limits U The currently detected speed limit is confirmed. If the consideration of speed limits is deactivated, function activated and the other with the Consider Porsche InnoDrive still displays detected events speed limits function deactivated. V Discarding an automatically accepted speed such as bends, grades and vehicles driving ahead. A W limit detected speed limit can be manually accepted by e the driver. X Push the control stalk up for longer (RESUME). The set speed limit is discarded and the previ- b Consideration of speed limits deactivated. Y ously set desired speed is retained. b The speed limit is detected and appears grey in the status display. Z e Push the control stalk up (RESUME). 204 Porsche InnoDrive (PID)

Consider speed limits function activated C A speed limit of 50 km/h (30 mph) has been A The vehicle regulates the speed to the de- A detected ahead (e.g. built-up area boun- sired speed of 100 km/h (60 mph) set by B dary). The vehicle progressively reduces the the driver. speed until the municipal boundary is C reached. B The driver sets the speed 5 km/h (3 mph) D higher. The vehicle regulates the speed to The detected speed limit is displayed in 105 km/h (63 mph). E blue. F D When the municipal bounday is reached, PID C After driving past a 50 km/h (30 mph) regulates the speed to the new speed limit speed limit sign, the vehicle regulates the G of 50 km/h (30 mph). speed to the desired speed of H 105 km/h (63 mph) set by the driver. The speed limit of 50 km/h (30 mph) is I Consider speed limits function deactivated displayed in grey on the instrument cluster. J

D The driver acknowledges the currently de- K tected speed limit of 50 km/h (30 mph) by L pressing up the control stalk (RESUME). The M Fig. 152: Example of driving with the Consider speed limits vehicle regulates the speed to function activated 50 km/h (30 mph) and the set desired N speed appears green in the status display. O A The vehicle regulates the speed to the de- If the speed is set again before reaching the tected speed limit of 100 km/h (60 mph). traffic sign, the set desired speed will be P displayed in blue. B The driver sets the desired speed Q 5 km/h (3 mph) higher based on the de- R tected speed limit. The vehicle regulates the speed to 105 km/h (63 mph). S T U

Fig. 153: Example of driving with the Consider speed limits V function deactivated W X Y Z

205 Porsche Stability Management (PSM)

A Porsche Stability Manage- – The vehicle decelerates and steering-wheel Activating PSM Sport forces are altered as PSM controls the brakes B Limited PSM support ment (PSM) – Reduced engine power WARNING C – The brake pedal pulsates and its position is General safety instructions In PSM SPORT mode, PSM support is limited in crit- D changed during braking Loss of control over the ical driving situations outside the ABS control range. WARNING E vehicle Automatic Brake Differential e PSM SPORT mode should always be switched off If one wheel of a driven axle starts to spin, it is during "normal" driving. F PSM does not reduce the risk of accidents owing to braked so that the other wheel on the same axle can e Never activate PSM SPORT mode when driving an inappropriate driving speed. G be driven. with a spare wheel. The increased safety provided should not induce you H to take greater risks with your safety. The physical Anti-slip Regulation b Vehicles with Sport Chrono package. I driving limits cannot be overcome, even with PSM. The Anti-slip Regulation system prevents the wheels In PSM SPORT mode, the system is switched to a e particularly sporty mode. J Despite PSM, the driver remains responsible for from spinning by adjusting the drive power, thereby adapting the driving style and manoeuvres to the ensuring good lane-holding ability and stable e Press the button briefly. K road and weather conditions, as well as the traf- handling. The button lights up yellow and PSM SPORT is L fic situation. displayed on the instrument cluster. Drive drag torque control M In excessively slippery conditions, the drive drag Switching off PSM Responding to warning messages torque control system prevents all driven wheels N No PSM support Always heed any warning and information messages from obstructing when the vehicle is accelerating. WARNING O displayed in the vehicle. This is also the case when downshifting on a slippery > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information road. When PSM is switched off, PSM support is no longer P messages" on page 271. provided in critical driving situations outside the ABS Anti-lock brake system (ABS) Q control range. The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels R Operating principle e PSM should always be switched on during "nor- from locking during full braking. Porsche Stability Management (PSM) is an active mal" driving. S control system for stabilising the vehicle in extreme > Please refer to chapter "ABS brake system (Anti- e Never switch off PSM when driving with a spare driving situations. It is automatically enabled when lock Brake System)" on page 207. T wheel. operational readiness is established. The main com- U ponents of the PSM system are the Automatic Brake Steering torque pulse V Differential (ABD) and Anti-slip Regulation (ASR) The steering torque pulse provides the driver with systems, the drive drag torque control system and steering assistance when braking on road surfaces W the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS). with differing friction values. Targeted pulses also assist the driver during countersteering. X PSM adjustments can be indicated by the following: – The PSM warning light flashes on the instru- Y ment cluster. Z – Hydraulic noises can be heard

206 Porsche Stability Management (PSM)

PSM SPORT or PSM OFF no longer appears on Multi-collision braking A the instrument cluster. During an accident, multi-collision braking can help B the driver reduce the risk of skidding and further ABS brake system (Anti-lock collisions during the accident through automatically C Brake System) initiated braking. D Loss of control over the WARNING Prerequisites E vehicle Multi-collision braking only works: F Fig. 154: PSM OFF button ABS does not reduce the risk of accidents owing to – in the event of front, side and rear-end collisions G e Press and hold the button for at least an inappropriate driving speed. – if the airbag control unit detects a corresponding activation threshold during an accident 2 seconds. The increased safety provided should not induce you H – if an accident occurs when the vehicle is travel- The button lights up yellow and PSM OFF is to take greater risks with your safety. The limits set ling at a speed of more than approx. 10 km/h I displayed on the instrument cluster. by the laws of driving physics cannot be overcome, even with ABS. J Information Information e Despite the advantages of ABS, the driver is re- K sponsible for adapting his or her driving style and When you brake in the ABS control range, the vehicle The vehicle is decelerated automatically by the PSM L is stabilised even when PSM is switched off. One- manoeuvres in line with road and weather con- system, provided the hydraulic brake system, PSM, sided spinning of the wheels is prevented even when ditions, as well as the traffic situation. and electrical system remain undamaged and op- M erational during the accident. PSM is switched off. N Operating principle In exceptional situations, however, it can be advan- O tageous to switch off PSM temporarily: The anti-lock brake system (ABS) prevents the Exceptional conditions wheels from locking during full braking. This gives P – on loose surfaces The following activities prevent automatic braking in the vehicle improved driving stability and manoeu- – in deep snow the event of an accident: Q vrability in hazardous situations. – when "rocking the vehicle free" – The driver presses noticeably on the accelerator ABS begins to take control as soon as one wheel pedal. R shows a tendency to lock. – The braking pressure exerted by the driver on the S Information This controlled braking process is comparable with brake pedal is stronger than the brake pressure extremely rapid cadence braking. A pulsating brake T When PSM SPORT mode is active, it is only possible applied by the system. pedal and a "juddering noise" alert the driver to to switch to PSM OFF mode if PSM was activated U adapt his or her driving speed to the road conditions. beforehand. V Performing full braking with ABS W Switching PSM back on Full braking is necessary: e Fully depress the brake pedal during the entire X e Press the button. braking operation, despite the pulsing pedal. Do Y PSM is active immediately. not reduce the braking pressure. The button lights up white. Z

207 Porsche Vehicle Tracking System (PVTS)

A Porsche Vehicle Tracking Information being moved without the Driver Card being present. B System (PVTS) For vehicles with the smartphone app Porsche – Sabotage: PVTS was used without authorisation. 1 C Connect or Car Connect some PVTS Plus settings – Break-in alarm: The alarm system was triggered General safety instructions can be implemented directly using the app or at and has been active for more than 15 seconds. D www.porsche.com/connect. Responding to warning messages E Detailed information on installation, functions and Information Always heed any warning and information messages management of the contract can be found at: www. F displayed in the vehicle. porsche.com/connect. – There is no guarantee that the theft of a vehicle > G Please refer to chapter "Warning and information will always be detected. messages" on page 271. – The PVTS alarm can be triggered even if the ve- H Scope of delivery and initial hicle battery is flat. I Operating principle activation PVTS is a GSM/GPS-based tracking system that al- J PVTS is tested by your Porsche partner and acti- Information lows a Security Operating Centre (SOC) to locate the vated together with the vehicle owner. vehicle if it is stolen. It can then be found by the K Following activation, the vehicle owner receives im- Note for Belgium / Luxembourg: authorities. L portant details, such as the telephone number of the If the Driver Card remains in the parked vehicle for As soon as PVTS detects a theft alarm, the location local Security Operating Centre (SOC) and of your longer than 30 minutes, it becomes invalid. In order M of the vehicle in question is sent to the Security Op- service provider. to reactivate the card, disarm mode must be acti- erating Centre (SOC). PVTS vehicle equipment is Detailed information on activating the system is vated via the app, customer portal or Security Oper- N available in two versions depending on whether the available at www.porsche.com/connect or from a ating Centre (SOC). driver is in possession of a Driver Card: O Porsche partner. – PVTS Plus with Driver Card P Information – PVTS without Driver Card Functions Q – If the vehicle was stolen, the Security Operating The PVTS vehicle equipment is affected by the in- Vehicle tracking is only carried out if the vehicle is Centre (SOC) can prevent the engine from R surance and legal requirements in the relevant stolen. In this case, a notification is sent to the starting. country. If you have questions about the installed specified mobile phone number. The location of the S PVTS variant: – For vehicles with the smartphone app vehicle is not specified in the notification for safety 1 T e Contact your Porsche partner. reasons. Porsche Connect or Car Connect in case of theft, access to the app or My Porsche the ve- e Contact the Security Operating Centre (SOC) if U hicle is prevented. your vehicle is stolen. In addition, report the theft V to the competent police authority. W The following alarms can be set: – Unauthorised movement of the vehicle: The ve- X hicle is being moved with the ignition switched Y off. For vehicles with a Driver Card: The vehicle is Z 1. (available in some countries) 208 Porsche Vehicle Tracking System (PVTS)

Operating the PVTS without a Information If the vehicle is not transported in transport mode, A Driver Card the system may trigger a false alarm, which is also – Do not put the Driver Card in the luggage com- subject to a charge (further information is available B When PVTS is operated normally, no intervention on partment or engine compartment or in the im- at www.porsche.com/connect). C the driver's part is required. mediate vicinity of metal (e.g. coins) or a mobile phone. Activating and deactivating transport mode D Operating PVTS Plus with Driver – Vehicles are very often stolen using stolen driv- e Contact the Security Operating Centre (SOC) E er's keys. Do not fasten the Driver Card to the before transporting the vehicle and when you Card F PVTS Plus can be activated and deactivated auto- driver's key. have finished transporting the vehicle. matically using a Driver Card. – or – G e Using the Porsche Connect, Information Car Connectsmartphone app1 or at www.por- H The PVTS Plus can detect up to 7 Driver Cards per sche.com/connect, before transporting the ve- I vehicle. Only one Driver Card must be present in the hicle and when you have finished transporting J vehicle. If you wish to add, delete or replace a Driver the vehicle. Card: K e Contact your Porsche partner. Service L PVTS must be set to vehicle servicing mode in the Driver Card malfunction following situations: M Fig. 155: PVTS Plus Driver Card In exceptional cases (e.g. interference from radio – during customer service (e.g. for regular N servicing) Activating PVTS Plus with the Driver Card waves), the Driver Card may not be detected. A O warning message appears on the instrument cluster. – when the vehicle battery is disconnected e Switch off the ignition and take the Driver Card If the vehicle is not serviced in vehicle servicing P with you when you leave the vehicle. Driver Card emergency deactivation mode, the system can trigger a false alarm, for which If the Driver Card is far enough away from the Q e If PVTS Plus cannot be deactivated using the you may be billed (further information is available at vehicle, PVTS Plus will be activated after approx. Driver Card (e.g. if the Driver Card battery is flat www.porsche.com/connect). 70 seconds. R or the Driver Card has been lost), contact the S Theft of the vehicle can be detected. Security Operating Centre (SOC) to have the Activating and deactivating service mode system deactivated, or activate "Disarm mode" e T Deactivating PVTS Plus with the Driver Card Contact the Security Operating Centre (SOC) using the app or at www.porsche.com/connect. before having the vehicle serviced or after the e U Store the Driver Card in the centre console of the vehicle has been serviced. vehicle or keep it on you. Transport e When your vehicle is being serviced, please in- V PVTS Plus is deactivated when the Driver Card is form the relevant employee at the qualified spe- located inside the vehicle. If the vehicle is to be transported (e.g. on a ferry), W transport mode must be activated. cialist workshop or the Porsche partner that your vehicle is equipped with PVTS. X Y Z 1. (available in some countries) 209 Porsche Vehicle Tracking System (PVTS)

A Information B In the case of vehicle equipment PVTS Plus, the C Driver Card and driver's key must be handed to Cus- tomer Service to ensure that PVTS Plus is deacti- D vated for a service. E F Changing the Driver Card battery G Internal chemical burns WARNING Fig. 156: Changing the PVTS Plus Driver Card battery H or death from swallowing the lithium button cell 1. Remove the Driver Card cover (1.–3.) I 2. Carefully open the battery cover on the Driver The Driver Card contains a lithium button cell J Card using a suitable tool (e.g. a screwdriver) (battery). (4.). K Swallowing the battery can lead to internal chemical 3. Change the battery (check polarity). L burns within two hours and thus to death. 4. Close the Driver Card and press it shut firmly. e Keep children away from removed or new Make sure that the cover on the Driver Card has M batteries. firmly clicked in place. N e Keep the Driver Card away from children. Chil- dren may open the Driver Card and remove the O battery. P e If the battery has been swallowed or inserted in- to a bodily orifice, seek medical attention Q immediately. R If the battery in the Driver Card is too weak, a text S message will be sent automatically to the specified mobile phone number. A message appears on the T instrument cluster. U V W X Y Z

210 Rear lid

Rear lid Release button underneath the rear lid at the b Parking lock and parking brake activated. A outside (rear skirt). Centre console control panel B General Safety Instructions – or – Gesture using your foot. e e C Uncontrolled opening or WARNING e Press the appropriate button to resume one- closing of the automatic The tailgate opens as far as the set opening D touch operation. height. rear lid E Danger of injury as a result of uncontrolled opening Opening the tailgate Central display F or closing of the automatic rear lid. e e Setting e Vehicle e bonnet, tailgate G e Open or close the rear lid only when the vehicle is Opening the tailgate using the release button and charging ports e Opening the tailgate stationary. H The tailgate opens as far as the set opening e Open or close the rear lid only when there are no height. I persons or animals within its movement range. e Always keep a close eye on the opening and J closing operation so that movement can be Opening the tailgate with the driver's key K stopped at any time in the event of danger. b Parking lock and parking brake activated. e Press the button on the driver’s key. L NOTICE All doors on the vehicle are unlocked. M The tailgate opens as far as the set opening N Risk of damage as a result of uncontrolled opening or height. closing of the rear lid. Fig. 157: Tailgate release button O Opening the tailgate using foot movement e Make sure there is sufficient clearance behind b Vehicle unlocked (vehicles without Comfort P and above the vehicle (e.g. roof transport sys- Access). Q tems, garage ceiling). – or – e Do not allow a load to protrude over the edge of b Driver's key is carried (vehicles with Comfort R the luggage compartment. Access). S e Press the button. Interrupting the opening or closing operation All doors on the vehicle are unlocked. T in the event of danger The tailgate opens as far as the set opening U height. Press one of the following buttons to immediately V interrupt the opening or closing operation: Opening the tailgate using the centre console e W button on the driver’s key. control panel or central display Fig. 158: Foot gesture control – or – The tailgate can be closed using the flap screen on X One of the two buttons in the rear lid trim panel. the centre console control panel or using the central Y – or – display. b Ready for operation. Z 211 Rear lid

Unintentional movement A CAUTION Information Closing the rear lid of the tailgate B The foot gesture function may not be available in the Closing rear lid using button in rear lid trim If the sensors in the rear detect persons, movements C following situations: panel or objects and a valid driver's key is located at the – The weather conditions are bad (rain, snow or D rear of the vehicle, the rear lid may open or close ice). E automatically, causing injury to persons or damage – The bumper is dirty. to the vehicle. – The driver's key radio signal is interfered with F To prevent unintentional movement of the rear lid: through radio waves. G e Deactivating the function in the central display. H – or – e Deactivate Comfort Access. Adjusting the opening height of the tailgate I The opening height of the tailgate can be adjusted b Vehicles with Comfort Access. individually. J b Function activated. On vehicles with level control, always adjust the Fig. 159: Buttons in rear lid trim panel K b Driver’s key is carried. tailgate when the vehicle is at its highest level. b A Close rear lid L The max. distance to the vehicle is approx. 1. Stand behind the vehicle and open the tailgate. 75 cm. B Close rear lid and lock vehicle 2. Press the button on the driver’s key or in the M 1. Stand in a central position behind the vehicle. tailgate trim panel to stop the opening operation. e Press button A in the rear lid trim panel. N 2. Move your foot toward the vehicle and back in 3. Move the tailgate by hand to the desired opening The rear lid is closed. one sequence. height. O The tailgate opens as far as the set opening 4. Press button A in the tailgate trim panel for ap- Closing and locking rear lid using button in P height. prox. 3 seconds. rear lid trim panel The function can be activated or deactivated in the b Vehicles with Comfort Access. Q An acoustic signal confirms the programmed central display. opening height. b Driver’s key is carried. e Press button B in the rear lid trim panel. R e e e e Setting Vehicle Vehicle locking Automatic stop in the event of unintentional S systems e Tailgate comfort access The rear lid is closed and the vehicle is locked. tailgate movement T If the tailgate lowers unaided immediately after Information U opening, such as due to the weight of snow, an electrical mechanism brakes the tailgate and a series If the key is inside the vehicle when you lock it, the V of brief warning signals sound until the tailgate vehicle is unlocked again. Several warning tones stops moving. sound and the vehicle flashes 4 times. Only if a door W e Bring the tailgate to rest for approx. 1 second. or the tailgate is not opened within approx. 45 sec- onds is the vehicle locked and can only be unlocked X The automatic stop is disabled. using a second key. Y e Make sure that the driver’s key is not left inside Z the vehicle when locking it.

212 Rear lid

Closing rear lid using centre console control – or – A panel or central display e Deactivate Comfort Access. B The rear lid can be closed using the flap view on the b Vehicles with Comfort Access. centre console control panel or using the central C b display. Driver’s key is carried. b D b Ready for operation. The max. distance to the vehicle is approx. 75 cm. b Parking lock and parking brake activated. E 1. Stand in a central position behind the vehicle. Centre console control panel 2. Move your foot toward the vehicle and back in F one sequence. e e G The rear lid is closed. H e Keep pressing the central display until the rear lid is closed. Detection of obstacles during closing I A warning signal sounds and the rear lid is The closing operation is interrupted automatically if J closed. closing of the rear lid is blocked by an obstacle. A warning signal sounds and the rear lid stops K Central display moving. L 1. Remove the obstruction. e e Setting e Vehicle e Bonnet, rear lid 2. Close the rear lid automatically or slowly by hand. M and charge port door e Close rear lid N e Keep pressing the central display until the rear lid is closed. O A warning signal sounds and the rear lid is P closed. Q Closing rear lid using foot gesture R Unintentional movement CAUTION S of the tailgate T If the sensors in the rear detect persons, movements U or objects and a valid driver's key is located at the rear of the vehicle, the rear lid may open or close V automatically, causing injury to persons or damage W to the vehicle. To prevent unintentional movement of the rear lid: X e Deactivating the function in the central display. Y Z

213 Roof Transport System

A Roof Transport System driving and cause serious accidents. e Only use roof transport systems that have been tested and approved by Porsche. Conventional B e Secure the load so that it will not move during Transporting objects on the roof. the journey. roof rack systems cannot be mounted on the C e Load the roof transport system so that the load vehicle. Unsecured or incorrectly WARNING does not protrude over the sides of the roof For more information on the roof transport system: D secured roof transport transport system. Never load the roof transport e Contact your Porsche partner. system or individual E system wider than the width of the vehicle. load-carrying devices F e Do not use elastic rubber tensioners. Fitting the roof transport system An unsecured or incorrectly secured roof transport e Position the centre of gravity of the load as low b Vehicles with a panoramic solid glass roof. G system can become detached from the vehicle while as possible with respect to the roof transport H driving and cause serious accidents. system and distribute the load evenly over the load area. I e Install individual load-carrying attachments such as a ski/snowboard holder or roof box as cen- J trally as possible with respect to the supports. NOTICE K e Check the roof transport system and load-carry- ing devices before every trip and at regular in- Washing the vehicle in a car wash or failure to ob- L tervals during longer trips to ensure that they are serve the overall vehicle height or the maximum M fitted correctly and securely. permitted gross weight can damage the vehicle or e Tighten all fastening screws again. roof transport system. N e Remove the complete roof transport system be- Changed vehicle O WARNING fore washing the vehicle in a car wash. handling e Check the overall vehicle height with the roof P The handling of the vehicle changes when the roof transport system fitted before driving through Q transport system is fitted and loaded. height-restricted entrances (e.g multi-storey car parks). R e Adapt your driving style accordingly. e Do not exceed the maximum roof load, maximum e S Do not drive at a speed of more than vehicle weight and maximum axle loads. Fig. 160: Components of the roof transport system 130 km/h (81 mph) when the roof transport A Front carrier bar (long) T system is loaded. B Rear carrier bar (short) Information U e When the roof transport system is fitted but not C Cover trims D Torque wrench loaded, do not drive at a speed of more than e If you are not using the roof transport system, V 180 km/h (110 mph). E key remove it completely from the vehicle in order to F Assembly protection W optimise power consumption and reduce noise. G Adapter Unsecured or incorrectly WARNING X secured load Various objects can be transported safely and se- When fitting for the first time: curely using the roof transport system and attach- e Adjust the front and rear carriers to fit the width Y An unsecured or incorrectly secured load can be- ments, e.g. ski/snowboard holder, roof box or bicycle of the vehicle. come detached from the roof transport system while Z rack.

214 Roof Transport System

NOTICE a. Place adapter G on torque wrench D. Loosen A adjusting screws I on the two upper sides of the respective carrier using torque wrench D. B Risk of damage to paintwork and/or glass from the carrier foot. C e Secure the assembly protection to the carrier D foot while assembling the carrier. E F G H I J K

Fig. 162: Locking and folding up the cover flaps L 2. Unlock cover flap H with the key E and fold up. M N Fig. 164: Affix assembly protection O b. Secure assembly protection F to the carrier foot on the opposite side. P

Fig. 161: Open the flaps of the roof trim Q 1. Open the flaps J of the roof trim. R S T U V W X

Fig. 163: Loosen adjusting screws. Y 3. Initial assembly: Z

215 Roof Transport System

A B C D E F G H I J K

L Fig. 165: Placing the carrier on the roof Fig. 166: Tighten fastening screws. Fig. 167: Tighten adjusting screws. M c. Place long carrier A at the front and short d. Screw in all 4 fastening screws on the car- e. Tighten the adjusting screws on the tops of carrier B at the rear in the holders on the ve- riers using torque wrench D until flush with the carriers on both sides slightly, but do not N hicle K and, at the same time, adapt to the the surface, but do not yet tighten fully. yet tighten them fully. Then tighten the ad- O vehicle width by means of the adjustable justing screws on the top to a torque of 8 Nm carrier feet. using torque wrench D. In order to do this, P turn torque wrench D until you hear a "crack". Ensure that the carriers are fitted in accord- Continue with Assembly Step 4. Q ance with the stickers on the underside of the R carriers. S T U V W X Y Z

216 Roof Transport System

4. Screw in all 4 fastening screws on the carriers A using torque wrench D until flush with the sur- face. Then tighten all fastening screws to a tor- B que of 8 Nm. In order to do this, turn torque C wrench D until you hear a "crack". e Check carriers to ensure they are sitting correctly D and securely on the vehicle E F G H I J K

Fig. 168: Affix assembly protection Fig. 169: Placing the carrier on the roof L 3. Further assembly: b. Place long carrier A at the front and short M a. Secure assembly protection F to the carrier carrier B at the rear in the holders on the ve- foot on the opposite side. hicle K located in the recesses on the trims. N O P

Fig. 171: Fold down the cover flaps and lock Q 5. Fold cover flaps H of the carriers fully downwards R and mount the desired load-carrying device (e.g. S for roof box, bicycle rack) on the carrier. Then close the cover flaps and lock using key E. T U V W X Y Z Fig. 170: Tighten fastening screws. 217 Roof Transport System

A Fitting mounting components B C D E F G H I J

K Fig. 172: Cutting the profile trims to size and attaching L 6. Cut profile trims C to size and push them side- Fig. 174: Cutting the profile trims to size and attaching ways into the carriers or press them into the 1. Cut the profile trim to the length of the basic M Fig. 173: Fitting mounting components carriers from above to protect against moisture carrier. N and dirt and also to prevent wind noise. 1. Unlock cover flaps with the key and fold back. 2. Press the profile trim into the T-groove. O 2. Insert the mounting components into the T Information groove provided. P 3. Close the cover flaps and lock them with the key. Q After driving 50 km (30 mls), retighten all screws on 4. Always read the relevant installation instructions the carriers and load-carrying devices. for fitting and securing mounting components. R S Closing the profile trim T For protection against moisture and dirt and to pre- vent wind noise, the T-groove of the profile trim U should be closed when the fasteners are not in use. V W X Y Z

218 Screenwash

Screenwash For information on washer fluid concentrates ap- A proved by Porsche: Contact your Porsche partner. B Selecting washer fluid If the washer-fluid level is too low, a warning mes- sage appears on the instrument cluster. C D Adding washer fluid 1. Open the cap on the washer fluid reservoir. E 2. Add washer fluid. F > Please refer to chapter "Filling capacities" on G page 309. 3. Close the cap carefully. H I J K L M N Fig. 175: Washer fluid reservoir O Note the following points: P e Mix the water with the appropriate additives (window cleaner concentrate, antifreeze), de- Q pending on the season. Always use the right mixture ratio and read all instructions on the R containers of the additives used. S – Summer: Fill with water and window cleaner concentrate T – Winter: Fill with water, antifreeze and window U cleaner concentrate V Only use window cleaner concentrate that meets the following requirements: W – Dilutability 1:100 X – Phosphate-free Y – Suitable for plastic headlight lenses Z

219 Seat Belts

A Seat Belts accident. Information B The seat belt pretensioner system can only be trig- Using seat belts correctly gered once; the system must then be replaced. Smoke is released when the seat-belt pretensioners C are triggered. This does not indicate a fire in the Unfastened or incor- e Check all seat belts regularly for signs of damage DANGER vehicle. D rectly used seat belts to the fabric and check that the seat-belt buckle and attachment points function correctly. E Seat belts do not offer any protection in an accident e Protect seat-belt buckle from soiling and keep it Observe the seat belt warning F if they are not worn. Incorrectly worn seat belts in- clean. crease the risk of injury in an accident. e Have seat belts that are damaged or have been light and warning message G e For their own safety, all occupants of the vehicle heavily stressed in an accident replaced H must wear a seat belt on all trips. immediately. I e Share all the information in this section with your The same applies to the seat belt pre-tensioner passengers. systems and force limiters installed on the seats J e Never use one seat belt for two persons at the that have been triggered. e K same time. In addition, have the anchor points of the seat e Remove any loose or bulky items of clothing that belts checked. L prevent the seat belt from fitting correctly and Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche M restrict your freedom of movement. recommends a Porsche partner as they have e Do not lay the seat belt across hard or breakable trained workshop personnel and the necessary N objects (glasses, ball-point pens, pipes, etc.). parts and tools. O These objects may pose an additional risk of e Ensure that the seat belts are fully retracted injury. when not in use to protect them from dirt and P e Belt straps must not be twisted or loose. damage. Q Using damaged seat > Please refer to chapter "Cleaning seat belts" on DANGER R belts. page 67. S Damaged, heavily stressed or worn seat belts do not Seat-belt pre-tensioners Fig. 176: Seat belt status display in the instrument cluster T offer adequate protection in the event of an Triggering of the seat-belt pre-tensioners depends A Seat belt status display for the left rear seat on the severity of the accident. B Seat belt status display for the centre rear seat (de- U pending on the equipment) The seat-belt pre-tensioners can be triggered: C Seat belt status display for the right rear seat V – In front and rear impacts D Warning light: driver's or passenger seat belt not fastened W – In side impacts – If the vehicle turns over X Front seats Y When the vehicle is ready for operation, red warning Z light D lights up on the instrument cluster and

220 Seat Belts stays on until the driver side and occupied passenger Adjusting the seat belt Fastening seat belt A side seat belts have been fastened. B A warning symbol is also displayed on the instru- ment cluster. C When the speed exceeds approx. D 24 km/h (15 mph), a warning message sounds and red warning light D on the instrument cluster E flashes if the driver side or occupied passenger side F seat belts are not fastened. G Rear seats H When the vehicle drives off, a seat belt status dis- play for the rear seats appears for about 60 seconds I in the instrument cluster. J Green symbol A + B indicates that the person sitting in the seat in question has fastened their seat K belt. L Red symbol C indicates that the person sitting in M the seat in question has not fastened their seat belt, Fig. 177: Adjusting belt height Fig. 178: Fastening seat belt or that the seat is empty. If a seat belt on the rear N seats is opened while the vehicle is moving, a warn- The height of the belt outlets for the front seats can 1. Assume a comfortable sitting position. ing message sounds and the relevant symbol turns be adjusted. 2. Adjust the backrest so that the seat belt always O e Adjust the height of the belt outlet so that the rests on your upper body and runs across the red and flashes for about 60 seconds . P belt runs across the middle of your shoulder, not middle of your shoulder. against your neck. 3. Grasp the seat belt latch and pull the belt in a Q a. Upwards – push belt outlet upwards. slow, continuous motion across your chest and R b. Downwards – press locking button A and lap. move belt outlet downwards. S Information T The seat belt may be blocked if the vehicle is stand- U ing at an angle or if the seat belt is pulled out abruptly. V The seat belt can also jam when accelerating or de- W celerating, when negotiating bends or on inclines. X 4. Insert the belt latch into the appropriate seat- Y Z

221 Seat Belts

A belt buckle on the inner side of the seat until it 1. Hold the belt latch. locks with an audible click. 2. Press the red button on the belt buckle. B 5. Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped or 3. Guide belt latch to approx. 7 cm (2.75 inches) C twisted and that it is not rubbing against sharp underneath the belt outlet. edges. D On the front seats and the centre rear seat (de- 6. Ensure that the horizontal section of the belt al- pending on the equipment), the belt latch is held E ways fits snugly across the pelvis. Therefore, in the end position via a stopper button. after fastening the seat belt, always pull the di- On the outer rear seats, the belt latch is held in an F agonal part of the belt upwards. easily accessible position by a plastic slide (see G Pregnant women: should position the lap belt as graphic). low as possible across the pelvis and ensure that 4. Push the plastic slide under the belt latch (see H it is not pressing against the abdomen. graphic). I 7. Also pull on the diagonal section of the belt now and again during the journey to ensure that the J horizontal section remains tight. K L Opening seat-belt buckle and re- moving seat belt M N O P Q R S T U V W X

Y Fig. 179: Removing the seat belt Z

222 seats seats being squeezed or crushed when you adjust the seat. Adjusting an electric seat A e Adjust the seat so that no-one is put at risk. B Choosing the correct seat position C The correct sitting position is important for safe and NOTICE fatigue-free driving. To adjust the driver seat posi- D tion to suit individual requirements, proceed as Risk of damage to headrests, roof and sun visor. follows: E e Set the seat position to ensure sufficient clear- 1. Adjust the seat height to ensure that you have F enough headroom and a good overview of the ance between the headrest, roof and sun visor. vehicle. G 2. Adjust the seat's fore-and-aft position so that H your legs are not fully straight and your foot is touching the entire pedal surface when pressing I the pedals fully. J 3. Grip the top half of the steering wheel. Set the backrest angle and the steering wheel position K so that your arms are almost outstretched. Your L shoulders must still rest on the backrest, however. M Fig. 180: Adjusting an electric seat 4. Adjust the seat's fore-and-aft position if N necessary. 1 Seat angle adjustment 2 Seat height adjustment O 3 Thigh support adjustment Adjusting the seat 4 Seat cushion side bolster adjustment (depending on the P equipment) Adjusting the seat when WARNING 5 Seat backrest side bolster adjustment (depending on Q driving the equipment) 6 Fore-and-aft adjustment R The seat may move further than desired if you at- 7 Backrest angle adjustment S tempt to adjust it whilst driving. You may lose con- 8 Lumbar support adjustment trol of the vehicle. T e Press each control in the direction indicated by e Do not adjust the seat while driving. the arrows until the desired setting or the end U position is reached. Seat adjustment V CAUTION Storing seat settings W If persons or animals are within the range of move- For information on storing and retrieving the seat X ment of the seat, there is a risk of parts of the body settings: Y > Please refer to chapter "Personal settings" on page 180. Z

223 seats

A Using the Comfort Entry function Information e Tap softkey A (seat heating) or B (seat ventila- tion) — repeatedly, if necessary. B The Comfort Entry function makes it easier for you to get in and out of the vehicle. When the key is changed, the seat and steering The number of illuminated indicator lights shows C wheel move to the entry position stored on the driv- the selected heating or ventilation setting. Automatic adjustment of CAUTION er's key. D driver’s seat Switching off seat heating/seat ventilation E Persons behind the driver’s seat may be trapped by Information e Tap softkey A (seat heating) or B (seat ventila- tion) — repeatedly, if necessary — until all pilot F the seat as a result of automatic adjustment of the driver's seat towards the rear. Manual intervention in the seat setting interrupts the lights go out. Comfort Entry function. G e Switch off the Easy Entry function if there is a e Adjust driving position manually. H person behind the driver’s seat. Information I Seat heating is not available when the interior tem- Activating function Switching seat heating/seat ven- perature is high. J The Comfort Entry function can be activated in the tilation on and off Seat ventilation is not available when the interior K central display. temperature is below 15 °C. If the battery voltage is too low, seat heating/seat L e e Comfort e Comfort Entry ventilation is restricted initially and then switched off. M > Please refer to chapter "Vehicle settings" on N page 257. Setting front seat heating / seat ventilation O Exiting the vehicle For the front seat heating and seat ventilation, the b Function activated. P balance between the seat surface and backrest can e Press the power button, switch off the vehicle be set via the central display. Q and open the driver's door. Fig. 181: Switching seat heating / seat ventilation on and off R The steering wheel moves upwards. 1. e Comfort e Driver seat/Passenger seat e The driver's seat moves backwards. S Seat heating balance/Seat ventilation balance T Entering the vehicle 2. Set balance. b U Function activated. b Driver's seat and steering wheel are in their Setting rear seat heating V Comfort Entry positions. For the rear seat heating, the balance between the seat surface and backrest can be set via the rear W e Close the driver's door, press the power button and switch on the vehicle. display. X The driver's seat and steering wheel move to the Fig. 182: Switching rear seat heating on and off 1. e Seat heating balance left/Seat heating Y stored position. Switching on seat heating/seat ventilation balance right Z b Vehicle ready for operation 2. Set balance. 224 seats

Using the front seat massage Adjusting passenger seat from the Forwards A e Press button A and at the same time pull the function (depending on the driver's seat B headrest forwards with both hands until the de- equipment) 1. e Comfort e Adjust the passenger seat sired setting is reached. C Switching the massage function on 2. Set the passenger seat position using the con- Backwards D trols on the driver's seat. e Press button A and at the same time push the b Vehicle ready for operation E e Press the 8 (Fig. 180) button on the corre- headrest backwards with both hands until the To end the adjustment: sponding seat. desired setting is reached. F The massage function is switched on. e Select Cancel seat adjustment. Adjusting headrests on rear seats G A menu for selecting the massage programme is Headrest on occupied H displayed briefly on the central display. Adjusting headrests WARNING centre rear seat in stor- I e Touch the icon to select the massage age position strength. Adjusting headrests on front seats J The fore-and-aft position of the headrests on the Driving with headrests not adjusted correctly in- K e Touch the icon to switch the massage front seats can be adjusted. creases the risk of serious injury. function on or off. e Always make sure that the headrest is engaged e If the centre rear seat is occupied, move the L correctly. The massage function switches off automatically headrest out of its storage position and adjust it M after 10 minutes. to one of the higher, detent positions. N The height of the headrests on the rear seats can be Configuring the massage programme on the O central display adjusted. e Adjust the height of the relevant headrest so that b Vehicle ready for operation. P the upper edge of the headrest is at eye level. If Q 1. e Comfort e Driver seat/Passenger seat e eye level cannot be reached, the topmost posi- Massage programme tion of the headrest is to be selected. R e Always make sure that the headrest is engaged 2. Select the desired massage programme. correctly. S T Setting the massage strength on the central U display b Vehicle ready for operation. V b Massage programme selected. W 1. e Comfort e Driver seat/Passenger seat e X Massage strength Fig. 183: Adjusting the fore-and-aft position of headrests Y 2. Select the desired massage strength. on front seats Z

225 seats

Headrests on rear seats A WARNING Removing removed or not adjusted 1. Push headrest up as far as it will go. B correctly 2. Fold the rear seat backrest roughly half-way C forward. Driving with headrests removed or not adjusted D correctly increases the risk of serious injury. 3. Press buttons A and B and at the same time push the headrest up until button B remains engaged. e If the rear seats are occupied, install the relevant E 4. Remove the headrest and stow safely in the headrests. vehicle. F e Adjust the height of each headrest so that the 5. Fold up and engage the rear seat backrest if upper edge of the headrest is at least at eye level G necessary. or the headrest has engaged in the topmost H Swapping headrests detent. WARNING I e Always make sure that the relevant headrest is engaged correctly. J The individual headrests are designed specifically for use on the respective seats. If headrests are not fit- K ted on the correct seats during re-installation, the risk of serious injury is increased. L Fig. 184: Setting the height of the headrests on the rear seats (example: 3 rear seats) e Ensure that the headrests are not interchanged M during re-installation. Raising N e Push headrest upwards until the desired setting Installing O is reached. 1. Fold the rear seat backrest roughly half-way P Lowering forward. e Press button A and at the same time push the Q 2. Insert headrest into the guides and push it down headrest downwards until the desired setting is until it engages with an audible click. R reached. 3. Press button A and push the headrest down fully. To improve your view to the rear, the headrest on the S It should no longer be possible to pull the head- centre rear seat can be moved to a storage position rest out of the backrest. T that is lower than the lowest usable position. 4. Fold up and engage the rear seat backrest. U Removing and installing headrests Folding the rear seat backrest V Fig. 185: Removing and installing headrests on rear seats on rear seats forward W The headrests on the rear seats may have to be re- The rear seat backrests can be folded forward indi- moved in order to install a child restraint system vidually to make the luggage compartment larger. X correctly. Y > Please refer to chapter "Child Restraint Systems (Child Seats)" on page 87. Z

226 seats

NOTICE > Please refer to chapter "Adjusting headrests" vehicle is moving. A on page 225. If the red marking B is still visible, the seat backrest B Risk of damage from objects on the rear seats. 2. Bush the release button A and fold the backrest is not engaged correctly. forwards. C e Do not place objects on the seats when folding e Make sure that the red marking B is no longer visible after the seat backrest has engaged. the backrests forward. Folding the backrest on the centre rear seat D e Release the seat backrest and engage it again if forward necessary. E Information F e Fold up the backrest until it locks with an audible The backrests on the left and centre rear seats are G joined together. When you fold the left backrest click. Make sure that the seat belts are not forward, the centre backrest will also fold over. trapped. H The centre rear-seat backrest can also be folded I forward separately (depending on fittings). J

Folding outer rear seat backrests forward K L M N O P

Fig. 187: Folding the backrest on the centre rear seat Q forward R b Vehicles with 3 rear seats S e Actuate release handle A in direction of arrow and fold the backrest forward. T U Returning rear seat backrests to the upright position V Seat backrest not en- W WARNING Fig. 186: Folding outer rear seat backrests forward gaged correctly X 1. Push the headrests down. If the rear seat backrests are not engaged correctly, Y they can fold forwards unintentionally while the Z

227 Smoker's Package

A Smoker's Package Opening and closing the ashtray B Using the ashtray C Fire hazard from flam- WARNING D mable objects

E Paper in the ashtray can catch fire. F e Do not put any flammable objects into the G ashtray. H Inserting ashtray I J K L M Fig. 189: Opening and closing the ashtray N e Open and close the ashtray by lifting and folding O down the lid.

P Removing the ashtray Q e Grip the ashtray and remove it. R S T U Fig. 188: Inserting ashtray V Depending on the equipment, an ashtray is available in the cupholder in the centre console. W > Please refer to chapter "cupholder" on page 100. X e Insert the ashtray in the cupholder and press down as far as it will go. Y Z

228 Socket

Socket A B Using the 12-volt socket Electrical accessories can be connected to the 12- C volt plug socket. D The 12-volt plug sockets are located in the storage compartment in the front armrest and in the rear E luggage compartment on the right in the direction of F travel. G Connecting the charging adapter H I Information J – The 12 V plug socket and the connected electri- cal accessories function even if the vehicle is K switched off.The power supply is interrupted Fig. 190: Charging adapter for 12-volt plug sockets L after a maximum of 30 minutes to protect the A Suitable charging adapters M vehicle battery. To turn on the load again, the B Unsuitable charging adapters power button must be pushed and the vehicle N switched on. NOTICE – The maximum load capacity of a 12-volt plug O socket is 20 A but only if one load is operating. P Do not exceed a 10 A load per 12-volt plug Risk of damage to the electrical system. socket if several loads are operating e Only use suitable charging adapters (A): Q simultaneously. The distance X between the ground connection R – Unshielded devices and equipment can cause and the upper edge of the charging adapter must interference to radio reception and malfunctions be less than approx. 16 mm. S in the vehicle electronics. e Unsuitable charging adapters (B) where the dis- T tance X between the earth connection and the upper edge is more than 16 mm can damage the U 12-volt plug sockets. V W X Y Z

229 Speed Limiter (LIM)

A Speed Limiter (LIM) – areas with high volumes of traffic Information – unsafe traffic situations (driving on motorway B General Safety Instructions exits, accelerating briefly) When using navigation with active route guidance, C – a vehicle position that cannot be clearly detected the adaptive speed limiter always adapts to the pro- Lack of attention posed route. If route guidance is not active, it adapts D WARNING by the system – covered or damaged traffic signs to the most plausible route. E The increased comfort offered by the system should – damaged or covered front camera lens F not induce you to risk your safety. The driver remains – out-of-date navigation data Controls responsible when driving, e.g. keeping a safe dis- Possible consequences: G tance or driving at an appropriate speed, even when – The speed limit is not detected or adopted H the system is activated. The system cannot replace correctly. the driver's attentiveness. I – The vehicle drives at the set maximum speed. e Drive with extreme care. – An information message is displayed on the in- J e If the system-related deceleration is insufficient, strument cluster. K slow the vehicle down immediately using the e Do not use the adaptive speed limiter in such footbrake. situations. L e Make sure that it is possible to take over control M of the vehicle at all times. Operating principle N Responding to warning messages The speed limiter (LIM) helps you to stay below a certain speed you set yourself. O Always heed any warning and information messages P displayed in the vehicle. > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information Adaptive speed limiter (depending on the Q messages" on page 271. country) The adaptive speed limiter uses navigation and R camera data (traffic sign recognition) to automati- Fig. 191: Control stalk for driver assistance systems S System limitations cally detect the speed limit within the system limits Restricted availability of and changes the maximum speed accordingly. R Switch systems on/off and open options menu T WARNING S Open options menu (when system is switched on) the system Speed limits detected in advance are displayed on 1 Set/increase speed limit U the instrument cluster, and the speed of the vehicle 2 Reduce speed limit The assistance provided by the adaptive speed lim- is reduced in good time. If a speed limit is not de- V 3 RESUME: Resume control, adopt speed iter cannot be guaranteed in certain situations. tected in advance, the speed will not be reduced 4 CANCEL: Interrupt control W Such situations include: until the vehicle is driving past the detected traffic sign. X – poor weather conditions (e.g. snow or ice) – unfavourable road conditions (including pot Y holes, dirty road surfaces, ruts, unclear road Z markings, loose gravel)

230 Speed Limiter (LIM)

Display elements The options menu for the driver assistance sys- Activating the speed limiter A tems appears on the instrument cluster. Setting current driving speed as the maximum Status display symbols B 2. If LIM is not already selected, select LIM using speed the rotary knob on the steering wheel and press e Briefly press the control stalk forwards (position C to confirm. Symbol Meaning 1). Speed limiter is on and passive. D The speed limiter is active. Speed limiter is passive. E Switching from an already activated driver assis- The current driving speed is set as the maximum tance system to the speed limiter speed and appears green in the status display. F 1. Press button S on the control stalk. Setting the detected speed limit as the maximum G The options menu for the driver assistance sys- speed Speed limiter is passive with a set tems appears on the instrument cluster. H maximum speed. b The adaptive speed limiter is activated 2. Select LIM using the rotary knob on the steering e Press the control stalk up (RESUME). I wheel and press to confirm. The speed limiter is active. Speed limiter is on and passive. J Speed limiter is active with a set The detected speed limit is set as the maximum The operating status appears grey in the status dis- K maximum speed. play. If the adaptive speed limiter is active, the cur- speed and is displayed in the status display. rently detected speed limit is also displayed in grey. L Changing the maximum speed M Speed limiter is active and a speed Information The set maximum speed or the detected speed limit limit has been detected ahead. As can be changed by pressing the control stalk. N soon as the vehicle reaches the start The last selected driver assistance system is re- b Speed limiter active. tained even after switching it off and operational O of the speed limit zone, the colour of Increasing the speed the displayed speed changes from readiness is restored. P e Push the control stalk forward (position 1): blue to green. – Brief press = 1 km/h (1 mph) increments Q Deactivating the speed limiter – Press and hold = 10 km/h (6 mph) e Press button R on the control stalk. increments R Activating and deactivating the The set desired maximum speed is deleted. S speed limiter Reduce speed e Pull the control stalk (position 2): T The system that was selected last is always Information – Brief pull = 1 km/h (1 mph) increments switched on. The system is initially in passive mode – Pull and hold = 10 km/h (6 mph) increments U when switched on. It must first be activated before If the speed limiter is deactivated automatically due If the adaptive speed limiter is active, the ± symbol V the control function starts working. to a system fault, it is only deactivated completely will appear next to the maximum speed. when the accelerator pedal is released or when the W Switching on the speed limiter system is switched off by pressing the R button. b No driver assistance system has been switched X on yet. Y 1. Press button R on the control stalk. Z

231 Speed Limiter (LIM)

A Interrupting and resuming the Overriding the speed Setting the maximum speed B speed limiter limiter temporarily On roads with no speed limit or if no speed limit has Interrupting causes the system to switch to passive The speed limiter can be overridden temporarily by been detected, the maximum speed that is set will C standby mode and remain in standby until it is acti- initiating a kickdown (pressing the accelerator down be used as the top speed. D vated again manually. fully). This can be useful when overtaking, for Setting the maximum speed example. E Interrupting control b Speed limiter active. e e Assistance e e Assistance system F e Press the control stalk downwards (CANCEL). e Accelerator pedal pressed down fully. settings e Adaptive Speed Limiter e Speed limiter is passive. Maximalgeschwindigkeit G The system is temporarily passive. The maximum speed set or the speed limit de- A warning signal sounds. The set maximum speed remains active until it is H tected before interrupting is displayed in grey. The speed limiter symbol with the set maximum reset, even with a change of driver or when the ve- I speed flashes on the instrument cluster. hicle is restarted. Resuming control J To resume control: The driving speed is lower than the set maximum e Press the control stalk up (RESUME). Using a personal speed limit K speed. If the current driving speed is above the set The personal speed limits function allows you to set e Press the control stalk up (RESUME). your own speed limit. A warning message appears L maximum speed, the vehicle is slowed down un- The speed limiter is active. The set maximum til the set maximum speed is reached again. and a warning signal sounds if the limit is exceeded. M speed or speed limit set before interrupting is – or – One way the function can be used is as a reminder of resumed. Take your foot off the accelerator or press the the maximum speed permitted for the tyre type fit- N ted on the vehicle. The driving speed is higher than the set maximum brake pedal to bring the speed of the vehicle to O speed. below the displayed maximum speed. Setting and activating a personal speed limit P e Press the control stalk up twice (RESUME). The speed limiter is active. The previously set Two speed limits can be set, but only one can be The speed limiter is active. The vehicle brakes to maximum speed or the currently detected speed activated at any one time. Q the maximum speed or speed limit set before limit is resumed. e e e e R interrupting. Speed limit Assistance system Activating and deactivating the settings e Personal assistance S Information adaptive speed limiter T If a different driver assistance system is selected, e e e e U Assistance Assistance system the speed limiter is interrupted. The previously set settings e Adaptive Speed Limiter e Consider V maximum speed is retained and will be resumed recognised speed limits when the speed limiter is reactivated. If the adaptive W speed limiter is active, the currently detected speed The currently detected speed limit is set as the maximum speed. X limit is adopted. Y Z

232 Spoiler

Spoiler Moving the rear spoiler to clean- A ing position B General Safety Instructions Extending and retracting CAUTION C Failure of the extendible the rear spoiler WARNING rear spoiler D When extending or retracting the rear spoiler man- E Driving stability will be adversely affected by in- ually when the vehicle is stationary, parts of the creased rear axle lift at higher speeds. body may become trapped between the moving F spoiler and stationary vehicle parts. e Adapt your driving style and speed to the G changed driving behaviour. e Make sure that no persons or objects are within e Have the fault corrected at a qualified specialist the range of movement of the rear spoiler. H workshop. I Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they The rear spoiler can be moved manually to cleaning have trained workshop personnel and the neces- position via the central display. J sary parts and tools. Moving the rear spoiler to cleaning position K b Ready for operation L NOTICE b Parking lock and parking brake activated. M e e e e Risk of damage to rear spoiler. Setting Vehicle Spoiler manual cleaning position N e Do not pull or push the vehicle by the rear spoiler. O e Please retract the rear spoiler before using auto- matic car washes. P Q Responding to warning messages R Always heed any warning and information messages displayed in the vehicle. S > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information T messages" on page 271. U Operating principle V The rear spoiler improves driving stability at high W speeds. Depending on the vehicle speed and the se- lected drive mode, the rear spoiler is automatically X extended or retracted. Y Z

233 Sport Chrono Stopwatch

A Sport Chrono Stopwatch Stopwatch on the dashboard B The Sport Chrono Stopwatch can be used to stop, evaluate and display times on the instrument cluster. C The following information can be recorded and D evaluated: – Lap number E – Completed lap distance F – Lap time – Optional: Various other data (such as vehicle po- G sition or speed) H During a recording the following can be displayed: I – Number of the current lap – Fastest lap time and the current lap time in col- J our comparison K – How much of the lap has been completed in re- lation to a reference lap L Fig. 193: Stopwatch in the instrument cluster – Colour rating to indicate whether the current lap M time is quicker than, slower than or identical to A Lap counter the current fastest lap or selected lap Fig. 192: Sport Chrono stopwatch B Circle diagram: how much of the lap has been com- N pleted compared to a reference lap. – Remaining recording time The total time is displayed in the stopwatch on the C Control commands O Up to 10 hours can be recorded and displayed. dashboard. D Current lap time P The analogue pointer indicates the seconds. The E Lap time reference lap digital display shows 1/100 second up to the first F Selected interim time Q minute. Subsequently, the display is in second steps. Starting timing R Setting the time display and illumination of S the stopwatch on the dashboard e Sport Chrono e Start Data recording begins. If a reference lap has not T > Please refer to chapter "Vehicle settings" on page 257. been loaded, the first lap is used as the refer- U ence lap. V Stopwatch in the instrument Stopping timing W cluster b Timing has started. The stopwatch is displayed on the Car & Info display. X e Sport Chrono e Stop Y Z

234 Sport Chrono Stopwatch

Continuing timing A b Timing was stopped. B e Sport Chrono e Continue C D Stopping lap/starting new lap The current stopwatch time is stored as a lap time E while the stopwatch is still running. F b Timing has started. G e Sport Chrono e Lap The lap counter A is incremented by one lap. H The time of the fastest completed lap is stored I as the fastest lap time. J Storing interim time K b Timing has started. L e Sport Chrono e Interim time M The intermediate time is displayed briefly and is not stored. Timing continues in the background. N The F area in the circle diagram shows every set O interim time. P Resetting the stopwatch time Q b Timing was stopped. R e Sport Chrono e Reset S All stopwatch time displays are reset to zero. T U V W X Y Z

235 Starting, driving and stopping the vehicle

A Starting, driving and stop- Drive positions Starting and driving the vehicle B ping the vehicle Establishing readiness for operation b C General Safety Instructions High-voltage battery is sufficiently charged. D b Disconnect the vehicle plug from the vehicle Reduced driving noise charge port. WARNING E with electric vehicles b Driver's key in passenger compartment. F Even when E-Sound is switched on in accordance Automatically G with legal requirements, an electric vehicle produces e Get in and shut the driver's door. Driver's key is very little driving noise, which means that other road detected in the passenger compartment. H users might not even hear it. There is therefore a risk Ready for operation. I of accidents, particularly in areas with traffic calm- Manually ing, while manoeuvring or parking. J e Be particularly attentive while driving! K L Operating principle M A distinction is made between readiness for opera- tion (standby) and readiness to drive. Both are acti- Fig. 194: Drive position display N vated separately. The following drive positions are available: O D — Drive Readiness for operation P Drive position D for driving forwards. When you get into the vehicle, the key you have with R — Reverse gear Q you is detected by the vehicle and readiness for op- Drive position R for driving in reverse. eration is established automatically. Some electrical Only engage while the vehicle is stationary and the R equipment and electronic systems, such as the cen- brake is applied. tral display, are available. S N — Neutral e To save the battery, only leave the vehicle in T Drive position N must be engaged while the vehicle standby (ready for operation) and only use the is being transported or in car washes, for example. U active electrical equipment for as long as is ab- solutely necessary. P — Park Fig. 195: Power button V Drive position P for securing the vehicle. b Readiness for operation switched off. Drive positions D, R and N are selected using the W Readiness to drive e Press the Power button. Driver's key is detected selector lever to the right of the steering wheel, The vehicle is ready to drive when drive position D, N in the passenger compartment. X while drive position P is selected by pressing the P or R is engaged. The vehicle is now ready to drive Ready for operation. Y and can be moved. button. Z

236 Starting, driving and stopping the vehicle

Establishing readiness for operation and driv- Driving off at high acceleration (Launch Energy recovery (recuperation) A ing off Control) Unsuitable use of B b Ready for operation. Driving off at high WARNING WARNING recuperation b Vehicle plug removed from the charge port, acceleration C charge port door closed and charging cable Recuperation is a system that is used only for energy D safely stowed. When driving off at high acceleration, you may lose recovery. It is not a driver assistance system and 1. Press the brake pedal. control of the vehicle or endanger other road users cannot take over any driver assistance system tasks. E under certain circumstances (poor road conditions, 2. Select transmission range D or R with the selec- e Do not use the deceleration effect of recupera- lack of attention, etc.). F tor lever. tion as a distance control system. The parking lock and the electric parking brake e Only drive off at high acceleration on public roads e Always be ready to brake and stay a safe dis- G are deactivated automatically. if the road and traffic conditions permit. tance away from the vehicle in front. H 3. To drive off, release the brake pedal and slowly e Do not endanger other road users when driving e For greater braking power or for braking the ve- I press the accelerator pedal. off at high acceleration. hicle to a standstill, press the brake pedal as The range depends on, among other things, the The vehicle already permits you to drive off at an required. J driving style, the climatic conditions, the use of en- extremely high rate of acceleration in normal driving ergy-intensive loads and the selected vehicle set- Automatic overrun recu- K mode. Maximum acceleration from a standstill is WARNING tings, e.g. driving mode. achieved using Launch Control, however. peration limited or not L available Driving off with Launch Control M Information The maximum overrun recuperation is limited. b Vehicle is at a standstill. N The readiness for operation is switched off in the b Readiness for operation established. The detection capability of the sensors can be im- following situations: b Steering wheel is not turned. paired by soiling, bad weather conditions (rain, snow, O – with corresponding settings in the energy man- b Drive position D selected. ice, fog, spray) and unfavourable road conditions P agement system b Driving mode SPORT or SPORT PLUS activated. (stone chippings, reflective objects). Vehicles up Q – if the vehicle was locked from outside 1. Press the brake pedal with your left foot. ahead may not be adequately detected, or may not – by opening the driver's door and the driver's seat 2. Quickly press down the accelerator fully and hold be detected at all. R belt in drive positions D or R If automatic overrun recuperation (Auto setting) is it down. S – by pressing the P button A message appears on the instrument cluster. not available, e.g. if sensors are dirty, a message to – by other systems that, for example, automatically 3. Release the brake pedal within a short space of this effect will appear in the instrument cluster. T activate drive position P or request the activation time. e Do not use automatic overrun recuperation in U of P if there is an error Vehicle accelerates to the maximum. conditions of poor visibility and bad road conditions. V Information W Stress on components increases dramatically when Operating principle X starting with maximum acceleration in comparison During recuperation, the drive converts most of the Y with normal driving off. kinetic energy into electrical energy, which is stored in the high-voltage battery. A distinction is made Z

237 Starting, driving and stopping the vehicle

A between overrun recuperation and braking Information Driving in coasting mode recuperation: B "Coasting" is the term used to describe driving – Overrun recuperation starts as soon as you take The deceleration effect of overrun recuperation can without the braking effect of overrun recuperation. C your foot off the accelerator pedal and slows be limited if the charge state of the high-voltage This function is designed to increase efficiency by down the vehicle. You can configure the overrun battery is high, for example. D reducing power consumption and increasing the recuperation strength. e Compensate for reduced overrun recuperation by range. Coasting occurs after the accelerator pedal is E – When you press the brake, braking recuperation pressing the brake if necessary. fully released slowly. Coasting ends when the accel- increases the amount of recuperated energy to a The overrun recuperation strength is displayed in erator pedal is pressed. F maximum. A higher braking request is then the power meter. b Driving in transmission range D. G achieved using the vehicle's wheel brakes. b PSM is active. Selecting overrun recuperation level H b No severe uphill or downhill gradients. Overrun recuperation settings e Press the recuperation button on the steering b Recuperation is switched off. I The following overrun recuperation settings can be wheel: e Slowly remove your foot from the accelerator selected: – Quick press = Switch overrun recuperation on J pedal. and off K Set- Dis- Meaning – Press and hold = Switch automatic overrun ting play recuperation (Auto) on and off Information L – or – Coasting mode is also possible in "SPORT" and Off No dis- No overrun recuperation. M "SPORT PLUS" driving modes. The overrun recuper- play Vehicle coasting. e Drive e Recuperation (accelerator pedal) N ation setting that is activated as standard for these The selected setting is shown on the instrument driving modes must be switched off when selecting On Overrun recuperation with O cluster. these modes. moderate deceleration of P the vehicle. Information Q Auto Variable adaptation of over- Automatic overrun recuperation is only available Stop, park and exit the vehicle run recuperation based on when PSM is active. Automatic overrun recuperation Inactive power steering R WARNING data relating to the area is not available in "PSM SPORT" mode. and brake booster S around the vehicle. T The power steering and brake booster are only ef- Information fective when the vehicle is ready for operation. If the U vehicle is not ready for operation, much greater force The various overrun recuperation settings are as- is required to turn the steering wheel or brake. V signed to the driving modes, but can also be freely e Only turn the vehicle off when it is stationary. W selected by the driver. Personalisation is possible in the INDIVIDUAL driving X mode. Y Z

238 Starting, driving and stopping the vehicle

Danger of the vehicle Electric parking brake is WARNING Activating the P drive position manually WARNING A rolling away deactivated B In the following situations, the parking brake is not If the vehicle is turned off using the power button on C active and the vehicle may roll away. an incline or gradient, the electric parking brake may – Leaving the vehicle with the N drive position not be activated (e.g. in the case of a slight incline or D gradient). The vehicle can roll away. engaged. E – If the driver door is opened and the driver's seat e Always press the P button to activate the parking belt is unfastened, the parking brake is deacti- brake on inclines and gradients before turning off F vated when the brake pedal is applied and the D the vehicle. G or R drive position is selected again. Fig. 196: Parking lock and electric parking brake button This can result in injury and damage to the vehicle. A Activating and deactivating the electric parking H warning about the danger of the vehicle rolling away b Hold the vehicle still by pressing the brake pedal. brake manually. I is displayed on the instrument cluster. e Press the P button. The electric parking brake can be activated or deac- J e Before leaving the vehicle, activate the parking The parking lock and the electric parking brake tivated on the central display independently of the P brake by pressing the P button. are activated simultaneously. drive position. K The brake warning light and the P drive po- sition display light up on the instrument cluster e e Setting e Vehicle e Electric parking L Stopping the vehicle brake Activating the P drive position automatically M e For a brief stop (e.g. at traffic lights), leave the The brake warning light lights up or goes out. b Hold the vehicle in place by pressing the brake N selector lever in the D drive position and hold the pedal. vehicle with the brake pedal. Responding to warning messages b D or R drive position selected. O e The HOLD function actively holds the vehicle The brake warning light flashes if the electric e Open the driver’s door and driver side seat belt. P automatically at a standstill after braking to a parking brake has not been applied fully in a sta- The parking lock and the electric parking brake stop on an incline. tionary vehicle. are activated automatically. Q If it was not possible to activate the parking lock, a The brake warning light and the P drive po- Parking the vehicle warning appears in the instrument cluster. R sition display light up on the instrument cluster Selecting the P drive position secures the vehicle Always heed any warning and information messages S – or – against rolling away. displayed in the vehicle. e Turn off the vehicle using the power button. T > Please refer to chapter "Warn- und Information- The parking lock is activated automatically. smeldungen" on page 271. U The P drive position display lights up on the in- strument cluster. Turn off the vehicle and get out. V The parking brake is also activated when parking b Parking lock and parking brake activated. W the vehicle on inclines and gradients of over 8%. e Exit and lock the vehicle. X The brake warning light lights up. The vehicle is turned off. Y Z

239 Starting, driving and stopping the vehicle

A Information B If you do not exit the vehicle, the vehicle may also be C turned off by pressing and holding the power button (approx. 1 second). D

E Information F The vehicle is turned off automatically in the follow- G ing situations: – after 30 minutes H – Battery charge level below minimum limit I J Additional information K L Leaving the vehicle in drive position N In drive position N, driving readiness is switched off M after 30 seconds in the following situations: N – Parking brake is not activated – Driver’s door is opened and driver’s seat belt is O not fastened P – Brake pedal is not pressed Q R S T U V W X Y Z

240 steering wheel steering wheel position to the tilt of the backrest and seat Storing steering wheel settings A position. On vehicles with memory package, the steering B Adjusting steering wheel 3. Swivel the lever back to the initial position, to- wheel settings can be stored on the memory buttons wards the driver until you feel it engage. in the driver door and on the driver's key. C Adjusting the steering WARNING > Please refer to chapter "Personal settings" on wheel while driving D Adjusting the steering wheel electrically page 180. Uncontrolled retrieval of E The steering wheel may move further than desired if CAUTION you attempt to adjust it while driving. You may lose the memory settings Operating instrument cluster with F control of the vehicle. If persons or animals are within the range of move- multi-function steering wheel G e Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. For further information on operating the instrument ment of the steering wheel while it is being adjusted, H there is a risk of body parts being trapped or cluster: > Adjusting steering wheel manually crushed. Please refer to chapter "Operating the instru- I ment cluster" on page 129. e Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended. J Switching steering wheel heating K on/off L M N O P Q R S T U Fig. 197: Steering wheel adjustment lever Fig. 198: Steering wheel adjustment control switch V 1. Swivel the lever downwards, away from the driver. e Move the control switch under the steering col- W umn in the relevant direction until the desired 2. Move the steering wheel vertically and horizon- Fig. 199: Heated steering wheel button X tally in order to adjust the steering wheel setting is reached. b Ready for operation. Y e Press the button on the central steering wheel spoke until the message Steering wheel heating Z 241 steering wheel

A or Steering wheel heating appears briefly on the instrument cluster. B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

242 Storage

Storage Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has the > Please refer to chapter "Driver's Key" on A following additional storage options: page 104. B Stowing objects – Storage tray with side boundaries under the centre console control panel C Unsecured or incorrectly Opening the storage compartment WARNING – Storage tray on the centre tunnel in front of the D positioned objects rear seats in the armrest An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load can slide – Storage net in the boot Opening the storage compartment in the E or be thrown about and injure the vehicle occupants – Bag hook in the boot front armrest F as a result of hard braking, direction changes or an G accident. Opening and closing the glove box e Only use the storage options described in these H instructions. I e Always transport objects in lockable storage compartments where possible. J e Stow objects so that they cannot slip or slide K around in the aforementioned situations. e Always ensure that objects are not protruding L from storage compartments or luggage nets. M e Do not transport heavy, hard, pointed, sharp- edged or fragile objects in open storage com- N partments or trays. O e Keep lockable storage compartments closed while driving. P

The vehicle offers the following storage options: Q

– glove box Fig. 201: Opening the storage compartment in the front R – Front and rear drink holders armrest S – Clothes hooks on the B-pillars and the rear grab Fig. 200: Opening the glove box e Press the button on the driver side of the handles T armrest. – Storage compartment under the boot floor Opening the glove box Lid opens automatically. U – Storage compartment in the front armrest e Pull the handle. – Storage compartment and bottle holder in the Glove box opens automatically. V front and rear door panel Closing the glove box W – Open storage compartments on the left and right e Close the cover by pressing on it. in the boot X The glove box can be locked and unlocked using the – Open storage compartment between the rear emergency key. Y seats (vehicles with 2 rear seats) Z

243 Sun Visors

A Sun Visors B Adjusting sun visor C D E F G H I J K

L Fig. 203: Opening vanity mirror M e Open the cover of the vanity mirror on the inside of the sun visor. N The vanity mirror light comes on. O Fig. 202: Adjusting sun visor NOTICE P e Swivel the sun visor down to prevent glare from the front. Risk of damage to the vanity mirror cover. Q If you are dazzled from the side: e R e Unclip the sun visor from the inner bracket and Do not force the cover beyond its end position. swivel it round so that it is in front of the side S window. T U Opening vanity mirror Cover of vanity mirror V CAUTION open W The mirror glass may break in the event of an acci- X dent and may fall into the passenger compartment if Y the cover is open. e Z Keep the cover closed when driving.

244 Towing

Towing Towing the vehicle manufacturer. Observe the manufacturer's A safety and operating instructions. B Tow-starting and push-starting e Observe the permissible towing force of the towing rope or towing bar. The towing rope or C the vehicle towing bar must be approved for the vehicle D NOTICE weight. Never exceed the manufacturer’s specifications. E e The towed vehicle must not be heavier than the Danger of significant damage to the vehicle as a re- F sult of tow-starting or push-starting. towing vehicle. e Vehicles with defective brakes must not be G e Never tow-start or push-start the vehicle. towed. e Do not attempt to tow the vehicle. Fig. 204: Permissible towing H e When towing, screw the towing lug to the ve- e Call a roadside assistance or breakdown recovery hicle before the towing rope or towing bar is se- I service. cured to the towing lug. e Have the vehicle transported with both axles on a J > Please refer to chapter "Using the towing lug" recovery vehicle, car transporter or trailer. on page 245. K e Tie the vehicle down only at its wheels. Do not attach tension straps to the towing lug. Using a towing rope L e Always keep the towing rope taut when towing. If the high-voltage battery is defective or fully dis- Avoid jerky and sudden loads. M charged, the vehicle can only be started after the N high-voltage battery has been recharged. Using a towing bar e e Call in a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche Do not attach the towing bar diagonally between O the vehicles. recommends a Porsche partner as they have P trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. Using the towing lug Q > Please refer to chapter "12-volt battery" on R page 282. Information S e Always observe the laws governing vehicle T Fig. 205: Impermissible towing transport. > Please refer to chapter "Transporting the vehicle e Before starting off, the driver should become U on car trains, ferries and car transporters" on familiarised with the special conditions that ap- V page 246. ply to vehicle transport. W Towing another vehicle X e For specifications and mounting instructions, please refer to the manual from the accessory Y Z

245 Towing

A Transporting the vehicle on car B trains, ferries and car transporters 1. Tie the vehicle down only at its wheels. Do not C attach tension straps to the towing lug. D 2. Deactivate interior surveillance and the inclina- tion sensor. E > Please refer to chapter "Alarm System" on F page 54. G 3. Activate Porsche Vehicle Tracking System Plus (PTVS Plus) transport mode. H > Please refer to chapter "Transport" on page 209. I J K

L Fig. 206: Towing lug in front Fig. 207: Towing lug at rear M Fitting the front towing lug Fitting the rear towing lug N The towing lug is stored in the tool kit. The towing lug is stored in the tool kit. > > O Please refer to chapter "Luggage compartment" Please refer to chapter "Luggage compartment" on page 153. on page 153. P 1. Press the lower edge of the plastic cover into the 1. Press the top edge of the plastic cover at the Q bumper until the cover disengages. marking, and carefully disengage the plastic 2. Pull the plastic cover out of the bumper and let it cover using a suitable tool. R hang by its thread. 2. Pull the plastic cover out of the bumper and stow S 3. Screw in towing lug A anti-clockwise as far as it it safely in the vehicle. will go (left-hand thread) and tighten hand-tight. 3. Screw in towing lug A anti-clockwise as far as it T will go (left-hand thread) and tighten hand-tight. U Removing the towing lug V 1. Screw out towing lug A clockwise (left-hand W thread). 2. Insert the plastic cover at the lower edge of the X opening. Y 3. Fold i[ the plastic cover and press on the upper edge until it engages in the bumper. Z 4. Store the towing lug in the tool kit. 246 Traffic sign detection

Traffic sign detection System limitations Display elements A The assistance provided by the system cannot be B General Safety Instructions guaranteed if traffic signs are covered or damaged. C Lack of attention Responding to warning messages WARNING D Always heed any warning and information messages Responsibility when driving, e.g. choosing an appro- displayed in the vehicle. E priate speed, remains with the driver even if traffic > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information F sign recognition is being used. The system is no messages" on page 271. substitute for attention on the part of the driver. G e Drive with extreme care. Operating principle H e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and Traffic sign recognition (availability dependent on I the area around the vehicle. country) detects speed limits, the beginning and end e Adapt your driving speed to traffic conditions. of no-overtaking zones as well as bend ahead signs. J Traffic signs are evaluated and shown on the instru- Failure of camera to de- ment cluster using camera (A) and the navigation K WARNING tect traffic signs system's map data. L If a traffic sign is confined to a certain time or Camera vision can be impaired by various factors, e. M weather conditions (e.g. fog or wet), the detected Fig. 209: Traffic sign display on the instrument cluster g. rain, snow, ice, heavy spray, oncoming headlights, sign is compared with the information provided by N reflections, dirt or damage. the vehicle (e.g. rain sensor, navigation data and A Main traffic signs time) and possibly displayed. B Additional signs O Sometimes the camera cannot detect traffic signs or C Bend ahead warning cannot detect them correctly. When this happens, In countries where traffic sign recognition is not P no speed limit or bend ahead warning, or an incorrect available, a message appears on the instrument Up to 3 main traffic signs (A) including additional speed limit or bend ahead warning is displayed. cluster. signs (B) can be displayed on the instrument cluster. Q Traffic signs on the road always have priority. The highest priority traffic sign is displayed on the R left. e Always pay attention to traffic signs when driv- S ing on public roads. The bend ahead warning (C) is issued approx. 150 m e Drive with extreme care. before a bend and continues until the bend has been T passed. e Always pay attention to the direction of travel. U e Clean the camera lens regularly and keep free of Speed limit display snow and ice. V e Do not cover the camera lens, and check for After operational readiness is established, the most recent valid speed limit appears on the instrument W damage regularly. Fig. 208: Windscreen camera cluster. If no speed limit is detected or if traffic sign X recognition is not available in the current area, a message appears on the instrument cluster. Y Z

247 Traffic sign detection

A Information B – In zones with traffic calming or residential C streets, the display reads "5 km/h" (3 m/h). – At unsigned motorway and dual carriageway en- D try and exit points, the relevant speed limit for E country roads is displayed. F G Speed limit warning display – The first time the speed limit is exceeded, the H sign flashes once. I – A red frame appears around the sign that flashes for 10 seconds. J – The frame then remains constantly lit up. K L Speed limit warning A speed limit warning with a warning threshold of M 0 km/h – 10 km/h (0 mph – 5 mph) can be set in N the central display. The function must also be acti- vated. When the set threshold is exceeded, the rel- O evant traffic sign is highlighted on the instrument P cluster. Q Setting and activating speed limit warning

R e e Assistance e e Assistance system S settings e Traffic sign recognition T U V W X Y Z

248 Tyres and Wheels

Tyres and Wheels against loss of pressure in two stages (yellow and A red tyre pressure warning, depending on the extent In addition to correct tyre inflation pressure and B correct wheel alignment, the service life of the tyres of the pressure loss). also depends on your driving style. Abrupt accelera- The tyre pressure warning light goes out only when C the tyre pressure has been corrected. tion, high cornering speeds and heavy braking in- D crease tyre wear. Tyre wear is also greater at higher The yellow tyre pressure warning is displayed for outside temperatures and on rough road surfaces. around 10 seconds after the car comes to a stand- E still and is switched off or when the vehicle is turned F Complying with load and speed on again. The yellow tyre pressure warning can be acknowledged when the vehicle is turned on. The red G requirements tyre pressure warning also appears during driving e Drive at an appropriate speed. and can be acknowledged. H e Do not overload the vehicle, and check the roof e If the tyre pressure warning light lights up and a I load. tyre pressure warning is displayed despite the > Please refer to chapter "Technical Data" on correct tyre pressure: Visit a qualified specialist J page 308. workshop. Porsche recommends a Porsche part- K ner as they have trained workshop personnel and Checking tyre pressure Fig. 210: Tyre-pressure plate fixing point the necessary parts and tools. L The tyre inflation pressure must match the pre- M NOTICE scribed value. These values are for cold tyres (20 ° Information C). N Tyre Pressure Monitoring gives a warning about a Insufficient tyre pressure can cause tyres to over- e Observe tyre-pressure plate. O pressure drop caused by natural diffusion as well as heat and thus be damaged – even invisibly. e Check the tyre pressure at least every 2 weeks about a gradual loss of pressure caused by foreign P when the tyres are cold. e Hidden tyre damage will not be eliminated by objects. Tyre Pressure Monitoring cannot warn you Q correcting the tyre pressure. about tyre damage that occurs suddenly (e.g. a flat e Never let air out of warm tyres. When tyres are Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) tyre due to unexpected external effects). R warm, the tyre inflation pressure is increased. Tyre Pressure Monitoring offers the following S This could cause the tyre pressure to fall below functions: Defective tyres WARNING the prescribed value. – Permanent monitoring of tyre pressure and T temperature. – Display of actual tyre pressure (actual pressure) Driving with defective tyres can result in serious U while driving. accidents. V – Tyre pressure warnings in two stages (yellow and e When a red tyre pressure warning appears on the red warning). instrument cluster: stop immediately in a suit- W – Vehicle is stationary: Display of the pressure de- able place and check the tyres for damage. If X viation from the required pressure. necessary, correct the damage using tyre sealant Y The tyre pressure warning light and a corre- Z sponding message on the instrument cluster warn 249 Tyres and Wheels

A or fit the spare wheel. > Please refer to chapter "Operating the instru- > Please refer to chapter "Configuring Tyre Pres- e Do not continue driving with defective tyres. ment cluster" on page 129. sure Monitoring (TPM) on the central display" on B Have defective tyres replaced immediately. Visit The display of the actual pressure is only for infor- page 250. C a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recom- mation. The tyre pressures change depending on the mends a Porsche partner as they have trained temperature. D Configuring Tyre Pressure Moni- workshop personnel and the necessary parts and e Under no circumstances should the tyre pres- toring (TPM) on the central E tools. sures be changed based on this display. e Do not drive with tyres in which the tyre pressure display F drops again very quickly. In case of doubt, have Checking the pressure deviation in the in- Incorrect settings G tyres checked by a qualified specialist workshop. strument cluster WARNING H Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the neces- Low or high tyre pressure irreparably damages the I sary parts and tools. tyre and the wheel, lengthens the braking distance and greatly increases the risk of an accident. J Despite the Tyre Pressure Monitoring system, it is K Faults in the Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) still the driver’s responsibility to ensure that the system tyres are inflated with the correct tyre pressure and L TPM will not function correctly in the following sit- the vehicle settings are correct. Incomplete or in- M uations, for example: correct settings may affect the accuracy of warnings – If the Tyre Pressure Monitoring is faulty N Fig. 211: Example of pressure difference and messages. – If wheel transmitters for Tyre Pressure Monitor- b Vehicle is stationary. e Adapt tyre pressure to suit your specific tyres O ing are missing and the payload. – During the learning phase after the tyre settings e Tyre info e Pressure deviation P e Make sure that the settings in the TPM menu have been updated > Please refer to chapter "Operating the instru- correspond to the tyres fitted on the vehicle and Q – After a wheel change without updating the tyre ment cluster" on page 129. its payload (especially after a wheel change or settings R The difference to the required pressure is displayed changes in vehicle loading). – If tyre temperatures are too high on the relevant wheel. Example: e Then select the type and size of fitted tyre again S If –0.1 bar (–1.5 psi) is displayed for the rear right in the TPM menu, even if the settings for the Checking the tyre pressure in the instrument T wheel, 0.1 bar (1.5 psi) must be added to this tyre. newly fitted set of wheels are the same as for the cluster The displayed pressures take into account the tyre old wheels. U The individual tyre pressures are only displayed temperature. V above a speed of approx. 25 km/h (16 mph) or if the e Always use the pressure deviation from the dis- tyre has been inflated by at least 0.1 bar (1.5 psi). play or from the corresponding tyre pressure Accessing filling information W When the vehicle is turned on after the vehicle has warning to correct the tyre pressure. b Vehicle is stationary. X been stationary for more than approx. 10 minutes, lines (-.-) will appear instead of the tyre pressures. Setting tyres e e Setting e Vehicle e Tyre pressure Y monitoring e Tyre info e Current press. Settings for tyre type, tyre size and load can be ad- Z justed via the central display: Load, tyre type and tyre size settings are displayed:

250 Tyres and Wheels

If the tyres have not yet been registered dashes (-.-) e e Setting e Vehicle e Tyre pressure Inflating tyres A are displayed instead of the tyre pressures. monitoring e tyre selection Hot filling hose CAUTION B Displaying pressure difference Selecting full load or partial load C b Vehicle is stationary. The compressor’s filling hose can get hot during the D e e Setting e Vehicle e Tyre pressure inflation process and can cause burns. e e e e Setting Vehicle Tyre pressure monitoring e full load e Wear gloves. E monitoring e pressure deviation Full load The compressor is housed in the right-hand box in F Displaced are the required pressure and the pressure Full load is activated. deviation from the required pressure for each wheel the front luggage compartment. G Full load along with the load, tyre type and tyre size > Please refer to chapter "Luggage compartment" Partial load is activated. H information. on page 153. Example: If –0.1 bar (–1.5 psi) is displayed for the e Adapt the tyre pressures to the selected load > Read and follow the operating instructions on the I type. compressor. rear right wheel, 0.1 bar (1.5 psi) must be added to J this tyre. The displayed pressures take into account 1. Screw the compressor’s filler hose onto the tyre the tyre temperature. Information valve. K e Always use the pressure deviation from the dis- 2. Connect the compressor to a plug socket in the L play or from the corresponding tyre pressure If the option Full load is not displayed, the specified vehicle and switch on the compressor. tyre pressures are valid for all types of vehicle load. warning to correct the tyre pressure. The tyre is inflated. M If the tyres are not yet taught, the new required 3. Check inflation pressure using the pressure N pressures are displayed instead of the actual pres- Teaching in Tyre Pressure Monitoring gauge and reduce tyre pressure or add more air if sure deviations. necessary. Check the inflation pressure again. O Tyre Pressure Monitoring begins to learn the tyres 4. Switch off compressor. after a wheel change, wheel transmitter replacement P Setting tyre type and tyre size 5. Unscrew the compressor’s filler hose. or update of the tyre settings. During this process, Q Tyre Pressure Monitoring recognises the wheels and Information their locations. Position and pressure information is Information R The options available depend on the model and tyre displayed as soon as Tyre Pressure Monitoring has S assigned the wheels recognised as belonging to the The tyre pressure can also be checked at a service type. For this reason, some of the selection options station and the tyres can be inflated. shown here may not be available. vehicle to the correct wheel positions. T e Before fitting tyres and wheels with dimensions During the learning process, the target pressures for U Reducing inflation pressure that are not available for selection in the TPM cold tyres (20 °C) are displayed on the central dis- menu, the missing information should be added. play and a message appears on the instrument 1. Switch off compressor. V Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche cluster. 2. Open air bleed screw on the filler hose until the W recommends a Porsche partner as they have The tyre pressure warning light on the instru- correct inflation pressure is achieved. trained workshop personnel and the necessary ment cluster remains lit until all the wheels have X parts and tools. been registered. Y e Use only tyres and wheels authorised by Porsche. Z

251 Tyres and Wheels

A Reading off inscription on tyres Y up to 300 km/h (186 mph) – If the tyre has been thermally and mechanically overloaded following a loss of pressure or other B (Y) up to 300 km/h (186 mph) as for Y previous damage. C tyres. Speeds of more than 300 km/h D (186 mph) are also possible at a max- Changing tyres and wheels imum tyre load capacity of 85 % (con- e Switch off the ignition when changing a wheel. E firmation from tyre manufacturer Lack of grip F required for speeds of more than WARNING 300 km/h (186 mph)). G In the initial period, new tyres do not yet have their H full road-holding ability or grip. Detecting tyre damage e You should therefore drive at moderate speeds I Hidden tyre damage and during the first 200 km (125 miles) to extend WARNING J rim flange damage the service life of the tyres and achieve full per- formance capability. K Hidden tyre damage can cause the tyre to burst. You L may lose control of the vehicle. e Only fit tyres of the same make and type and with the same specification number (e.g. "N..."). e Check tyres, including the sidewalls, regularly for M e Fig. 212: Inscription on tyres foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and bulges. Before fitting new tyres, inquire about their cur- rent approval status: Contact your Porsche N A Nominal width in mm e Cross kerb edges slowly and at right angles if partner. B Cross-section ratio in % possible. Avoid heavy or sharp-angled impact O e C Belt type code letter against steep and sharp kerbs or sharp-edged Use only tyre makes tested and approved by D Rim diameter in inches Porsche. P objects (e.g. stones). E Load rating code number e The deviation in tread depth on an axle must not F Speed code letter e If in doubt, have the wheel – particularly the in- Q be more than 30 %. ner side – checked by an expert. Visit a qualified e R The speed code letter F indicates the maximum specialist workshop. Porsche recommends a Only use second-hand tyres if you know their permitted speed for the tyre. Porsche partner as they have trained workshop history. S e personnel and the necessary parts and tools. Always replace both tyres on an axle so that dif- H T up to 210 km/h (130 mph) e Tyres must never be repaired under any circum- ferent profile depths will not unnecessarily influ- ence vehicle handling. stances. Sealing the tyre with the tyre sealant is U V e up to 240 km/h (150 mph) only an emergency solution to enable you to Tyres should only be fitted by professionals. Visit V drive to the nearest workshop. a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recom- W up to 270 km/h (168 mph) mends a Porsche partner as they have trained W In the case of the following tyre damage, the tyre X must be replaced for safety reasons: – Tyre damage where the possibility of a ply frac- Y ture cannot be ruled out. Z

252 Tyres and Wheels

workshop personnel and the necessary parts and If valve caps are missing, the valve is unprotected Information A tools. from dust and dirt, resulting in leaks. B e Adapt your driving style to the changed vehicle e Always screw on valve caps tightly to protect At low temperatures, juddering noises caused by the handling. valve inserts from dirt. Dirty valve inserts can tyres can occur during manoeuvering or accelerating C e cause creeping air loss. out of curves on both dry and wet road surfaces. Only use tyres with tyre pressure sensors for Tyre D Pressure Monitoring (TPM). e Replace missing valve caps immediately. The driving performance and comfort of summer e Make sure that the wheels are compatible with e Use only plastic valve caps. tyres is reduced at low temperatures below 7 °C. E the TPM system in the vehicle. For information Porsche therefore recommends that you fit winter F on suitable wheels and on the TPM system in the Using winter tyres tyres on the vehicle when temperatures are below vehicle: Contact your Porsche partner. 7 °C. G e Exceeding the maximum Extremely low temperatures below –15 °C can When changing a tyre, check the battery charge WARNING H condition of the tyre pressure sensors: Visit a permitted speed cause permanent damage to summer tyres. qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recom- Winter tyres are no longer suitable if their tread I Exceeding the maximum permitted speed can cause mends a Porsche partner as they have trained depth is less than 4 mm. workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tyres to burst. J tools. e Observe the maximum permitted speed for the K > Please refer to chapter "Technical Data" on tyre. Using snow chains L page 308. e Only fit winter tyres rated for a lower permitted Snow chains can be fitted to the rear axle only, with top speed than the specified maximum vehicle the tyre/wheel combinations listed under "Technical M speed if they bear the M+S designation or the Data" and marked for snow chain use. Information N snowflake symbol on the tyre sidewall. Observe > Please refer to chapter "Technical Data" on If new tyres are fitted to only one axle, the different country-specific laws. page 308. O tread depths on the two axles can cause a marked e Affix a sticker showing the maximum permitted e Use only the snow chains approved by Porsche P change from the previous driving behaviour to which speed in the driver’s field of vision. Observe to guarantee sufficient clearance between the you have become accustomed. This is particularly country-specific laws. wheel well and the chain. Q true when new tyres are fitted to the rear axle. The e Set the maximum permitted speed as the speed e Remove ice and snow deposits in the wheel well effect is reduced continuously, however, as tyre R limit. before installing the chains. mileage increases. e Vehicles with rear axle steering: Deactivate rear S e Install winter tyres in a timely manner before the axle steering. cold season begins. T Checking and replacing valves and e Use only tyre makes tested and approved by – e Setting e Vehicle settings e Addi- tional chassis settings U valve caps Porsche. e Before fitting new tyres, inquire about their cur- e Observe the different national regulations re- V e Use only genuine Porsche valves for the Tyre rent approval status: Contact your Porsche garding maximum speeds. Pressure Monitoring (TPM) system. W partner. e Check the valves whenever the tyres are Checking tyre tread X changed and replace them if necessary. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have Most tyres have integrated wear indicators in the Y centre of the tread. These wear indicators are trained workshop personnel and the necessary Z parts and tools. 253 Tyres and Wheels

A located in the main tread channels and display the e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche Information minimum tread depth of 1.6 mm. recommends a Porsche partner as they have B e Check the tyre tread regularly, particularly before trained workshop personnel and the necessary The tyre and wheel sizes are different on each of the C and after long journeys. parts and tools. two axles. When wheels are removed, mark the di- rection of rotation and position of each wheel and fit D Measuring the tyre tread depth Changing a wheel the wheels in accordance with this marking. E e Insert a commercially available tread depth e Only use wheels/tyres with approved dimensions Working under the gauge or calliper in the tyre tread and measure WARNING for each axle. F vehicle the tyre tread depth. Vehicle registration documents or Please refer to G The vehicle can slip off the jack. chapter "Technical Data" on page 308. H Information e Make sure that no one is in the vehicle when jacking up and changing a wheel. Uneven tyre wear indicates a defect on the vehicle: I e Raise the vehicle only at the prescribed jacking Caring for wheel attachment faces e Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche points on the vehicle underbody. J recommends a Porsche partner as they have e Never jack up the vehicle when it is parked on a trained workshop personnel and the necessary K surface that slopes up, down or to the side. parts and tools. L e Only use the jack to raise the vehicle for chang- ing wheels. M Storing wheels e Always place the vehicle on solid supports when N Tyres must not be more than 6 years old. Chemical working under the vehicle. additives, which make the rubber in the tyre elastic, O > Please refer to chapter "Jack and Lifting Plat- lose their effect over the course of time and the form" on page 138. P rubber becomes brittle. The age of a tyre can be Q seen from the DOT code on the tyre sidewall. If the last four digits are 3016, for example, the tyre was Information manufactured in the 30th week of 2016. R The tools needed for changing wheels (jack, wheel e S Always store wheels in cool, dry and dark condi- bolt wrench, mounting aids, etc.) are not included in tions. Tyres without rims should be stored in a the standard scope of supply for the vehicle. T standing position. e For information on the tool required: Contact e U Do not store summer tyres or park vehicles fitted your Porsche partner. with summer tyres at ambient temperatures be- Fig. 213: Wheel attachment faces V low –15 °C. e W Avoid contact with petrol, oil and grease. X Balancing wheels Y As a precaution, have wheels balanced in spring (summer tyres) and before winter (M+S tyres). Z

254 Tyres and Wheels

NOTICE Using security wheel bolts result in serious injury and damage. A e Manually set Normal Level and switch off the B Risk of damage to the wheel and wheel attachment levelling system before lifting the vehicle. face. C e The wheel attachment face B on the brake disc e e Setting e Vehicle e Additional chassis D settings e Deactivate chassis adjustment and on the wheel hub itself must not be greased. E e Only the areas A may be greased. Grease these before using a jack ® F areas very thinly with Optimoly TA: Contact your 1. Activate the electric parking brake. Porsche partner. Do not use any other grease or 2. Turn off the vehicle. G paste. 3. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling H away, e.g. by placing wheel chocks at the wheels Caring for wheel bolts on the opposite side. I e Always clean the wheel bolts before fitting. 4. Slightly loosen the wheel bolts or wheel nuts on J e Wheel bolts must not be greased. the wheel to be changed. K e Replace damaged wheel bolts. Only use genuine 5. Lift the vehicle only at the specified jacking Porsche wheel bolts intended for this particular points. L model or wheel bolts of similar quality which > Please refer to chapter "Jack and Lifting have been manufactured according to Porsche Fig. 214: Adapter for security wheel bolts Platform" on page 138. M 6. Raise the vehicle until the wheel lifts off the specifications and production requirements. The adapter for the security wheel bolts is located in N e Tighten wheel bolts to a tightening torque of ground. the tool kit. O 160 Nm (118 ftlb.). e To loosen and tighten the wheel bolt with an- e Do not use any force-activated tools such as titheft protection, the adapter must be used be- P impact screwdrivers. tween the wheel bolt and the wheel bolt wrench. Q e When positioning the adapter ensure that it en- gages fully in the teeth of the wheel bolt. R S Changing a wheel T Preparing the vehicle U Control operation of the WARNING V levelling system W A vehicle on which the levelling system is activated X can move unexpectedly or tip or fall off lifting equipment, e.g. a jack or lifting platform. This can Y Z

255 Tyres and Wheels

A Changing a wheel 1. For vehicles without PCCB: Remove one wheel bolt and screw in one assembly aid. B – or – C 1. For vehicles with PCCB: Remove two wheel bolts and screw in two assembly aids A and B. D E NOTICE

F The brake discs can become damaged in the case of G improper wheel change, especially in vehicles with PCCB. H e Screw in assembly aids when changing a wheel. I 2. Remove the remaining wheel bolts. J 3. Remove the wheel. K 4. Fit a new wheel. L 5. Insert wheel bolts and tighten slightly in diago- nally opposite sequence. M 6. Remove assembly aids and screw in remaining Fig. 215: Screw in one assembly aid on vehicles without wheel bolts. Initially tighten wheel bolts only N PCCB slightly in diagonally opposite sequence so that O the wheel is centred. P 7. Inflate the tyre if necessary. 8. Lower the vehicle fully and remove the jack. Q 9. Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonally opposite R sequence. Do not use any force-activated tools such as impact screwdrivers. S 10.Immediately after changing a wheel, use a tor- T que wrench to check the prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts (1600 Nm / U 1180 ftlb.). V 11.The settings for Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) are updated. W > Please refer to chapter "Teaching in Tyre X Pressure Monitoring" on page 251. Y

Z Fig. 216: Screw in two assembly aids on vehicles with PCCB

256 Vehicle settings

Vehicle settings A Different vehicle settings can be adjusted depending on the model, country and equipment. The vehicle settings described here are therefore not available in all B models, countries and equipment versions. For safety reasons, some functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary. C The vehicle settings remain stored after the vehicle is switched off. > Please refer to chapter "Personal settings" on page 180. D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

257 Vehicle settings

A System settings B What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? C – D Configuring general system settings (language, e Touch e Setting e System. time, units, etc.) – Language and keyboard E – Date and time F – Units G – Reset system to factory settings H Display settings I J What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? K Configuring general display settings (brightness, e Touch e Setting e Displays. – L touch tone setting, etc.) – Central display M – Touch control panel – Instrument cluster N – Additional instrument O P Volume settings Q What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? R Adjusting the volume (navigation announcements, – S e Touch e Setting e Volume. ParkAssist, etc.) – Nav. announcements T – ParkAssist U – Volume reduced when ParkAssist is active – Speed dependent volume V – Lane departure warning W – Call tone X – Message tone – Mute navigation during call Y Z

258 Vehicle settings

Sound settings A B What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? C – Setting the sound (treble/bass, balance/fader) e Touch e Setting e Sound. D – Bass and treble E – Balance and fader F Voice control settings G H What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? I Configuring voice control settings > p. 264 e Touch e Setting e Voice control. J – Activation with "Hi Porsche" – Short dialogue K – Interrupt voice control L – Online voice recognition M N Vehicle settings O What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? P Q Configuring vehicle settings / using vehicle func- e Touch e Setting e Vehicle. tions (unlocking when approaching the vehicle, R folding in mirrors, tyre selection, activation of dy- – Spoiler manual cleaning position > p. 233 S namic high beam, etc.) – Electric parking brake > p. 61 – Quick access buttons > p. 125 T – Bonnet, tailgate and charging ports > p. 57 U – Vehicle locking system > p. 69 – Tyre pressure monitoring > p. 249 V – Light and visibility > p. 147 W X Y Z

259 Vehicle settings

A Assistance system settings B What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? C D Adjusting assistance system settings (warning e Touch e Setting e Assistance systems. signal volume, warning time setting, etc.) E – ParkAssist > p. 176 F – Porsche Active Safe > p. 267 – Porsche InnoDrive > p. 199 G – Adaptive Speed Limiter > p. 230 H – Lane departure warning > p. 144 – Lane Change Assist I > p. 139 – Night View Assist > p. 171 J – Traffic sign recognition > p. 247 K – Personal speed limits > p. 230 – Dangerous situations L – M Notification centre N O What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? > P Configuring notification settings e Touch e Setting e Notification centre. p. 173 Q – Allow notifications – Notification tone R

S Radio settings T U What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where?

V Configuring radio settings e Touch e Setting e Media. – W – Traffic notices – Station tracking in case of weak reception X – Online station tracking in case of weak Y reception Z

260 Vehicle settings

Porsche Connect settings A B What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? C > p. 196 Configuring settings for Porsche Connect (privacy, e Touch e Setting e Privacy and Porsche D etc.), displaying the Legal Notice and data privacy Connect. information E F Set-up wizard G

What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? H

> I Calling up the set-up wizard e Touch e Setting e Set-up assistant. p. 180 When you start the PCM for the first time, the Set- J up assistant is displayed and guides you through K important steps for configuring the PCM. L The Set-up assistant can also be accessed manually. M N Software information O

What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? P Q Displaying software information (version, e Touch e Setting e Software information. – components) R S T U V W X Y Z

261 Vehicle settings

A Drive B What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? C Set drive mode > p. 106 D e Touch e Drive e Drive mode. > E Set chassis tuning e Touch e Drive e Chassis. p. 187

F > Set chassis height e Touch e Drive e Chassis height. p. 187 G > H Set recuperation e Touch e Drive e Recuperation (accelerator). p. 236

I > Set E-sound e Touch e Drive e E-Sound. p. 106 J > p. 106 K Configure Individual drive mode e e Drive e e Individual drive mode configuration Touch. L > M Configure Range drive mode e e Drive e e Range drive mode p. 106 N configuration Touch. O Assistance P Q What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where?

R Switch basic assistance systems on e Touch e Assistance e Basic assistance. S The basic assistance systems are designed for safety and should always be switched on. – Porsche Active Safe > p. 267 T – Emergency Stop Function > p. 112 U – Night View Assist > p. 171 V > Display ParkAssist e Touch e Assistance e ParkAssist. p. 176 W Switch assistance systems on X e Touch e Assistance. Y Z

262 Vehicle settings

What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? A

– Lane Keep Assist > p. 144 B – Active Lane Keeping > p. 30 C – Manoeuvring Assist – D – Rear Cross Traffic Alert – E – Intersection Assist > p. 136 – Lane Change Assist > p. 139 F – Traffic sign recognition > p. 247 – Traffic Jam Pilot G – H

Trip I J What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? K

Display trip data (average fuel consumption, range, e Touch e Trip. – L driving time, etc.) M

Configure how trip data is displayed e Touch e Trip e Personal trip. – N O Reset trip data e e e – Touch Trip Reset trip data. P Q Comfort R What do I want to do? What should I choose? Where? S

Adjust ambient lighting (brightness, colour) e Touch e Comfort e Ambient lighting. T U Set comfort functions on driver/passenger seat e e e > p. 223 Touch Comfort Driver seat/Passenger V (massage function, seat heating/seat ventilation seat. balance) W > X Switch comfort entry function on e Touch e Comfort e Comfort Entry. p. 223 Y Adjust passenger seat from the driver's seat > p. 223 e Touch e Comfort e Adjust passenger seat. Z

263 voice control

A voice control B Quick overview Voice control C This brief overview does not replace the compre- D hensive descriptions. Safety messages and warn- E ings, in particular, are not replaced by this brief overview. F For information on operating Porsche G Communication Management (PCM): H > Please refer to chapter "Porsche Communication Management (PCM)" on page 190. I J K Fig. 217: Using voice control L What do I want to do? What do I have to do? Where? M > N Starting voice control e Press the button on the steering wheel. p. 264 O An acoustic signal sounds and a corresponding window (see A) appears in the central display. P > p. 266 Q Displaying the voice control settings e Tap (see B) in the central display.

R Due to the various usage options, the features de- certain circumstances. Selected Precool/heat, Ergonomics, Media, Naviga- S scribed here are not available in all models, countries e Do not use voice control in an emergency. tion and Phone functions can be activated, and con- and equipment versions. trolled and used simply and easily via voice T e Enter the emergency number using the central Impaired voice display. commands. WARNING U recognition A Help function is available under Voice control. The voice control system communicates with the V Your voice may change in stressful situations. This driver, thereby providing assistance for using the Using voice control vehicle and completing various tasks while driving. W can lead to the desired telephone connection failing b Vehicle ready for operation. It is your helpful companion and can be used inter- or not being established quickly enough under b No phone call active. X actively. The voice control system acts on and reacts b Parking aid is not active. Y to voice input, makes suggestions, performs searches based on your queries and incorporates Z environmental data. 264 voice control

Starting voice control via steering wheel Pausing voice control Ending external voice control (e.g. Siri) A b Voice control is active and waiting for a voice > Please refer to chapter "Apple CarPlay" on B command. page 55. e C e Tap in Zentraldisplay. Press the button on the steering wheel. The dialogue will be paused and can be re- A fading acoustic signal sounds. D started by tapping again. Notes on communication using voice control E Note the following points when using voice control: F Ending voice control – Speak clearly and at a normal volume. b Voice control is active and waiting for a voice G – Stress voice commands evenly, without long Fig. 218: Steering wheel with voice control button command. pauses in your speech. H e Press the button on the steering wheel. 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. – Reduce disruptive sounds caused by closing – or – I An acoustic signal sounds and a corresponding doors, windows and sliding roof, for example. Say Cancel. J window appears in the central display. – Voice control is optimised for the driver. A fading acoustic signal sounds. 2. Say the voice command. K Interrupting voice control via button Using natural voice commands L Starting voice control via the central display The voice control system is operated using natural The voice output of the voice control can be inter- voice commands and can work using various types M 1. Tap e in Zentraldisplay. rupted during the dialogue. of spoken commands. N An input request sounds and a corresponding e Briefly press the button on the steering – Use natural instructions, such as "Set air condi- window appears in the central display. wheel. tioning to 22 °C.", "Turn on Shiatsu massage." or O 2. Say the voice command. "Drive me to Parliament Street, London. P Interrupting voice commands via voice input – Say what you need, e.g. "I'm cold" or "I want to go The search results are limited to the currently se- The voice commands of voice control can be inter- to a charging station." Q lected quick filter bar, for example, if the quick filter rupted during the dialogue, for example, to say other – Use situation-related voice commands, e.g. bar Media is selected, only search results for this voice commands or execute voice commands im- R quick filter bar are displayed. "Avoid motorway." or "I would like to park here." mediately. Activate the function in Zentraldisplay: – Ask for information, e.g. "What's my battery S charge level?" or "What's the weather like in Starting voice control by saying "Hey e Tap e Setting e Voice control e T Porsche" London?" Interrupt voice control. U b "Hey Porsche" activated: – Use general search queries or questions, e.g. "What can I do in the Media area?" or "How does V e e e Starting external voice control (e.g. Siri) voice recognition work?" 1. Setting Voice control Activation W with "Hey Porsche" > Please refer to chapter "Apple CarPlay" on – Use main functions, e.g. "I would like to see the page 55. map.“ or "Show my contacts." X 2. Say"Hey Porsche" and the desired voice 1. Press and hold the button on the steering – Use a destination from the map: Press your de- command. Y wheel. sired destination for longer and say "Hey Por- 2. Say your desired voice command. sche, drive me there." Z

265 voice control

A General voice commands – When do I have to charge? Voice Control Help – Let me show you something on the map: Select a B The following voice commands can be said at any The system can assist in different ways, questions point in the dialogue: destination on the map on the central display. can be asked or specific issues can be raised. C – Correction – Find a restaurant along the route/at the – I need help (general) D – Pause destination – How does voice control work? – Cancel – How much longer will it take? – What can I do in the navigation area? E – Help – I would like to park here – What can you do? F – Drive me to work – Where have I driven to recently? G Using lists by voice control Changing voice control settings H Browsing through lists Media e e Setting e Voice control e Select the – Play the song "Get a Life", for example, from desired setting. I b Voice control is active. e Say Next page/Previous page. Porsche Sounds J – A different song Selecting an entry from the list – What am I listening to now? Online mode K b Data transfer to the cloud permitted. Line numbers and list entries displayed in blue in the – I would like to search for music b Data connection sufficient. L central display can be spoken and thereby selected. – Play Nelly Furtado in Apple Music b Voice control is active. M b Voice control is active. – Play Classic FM The entire range of Voice Control functions, such as e Say Line 1. – Skip on one track online search, can be accessed in online mode. N – or – – I would like to choose a different source Online mode is displayed on the central display by O Say a list entry. Phone means of the symbol. P Examples of commands b No phone call active. If the data connection is insufficient, PCM switches automatically to offline mode. Some Voice Control Q These are not complete lists and show only some of – Please call John Doe function are only available to a limited extent in off- the possible natural voice commands and instruc- – Dial 020 911, for example R line mode. tions for the voice control system. – Try Andrew Forbes again If Voice Control is in offline mode, this is indicated on S A good data connection improves the search results – Show my call list the central display by means of the symbol. T and makes the search faster. – I would like to connect a new phone U Air-conditioning system/Comfort functions Reacting to previous dialogues V – Set seat heating to level 2 b Voice control is active. – The windscreen is misted up It is possible to react to an older dialogue of a main W – I would like a massage function (e.g. Phone) using other voice commands: X – Change the ambient light to red – Please call John Doe again

Y Navigation/while driving/Finder Z – Drive me to the Porsche Museum

266 Warn and Brake Assist (WBA)

Warn and Brake Assist 85 km/h (53 mph). It can react to vehicles up to a Warn and Brake Assist (WBA) includes the following A speed of 250 km/h (156 mph). functions depending on the country: B (WBA) The system does not respond to animals, crossing – Distance warning (depending on equipment) vehicles, oncoming vehicles and objects such as – Collision warning C General Safety Instructions bars, fences and rail vehicles. – Acute warning (warning jolt) D System not available or WARNING – Automatic braking and brake assistance has restricted availability The function is not available: – Swerve Assist (depending on equipment) E – when reversing – Turn Assist (depending on equipment) The system supports the driver within the limits of F – if the brake lights are defective – Preventive occupant protection functions (de- the system but cannot prevent an accident under all – if PSM malfunctions and if PSM is switched off pending on equipment) G circumstances. – if the airbag control unit malfunctions H Responsibility for appropriate driving reactions The camera behind the windscreen and the radar aimed at avoiding an accident always lies with the The function may be restricted, or sensor of the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (de- I pending on the equipment) detect the surroundings driver. unavailable: in front of the vehicle. An impending frontal collision J e Drive with extreme care. – up to 10 seconds after establishing readiness for with other road users (vehicles, pedestrians or cy- K e Always pay attention to the traffic situation and operation clists) can be detected. the area around the vehicle. – if the seat belts are not fastened L e The driver must be ready at all times to assume – in sharp bends Information M control of the vehicle if the system is not avail- – in the presence of reflective objects such as able or fails to function as expected. guardrails or when entering a tunnel A warning time can be set for the distance and col- N – in heavy rain, snow, fog and ice lision warning. This varies depending on the traffic O – in the event of damage to the windscreen situation and driver behaviour. System limitations – in the event of damage to the bumper, e.g. P Within the system limits, the system can warn through parking bumps Q against impending head-on collisions and initiate the – in the event of damaged or soiled radar sensors appropriate braking manoeuvres (depending on the – if the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) R country) or steering assistance (depending on malfunctions equipment). Not all road users and dangerous situa- S tions can be recognised correctly and in time. Responding to warning messages T The lateral vehicle areas and the rear area are not Always heed any warning and information messages monitored. U displayed in the vehicle. In complex driving situations, the system can issue > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information V undesired warnings and perform undesired brake messages" on page 271. interventions. W Not all Warn and Brake Assist protection measures X are triggered, depending on the hazardous situation. Operating principle The system is available above walking speed and can Warn and Brake Assist (WBA) can initiate measures Y react to pedestrians or cyclists up to a speed of to protect the occupants and other road users in Z certain dangerous situations. 267 Warn and Brake Assist (WBA)

A Information Collision warning Automatic braking and brake as- B Observe the following information: sistance (availability depending C e Turn off Warn and Brake Assist while the vehicle on country) is being used off public roads or being loaded If the driver does not respond to the acute warning D onto car transporters, trains, ships or the like. or does not brake sufficiently, the Warn and Brake E This can prevent any undesired intervention by Assist can support the driver while braking or brake the system. the vehicle to a standstill by applying progressively F e Observe any applicable country-specific regula- increasing braking force. G tions, especially regarding driving, vehicle dis- Additionally, a warning tone is emitted and a symbol tance, speed, etc. The driver is always appears on the instrument cluster. H responsible for complying with the relevant reg- By reducing the vehicle speed, the consequences of I ulations that apply in each country. a possible accident are mitigated. e Deactivate Warn and Brake Assist (WBA) during J transport. Information K Automatic braking interventions can be aborted with L Distance warning the following measures: e M If Warn and Brake Assist (WBA) detects a safety Pressing the brake pedal hazard due to driving too closely to the car in front, Fig. 219: Collision warning on the instrument cluster e Fully depress the accelerator pedal N e the driver is warned by the symbol on the in- If the system detects a possible collision, it can warn steer actively 1 O strument cluster. . the driver by issuing a warning tone and displaying a Detection can take place within a speed range from warning on the instrument cluster. Information P approx. 65 km/h (40 mph) – 250 km/h (155 mph). Q Once the vehicle has reached a standstill, it is not Urgent warning (warning jolt) held permanently by the brake system. R If the driver does not respond to the collision warn- e If necessary, actuate the brake and resume con- ing, a warning jolt is performed in addition to the trol of the vehicle. S warning tone and display of the symbol on the in- T strument cluster. With the warning jolt, the system draws attention to U Swerve Assist the increasing danger of collision. Swerve Assist can help in hazardous situations to V In the event of this warning, it may still be possible steer the vehicle around an obstacle. to prevent a collision through the driver avoiding the W If the system detects a critical situation and the pedestrian or braking sharply. driver actively avoids the obstacle after the urgent X The urgent warning function is automatically active warning, Swerve Assist will support the driver by and cannot be manually adjusted. Y selectively braking individual wheels and correcting Z 1. Not available in some country versions. 268 Warn and Brake Assist (WBA) the steering angle with a slight steering movement. order to support the effectiveness of the passive Assist occupant protection functions are A If Swerve Assist is active, automatic braking or brake occupant protection systems. For this purpose, de- deactivated. assistance is aborted. pending on the situation, the front seat belts are B pretensioned, opened windows are closed and the Switching Warn and Brake Assist C System limitations side bolsters of the front seats are inflated (depend- D Swerve Assist is available for speeds of ing on the equipment). on and off 50 km/h (31 mph) – 150 km/h (93 mph). Within the system limits, the preventive occupant NOTICE E protection measures can be activated in the follow- ing situations: F Turn Assist e Switch off Warn and Brake Assist in the follow- – during emergency braking initiated by the driver Turn Assist can assist with driving off or slow driving ing situations: G from a speed of approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) via a braking intervention, so that the vehicle1 does – during removal – during an automatic brake intervention initiated H not collide with an oncoming vehicle when turning – when driving off public roads left. The braking intervention keeps the vehicle in its by the vehicle I – during transport, e.g. on a car transporter, own lane. As soon as the collision hazard has passed and a train or ship J stable driving condition is achieved, the precondi- System limitations tioning measures are ended and existing seat belt K Turn Assist is only available when using the direction tension is released again. e e Assistance e Basic assistance e Warn L indicator and up to a maximum speed of and Brake Assist 10 km/h (6 mph). System limitations M If the Warn and Brake Assist is restricted or – In the case of repeated activation (e.g. in the switched off, a display appears in the instrument N context of driver safety training), the belt tension Preventive occupant protection cluster. O function increases progressively so that it may no longer be possible to reliably release the belt tensioning. The Warn and Brake Assist is automatically switched P In this case, unfasten and refasten the seat belt on after operational readiness has been established. Seat belt system optimisation or deactivate Warn and Brake Assist. Q When driving off, the front seat belts are gently – In the event of a defect in the reversible belt Setting the distance warning R tightened once to ensure an optimal position with tensioner, the preventive occupant protection The distance warning can be switched off and on. regard to the occupants. systems are only available to a limited extent. S The warning time can also be set. Activation is performed when reaching a driving – After an accident, the seat-belt pretensioner may speed of approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) or when the T be damaged. Visit a qualified specialist work- e e Assistance e Basic assistance e Warn seat belts are fastened again. shop. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as and Brake Assist e Distance warning U they have trained workshop personnel and the V Preconditioning of the seat belt and passen- necessary parts and tools. ger compartment – If the functionality of PSM is restricted or Setting the collision warning W In hazardous situations, Warn and Brake Assist can switched off, the preventive Warn and Brake The collision warning can be switched off and on. X initiate measures to prepare for a possible collision in The warning time can also be set. Y Z 1. Country-dependent: Turn Assist is available in countries with right-hand traffic only when turning left and in countries with left-hand traffic only when turning right. 269 Warn and Brake Assist (WBA)

A e e Assistance e Basic assistance e Warn and Brake Assist e Collision warning B C Switching Turn Assist on and off D e e Assistance e Basic assistance e Warn E and Brake Assist e Turn Assist F G Switching Serve Assist on and off H e e Assistance e Basic assistance e Warn I and Brake Assist e Swerve Assist J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

270 Warning and information messages

Warning and information messages A If a warning message appears, refer to the corresponding chapters in this manual. Warning messages only appear if all measurement prerequisites are met – all fluid B levels should therefore be checked regularly. The message will disappear either after a certain time has elapsed or after it has been acknowledged. If a warning light appears, refer to the corresponding chapters in this manual. Please refer to chapter "instrument cluster" on page 125. C Important messages are stored under ( in the central display of the main menu. Depending on the message, its display can vary and be used, for example, in D connection with graphics, symbols or buttons to acknowledge or confirm a prompt. Some messages can include other functions such as the display of instructions in the central display or the search for a nearby Porsche partner. E > Please refer to chapter "Notifications" on page 173. F

General message structure G The following table shows the various types of message and their meaning. H I colour Message structure Example Urgency Meaning and action required J Red Cause : Drive system fault High risk of Stop the vehicle immediately in a suit- e.g. component failure/ Electric drive overheated damage able place. K Component defective/ e Do not keep driving. Stop safely in a L Component faulty suitable place and switch off the vehicle. M Step: Park the vehicle safely e Call roadside assistance or have your N Park the vehicle safely vehicle towed. O > Please refer to chapter "Towing" if necessary, further step Let the electric drive cool down on page 245. P e Have the fault remedied immediately Q at a qualified specialist workshop.1 R Yellow Cause : Chassis fault Increased risk of Limited and adapted driving permitted. S e.g. component failure/ damage e Adapt your driving style to the Component defective/ situation. T Component faulty/ e Reduce load. U Component overloaded/ e If the fault occurs frequently or con- Component limited/ tinuously, have it remedied at a quali- V 1 Component not available fied specialist workshop. W Step and, if necessary, further step: Consult a workshop X e.g. service necessary/ Y Z 1. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. 271 Warning and information messages

A colour Message structure Example Urgency Meaning and action required B Consult a workshop/ adapted driving permitted C Check component/ (adapted or restricted) driving possible/ D Adapt or reduce speed/ E Reduce load

F White Cause : Camera system not available Low risk of Adapted driving permitted. G e.g. component fault/ damage e Temporary condition. Normal condi- Component limited/ tion is restored automatically while H Component not (no longer) available driving or after the vehicle has been I restarted. Explanation: Temporary condition e Adapt your driving style to the J e.g. temporary condition situation. K e If the fault occurs frequently or con- If necessary, further step: Driving permitted tinuously, have it remedied at a quali- L e.g. driving permitted/ fied specialist workshop.2 M Reduce load/ Adapt your driving style N

O Messages with more information in this manual P Message on the instrument cluster or central display Meaning and action required Q R Active parking support is restricted or is faulty. Active Parking Support not available Limited sensor system, see Adapted driving permitted. S Driver's Manual e Adapt your driving style to the situation. T e Have the fault remedied as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.2 U A Function on Demand is currently in progress. Some displays, An update is being installed or a Function on Demand (FoD) is being activated. Readiness V control units and functions of possible safety relevance as well as for operation is blocked. Displays and vehicle functions (e.g. comfort functions or anti- W driver assistance systems may not be available. The vehicle theft functions) may be temporarily disabled. currently won't start. Please consult the Driver's Manual for further X information. Y Z 2. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. 272 Warning and information messages

Message on the instrument cluster or central display Meaning and action required A B – OR – e Follow any requests in the central display, such as exiting the vehicle with all passengers. An online software update is currently in progress. Some displays, C e Do not use the vehicle while the update is being installed or Function on Demand (FoD) control units and functions of possible safety relevance as well as D is activated. driver assistance systems may not be available. The vehicle > currently won't start. Please consult the Driver's Manual for further Please refer to chapter "Over-the-Air (OTA) functions " on page 174. E information. F

Kerb warning is limited or is faulty. G Curb warning not available. Limited sensor system. See Driver's Adapted driving permitted. H Manual. e Adapt your driving style to the situation. I e Have the fault remedied as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.3 J Brake pad worn Brake pads are worn. K pads Limited and adapted driving permitted. 3 L Driving permitted e Have the brake pads replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. M Power steering has failed or is faulty. N Brake booster failure Stop the vehicle immediately in a suitable place. e Do not keep driving. Stop safely in a suitable place and switch off the vehicle. O – OR – e Call roadside assistance or have your vehicle towed. P Brake booster fault > Please refer to chapter "Towing" on page 245. e Have the fault remedied immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.3 Q R An update has failed. The vehicle's readiness for operation may be blocked, depending on the severity of the fault caused. Displays and vehicle functions cannot work correctly. The S The online software update could not be carried out. This may severity of the fault caused and its consequences are shown in the central display. T result in functional restrictions. Please observe the warning and e When the vehicle is ready for operation: Adapt your driving style to the situation. U information lights and the Driver's Manual. Please consult your e If the vehicle is not ready for operation: Call a roadside assistance service and have qualified specialist workshop to have the update carried out in full. your vehicle towed. V > Please refer to chapter "Towing" on page 245. W e Have the fault remedied immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.3 X Intervention was The intervention of a driver assistance system was aborted. Y Z 3. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. 273 Warning and information messages

A Message on the instrument cluster or central display Meaning and action required B aborted Limited and adapted driving permitted. C e Take over control of the vehicle. D e Adapt your driving style to the situation. > Please refer to chapter "Vehicle settings" on page 257. E F Chassis failure Chassis has failed or is faulty. Adapted driving permitted. See Driver's Manual. Limited and adapted driving permitted. G – OR – e Adapt your driving style to the situation. H Chassis fault e Reduce load. e Have the fault remedied as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.4 I Adapted driving permitted. See Driver's Manual. J There is too much strain on the steering lock. Steering column is strained. K Adapted driving permitted. L Move steering wheel e Adapt your driving style to the situation. e While the vehicle is stationery, relieve the steering lock by turning the steering wheel M to the left or right. N The doors can lock automatically from a speed of approx. 15 km/h (9mph) and no longer O Opening the doors while the vehicle is moving not possible be opened. P See Driver's Manual e Setting door locking options. > Please refer to chapter "Vehicle settings" on page 257. Q R Parking brake is in service mode. Limited and adapted driving permitted. S Parking brake in service mode e Adapt your driving style to the situation. T e Have the fault remedied as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.4 U Intelligent location-based chassis failure. V Limited and adapted driving permitted. Intelligent location-based chassis failure W e Adapt your driving style to the situation. See Driver's Manual X e Reduce load. e Have the fault remedied as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.4 Y Z 4. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. 274 Warning and information messages

Message on the instrument cluster or central display Meaning and action required A B Rain/light sensor is defective. Rain or light C sensor faulty Adapted driving permitted. e Switch on windscreen wipers and lights manually. D Inspection necessary e Have the fault remedied as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.1 E Speed for set tyre pressure has been exceeded. F Tyre pressure too low Adapted driving permitted. G e Reduce speed. Reduce speed e Set the correct tyre pressure at the next opportunity. H > Please refer to chapter "Tyres and Wheels" on page 249. I

Significant pressure loss in one or several tyres. J Park the vehicle correctly and safely. K e Do not keep driving. Stop safely in a suitable place and switch off the vehicle. L e Check the indicated tyre for damage. e Add sealant if necessary. M Check tyres e Set the correct tyre pressure at the next opportunity. N > Please refer to chapter "Tyres and Wheels" on page 249. O > Please refer to chapter "Flat Tyre" on page 114. e If necessary, call roadside assistance and have your vehicle towed. P > Please refer to chapter "Towing" on page 245. Q e Have the fault remedied immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.1 R S T U V W X Y Z 1. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. 275 Warning and information messages

A Message on the instrument cluster or central display Meaning and action required B Key signal faulty. Key not detected due to wrong key position or flat battery in the driver's C key. D Key not found e Place the driver's key in the rear drinks holder in the central console. Place the key in the storage compartment. See Driver's Manual e Replace battery. E e Switch off possible interference sources. F Please refer to chapter "Driver's Key" on page 104. G Warn and Brake Assist is limited or faulty. H Warn and Brake Assist limited Limited and adapted driving permitted. I See Driver's Manual e Adapt your driving style to the situation. e Have the fault remedied as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.1 J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1. Porsche recommends a Porsche partner as they have trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. 276 Windows

Windows Information b Operational readiness established. A – or – B Opening and closing side windows If a side window is blocked by an object during b The vehicle is turned off, but not for longer than closing, it will stop and open again by several 10 minutes. C Opening and closing the WARNING centimetres. b Driver's or passenger's door not yet opened. side windows If the side window is blocked a second time within D The rocker switches have a two-stage function. approx. 10 seconds, one-touch operation will be When opening or closing the side windows, particu- When actuating the buttons, both positions can be E disabled for this window. The side window can be clearly felt through resistance when pulling or larly in one-touch mode, parts of the body may get closed manually. One-touch operation is enabled F trapped between the moving side window and fixed pressing. again once the side window has been closed com- G vehicle parts. pletely using the manual closing function. First setting – manual operation e When opening and closing the side windows, e Press or pull the relevant rocker switch to the H make sure that no parts of the body can become first setting until the desired position is reached. I trapped between the moving side window and Opening and closing side windows The process stops when the switch is released. fixed vehicle parts. J Second setting – one-touch operation e Push the power button and switch off the vehicle e Briefly push or pull the relevant rocker switch all K when you leave the vehicle. Uninformed persons the way to the second setting. could injure themselves by operating the power L The side window opens or closes automatically windows. to the end position. M e In the event of danger, immediately release the e button on the driver’s key or the proximity sensor Actuate the button again to stop the side win- N dow at the desired position. in the door handle on vehicles with Comfort O Access. The window closes faster during one-touch opera- tion than during manual operation. e Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended. P Q Closing a side window WARNING manually R

If one-touch operation has been disabled following S blockage of a side window, the side window shuts T with its full closing force during manual closing. Parts of the body that become trapped between the U moving side window and fixed vehicle parts may be Fig. 220: Power window buttons in the driver's door V crushed. A Power window, front, driver's side W e Make sure that nobody is trapped or crushed B Power window, front, passenger's side C Power window, rear, driver's side when closing the side windows. X D Power window, rear, passenger's side E Child protection safety button Y Z

277 Windows

A Opening and closing side windows with the Closing side windows with the proximity Disabling controls in the rear – driver’s key sensor in the door handle B child protection The power window buttons on the rear doors and the C rear passenger touch screen can be disabled by D pressing the safety button E in the control panel on the driver’s door. E Switching child protection on/off F e Press the safety button E. G The indicator light on the button comes on. The rear power window buttons in the rear doors H and the rear display are deactivated. I Fig. 222: Comfort Access J b Vehicles with Comfort Access. K b Carry the driver's key with you, such as in your L trouser pocket. e Touch proximity sensor A in the door handle M when locking the vehicle until the desired posi- tion has been reached.. N Fig. 221: Opening and closing side windows with the driv- er’s key The hazard warning lights flash twice when all O side windows and the roof system have closed. b Function activated. P e Press and hold the or on the driver's key Storing the end position of side windows Q until the side window has reached the desired The end positions of the side windows will be lost if position. R the 12 V power supply fails. One-touch operation of The hazard warning lights flash twice when all the side windows is disabled. S side windows and the roof system have closed. Perform these steps for all side windows: T The function can be activated or deactivated in the central display. 1. Close side the window completely once by pull- U ing the rocker switch to the second setting. e e Setting e Vehicle e Vehicle locking 2. When the side window is completely closed, V system e Comfort access briefly pull the rocker switch to the second set- W ting again. 3. Completely open the side window once by X pressing the rocker switch. Y Z

278 Windscreen Wiper

Windscreen Wiper Controls Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity A By adjusting the sensitivity in 4 stages, it is possible B General safety instructions to determine what water quantity on the windscreen will trigger the next wiper operation. C Unintended wiping WARNING D

In rain sensor mode, the windscreen wipers wipe E automatically if moisture is detected on the F windscreen. G e Always switch off the windscreen wipers before cleaning the windscreen. H I NOTICE J Risk of damage to luggage compartment lid, wind- K screen and wiper system. L e Only wipe the windscreen when sufficiently wet, otherwise it could become scratched. Fig. 223: Windscreen wiper stalk M e Carefully detach frozen wiper blades from the 0 Windscreen wipers off N windscreen before driving. 1 Rain sensor operation e Always switch off windscreen wipers in car 2 Slow wiping Fig. 224: Switch for rain sensor/intermittent operation O washes to prevent them wiping unintentionally 3 Fast wiping 4 Wiping with one-touch function High sensitivity (more frequent wiping) P (rain sensor operation). 5 Spray and wipe e Move switch (A) upwards. Q The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the Responding to warning messages Switching on rain sensor windscreen. R Always heed any warning and information messages Low sensitivity (more infrequent wiping) S displayed in the vehicle. operation e Press switch (A) downwards. T > Please refer to chapter "Warning and information In rain sensor mode, the speed of the windscreen messages" on page 271. wipers depends on the quantity of water measured U on the windscreen. Switching on continuous wiping e V Move the wiper stalk upwards to the first detent Slow wiping (position 1). e Move wiper stalk upwards to the second detent W The rain sensor operation is active. (position 2). X Fast wiping Y e Move wiper stalk upwards to the third detent (position 3). Z

279 Windscreen Wiper

A Wiping with one-touch function NOTICE Information One-time wiping B Get a qualified specialist workshop to carry out this e If the wiper arms accidentally fall back onto the Briefly press the wiper stalk downwards work if necessary. Porsche recommends a Porsche C windscreen, they can damage the windscreen. (position 4). partner as they have trained workshop personnel and D Multiple wiping e Always hold the wiper arms securely when re- the necessary parts and tools. E e Press and hold the wiper stalk downwards placing the wiper blades. (position 4). F It is essential for wiper blades to be in perfect con- dition for a clear view. The wiper blades should be Cleaning the Night View Assist G Spraying and wiping replaced twice a year (before and after the cold and reversing cameras H e Pull wiper stalk towards the steering wheel. season) or if wiper performance deteriorates or the > Please refer to chapter "Night View Assist" on Spray nozzles and windscreen wipers are active blades are damaged. page 171. I as long as the wiper stalk is held. > Please refer to chapter "ParkAssist" on page 176. Replacing front wiper blades J When the wiper stalk is released, the windscreen wipers continue to perform a few drying wipes. The windscreen wipers must be extended to replace Additional information K the wiper blades or fit ice or sun protective covers L Switching the windscreen wipers underneath. Wiper behaviour when operational readiness has been established. M off Extending the windscreen wipers b e Move the wiper stalks to position 0. Switch off readiness for operation. – The wiper stalk is in position 1: The rain sensor is N 1. Press the wiper lever downwards once (position activated from 4 km/h (2.5 mph). 4). – The wiper stalk is in position 2 or 3: The wind- O Information The windscreen wipers move upwards by approx. screen wipers remain off until the wiper stalk is P After switching off the windscreen wipers or opera- 90°. actuated. Q tional readiness, the wipers move up slightly from 2. Replace the wiper blades according to the sepa- For example, this prevents the wipers from wiping an their rest position so that the wiping edges are rate instructions provided by the manufacturer. ice-covered windscreen as soon as operational R aligned correctly. Note the different lengths of the wiper blades! readiness is established. S Retracting the windscreen wipers Wiper behaviour when the speed is changed T b Switch on readiness for operation. Replacing wiper blades e Press the wiper lever downwards for at least 2 b The wiper stalk is in position 2 or 3. U Incorrectly fitted wiper seconds (position 4). – At speeds below 4 km/h (2.5 mph): The wipers CAUTION V blades The windscreen wipers return to their home switch to rain sensor operation. position. – The speed increases above 12 km/h (8 mph): W If they are not changed properly, the incorrectly fit- The wipers switch to the selected setting. ted wiper blades can come loose while driving. X Application example: When braking at traffic lights, e The wiper blades must latch properly in the wiper the wipers switch to rain sensor operation. When the Y arm. vehicle accelerates, the wipers switch to the se- Z e Check that the wiper blades are fitted securely. lected setting from 12 km/h (8 mph).

280 Windscreen Wiper

Information A The wipers stop when the bonnet is opened. B e To switch on the windscreen wipers again, move C the windscreen wiper stalk upwards/ downwards. D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

281 12-volt battery

A 12-volt battery e Never connect jump leads or a the charger di- tools. rectly to the 12 V lithium battery. e Disconnect the negative terminal on the battery B General safety instructions Electric shock, short cir- during all work on the electrical system. C WARNING The 12-volt lithium battery is automatically discon- cuit, fire or explosion The 12 V lithium battery is located under a plastic D nected from the vehicle electrical system if the bat- cover in the front luggage compartment. Please re- Touching conductive parts of the vehicle can give tery charge condition is low. The vehicle cannot be fer to chapter "Installing and removing the plastic E you an electric shock. You can cause a short circuit operated if the 12 V lithium battery is discharged. cover in the front luggage compartment" on when working on the vehicle's electrical system. F The electrical system is deactivated temporarily. page 155. e Observe warning message. Short circuits can cause fires. G To charge the 12 V lithium battery: e The battery should only be removed and installed Safety symbols on the 12 V lithium battery H e Establish operational readiness. or have work performed on it at a qualified spe- Read instructions > Please refer to chapter "Starting, driving and cialist workshop. Porsche recommends a Por- I stopping the vehicle" on page 236. sche partner as they have trained workshop Wear eye protection J – or – personnel and the necessary parts and tools. e Charging the 12 V battery using the charger. Danger of explosion K Escaping electrolyte fluid – or – WARNING L and toxic gases Fire, sparks, naked flames and smoking e Supply external power from another vehicle for are prohibited at least 5 minutes. M Risk of electrolyte fluid and toxic gases escaping in Avoid causing sparks and short circuits Then establish operational readiness or charge exceptional cases if the 12 V lithium battery is when handling cables and electrical N the 12 V battery using a charger. damaged or handled incorrectly. devices. O After establishing operational readiness and when e Avoid any inhalation of the vapours and any skin Danger of caustic burns P the battery is charged (for at least 10 minutes) or contact with the electrolyte fluid. Electrolyte fluid is highly corrosive: wear when the vehicle has been connected to an external e Keep people away and stay on the side facing safety gloves and eye protection. Q power supply, the electrical system is reactivated into the wind. First aid automatically. The 12-volt lithium battery is auto- R e The 12 V lithium battery should only be charged If electrolyte fluid splashes into your eye, matically reconnected to the vehicle electrical in well-ventilated areas. rinse immediately for a few minutes with S system. clean water. Immediately seek medical Another vehicle's battery can be used as an external attention from a doctor. If electrolyte T NOTICE power supply with the help of jump leads. Both bat- fluid splashes onto your skin or clothing, U teries must have a nominal voltage of 12 V. The ca- neutralise immediately with soapsuds pacity (Ah) of the donor battery must not be Risk of short circuit, fire and damage to electronic V and rinse with plenty of water. If you ac- substantially less than that of the flat battery. The control units and components. cidentally drink electrolyte fluid, consult W flat 12 V lithium battery must be connected properly e The battery should only be removed or installed a doctor immediately. to the vehicle electrical system. by a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche rec- X Keep children away The need to repeatedly provide power from a power ommends a Porsche partner as they have trained Y supply or repeated charging of the 12 V lithium bat- workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tery under normal operating conditions may indicate Z that the 12 V lithium battery is damaged. 282 12-volt battery

Disposal Charging the 12 V battery using the charger A Hand in the old battery at a battery col- What do I What do I have to do? lection point. want to do? B Never dispose of an old battery with do- Charging e Never charge a damaged 12 V C mestic waste. lithium battery. the 12 V D Always have maintenance work carried lithium out by qualified technicians battery E Never attempt to replace the 12 V lith- F ium battery yourself. The 12 V lithium Lay up the e If the vehicle is left for long battery of this vehicle must only be re- vehicle periods in the garage or G placed with a 12 V lithium battery ex- workshop, the doors and lids plicitly specified by Porsche for this of the vehicle should be H vehicle. The use of other 12 V lithium or closed. I lead-acid batteries will result in consid- e Turn off the vehicle. erable malfunctions, including total fail- J ure of the electrical system. K Always have the 12 V lithium battery re- Information placed by a qualified specialist work- L shop. Porsche recommends a Porsche The 12 V lithium battery still discharges even when partner as they have trained workshop your vehicle is not in use. M e Fig. 225: 12 V lithium battery terminals personnel and the necessary parts and To maintain its function, charge the 12 V lithium N battery approximately every 6 weeks or connect Escaping irritating gases tools. CAUTION it to a trickle charger suitable for lithium bat- due to a damaged 12 V O teries with a CC/CV or pure CV characteristic. lithium battery 12 V lithium battery P Porsche recommends Porsche Tequipment chargers and trickle chargers. The use of non-approved chargers or boosters can Q What do I What do I have to do? result in the 12 V lithium battery being charged with want to do? excessive charging voltage and excessive charging R current. This can damage the 12 V lithium battery, Avoid run- e Switch off unneeded electri- S and irritating gases can escape. This can cause con- ning down cal loads on short trips. siderable damage to the vehicle and burns. T the battery e Only use chargers or boosters that have been U Prepare for e Have the 12 V lithium battery approved by the equipment manufacturer for V winter checked before the start of LiFePO4 batteries with integrated electronic driving winter. protection circuits. W e The following maximum values must never be X exceeded: Y Z

283 12-volt battery

External power supply or A – Max. charging voltage: 14.8 V (even in the Supplying external power from another NOTICE event of a fault with the 12 V lithium battery vehicle emergency starting B disconnected; no voltage peaks permitted) Unsuitable jump leads Emergency starting and supplying external power C – Max. charging current: 90 A WARNING and incorrect procedures can severely damage the vehicle electronics. D e If in doubt, contact your Porsche partner. Supplying external power using unsuitable jump e Do not supply external power or initiate emer- E e Observe the instructions of the charger leads or following incorrect procedures can cause gency starting. manufacturer. short circuits. Short circuits can cause fires. e Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche F recommends a Porsche partner as they have e Ensure adequate ventilation when charging the e Use only standard jump leads with sufficient G 12 V lithium battery. cross section and completely insulated terminal trained workshop personnel and the necessary parts and tools. H 1. Open the bonnet. clamps. Follow the instructions provided by the > Please refer to chapter "Opening and closing jump lead manufacturer. I 1. Open the bonnet. Please refer to the bonnet and tailgate" on page 153. e The vehicles must not touch, otherwise current chapter "Perform emergency unlocking of the J 2. Remove the plastic cover.Please refer to may flow as soon as the positive terminals are bonnet" on page 58. chapter "Installing and removing the plastic cov- connected. K 2. Remove the plastic cover. Please refer to er in the front luggage compartment" on e Ensure that conductive jewellery (e.g. rings, chapter "Installing and removing the plastic cov- L page 155. chains, watch straps) does not come into contact er in the front luggage compartment" on 3. Fold open the cap on the positive terminal for with live parts of the vehicle. page 155. M jump-lead starting +. e Never connect jump leads directly to the 12 V N 4. Connect the red positive cable of the charger to lithium battery or other electrical components. the positive terminal for jump-lead starting +. Only connect jump leads to the jump-lead start- O 5. Connect the black negative cable of the charger ing terminals. P to the ground point –. Exhaustively discharged 6. Switch on the charger. NOTICE Q 7. After charging the battery, first switch off the 12 V lithium battery charger and then disconnect it. R Risk of damage when supplying external power to an 8. Close the cap on the positive terminal for jump- exhaustively discharged 12 V lithium battery. S lead starting +. T 9. Install the plastic cover. Please refer to e If you suspect that the 12 V lithium battery is chapter "Installing and removing the plastic cov- exhaustively discharged, do not supply power U er in the front luggage compartment" on from an external source. V page 155. For recommendations on a suitable charger: W e Contact your Porsche partner. X Y Fig. 226: 12 V lithium battery terminals Z

284 12-volt battery

3. Fold open the cap on the positive terminal for Replacing the 12 V lithium battery A jump-lead starting +. Danger of fire due to un- WARNING B 4. Connect the red positive cable to the positive suitable 12 V lithium terminal for jump-lead starting +. battery C 5. Connect the red positive cable to the positive D terminal of the donor battery. In addition to significant malfunctions of the vehicle 6. Connect the black negative cable to the negative electrical system, use of an unsuitable 12 V lithium E terminal of the donor battery. battery or its incorrect installation may in excep- F 7. Connect the black negative cable to the ground tional cases cause a fire (e.g. during charging). point–. e Never attempt to replace the 12 V lithium bat- G 8. Allow the engine of the donor vehicle to run at a tery yourself. Only have the 12 V lithium battery H higher engine speed. of this vehicle replaced with a 12 V lithium bat- 9. Charge the 12 V lithium battery from the exter- tery explicitly specified by Porsche for this ve- I nal power supply (min. 5 minutes). hicle. The use of other lithium or lead-acid J The electrical system is reactivated batteries results in significant malfunctions in- automatically. cluding total failure of the electrical system. K 10.Ready for operation: e Always have the 12 V lithium battery replaced by L First, disconnect the black negative cable from a qualified specialist workshop. Porsche recom- the ground point – then from the negative ter- mends a Porsche partner as they have trained M minal of the donor battery. workshop personnel and the necessary parts and N 11.Ready for operation: tools. O Disconnect the red positive cable from the pos- e Observe the disposal instructions for lithium itive terminal of the donor battery first, then from batteries. P the positive terminal for jump-lead starting +. 12.Close the cap on the positive terminal for jump- Q Power interruption lead starting +. R 13.Install the plastic cover. Please refer to Following a temporary power interruption, some chapter "Installing and removing the plastic cov- equipment has to be reinitialised. S er in the front luggage compartment" on 1. Store the end position for the power windows. T page 155. > Please refer to chapter "Windows" on 14.To continue charging the 12 V lithium battery: page 277. U Charge the 12 V lithium battery using the 2. Registering wheels and tyres in Tyre Pressure V charger. Please refer to chapter "Charging the 12 Monitoring (TPM). W V battery using the charger" on page 283. > Please refer to chapter "Tyres and Wheels" – or – on page 249. X Establish operational readiness. Please refer to chapter "Starting, driving and stopping the ve- Y hicle" on page 236. Z

285 Technical Data On the following pages, you will find the technical data for your vehicle.

286 Software licences Software licences Declaration on open source soft- ware for the instrument cluster - list of OSS components

The instrument cluster contains components that are licensed as open source software. The affected components and the associated licence conditions are listed below. The licensee receives a non-exclusive right of use for the open source software from the respective copyright holders under the conditions that provide for the relevant valid licence conditions. The liability and warranty provisions of open source licences are only valid in relation to the respective copyright holders. This list of open source program codes was compiled by reference to the third-party software that was integrated into the services at the time the list was created.

Open Source Licence Copyright

AArch64 UEFI bootstraps BSD-3-Clause Copyright (c) 2011-2013 ARM Limited

aarongifford-sha2 1.1 BSD-3-Clause Copyright (c) 2000-2001, Aaron D. Gifford

Boost 1.64.0 BSL-1.0 Copyright (c) 2003-2017 Christopher M. Kohlhoff. Copyright (c) 2013-2017 Louis Dionne. Copyright (c) 2001-2011 Joel de Guzman.

colorama 0.3.3 BSD-3-Clause Copyright (c) 2010 Jonathan Hartley.

Crypto++ BSL-1.0 Copyright (c) 1995-2013 by Wei Dai.

CVTUTF Unicode-TOU Copyright 2001-2004 Unicode, Inc.

DejaVu fonts DejaVu Fonts Licence

Dinkum C++ 11 Libraries MIT-like Licence (Dinkum C++ 11 Libraries) Dinkum C++ Library developed by P.J. Plauger. Dinkum C++ Library Reference developed by P.J. Plauger.

dtc-libfdt BSD-2-Clause Copyright (C) 2006 David Gibson, IBM Corporation.

edk2 BSD-2-Clause Copyright (c) 2004 - 2016, Intel Corporation. Copyright (c) 2008 - 2010, Apple Inc. Copyright (c) 2011 - 2015, ARM Limited. 287 Software licences

Open Source Licence Copyright

Copyright (c) 2014 - 2015, Linaro Limited. Copyright (c) 2013 - 2015, Red Hat, Inc.

edk2-FatPkg BSD-like licence (EFI/UEFI) Copyright (c) 2006, Intel Corporation.

freetype 2.6 FTL Copyright (c) 2006-2015 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm and Werner Lemberg.

HarfBuzz 0.9.35 MIT-like Licence (HarfBuzz) Copyright (c) 2010, 2011, 2012, Google, Inc. Copyright (c) 2012, Mozilla Foundation. Copyright (c) 2011, Codethink Limited. Copyright (c) 2008, 2010, Nokia Corporation and/ or its subsidiary/subsidiaries. Copyright (c) 2009, Keith Stribley. Copyright (c) 2009, Martin Hosken and SIL International. Copyright (c) 2007, Chris Wilson. Copyright (c) 2006, Behdad Esfahbod. Copyright (c) 2005, David Turner. Copyright (c) 2004, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, Red Hat, Inc. Copyright (c) 1998-2004, David Turner and Wern- er Lemberg.

icu 52.1 ICU Copyright (c) 1995-2010 International Business Machines Corporation and others

jpeg 9a IJG Copyright (c) 1991-1994, Thomas G. Lane. Copyright (c) 1989, 2000 Aladdin Enterprises.

Json.NET MIT Copyright (c) 2007 James Newton-King.

libGD MIT-like Licence (libgd)

libpng 1.6.21 Libpng Copyright (c) 1998-2002, 2004, 2006-2016 Glenn Randers-Pehrson.

288 Software licences

Open Source Licence Copyright libpng 1.6.12 Libpng Copyright (c) 2004, 2006-2009 Glenn Randers- Pehrson. libunibreak 4.0 Zlib Copyright (c) 2008-2016 Wu Yongwei. Copyright (c) 2012-2016 Tom Hacohen. Copyright (c) 2013 Petr Filipsky. Copyright (c) 2016 Andreas Röver.

LK MIT Copyright (c) 2008-2015 Travis Geiselbrecht. musl-libc 1.1.5 BSD-2-Clause Copyright (c) 2005-2014 Rich Felker, et al. BSD-like Licence (musl) Copyright (c) 2005 Bruce D. Evans and Steven G. Kargl. Copyright (c) 2001-2009 Ville Laurikari. Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.

OpenGL MIT Copyright (c) 2013-2017 The Khronos Group Inc.

OpenGL-ES 2.0 MIT Copyright (c) 2013-2017 The Khronos Group Inc. SGI-B-2.0

OpenMAX IL 1.1.2 MIT openssl OpenSSL Copyright (c) 1998-2017 The OpenSSL Project. Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young.

PCCTS 1.33 MIT-like Licence (PCCTS)

QNX BSP Apache-2.0 Copyright (c) 2007, QNX Software Systems.

RFC 1321 RSA-MD Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Cre- ated 1991.

SCons 2.0.0. MIT Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 The SCons Foundation.

289 Software licences

Open Source Licence Copyright

Synopsys DWC ETHER QOS Software Driver MIT-like Licence (Synopsys DWC ETHER QOS Software Driver)

Uthash BSD-like Licence (Uthash) Copyright (c) 2005-2016, Troy D. Hanson http:// troydhanson.github.com/uthash/

v8 3.28.35 BSD-3-Clause Copyright (c) 2006-2011, the V8 project authors.

xmltodict MIT Copyright (c) 2012 Martin Blech and individual contributors.

zlib 1.2.8 Zlib Copyright (c) 1995-2013 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler.

— BSD-3-Clause Copyright (c) 2012-2015, The Linux Foundation.

FAT 32 File System Driver과 관련해서 LICENSE-2.0. Unless required by applicable law or EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, 인텔의 EFI Specification과 UEFI Forum의 UEFI agreed to in writing, software distributed under the BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES Specification의 implementation을 emulate 하는 경 Licence is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITH- OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR- 우, firmware, application, utility, driver 작성 등에서 OUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, TICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. UNDER NO 만 사용할 수 있음 either express or implied. See the Licence for the CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER The code is conditioned upon the FAT 32 File Sys- specific language governing permissions and limita- OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, tem Driver and only as necessary to emulate an im- tions under the Licence. INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY OR plementation of the UEFI Specifications; and to CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT create firmware, applications, utilities and/or drivers. BSD-2-Clause NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE This software is based in part on the work of the In- Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA OR dependent JPEG Group. with or without modification, are permitted provided PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW- EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, This product includes software developed by the that the following conditions are met: OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY OR (http://www.openssl.org/). above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) following disclaimer. ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS Apache-2.0 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the Licensed under the Apache Licence, Version 2.0 (the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or "Licence"); you may not use this file except in com- other materials provided with the distribution. pliance with the Licence. You may obtain a copy of THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT the Licence at http://www.apache.org/licenses/ HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS", AND ANY 290 Software licences

BSD-3-Clause * Redistributions of source code must retain the . Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the with or without modification, are permitted provided following disclaimer. following disclaimer in the documentation and/or that the following conditions are met: THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT other materials provided with the distribution. 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS", AND ANY . Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES following disclaimer in the documentation and/or 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR- other materials provided with the distribution. above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the TICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. UNDER NO THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT following disclaimer in the documentation and/or CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS", AND ANY other materials provided with the distribution. OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, 3. Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY OR BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES names of its contributors may be used to endorse or CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR- NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE promote products derived from this software with- TICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. UNDER NO out specific prior written permission. GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA OR CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW- OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS", AND ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY OR WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY OR EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR- GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA OR SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY TICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. UNDER NO PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW- OF SUCH DAMAGE. CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY OR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, BSD-like Licence (musl) INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE rights reserved. GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA OR Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. OF SUCH DAMAGE. PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW- business. Permission to use, copy, Pehrson andri- Additional terms: In addition to the forgoing, redis- EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, bute this software is freely granted, provided that tribution and use of the code is conditioned upon the WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY OR this notice is preserved. FAT 32 File System Driver and all derivative works TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) thereof being used for and designed only to read ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS BSD-like licence (EFI/UEFI) and/or write to a file system that is directly man- SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, aged by Intel's Extensible Firmware Initiative (EFI) OF SUCH DAMAGE. with or without modification, are permitted provided Specification v. 1.0 and later and/or the Unified Ex- that the following conditions are met: tensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) Forum's UEFI BSD-like Licence (Uthash) . Redistributions of source code must retain the Specifications v.2.0 and later (together the "UEFI Specifications"); only as necessary to emulate an Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the implementation of the UEFI Specifications; and to with or without modification, are permitted provided following disclaimer. create firmware, applications, utilities and/or drivers. that the following conditions are met:

291 Software licences

BSL-1.0 Copyright (c) 2003 by Bitstream, Inc. All Rights Re- GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR Boost Software Licence - Version 1.0 - 17th August, served. Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream, CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN AC- 2003 Inc. TION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARIS- Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any ING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE person or organisation obtaining a copy of the soft- person obtaining a copy of the fonts accompanying THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS ware and accompanying documentation covered by this licence ("Fonts") and associated documentation IN THE FONT SOFTWARE. this licence (the "Software") to use, reproduce, dis- files (the "Font Software"), to reproduce and distrib- Except as contained in this notice, the names of play, distribute, execute and transmit the Software, ute the Font Software, including without limitation Gnome, the Gnome Foundation and Bitstream Inc., and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and the rights to use, copy, merge, publish, distribute shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to pro- to permit third-parties to whom the Software is fur- and/or sell copies of the Font Software, and to per- mote the sale, use or other dealings in this Font nished to do so, all subject to the following: mit persons to whom the Font Software is furnished Software without prior written authorisation from The copyright notices in the Software and this entire to do so, subject to the following conditions: the Gnome Foundation or Bitstream Inc., respec- statement, including the above licence grant, this The above copyright and trademark notices and this tively. For more information, contact: fonts@gnome. restriction and the following disclaimer, must be in- permission notice shall be included in all copies of org. cluded in all copies of the Software, in whole or in one or more of the Font Software typefaces. Arev Fonts Copyright part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless The Font Software may be modified, altered or sup- Original text such copies or derivative works are solely in the form plemented, and in particular the designs of glyphs or Copyright (c) 2006 by Tavmjong Bah. All Rights of machine-executable object code generated by a characters in the Fonts may be modified and addi- Reserved. source language processor. THE SOFTWARE IS tional glyphs or characters may be added to the Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY Fonts, only if the fonts are renamed to names not person obtaining a copy of the fonts accompanying KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT containing either the words "Bitstream" or the word this licence ("Fonts") and associated documentation LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT- "Vera". files (the "Font Software"), to reproduce and distrib- ABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, This Licence becomes null and void to the extent ute the modifications to the Bitstream Vera Font TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. UNDER NO CIR- applicable to Fonts or Font Software that has been Software, including without limitation the rights to CUMSTANCES SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS modified and is distributed under the "Bitstream use, copy, merge, publish, distribute and/or sell OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LI- Vera" names. copies of the Font Software, and to permit persons ABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, The Font Software may be sold as part of a larger to whom the Font Software is furnished to do so, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, software package, but no copy of one or more of the subject to the following conditions: ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH Font Software typefaces may be sold by itself. The above copyright and trademark notices and this THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE THEREOF OR OTHER THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", permission notice shall be included in all copies of DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR one or more of the Font Software typefaces. IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY The Font Software may be modified, altered or sup- DejaVu Fonts Licence WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS plemented, and in particular the designs of glyphs or Fonts are © Bitstream (see below). DejaVu changes FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-IN- characters in the Fonts may be modified and addi- are in public domain. Explanation of copyright is on FRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADE- tional glyphs or characters may be added to the Gnome page on Bitstream Vera fonts. Glyphs im- MARK OR OTHER RIGHT. UNDER NO Fonts, only if the fonts are renamed to names not ported from Arev fonts are © Tavmjung Bah (see CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL BITSTREAM OR THE containing either the words "Tavmjong Bah" or the below) GNOME FOUNDATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, word "Arev". Bitstream Vera Fonts Copyright DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY

292 Software licences

This Licence becomes null and void to the extent contributions which rely on, or relate to, the Free- Throughout this licence, the terms 'package', 'Free- applicable to Fonts or Font Software that has been Type Project. Type Project' and 'FreeType archive' refer to the set modified and is distributed under the "Tavmjong Bah This license applies to all files found in such pack- of files originally distributed by the authors (David Arev" names. ages, and which do not fall under their own explicit Turner, Robert Wilhelm and Werner Lemberg) as the The Font Software may be sold as part of a larger licence. The licence affects thus the FreeType font 'FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or software package, but no copy of one or more of the engine, the test programs, documentation and final release. Font Software typefaces may be sold by itself. makefiles, at the very least. 'You' refers to the licensee or person using the proj- THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", This licence was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and ect, where 'using' is a generic term including WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licences, which all compiling the project's source code as well as linking IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY encourage inclusion and use of free software in it to form a 'program' or 'executable'. This program is WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS commercial and freeware products alike. As a con- referred to as 'a program using the FreeType engine'. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-IN- sequence, its main points are that: This licence applies to all files distributed in the FRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADE- o We do not promise that this software works. original FreeType Project, including all source code, MARK OR OTHER RIGHT. UNDER NO However, we will be interested in any kind of bug binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TAVMJONG BAH BE LI- reports. ('as is' distribution) in the file in its original, unmodified form as distrib- ABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LI- o You can use this software for whatever you want, uted in the original archive. If you are unsure whether ABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, in part or full, without having to pay us. ('royalty-free' or not a particular file is covered by this licence, you INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL usage) must contact us to verify this. DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CON- o You cannot claim to be the author of this software. The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by TRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you David Turner, Robert Wilhelm and Werner Lemberg. OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT must acknowledge somewhere in your documenta- All rights reserved except as specified below. SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE tion that you have used the FreeType code. ('credits') 1. No Warranty FONT SOFTWARE. We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED 'AS IS' Except as contained in this notice, the name of of this software, with or without modifications, in WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EX- Tavmjong Bah shall not be used in advertising or commercial products. We disclaim all warranties PRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings covering The FreeType Project and assume no liabil- TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT- in this Font Software without prior written author- ity related to The FreeType Project. NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. UNDER NO isation from Tavmjong Bah. For more information, Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form CIRCUMSTANCES WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR contact: [email protected]. for a credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAM- licence. We thus encourage you to use the following AGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO FTL text: USE THE FREETYPE PROJECT. The FreeType Project LICENCE “Portions of this software are copyright © year The 2. Redistribution 2006-Jan-27 FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights This licence grants a worldwide, royalty-free, per- Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by David Turner, Rob- reserved.” petual and irrevocable right and licence to use, exe- ert Wilhelm and Werner Lemberg Please replace year with the value from the FreeType cute, perform, compile, display, copy, create Introduction version you actually use. derivative works of, distribute and sublicense the The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive Legal Terms FreeType Project (in both source and object code packages; some of them may contain, in addition to 0. Definitions forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; the FreeType font engine, various tools and and to authorise others to exercise some or all of the

293 Software licences

rights granted herein, subject to the following o [email protected] CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE conditions: Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, OF THIS SOFTWARE. o If the source code is redistributed, this licence file as well as future and planned additions to the library Except as contained in this notice, the name of a ('FTL.TXT') must remain unaltered; any additions, and distribution. If you are looking for support, start copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or deletions or changes to the original files must be in this list if you have not found anything in the otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. documentation to help you. in this Software without prior written authorisation The copyright notices of the unaltered original files o [email protected] of the copyright holder. must be preserved in all copies of source files. Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design o Redistribution in binary form must provide a dis- issues, specific licences, porting, etc. IJG claimer that states that the software is based in part Our home page can be found at Independent JPEG Group Licence of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution http://www.freetype.org LEGAL ISSUES documentation. We also encourage you to put an — end of FTL.TXT — In plain English: URL to the FreeType web page in your documenta- 1. We do not promise that this software works. (But tion, though this is not mandatory. ICU if you find any bugs, please let us know!) These conditions apply to any software derived from Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any 2. You can use this software for whatever you want. or based on the FreeType Project, not just the un- person obtaining a copy of this software and asso- You do not have to pay us. modified files. If you use our work, you must ac- ciated documentation files (the "Software") to deal 3. You cannot claim to be the author of this soft- knowledge us. However, you do not need to pay us in the Software without restriction, including with- ware. If you use it in a program, you must acknowl- any fee. out limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, edge somewhere in your documentation that you 3. Advertising publish, distribute and/or sell copies of the Soft- have used the IJG code. Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor ware, and to permit persons to whom the Software In legalese: you shall use the name of the other for commercial, is furnished to do so, provided that the above copy- The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, advertising or promotional purposes without specific right notice(s) and this permission notice appear in either express or implied, with respect to this soft- prior written permission. all copies of the Software and that both the above ware, its quality, accuracy, merchantability or fitness We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or copyright notice(s) and this permission notice ap- for a particular purpose. This software is provided more of the following phrases to refer to this soft- pear in supporting documentation. THE SOFTWARE "AS IS", and you, its user, assume the entire risk as to ware in your documentation or advertising materials: IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF its quality and accuracy. 'FreeType Project', 'FreeType Engine', 'FreeType li- ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas brary' or 'FreeType Distribution'. NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MER- G. Lane. All Rights Reserved except as specified As you have not signed this licence, you are not re- CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR- below. quired to accept it. However, as the FreeType Project POSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify is copyrighted material, only this licence, or another RIGHTS. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE and distribute this software (or portions thereof) for one contracted with the authors, grants you the right COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN any purpose, without a fee, subject to these to use, distribute and modify it. Therefore, by using, THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM OR ANY conditions: distributing or modifying the FreeType Project, you SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (1) If any part of the source code for this software is indicate that you understand and accept all the OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING distributed, then this README file must be included, terms of this licence. FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER with this copyright and no-warranty notice unal- 4. Contacts IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR tered; and any additions, deletions or changes to the There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN

294 Software licences original files must be clearly indicated in accompa- script, install-sh, is copyright by M.I.T. but is also according to the same disclaimer and licence as nying documentation. freely distributable. libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added to (2) If only executable code is distributed, then the It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the the list of Contributing Authors accompanying documentation must state that "this JPEG spec is covered by patents owned by IBM, AT Cosmin Truta software is based in part on the work of the Inde- and Mitsubishi. Hence arithmetic coding cannot le- libpng versions 1.0.7, 1 July 2000 to 1.2.5, 3 Octo- pendent JPEG Group". gally be used without obtaining one or more licen- ber 2002, are Copyrighted (c) 2000-2002 Glenn (3) Permission for use of this software is granted ces. For this reason, support for arithmetic coding Randers-Pehrson and are distributed according to only if the user accepts full responsibility for any has been removed from the free JPEG software. the same disclaimer and licence as libpng-1.0.6 with undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO (Since arithmetic coding provides only a marginal the following individuals added to the list of Contri- LIABILITY for damages of any kind. gain over the unpatented Huffman mode, it is un- buting Authors These conditions apply to any software derived from likely that a large number of implementations will Simon-Pierre Cadieux or based on the IJG code, not just to the unmodified support it.) As far as we are aware, there are no pat- Eric S. Raymond library. If you use our work, you should acknowledge ent restrictions on the remaining code. Gilles Vollant us. The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and with the following additions to the disclaimer: Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG and write GIF files. To avoid entanglement with the There is no warranty against interference with your author's name or company name in advertising or Unisys LZW patent, GIF reading support has been enjoyment of the library or against infringement. publicity relating to this software or products de- removed altogether, and the GIF writer has been There is no warranty that our efforts or the library rived from it. This software may be referred to only simplified to produce "uncompressed GIFs". This will fulfil any of your particular purposes or needs. as "the Independent JPEG Group's software". technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the re- This library is provided with all errors, and the entire We specifically permit and encourage the use of this sulting GIF files are larger than usual but readable by risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy software as the basis of commercial products, pro- all standard GIF decoders. and effort is borne by the user. vided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed We are required to state that "The Graphics Inter- libpng versions 0.97, January 1998 to 1.0.6, 20 by the product vendor. change Format(c) is the Copyright property of March 2000, are Copyrighted (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by permis- CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Randers-Pehrson and are distributed according to sion of L. Peter Deutsch, sole proprietor of its copy- Mark property of CompuServe Incorporated." the same disclaimer and licence as libpng-0.96, with right holder, Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA. the following individuals added to the list of Contri- ansi2knr.c is NOT covered by the above copyright Libpng buting Authors: and conditions, but instead by the usual distribution This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your Tom Lane terms of the Free Software Foundation; principally, convenience. In case of any discrepancy between Glenn Randers-Pehrson that you must include source code if you redistribute this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is in- Willem van Schaik it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for full details.) However, cluded in the libpng distribution, the latter shall libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any pro- prevail. 1997, are Copyrighted (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas gram generated from the IJG code, this does not COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER and LICENCE: Digger Distributed according to the same disclaimer limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do. If you modify libpng you may insert additional noti- and licence as libpng-0.88, with the following indi- The Unix configuration script "configure" was pro- ces immediately following this sentence. viduals added to the list of Contributing Authors: duced with GNU Autoconf. It is copyright by the Free This code is released under the libpng licence. John Bowler Software Foundation but is freely distributable. The libpng versions 1.2.6, 15 August 2004 to 1.4.5, 9 Kevin Bracey same holds for its supporting scripts (config.guess, December 2010, are copyrighted (c) 2004, 2006- Sam Bushell config.sub, ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support 2010 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are distributed Magnus Holmgren

295 Software licences

Greg Roelofs this source code in a product, acknowledgement is Dinkumware, Ltd. and P.J. Plauger ("Licensor") retain Tom Tanner not required but would be appreciated. exclusive ownership of this Product. It is licensed to libpng versions 0.5, May 1995 to 0.88, January you ("Licensee") in accordance with the terms spe- 1996, are Copyrighted (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric MIT cifically stated in this Notice. If you have obtained Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any this Product from a third party or under a special li- For the purposes of this copyright and licence, person obtaining a copy of this software and asso- cence from Dinkumware, Ltd., additional restrictions "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following ciated documentation files (the "Software") to deal may also apply. You must otherwise treat the Prod- set of individuals: in the Software without restriction, including with- uct the same as other copyrighted material, such as Andreas Dilger out limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, a book or recording. You may also exercise certain Dave Martindale publish, distribute, sublicense and/or sell copies of rights particular to computer software under copy- Guy Eric Schalnat the Software, and to permit persons to whom the right law. In particular: Paul Schmidt Software is furnished to do so, subject to the fol- You may use the Library portion of the Product (if Tim Wegner lowing conditions: present) to compile and link with C/C++ code to The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The The above copyright notice and this permission no- produce executable files. Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all tice shall be included in all copies or substantial You may freely distribute such executable files for no warranties, expressed or implied, including, without portions of the Software. additional licence fee to the Licensor. limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT You may make one or more backup copies of the fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, Product for archival purposes. and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, in- INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRAN- You may permanently transfer ownership of the direct, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequen- TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PAR- Product to another party only if the other party tial damages, which may result from the use of the TICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. agrees to the terms stated in this Notice and you PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possi- UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE AU- transfer or destroy all copies of the Product that are bility of such damage. THORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR in your possession. You must preserve this Notice and all copyright no- Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, Pehrson ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, andribute this source code, or portions hereof, for WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR tices with any copy you make of the Product. any purpose, without a fee, subject to the following OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CON- You may not loan, rent or sublicense the Product. restrictions: NECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE You may not copy or distribute, in any form, any part of this Product for any purpose not specifically per- 1. The origin of this source code must not be THEREOF OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. mitted by this Notice. misrepresented. MIT-like Licence (Dinkum C++ 11 Libraries) This copy of the Product is licensed for use by a 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such limited number of developers, which is specified as The Dinkum C++ Library in machine-readable or and must not be misrepresented as being the origi- part of the packaging for this Product. printed form ("Dinkum Library") and the Dinkum C++ nal source. A licence for up to ten users, for example, limits to Library Reference in machine-readable or printed 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or al- ten the number of developers reasonably able to use form ("Dinkum Reference"), hereafter in whole or in tered from any source or altered source distribution. the Product at any instant of time. part the "Product," are all copyrighted © 1989- The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specif- Thus, ten is the maximum number of possible con- 2001 by P.J. Plauger. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. The ically permit, without a fee, and encourage the use of current users, not the number of actual concurrent Product is derived in part from books copyrighted © this source code as a component to supporting the users. 1992-1995 by P.J. Plauger. PNG file format in commercial products. If you use A single-user licence is for use by just one developer.

296 Software licences

Anyone who accesses this software has a moral re- INFRINGEMENT. THE LICENSOR SHALL NOT BE LI- MIT-like Licence (HarfBuzz) sponsibility not to aid or abet illegal copying by ABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES SUFFERED BY LICENSEE HarfBuzz is licensed under the so-called "Old MIT" others. AS A RESULT OF USING THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF licence. Details follow. For parts of HarfBuzz that are The Licensor recognises that the machine-readable THE LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POS- licensed under different licences, see individual files format of the Product makes it particularly condu- SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. TO THE EXTENT names COPYING in subdirectories where applicable. cive to sharing within multi-user systems and across PERMITTED BY LAW, THE LICENSOR SHALL NOT Copyright (c) 2010, 2011, 2012 Google, Inc. networks. BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL Copyright (c) 2012 Mozilla Foundation. Such use is permitted only so long as Licensee does DAMAGES. Copyright (c) 2011 Codethink Limited not exceed the maximum number of possible con- By using this Product, you agree to abide by the in- Copyright (c) 2008, 2010 Nokia Corporation and/or current users and takes reasonable precautions to tellectual property laws and all other applicable laws its subsidiary/subsidiaries protect the Product against unauthorised copying of the USA, and the terms described above. You may Copyright (c) 2009 Keith Stribley and against public access. be held legally responsible for any infringement that Copyright (c) 2009 Martin Hosken and SIL In particular, please note that the ability to access is caused or encouraged by your failure to abide by International this copy does not imply permission to use it or to the terms of this Notice. Copyright (c) 2007 Chris Wilson copy it. RESTRICTED RIGHTS: Use, duplication or disclosure Copyright (c) 2006 Behdad Esfahbod Please note also that the Licensor has expended by the government is subject to the restrictions as Copyright (c) 2005 David Turner considerable professional effort in the production of set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Copyright (c) 2004, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 Red this Product and continues to do so to keep it Technical Data and Computer Software Clause as Hat, Inc. current. DFARS 52.227-7013 and FAR 52.227-19. Unpub- Copyright (c) 1998-2004 David Turner and Werner The Licensor warrants that the Product as shipped lished rights are reserved under the Copyright Laws Lemberg performs substantially in accordance with its docu- of the USA. Contractor/ Manufacturer is DINKUM- For full copyright notices, consult the individual files mented purpose and that the medium on which the WARE, LTD., 398 Main Street, Concord, MA 01742. in the package. Product is provided is free from defects in material The terms of this notice shall be governed by the Permission is hereby granted, without written and workmanship. To the extent permitted by law, laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. THE agreement and without licence or royalty fees, to any implied warranties on the Product are limited to RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF THE PARTIES SHALL use, copy, Pehrson andribute this software and its 90 days. NOT BE GOVERNED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE U. documentation for any purpose, provided that the The Licensor's entire liability under this warranty N. CONVENTION FOR THE INTERNATIONAL SALE above copyright notice and the following two para- shall be, at the Licensor's option, either to refund the OF GOODS, 1980. graphs appear in all copies of this software. licence fee paid by the Licensee or to replace the This Copyright and Licence Notice is the entire UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE COPY- medium on which the Product is provided. This is agreement of the parties with respect to the matters RIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DI- also the Licensee's exclusive remedy. To qualify for set forth herein, and supersedes any other verbal or RECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR this remedy, the Licensee must demonstrate satis- written agreements or communications relating CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE factory proof of purchase to the Licensor and return thereto and shall alone be binding. No provision ap- USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTA- the Product in reasonably good condition to the Li- pearing on any purchase order, quotation form or TION, EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN censor. THE LICENSOR OTHERWISE MAKES NO other form originated by either party shall be ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES ABOUT THE applicable. THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DIS- SUITABILITY OF THIS PRODUCT, EITHER EXPRESS Dinkumware and Dinkum are registered trademarks CLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE of Dinkumware, Ltd. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER- IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON- 297 Software licences

PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER MIT-like Licence (Synopsys DWC ETHER QOS USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE IS ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT Software Driver) POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. HOLDER HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAIN- The Synopsys DWC ETHER QOS Software Driver and TENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS documentation (hereinafter "Software") is an un- MIT-like Licence (libgd) OR MODIFICATIONS. supported proprietary work of Synopsys, Inc. unless In order to resolve any possible confusion regarding otherwise expressly agreed to in writing between the authorship of gd, the following copyright state- MIT-like Licence (PCCTS) Synopsys and you. ment covers all of the authors who have required SOFTWARE RIGHTS The Software IS NOT an item of Licensed Software such a statement. If you are aware of any oversights We reserve no LEGAL rights to the Purdue Compiler or Licensed Product under any End User Software in this copyright notice, please contact Pierre-A. Construction Tool Set (PCCTS) – PCCTS is in the Licence Agreement or Agreement for Licensed Joye, who will be pleased to correct them. public domain. An individual or company may do Product with Synopsys or any supplement thereto. * Portions copyrighted 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, whatever they wish with source code distributed Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 by with PCCTS or the code generated by PCCTS, in- person obtaining a copy of this software annotated Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory. Funded under Grant cluding the incorporation of PCCTS, or its output, with this licence and the Software, to deal in the P41-RR02188 by the National Institutes of Health. into commerical software. Software without restriction, including without limi- * Portions copyrighted 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, We encourage users to develop software with tation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, pub- 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 by Boutell.Com, PCCTS. However, we do ask that credit is given to us lish, distribute, sublicense and/or sell copies of the Inc. for developing PCCTS. By "credit", we mean that if Software, and to permit persons to whom the Soft- * Portions relating to GD2 format copyrighted 1999, you incorporate our source code into one of your ware is furnished to do so, subject to the following 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Philip Warner. programs (commercial product, research project or conditions: * Portions relating to PNG copyrighted 1999, 2000, otherwise) that you acknowledge this fact some- The above copyright notice and this permission no- 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Greg Roelofs. where in the documentation, research report, etc. If tice shall be included in all copies or substantial * Portions relating to gdttf.c copyrighted 1999, you like PCCTS and have developed a useful tool portions of the Software. 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 John Ellson (ell- with the output, please mention that you developed THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING DISTRIBUTED BY SYN- [email protected]). it using PCCTS. In addition, we ask that this header OPSYS SOLELY ON AN "AS IS" BASIS AND ANY EX- * Portions relating to gdft.c copyrighted 2001, remain intact in our source code. As long as these PRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT 2002, 2003, 2004 John Ellson (ellson@graphviz. guidelines are kept, we expect to continue enhanc- NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF org). ing this system and expect to make other tools MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTIC- * Portions copyrighted 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, available as they are completed. ULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. UNDER 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Pierre-Alain Joye (pier- ANTLR 1.33 NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL SYNOPSYS BE LIABLE [email protected]). Terence Parr FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, * Portions relating to JPEG and to colour quantisa- Parr Research Corporation EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (IN- tion copyrighted 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, with Purdue University and AHPCRC, University of CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT Doug Becker and copyrighted (C) 1994, 1995, Minnesota OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 1989-1995 USE, DATA OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUP- 2003, 2004 Thomas G. Lane. This software is based TION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LI- See the file README-JPEG.TXT for more ABILITY OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR information. OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE

298 Software licences

* Portions relating to GIF compression copyrighted Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR 1989 by Jef Poskanzer and David Rowley, with with or without modification, are permitted provided SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS; OR modifications for thread safety by Thomas Boutell. that the following conditions are met: BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED * Portions relating to GIF decompression copy- 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN righted 1990, 1991, 1993 by David Koblas, with above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT (INCLUD- modifications for thread safety by Thomas Boutell. following disclaimer. ING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY * Portions relating to WBMP copyrighted 2000, 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Maurice Szmurlo and Jo- above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH han Van den Brande. following disclaimer in the documentation and/or DAMAGE. * Portions relating to GIF animations copyrighted other materials provided with the distribution. This product includes cryptographic software writ- 2004 Jaakko Hyvätti ([email protected]) 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or ten by Eric Young ([email protected]). This prod- Permission has been granted to copy, distribute and use of this software must display the following ac- uct includes software written by Tim Hudson modify gd in any context without a fee, including a knowledgement: "This product includes software ([email protected]). commercial application, provided that this notice is developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the Original SSLeay Licence present in user-accessible supporting OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@crypt- documentation. 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL soft.com) All rights reserved. This does not affect your ownership of the derived Project" must not be used to endorse or promote This package is an SSL implementation written by work itself, and the intent is to assure proper credit products derived from this software without prior Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementa- for the authors of gd, not to interfere with your pro- written permission. For written permission, please tion was written so as to conform with Netscapes ductive use of gd. If you have questions, please do contact [email protected]. SSL. not hesitate to ask. "Derived works" includes all pro- 5. Products derived from this software may not be This library is free for commercial and non-com- grams that utilise the library. Credit must be given in called "OpenSSL", nor may "OpenSSL" appear in mercial use as long as the following conditions are user-accessible documentation. their names without prior written permission of the observed. The following conditions apply to all code This software is provided "AS IS." The copyright OpenSSL Project. found in this distribution, whether it be the RC4, holders disclaim all warranties, either express or im- 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must re- RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. plied, including but not limited to implied warranties tain the following acknowledgement: "This product The SSL documentation included with this distribu- of merchantability and fitness for a particular pur- includes software developed by the OpenSSL Proj- tion is covered by the same copyright terms except pose, with respect to this code and accompanying ect for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www. that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). documentation. openssl.org/)" Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Although their code does not appear in the current THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL Copyright notices in the code must not be removed. release, the authors wish to thank David Koblas, Da- PROJECT "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED If this package is used in a product, Eric Young vid Rowley and Hutchison Avenue Software Corpo- WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, should be given credit as the author of the parts of ration for their prior contributions. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY the library used. This can be in the form of a textual AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE message at program startup or in documentation OpenSSL DISCLAIMED. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL (online or textual) provided with the package. OpenSSL Licence THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, with or without modification, are permitted provided rights reserved. SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM- that the following conditions are met: AGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

299 Software licences

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the changed, i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and The above copyright notice including the dates of copyright notice, this list of conditions and the fol- put under another distribution licence [including the first publication and either this permission notice or lowing disclaimer. GNU Public Licence.] a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the shall be included in all copies or substantial portions above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the RSA-MD of the Software. following disclaimer in the documentation and/or Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Cre- THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT other materials provided with the distribution. ated 1991. All rights reserved. WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or Licence to copy and use this software is granted INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRAN- use of this software must display the following ac- provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Se- TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PAR- knowledgement: "This product includes crypto- curity, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all TICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. graphic software written by Eric Young material mentioning or referencing this software or UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL SILICON ([email protected])". The word 'cryptographic' can this function. GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAM- be omitted if the routines used from the library are Licence is also granted to make and use derivative AGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN AC- not cryptographic :-). works provided that such works are identified as TION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, 4. If you include any Windows-specific code (or a "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH derivative thereof) from the apps directory (applica- Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mention- THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE THEREOF OR OTHER tion code) you must include an acknowledgement: ing or referencing the derived work. DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. "This product includes software written by Tim RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations Except as contained in this notice, the name of Sili- Hudson ([email protected])". concerning either the merchantability of this soft- con Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS ware or the suitability of this software for any par- otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, ticular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express in this Software without prior written authorisation INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED or implied warranty of any kind. from Silicon Graphics, Inc. WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT- These notices must be retained in any copies of any NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DIS- part of this documentation and/or software. Unicode-TOU CLAIMED. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL Unicode Terms of Use THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR SGI-B-2.0 For the general privacy policy governing access to ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENCE B (Version 2.0, Sept. this site, see the Unicode Privacy Policy. For trade- EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (IN- 18, 2008) mark usage, see the Unicode® Consortium Name and CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon Trademark Usage Policy. OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. A. Unicode Copyright. USE, DATA OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUP- Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any 1. Copyright © 1991-2014 Unicode, Inc. All rights TION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY reserved. OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LI- person obtaining a copy of this software and asso- ciated documentation files (the "Software") to deal 2. Certain documents and files on this website con- ABILITY OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR tain a legend indicating that "Modification is permit- OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE in the Software without restriction, including with- out limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, ted." Any person is hereby authorised, without a fee, USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE to modify such documents and files to create deriv- POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. publish, distribute, sublicense and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the ative works conforming to the Unicode® Standard, The licence and distribution terms for any publically Software is furnished to do so, subject to the fol- subject to Terms and Conditions herein. available version or derivative of this code cannot be lowing conditions:

300 Software licences

3. Any person is hereby authorised, without a fee, to 1. This publication and/or website may include this website indicates your acknowledgement of view, use, reproduce and distribute all documents technical or typographical errors or other inaccura- Unicode, Inc.'s exclusive worldwide rights in the and files solely for informational purposes in the cies. Changes are periodically added to the informa- Unicode Word Mark, the Unicode Logo and the Uni- creation of products supporting the Unicode Stand- tion herein; these changes will be incorporated in code trade names. ard, subject to the Terms and Conditions herein. new editions of the publication and/or website. Uni- 2. The Unicode Consortium Name and Trademark 4. Further specifications of rights and restrictions code may make improvements and/or changes in Usage Policy ("Trademark Policy") are incorporated pertaining to the use of the particular set of data the product(s) and/or program(s) described in this herein by reference and you agree to abide by the files known as the "Unicode Character Database" publication and/or website at any time. provisions of the Trademark Policy, which may be can be found in Exhibit 1. 2. If this file has been purchased on magnetic or op- changed from time to time at the sole discretion of 5. Each version of the Unicode Standard has addi- tical media from Unicode, Inc. the sole and exclusive Unicode, Inc. tional specifications of rights and restrictions of use. remedy for any claim will be the exchange of the 3. All third party trademarks referenced herein are For the book editions (Unicode 5.0 and earlier), defective media within ninety (90) days of original the property of their respective owners. these are found on the back of the title page. The purchase. F. Miscellaneous. online code charts carry specific restrictions. All 3. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN SECTION C.2, THIS 1. Jurisdiction and Venue. This server is operated other files, including online documentation of the PUBLICATION AND/OR SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED from a location in the State of California, United core specification for Unicode 6.0 and later, are "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EI- States of America. Unicode makes no representation covered under these general Terms of Use. 6. THER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, IN- that the materials are appropriate for use in other 6. No licence is granted to "mirror" the Unicode CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY locations. If you access this server from other loca- website where a fee is charged for access to the WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS tions, you are responsible for compliance with local "mirror" site. FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGE- laws. This Agreement, all use of this site and any 7. Modification is not permitted with respect to this MENT. UNICODE AND ITS LICENSORS ASSUME NO claims and damages resulting from use of this site document. All copies of this document must be RESPONSIBILITY FOR ERRORS OR OMISSIONS IN are governed solely by the laws of the State of Cal- verbatim. THIS PUBLICATION AND/OR SOFTWARE OR OTH- ifornia without regard to any principles that would B. Restricted Rights Legend. Any technical data or ER DOCUMENTS REFERENCED BY OR LINKED TO apply the laws of a different jurisdiction. The user software licensed to the United States of America, THIS PUBLICATION OR THE UNICODE WEBSITE. agrees that any disputes regarding this site shall be its agencies and/or instrumentalities under this D. Waiver of Damages. Under no circumstances shall resolved solely in the courts located in Santa Clara Agreement is commercial technical data or com- Unicode or its licensors be liable for any special, in- County, California. The user agrees said courts have mercial computer software developed exclusively at cidental, indirect or consequential damages of any personal jurisdiction and agrees to waive any right to private expense as defined in FAR 2.101, or DFARS kind or any damages whatsoever, whether or not transfer the dispute to any other forum. 252.227-7014 (June 1995), as applicable. For Unicode was advised of the possibility of the dam- 2. Modification by Unicode Unicode shall have the technical data, use, duplication or disclosure by the age, including, without limitation, those resulting right to modify this Agreement at any time by post- Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in from the following: loss of use, data or profits, in ing it to this site. The user may not assign any part of DFARS 202.227-7015 Technical Data, Commercial connection with the use, modification or distribution this Agreement without Unicode's prior written and Items (Nov 1995) and this Agreement. For of this information or its derivatives. consent. Software, in accordance with FAR 12-212 or DFARS E. Trademarks & Logos. 3. Taxes. The user agrees to pay any taxes arising 227-7202, whichever applies use, duplication or 1. The Unicode Word Mark and the Unicode Logo are from access to this website or use of the information disclosure by the Government is subject to the re- trademarks of Unicode, Inc. "The Unicode Consorti- herein, except for those based on Unicode's net strictions set forth in this Agreement. um" and "Unicode, Inc." are trade names of Unicode, income. C. Warranties and Disclaimers. Inc. Use of the information and materials found on

301 Software licences

4. Severability. If any provision of this Agreement is declared invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall remain in effect. 5. Entire Agreement. This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties.

Zlib zlib Licence This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. Under no circumstances will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepre- sented; you cannot claim to be the author of the original software. If you use this software in a prod- uct, an acknowledgement in the product documen- tation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. This product includes third party software provided by QNX Software Systems Limited ("QNX"). To find the QNX open source information used, visit the LGE Open Source Distribution Site. (http:// opensource.lge.com)

302 Radio equipment outside European countries Radio equipment outside European countries

Inspection marks and declarations Modelo PK3: 00971–18–02930 1. Cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférences of conformity 2294-15-3616 nuisibles et 00716-15-03745 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence re- Albania, Bahrain, Bosnia and Herzegovina, 05674-16-06830 çue, y compris les interférences pouvant en- French Guyana, Georgia, Gibraltar, Guade- 00598-18-05298 traîner un fonctionnement. loupe, Iceland, Israel, Ivory Coast, Kuwait, "Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto Macedonia, Martinique, Monaco, Montenegro, é, não tem direito à proteção contra interferência Customs Union (including Armenia, Belarus, New Caledonia, Norway, Reunion, Sri Lanka, prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e Kazakhstan, Russia) St. Lucia, Switzerland, Trinidad & Tobago, não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando Turkey. em caráter primário." Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode causar interfer- ência em sistemas devidamente autorizados. Модель: LTE-MBC-EU2 Argentina Este produto está homologado pela ANATEL, de Изготовитель: Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH acordo com os procedimentos regulamentados pela Сделано в Германии Resolução 242/2000, e atende aos requisitos Электропитаие : 12 V=, 400 mA requisitos técnicos aplicados. CNC ID: H-21037 Para maiores informações, consulte o site da ANA- Costa Rica TEL www.anatel.gov.br CNC ID: C-18053 SUTEL 00770-2018

Australia Brunei Ghana DTA-002281 NCA APPROVED: 1R3-1M-7E0-14B NCA APPROVED: 6X6-4H-7EO-OF3 Canada Belarus This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Hong Kong Operation is subject to the following two conditions: HKCA 1035: Automotive radar: radio equipment ex- 1. This device may Not cause harmful interference, empted from licensing. and 2. This device must accept any interference re- India Brazil ceived including interference that may cause ETA – 1736/18-RLO(NE) undesired operation. Cet appareil est conforme à la Partie 15 des règle- Indonesia mentations de la FCC et avec la norme RSS-210 de 55538/SDPPI/2018 l'Industrie Canadienne. Son fonctionnement est 2208 soumis aux deux conditions suivantes: Modelo BCMevo5: 02393–19–05364 303 Radio equipment outside European countries

53856/SDPPI/2017 CIDF17000143 Mongolia 47817/SDPPI/2016 CIDF18000015 55747/SDPPI/2018 Mexico Israel IFETEL: RLVPOPK17-1947 Model Name: TSSRE4Dg IFETEL: RLVBOLR14-1873 Manufacturer: Huf Electronics Bretten IFETEL: RLVDER316-1666 Model Name: LRR4 IFT: RCPKATR18-0034 Manufacturer: Bosch Marca: KATHREIN AUTOMOTIVE Modelo (s): TRANSCVRP01 Japan La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las si- 204-560001 guientes doscondiciones: 202-LSC054 (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause 202-JN0638 interferencia perjudicial y 202-SMF114 (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su op- Japanese Radio Law Compliance. This device is Morocco granted pursuant to the Japanese Radio Law. This eración no deseada. device should not be modified (otherwise the AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC granted designation number will become invalid). Moldova Numéro d´agrément : MR 17800 ANRT 2018 Jamaica Date d´agrément : 24/10/2018 This product has been Type Approved by Jamaica: Numéro d´agrément : SMA - PK3. MR 15019 ANRT 2017 Date d´agrément : 26/10/2017 This product has been Type Approved by Jamaica: SMA - BCMevo5. Numéro d´agrément : MR 9668 ANRT 2014 Jordan Date d´agrément : 30/09/2014 Numéro d´agrément : TRC/LPD/2014/212 MR 12623 ANRT 2016 TRC/LPD/2017/615 Date d´agrément : 11/10/2016 TRC/LPD/2016/584 MD OC TIP 024 A6116-18 Numéro d´agrément : TRC/LPD/2018/66 MR 15845 ANRT 2018 Date d´agrément : 19/02/2018 Malaysia Numéro d’agrément : MR 13255 ANRT 2017 Date d’agrément : 09/02/2017 Numéro d’agrément: MR 19520 ANRT 2019 CIDF15000490 Date d’agrément: 13/04/2019 CIDF19000029 304 Radio equipment outside European countries

Oman Philippines Serbia OMAN - TRA D172249 TA056891 OMAN - TRA TA044715 D100428 OMAN - TRA/TA-R/4813/17 D100428 34540-1313/16-3 OMAN - TRA/TA-R/2609/15 34540-1020/17-3 D080134 OMAN - TRA/TA-R/2160/14 Singapore OMAN - TRA/R/3848/17 Complies with IDMA Standard DA 103787. D080134 Complies with IDMA Standards N0644-18. Complies with IDMA Standards DB 106879. Pakistan Registration Number N3078-18 Qatar Complies with IDMA Standards N2853–18. Approval Ref.: CRA/SA/2015/R-4714 Approval Ref.: CRA/SA/2014/R-4315 South Africa TA-2014/2597 Paraguay Russia APPROVED

TA-2014/1784 Модель: LTE-MBC-EU APPROVED Изготовитель: Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH Сделано в Германии TA-2017/2491 Электропитаие : 12 V=, 400 mA APPROVED Модель: WCH-193 Изготовитель: Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH TA-2016/2759 Сделано в Германии APPROVED Электропитаие : 12 V=, 400 mA

TA-2017/3465 APPROVED Fig. 227:

305 Radio equipment outside European countries

TA-2016/3539 이 기기는 가정용(B급) 전자파적합기기로서 주 第十二條經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機， APPROVED 로 가정에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 하며, 非經許可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變 모든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다. 更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功 해당 무선 설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 能。 TA-2017/209 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없음 第十四條低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航 APPROVED 인증 받은 자의 상호 Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH 安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時， / 應改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。前項合法通 TA-2019/5064 제조자/제조국가 Germany / 信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信。低功 APPROVED 기자재의 명칭/ 모델명 LTE-MBC-CN / 率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫 기자재의 명칭/ 모델명 MSIP-RMM-N7V-LTE- 療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。 MBC-CN 本器材須經專業工程人員安裝及設定，始得設 TA-2016/2568 인증 받은 자의 상호 Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH 置使用，且不得直接販售給一般消費者 APPROVED / 電磁波警語標示：「減少電磁波影響，請妥適 제조자/제조국가 Germany / 使用 기자재의 명칭 모델명 TA-2019/5116 / WCH-193 / 輸入電源需使用所附的5A保險絲於產品前端做 기자재의 명칭 모델명 APPROVED / R-CMM-N7V-WCH-193 保護

Taiwan Thailand CCAK15LP0801T1 This telecommunication equipment conforms to South Korea CCAE15LP0190T0 NTC technical requirements. CCAF16LP2450T2 CCAE18LP0110T0 해당 무선 설비는 운용 중 전파혼신 가능성이 있 음 MSIP-REM-HEB-TSSSG4G5 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法 第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機， MSIP-CRM-HEB-TSSRE4DG : 非經許可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變 MSIP-CMM-BO2-LRR4 更頻率、加大功率或變更原 設計之特性及功 MCIP-CRM-DDG-R3TR 能。 R-C-MQU-PK3 第十四條: 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航 송신기 주파수 21.85 kHz 安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時， B급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재) 應立即停用，並改善至無干 擾時方得繼續使 이 기기는 가정용(B급) 전자파적합기기로서 주 用。 로 가정에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 하며 , 前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電 모든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다 . 信。 해당 무선 설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 低功率射頻電機需忍受合法通信或工業、科學 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없음 及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。 송신기 주파수 433.92 MHz 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法 B급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)

306 Radio equipment outside European countries

Ukraine DEALER No: 0043253/10 Vietnam

United States of America NOTICE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference re- ceived, including interference that may cause unde- sired operation. Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment. Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information: The radiated output power of the device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. United Arab Emirates Nevertheless, the device shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during TRA REGISTERED No: ER58762/17, normal operation is minimized. DEALER No: 0018994/09 TRA REGISTERED No: ER66073/18, DEALER No: 0018994/09 TRA REGISTERED No: ER38964/15, DEALER: HUF ELECTRONICS GmbH TRA REGISTERED No: ER36213/14, DEALER No: DA36785/14 TRA REGISTERED No: ER497919/16, DEALER No: DA0062437/11 TRA REGISTERED No: ER61595/18, DEALER No: DA65993/17 TRA REGISTERED No: ER54754/17, DEALER No: 0043253/10 TRA REGISTERED No: ER71148/19 DEALER No: DA0043253/10 TRA REGISTERED No: ER54754/17,DEALER No: DA0043253/10 TRA REGISTERED No: ERXXXXX/XX, 307 Technical Data Technical Data The information contained in this Manual may differ Identification plate (country-dependent) Tyre-pressure plate from the vehicle-specific data due to differing items of equipment or for country-specific reasons. Unless specified separately, it applies for all body variants. For the vehicle-specific data, please refer to the of- ficial vehicle documentation and vehicle registration documents and the information plates (e.g. identifi- cation plate) in the vehicle. The information in the official vehicle documentation and vehicle registration documents always takes priority over the information in this Manual.

Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number is located at the bottom left behind the windscreen and under the passenger seat. e When ordering spare parts, always quote the vehicle identification number.

Fig. 228: Identification plate fixing point Fig. 230: Tyre-pressure plate fixing point The tyre pressure plate is attached to the door sill area at the driver’s door.

Vehicle data carrier The vehicle data carrier is located in the "Warranty and Maintenance" booklet. It contains all important data about your vehicle. This data carrier cannot be re-ordered if it is lost or damaged.

Fig. 229: Example of identification plate A EC type approval number (country-dependent) B Vehicle identification number C Permissible gross weight E Maximum axle load, front F Maximum axle load, rear

308 Technical Data dimensions

Length (depending on equipment) 4.963 mm

Width (depending on equipment) 1.966 mm

Width with exterior mirrors 2.144 mm

Height at DIN kerb weight 1.356 mm-1.401 mm depending on chassis version

Ground clearance at DIN kerb weight 106 mm-149 mm depending on chassis version

Filling capacities

approx. 2.5 litres (vehicles with Night View Assist or reversing camera: approx. Washer fluid 5.5 litres)

Weight

Fig. 231: Example of identification plate A EC type approval number (country-dependent) B Vehicle identification number C Permissible gross weight E Maximum axle load, front F Maximum axle load, rear

309 Technical Data

Payload (includes 75 kg for driver and luggage)

Depending on model and equipment 385 kg – 740 kg

e The vehicle-specific weights such as permissible total weight and permissible axle loads must be taken from the identification plate or the official vehicle documents and registration documents (country-specific, e.g. "Certificate of Conformity") provided during delivery of the vehicle. e Do not exceed the maximum gross weight and maximum axle loads. If additional accessories are installed, the maximum permissible load will be reduced.

Roof load e Only use roof transport systems from the Porsche Tequipment product line or products that have been tested and approved for this vehicle by Porsche. e Observe the individual weights of the roof transport system and the attachment parts. e Do not drive at a speed of more than 130 km/h (81 mph) when the roof transport system is loaded. > Please refer to chapter "Roof Transport System" on page 214.

Maximum roof load

All models 75 kg

Tyres and wheels Wheel and tyre sizes Tyres approved by Porsche are the best possible tyres for your vehicle. The load capacity index (e.g. "105") and classification letter for the maximum permitted speed (e.g. "Y") are minimum requirements. When fitting new tyres or changing tyres: > Please refer to chapter "Tyres and Wheels" on page 249. e Snow chains must only be fitted to the appropriately marked wheel and tyre sizes. Observe the applicable national regulations regarding maximum speeds when snow chains are fitted. Only use snow chains approved by Porsche. e Before fitting different wheels and tyres, check the EU declaration of conformity to see if the desired wheel/tyre combination is permitted for your particular vehicle. For more information, please contact your Porsche partner.

Tyre type Tyre size Wheel size Fitting snow chains

FA: 225/55 R 19 103Y XL FA: 8,0J x 19, RO 50 no RA: 275/45 R 19 108Y XL RA: 10,0J x 19, RO 47 Summer tyres FA: 245/45 R 20 103Y XL FA: 9.0J x 20, RO 54 no RA: 285/40 R 20 108Y XL RA: 11,0J x 20, RO 60

310 Technical Data

Tyre type Tyre size Wheel size Fitting snow chains

FA: 255/40 ZR 20 (103Y) XL FA: 9.0J x 20, RO 54 no RA: 295/35 ZR 20 (108Y) XL RA: 11,0J x 20, RO 60

FA: 265/35 ZR 21 (101Y) XL FA: 9,5J x 21, RO 60 no RA: 305/30 ZR 21 (104Y) XL RA: 11,5J x 21, RO 66

FA: 225/55 R19 103H XL M+S FA: 8,0J x 19, RO 50 no RA: 275/45 R19 108H XL M+S RA: 10,0J x 19, RO 47

FA: 245/45 R 20 103H XL M+S FA: 9.0J x 20, RO 54 All-season tyres no RA: 285/40 R 20 108H XL M+S RA: 11,0J x 20, RO 60

FA: 265/35 R 21 101H XL M+S FA: 9,5J x 21, RO 60 no RA: 305/30 R 21 104H XL M+S RA: 11,5J x 21, RO 66

FA: 225/55 R19 103V XL M+S FA: 8,0J x 19, RO 50 On rear axle only RA: 275/45 R19 108V XL M+S RA: 10,0J x 19, RO 47 Winter tyres FA: 245/45 R 20 103V XL M+S FA: 9.0J x 20, RO 54 On rear axle only RA: 285/40 R 20 108V XL M+S RA: 11,0J x 20, RO 60

19-inch wheels not suitable for vehicles with a Porsche Surface Coated Brake (PSCB) or Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB). FA = front axle, RA = rear axle, RO = rim offset tyre pressure All tyre pressures apply only to the tyre makes and types approved by Porsche for cold tyres (20 °C). The correct tyre pressures for factory-fitted tyres can be found on the tyre pressure plate. The specified tyre pressures for all other tyre options can be found on the Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) display in the central display. e Set the tyre type, tyre size and loading condition of the vehicle in the Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) system. > Please refer to chapter "Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM)" on page 249. e Refer to the tyre pressure plate and the Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) display in the central display. – e Setting e Vehicle settings e Tyre pressure monitoringTyre Pressure Monitoring e Pressure deviation e Adapt the tyre pressure according to specifications.

311 Technical Data Spare wheel > Please refer to chapter "Using the spare wheel" on page 115.

Wheel and tyre size

Tyre size Wheel size Fitting snow chains

T 155/70 R20 115M 4,5B x 20, RO 7 no

FA = front axle, RA = rear axle, RO = rim offset

Tyre pressure All tyre pressures apply only to the tyre makes and types approved by Porsche for cold tyres (20 °C).

FA RA

4.2 bar / 420 kPa / 61 psi 4.2 bar / 420 kPa / 61 psi

312 Radio equipment in accordance with 2014/53/EU Radio equipment in accordance with 2014/53/EU Declaration of Conformity Your vehicle features a variety of radio equipment. The manufacturers of this radio equipment declare that it complies with the specifications for their use in accordance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the relevant EU Declaration of Conformity is available at the following Internet address: http://www.porsche.com/international/ accessoriesandservice/porscheservice/ vehicleinformation/documents/

Mapping tables – TPMS ECU G5 compact 433.92 MHz TSSS – 992.035.504.A The mapping tables help to make a connection be- G4G5 – VAG_724791001 tween the device designation in a declaration of Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) system – gen. 3 – 920286352 conformity, and the vehicle equipment and termi- wheel electronics – VAG_724791007 nology in his driver's manual. – TPMS Sensor G3.8 433.92 MHz TSSRE4Dg Other Security Infotainment – Ladekabel Driver’s key Smartphone tray – PK3 – LTE-MBC-EU2 Multi Band Compensor Porsche vehicle tracking system – driver card Wireless charging – PD2 – WCH-193c Garage door opener (HomeLink®) – Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink® Driver assistance ADHL5D Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) – LRR4 automotive radar sensor Control units ParkAssist Central control unit – TRANSCVRP01 – BCMevo 5 Lane Change Assist (LCA), Intersection Assist (IA) tyre – R3TR Short Range Radar Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) system – gen. 3 control unit Antennas – Kommunikationsbox C-Box: CONBOX-HIGH 313 Radio equipment in accordance with 2014/53/EU

Radio system, frequency band, Control units Smartphone tray maximum transmission power Unless stated otherwise, the details apply to all Central control unit WCDMA VIII 125.00 mW models or vehicles that are equipped with the rele- (880 – 915 MHz) 21.85 kHz < 40dBμA/m @ 10m vant radio1 system. Deviations are marked in the footnotes. LTE FDD1 200.00 mW 433,05 – 434,79 MHz Receiver only (1920 – 1980 MHz) Security Tyres LTE FDD3 200.00 mW (1710 – 1785 MHz) Driver’s key Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) system – gen. 3 LTE FDD7 200.00 mW 21.85 kHz < 40 dBμA/m @ 10m wheel electronics (2500 – 2570 MHz) 433,47 – 434,37 MHz 10.00 mW 433.92 MHz 81 dBμV/m LTE FDD8 200.00 mW (880 – 915 MHz) Porsche vehicle tracking system – driver card Tyre Pressure Monitoring – gen. 3 control unit LTE FDD20 200.00 mW 21.85 kHz < 40 dBμA/m @ 10m 433.92 MHz Receiver only (832 – 862 MHz)

433,47 – 434,37 MHz 10.00 mW Infotainment Wireless charging Garage door opener (HomeLink®) 111.00 kHz 42 dBμA/m Smartphone tray 433,05 – 434,79 MHz 10.00 mW GSM 900 2000.00 mW Driver assistance 868,00 – 868,60 MHz 25.00 mW (880 – 915 MHz) 868,70 – 869,20 MHz Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) GSM 1800 1000.00 mW 869,40 – 869,65 MHz (1710 – 1785 MHz) 869,70 – 870,00 MHz 76 – 77 GHz 981.75 mW WCDMA I 125.00 mW (1920 – 1980 MHz) Lane Change Assist (LCA), Intersection Assist (IA) WCDMA III 125.00 mW (1710 – 1785 MHz) 76 – 77 GHz 1000.00 mW

1. In some countries, commissioning or approval for use of the radio technology may be restricted, not permitted or permitted with additional requirements. 314 Radio equipment in accordance with 2014/53/EU

ParkAssist Communication box C-Box

Bluetooth® 2.51 mW LTE FDD8 199.53 mW (2402 – 2480 MHz) (880 – 915 MHz)

LTE FDD20 199.53 mW Antennas (832 – 862 MHz)

Communication box C-Box LTE FDD28 199.53 mW (758 – 803 MHz) WiFi 31.62 mW (2400 – 2484 MHz) LTE FDD32 199.53 mW (1452 - 1496 MHz) Bluetooth® 10.00 mW 2400 - 2480 MHz) LTE FDD38 199.53 mW (2570 – 2620 MHz) GSM 900 501.19 mW (880 – 915 MHz) Other GSM 1800 1000.00 mW (1710 – 1785 MHz) Charging cable

WCDMA I 251.19 mW WiFi 2.4 GHz 100 mW (1920 – 1980 MHz) (2400 – 2483.5 MHz)

WCDMA III 251.19 mW WiFi 5 GHz 100 mW (1710 – 1785 MHz) (5150 – 5250 MHz)

WCDMA VIII 251.19 mW (880 – 915 MHz)

LTE FDD1 199.53 mW (1920 – 1980 MHz)

LTE FDD3 199.53 mW (1710 – 1785 MHz)

LTE FDD7 199.53 mW (2500 – 2570 MHz)

315 Index

Index Switching the ioniser on/off ...... 50 Automatic headlights Upper ventilation panel...... 47 Setting ...... 147 Air-recirculation mode Symbols Switching on/off ...... 50 B Airbag Baby carrier ...... 93 12 V lithium battery Care instructions ...... 67 External power supply...... 284 Baby seat ...... 93 Switching passenger airbag on and off...... 93 Switching passenger airbag on and off...... 93 Jump starting...... 284 Warning light ...... 40 Battery ...... 283 Alarm system Charging (lithium battery) ...... 282-283 A Deactivating interior surveillance and inclination External power supply...... 284 sensor ...... 54 ABS (Anti-lock brake system) ...... 207 Installation position (lithium battery) ...... 282 Function indication ...... 54 Accepting/rejecting a call ...... 182 Instructions (lithium battery) ...... 282 Functional description...... 54 Account ...... 180 Jump starting...... 284 Switching on and off ...... 54 Active Lane Keeping ...... 30 Lithium battery ...... 282-283 Display elements ...... 31 All-wheel drive Procedure after connection (lithium battery). . . . 282-283 General safety instructions...... 30 Torque distribution display...... 131 Replacing (lithium battery)...... 282-283 Switching on and off ...... 32 Alloy wheels Vehicle electrical system warning (lithium battery) . . 282- Adaptive cruise control (ACC) Care instructions ...... 66 283 Changing the desired speed...... 37 Aluminium rims Warnings on the battery (lithium battery) ...... 282 Interrupting and resuming control...... 38 Care instructions ...... 66 Battery charge level Operating states ...... 37 Ambient lighting ...... 134 Displaying ...... 126 Overriding control ...... 38 Adjusting brightness ...... 263 Battery temperature Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set colour ...... 263 Displaying ...... 126 Braking to a standstill and driving off again...... 39 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ...... 207 Belts Changing the desired distance ...... 37 Antifreeze Care instructions ...... 67 Controls ...... 36 In coolant ...... 97 Fastening ...... 221 Display elements ...... 36 In washer fluid ...... 219 Notes...... 220 Operating principle ...... 36 Apple CarPlay Opening seat-belt buckle and removing seat belt. . . . . 222 Switching on and off ...... 37 Siri ...... 55 Seat-belt pre-tensioners ...... 220 Adjusting the seat position ...... 223 Apple CarPlay ...... 55 Warning light on the instrument cluster...... 220 Warning message ...... 220 Advanced Climate Control ...... 46 Apps ...... 56 Air distribution Charging app ...... 56 Bend ahead warning ...... 247 Setting ...... 47 Porsche "Good to know" app ...... 56 Bluetooth® Air suspension (PASM)...... 187 Porsche 360+ app...... 56 Connecting a mobile phone ...... 183 Air-conditioning system Porsche Connect App ...... 56 Device Manager ...... 102 Adjusting air distribution ...... 47 Porsche Road Trip app ...... 56 Bonnet Defrosting windscreen ...... 51 Armrest Closing ...... 58 Setting automatic air-recirculation mode...... 50 Front storage compartment ...... 243 Emergency unlocking ...... 58 Setting the air flow ...... 48 Arrival Opening...... 57 Setting the footwell temperature ...... 48 Displaying ...... 126 Bottle holders ...... 100 Setting the temperature ...... 48 Ashtray Brake assistance ...... 268 Storing and retrieving personal settings...... 180 Emptying ...... 228 Brake fluid ...... 60 Switching A/C MAX mode on/off ...... 48 Opening...... 228 Changing brake fluid ...... 60 Switching air-recirculation mode on and off ...... 50 Assistance systems Checking the brake fluid level ...... 60 Switching cooling function on/off...... 48 Adjusting settings ...... 260 Brakes Switching Eco mode on/off ...... 49 Automatic Coming Home lights ...... 149 Bedding in and cleaning ...... 61 Switching maximum cooling output on/off ...... 48 Automatic dimming function Brake pad warning message ...... 62 Switching on automatic climate control...... 46 Brake pads and brake discs ...... 61 Switching on/off ...... 46 Mirror ...... 163 316 Index

General safety instructions...... 61 Notes on leaving the vehicle unused for long periods. . . 63 Inserting the vehicle plug and starting the charging Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB) ...... 61 Paint ...... 64 process ...... 81 Porsche Surface Coated Brake (PSCB)...... 61 PCM...... 68 Profile function ...... 83 Braking Race-Tex...... 67 Safety instructions ...... 79 Emergency braking function ...... 62 Screens ...... 68 Timer function ...... 83 Breakdown Call Seals ...... 66 Charging app ...... 56 Data transmission ...... 175 Seat belts ...... 67 Charging Planner...... 169 Online measures ...... 175 Touch displays ...... 68 Chassis number...... 308 Underbody protection ...... 65 Triggering ...... 175 Child lock ...... 74 Wheel bolts ...... 255 Vehicle access ...... 175 Rear seats...... 278 Windows...... 65 Buttons on the multi-function steering wheel ...... 129 Child protection Care of wheels...... 66 Disabling the controls in the rear...... 278 Carpet...... 67 Child restraint system C Care instructions ...... 67 Cameras Ensuring correct installation position ...... 91 Central display...... 190, 193 Overview...... 19 Installing ...... 93 Configuring Home screen...... 124 Installing with i-Size system ...... 95 Car care ...... 63 Configuring homepage ...... 124 Airbags ...... 67 Installing with ISOFIX system ...... 95 Configuring MyScreen...... 124 Switching passenger airbag on and off...... 93 Alloy wheels ...... 66 MyScreen ...... 124 Car washing ...... 64 Using correct weight and size class ...... 88 Notifications...... 173 Using correctly...... 87 Decorative films...... 66 Start menu ...... 124 Dinamica...... 67 Child seat Central locking...... 69 Fabric lining ...... 67 Ensuring correct installation position ...... 91 Locking vehicle with Comfort Access...... 73 Headlights ...... 66 Installing ...... 93 Locking vehicle with driver's key ...... 72 Laying up a vehicle ...... 68 Installing with i-Size system ...... 95 Opening and locking vehicle from inside ...... 73 Leather ...... 66 Installing with ISOFIX system ...... 95 Storing and retrieving personal settings...... 180 Paint ...... 64 Switching passenger airbag on and off...... 93 Unlocking vehicle with Comfort Access ...... 71 Plastic parts ...... 66 Top tether...... 95 Unlocking vehicle with driver's key ...... 71 Seals ...... 66 Using correct weight and size class ...... 88 Seat belts ...... 67 Centre armrest Using correctly...... 87 Underbody protection ...... 65 Front storage compartment ...... 243 Closing the profile trim...... 218 Use of high-pressure cleaning equipment ...... 63 Centre console control panel Coasting mode ...... 238 Freehand entry...... 195 Warnings ...... 63 Cockpit Operating ...... 78 Wheel bolts ...... 255 Adjusting lighting...... 134 Quick filter ...... 76 Windows...... 65 Car & Info display ...... 126 Remote control ...... 76 Car Care Odometer ...... 131 Rear spoiler...... 233 Changing battery Power meter...... 125 Car washing ...... 64 Driver’s key...... 105 Speed & Assist display ...... 125 Care instructions...... 63 Charge port door Trip counter ...... 131 Airbags ...... 67 Emergency operation ...... 85 Warning and indicator lights ...... 126 Alloy wheels ...... 66 Identification of location...... 126 Collision warning...... 268 Car washing ...... 64 Opening the charge port door ...... 80 Setting the warning time ...... 269 Carpet ...... 67 Charging Switching on and off ...... 269 Decorative films...... 66 Identification for location of charge port door ...... 126 Comfort Access Displays...... 68 Charging (high-voltage battery) Lock vehicle ...... 73 Fabric lining ...... 67 Emergency operation of vehicle plug ...... 86 Operating principle ...... 70 Floor mats...... 67 Finishing the charging process and removing the vehicle Unlocking vehicle...... 71 plug ...... 82 High-voltage battery...... 63 Comfort Entry function High-voltage battery charge and locking status display on Laying up a vehicle ...... 68 Switching on ...... 263 vehicle charge port ...... 82 Leather ...... 66 Comfort memory package ...... 180 317 Index

Compass Device Manager...... 102 SPORT PLUS ...... 106 Displaying ...... 126 Diagnostic socket ...... 7 Vehicle setup ...... 107 Configuring the capacitive button ...... 259 Digital Driver's Manual Warning messages ...... 107 Configuring the quick access button on the steering App ...... 3 Driving time and distance wheel ...... 259 On-board ...... 3 Displaying ...... 126 Congestion updates (Navigation) ...... 168 Dipped beams ...... 147 Dynamic high beam Connect Direction indicator...... 150 Activating ...... 259 Using Porsche Connect services ...... 196 Actuate ...... 150 Connecting an external device via USB ...... 103 Comfort direction indication ...... 150 E Connection manager...... 102 Display Electric parking brake Connection status...... 184 Car & Info ...... 126 Actuate ...... 259 Connectivity Speed & Assist...... 125 Electrical system voltage Connection status ...... 184 Displaying and resetting odometer...... 131 Displaying ...... 126 Establishing data connection ...... 196 Displaying and resetting trip counter ...... 131 Embedded SIM card Using Porsche Connect services ...... 196 Displaying/editing e-mails...... 160 Establishing data connection ...... 196 Contacts (phone) ...... 182 Displaying/editing messages (text messages/e-mails). . . . . 160 Emergency Assist ...... 112 Coolant ...... 97 Displaying/editing text messages...... 160 Emergency braking function Cruise control Displays Activating ...... 62 Controls ...... 98 Care instructions ...... 68 Emergency call ...... 108 Cruise control (CC) ...... 98 Distance warning ...... 268 Emergency key ...... 104 Cruise control (CC) ...... 98 Setting the warning time ...... 269 Emergency locking of doors...... 74 Activating ...... 99 Switching on and off ...... 269 Emergency operation Changing the desired speed...... 99 Door Charge port door ...... 85 Display elements ...... 98 Emergency locking ...... 74 Vehicle plug ...... 86 General safety instructions...... 98 Emergency unlocking ...... 74 Emergency stop function ...... 112 Interrupting control ...... 99 Locking with Comfort Access ...... 73 General safety instructions...... 112 Operating principle ...... 98 Locking with the driver's key ...... 72 Operating principle ...... 112 Resuming control...... 99 Opening and locking from inside ...... 73 Override ...... 113 Switching on and off ...... 98 Drive mode Switching on and off ...... 113 Warning messages ...... 98 Configuring RANGE ...... 106 System limitations...... 112 Cupholder...... 100 Range ...... 107 Warning messages ...... 112 Drive positions...... 236 Emergency unlocking D Driver memory package ...... 180 Front lid...... 58 DAB Driver's key...... 104 Emergency unlocking of doors ...... 74 Setting frequency range ...... 157 Driver’s key Entering a stopover (Navigation)...... 167 Data connection Changing battery...... 105 Entering characters...... 78 Device Manager ...... 102 Lock vehicle ...... 72 Entering/searching for a destination ...... 165 Establishing (embedded SIM card) ...... 196 Unlocking vehicle...... 71 Establishing readiness for operation...... 236-237 External WiFi hotspot ...... 196 Driver’s key (remote control) Examples of commands ...... 266 Using vehicle WiFi hotspot...... 196 Opening/closing side windows (without Comfort Date Access) ...... 278 Exterior lights Setting the fade-out duration ...... 259 Displaying ...... 126 Driving mode ...... 106 Date and time Configuring INDIVIDUAL...... 106 Exterior mirror Setting ...... 258 INDIVIDUAL ...... 106 Adjusting as a parking aid...... 162 Folding in/out ...... 162 Deceleration NORMAL ...... 106 Setting ...... 161 Displaying ...... 126 RANGE ...... 106 Storing settings (memory) ...... 162 Decorative films ...... 66 Select ...... 106 External power supply ...... 284 Care instructions ...... 66 SPORT...... 106 318 Index

External WiFi hotspot ...... 196 G Ice cover...... 280 G-force display ...... 131 Identification number ...... 308 F Garage door opener Identification plate ...... 308 Fabric lining (care instructions)...... 67 HomeLink® ...... 121 Immobiliser ...... 54 Factory settings Programming ...... 121 Indicator lights...... 126 Using...... 121 Resetting vehicle settings ...... 258 Information area Faults Gestures ...... 78 Configuring...... 126 Driver's key battery ...... 105 Glove box Inserting the vehicle plug and starting the charging Power windows ...... 278 Storage ...... 243 process...... 81 Filling capacities ...... 309 Good to know app...... 56 Instrument cluster...... 125 Washer fluid...... 309 GPS altitude Adjusting lighting...... 134 Finishing the charging process and removing the vehicle Displaying ...... 126 Car & Info display ...... 126 plug...... 82 Configuring the capacitive instrument cluster Fire extinguisher ...... 13 button ...... 259 H Menu overview...... 131 First aid kit...... 154 Handwriting panel...... 78 Modifying the display ...... 258 Fitting carrier...... 214 Headlights ...... 151 Odometer ...... 131 Fitting mounting components...... 218 Care instructions ...... 66 Operating ...... 129 Floor mats Changing bulbs ...... 151 Overview...... 125 Care instructions ...... 67 Overseas mode ...... 151 Power meter...... 125 Fluids and fuels ...... 309 Setting ...... 151 Selecting options and activating functions ...... 130 Washer fluid...... 309 High beam Speed & Assist display ...... 125 FM High beam stalk...... 150 Sport Chrono stopwatch...... 234 Setting frequency range ...... 157 High-pressure cleaning device Trip counter ...... 131 Folding in mirrors ...... 259 Instructions for use ...... 63 Tyre Pressure Monitoring ...... 249 Warning and indicator lights ...... 126 Folding rear seat backrest forward ...... 226 High-voltage battery care ...... 63 Instrument lighting Footwell temperature High-voltage battery charge and locking status display on Adjusting brightness ...... 134 Setting ...... 48 vehicle charge port ...... 82 Instrument panel Four-wheel drive High-voltage battery charge and locking status on vehicle charge port ...... 82 Adjusting lighting...... 134 All-wheel display ...... 131 HOLD function...... 123 Car & Info display ...... 126 Freehand entry ...... 78 Activating ...... 123 Overview...... 125 Front seat General Safety Instructions ...... 123 Power meter...... 125 Setting ...... 223 Operating principle ...... 123 Speed & Assist display ...... 125 Full load Warning messages ...... 123 Warning and indicator lights ...... 126 Setting ...... 251 HomeLink® Intelligent detour...... 168 Function buttons on the multi-function steering wheel . . . . 129 Garage door opener...... 121 Interfaces in the armrest Function on Demand (FoD) HomeLink®Garage door opener USB ...... 102 Activating ...... 174 Programming ...... 121 Interior lighting Deactivating ...... 174 Using...... 121 Ambient lighting ...... 134 Fuse ...... 117 Hotspot Dimming ...... 134 Changing electric fuses ...... 117 Using an external WiFi hotspot ...... 196 Setting the fade-out duration and brightness ...... 259 Fuse assignment ...... 117 Using PCM WiFi hotspot ...... 196 Switching on and off ...... 134 Fuse assignment for the right footwell...... 120 Interior mirror Fuse assignment left dashboard ...... 118 Dimming ...... 163 Fuse assignment right dashboard ...... 118 I Setting ...... 163 I-Size system Fuse box ...... 117 Internet Left footwell fuse assignment ...... 119 Installing child restraint system with i-Size system . . . . 95 Top tether...... 95 Establishing data connection ...... 196

319 Index

Intersection Assist ...... 136 Lateral acceleration forces Load Display elements ...... 136 Display ...... 131 On the roof ...... 214 General safety instructions...... 136 Launch Control ...... 237 Locking Operating principle ...... 136 Laying up a vehicle ...... 68 Emergency locking of vehicle...... 74 Switching on and off ...... 137 Leather Locking vehicle from inside ...... 73 System limitations...... 136 Care instructions ...... 66 Locking vehicle with Comfort Access...... 73 Warning messages ...... 136 Locking vehicle with driver's key ...... 72 Leaving the vehicle unused ...... 63 Ioniser SAFELOCK ...... 72 Light bulbs ...... 151 Switching on/off ...... 50 Locking options ISOFIX system ...... 91 Lighting Setting ...... 259 Interior lighting ...... 134 Installing child restraint system with ISOFIX system . . . 95 Longitudinal acceleration Top tether...... 95 Lights Displaying ...... 126 Adverse weather lights ...... 149 Longitudinal acceleration forces Ambient lighting ...... 134 Display ...... 131 J Automatic Coming Home lights...... 149 Jack Automatic headlight calibration...... 149 Luggage compartment...... 153 Information on raising vehicles with air suspension . . . 188 Automatic headlights ...... 147 Closing ...... 58 Lifting the vehicle ...... 138 Brief overview ...... 147 Emergency unlocking ...... 58 Jump starting ...... 284 Care instructions ...... 66 Opening...... 57, 211 Jump-lead starting Changing bulbs ...... 151 External power supply...... 284 Dipped beams ...... 147 M Direction indicator ...... 150 Maintenance work Dynamic cornering lights ...... 149 Adding washer fluid...... 219 K Dynamic high beam...... 149 Key Malfunctions Encounter lights...... 149 Storing the side window end positions...... 278 Locking vehicle ...... 72 Entry function/Exit function ...... 149 Map (Navigation) Removing emergency key...... 104 Exterior lights...... 147 Calling up ...... 165 Storing and retrieving personal settings...... 180 Fog function ...... 149 Configure ...... 167 Unlocking vehicle...... 71 General safety instructions...... 148 Keyboard ...... 194 Hazard warning lights ...... 151 Massage programme Setting ...... 258 Headlight flasher ...... 150 Setting ...... 263 Interior lighting ...... 134 Massage strength L Motorway lights...... 149 Setting ...... 263 Lane Change Assist (LCA) ...... 139 Overseas mode ...... 151 Media ...... 157 Display elements ...... 141 Passing lights...... 149 Browsing...... 157 Driving situations...... 141 PDLS Plus with LED headlights ...... 149 Connecting an external device via USB ...... 103 General safety instructions...... 139 PDLS Plus with LED matrix headlights ...... 149 Interfaces in the armrest ...... 102 Information and warning stage ...... 141 Rear fog light ...... 147 Making settings ...... 159 Operating principle ...... 140 Setting the off delay ...... 149 Playing ...... 157 Rear collision warning ...... 140 Setting travel mode...... 259 Selecting a source ...... 157 Rear Turn Assist...... 139 Side lights...... 147 Storing/editing a favourite ...... 158 Setting display brightness ...... 141 Signage glare reduction ...... 149 Tuning/storing stations ...... 157 Switching on and off ...... 141 Situational lighting distribution ...... 149 Memory package...... 180 System limitations...... 140 Switching dynamic high beam on and off ...... 150 Messages ...... 160 Warning messages ...... 140 Switching high beam on and off ...... 150 Minor repairs Switching off ...... 148 Lane Keep Assist...... 144 In the event of a flat tyre ...... 114 Switching parking lights on and off...... 150 Operating principle ...... 145 Securing vehicle to prevent it from rolling away ...... 114 Warning messages ...... 148 Switching on and off ...... 146 Towing the vehicle ...... 245 LIM (speed limiter) ...... 230 Language Mirror Setting ...... 258 Listening to the mailbox...... 182 Adjusting exterior mirrors...... 161

320 Index

Adjusting exterior mirrors as a parking aid...... 162 General safety instructions...... 171 Parking Automatic dimming function ...... 163 Operating principle ...... 171 ParkAssist...... 176 Exterior mirror heating ...... 51 Pedestrian warning ...... 171 Reversing camera ...... 177 Folding exterior mirrors in/out...... 162 Setting the picture contrast...... 172 Surround View ...... 178 Storing exterior mirror settings (memory) ...... 162 Setting the warning time ...... 172 Parking aid Vanity mirror ...... 244 Switching on and off ...... 172 Swivelling down mirror glass ...... 162 Mobile data (connectivity) ...... 196 System limitations...... 171 Partial load Mobile phone Warning messages ...... 171 Setting ...... 251 Connecting a mobile phone ...... 183 Notification centre ...... 173 PASM (Porsche Active Suspension Management) ...... 187 ® Connecting via Bluetooth (known mobile phone) . . . . 184 Notifications ...... 173 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF/ON indicator ...... 41 Connecting via Bluetooth® (new mobile phone)...... 183 Filtering...... 173 Passenger mirror Connecting via Bluetooth® (second mobile phone) . . . . 184 Opening...... 173 Adjusting as a parking aid...... 162 Connecting via Bluetooth® (Windows® and iOS operating Folding in/out ...... 162 system) ...... 184 Setting ...... 161 Stowing...... 185 O Wireless charging ...... 185 On-board computer Passenger seat Menu overview...... 131 Adjust from the driver’s seat ...... 263 Mode switch ...... 106 Tyre Pressure Monitoring ...... 249 PCM ...... 197 Multi-collision braking ...... 207 Online navigation...... 165 Care instructions ...... 68 Multi-function steering wheel Online Services Central display ...... 190, 193 Buttons ...... 129 Establishing data connection ...... 196 Configuring Home screen...... 124 Recuperation button ...... 130 Opening and locking ...... 69 Configuring homepage ...... 124 Music Side windows...... 277 Configuring MyScreen...... 124 Connecting an external device via USB ...... 103 Storing and retrieving personal settings...... 180 Entering text and characters ...... 194 Interfaces in the armrest ...... 102 Vehicle ...... 69 Keyboard...... 194 Playing ...... 157 Opening Driver's Manual in vehicle ...... 195 Modifying the display ...... 258 Storing/editing a favourite ...... 158 MyScreen ...... 124 Opening Driver's Manual in Zentraldisplay ...... 195 MyScreen ...... 124 Notifications...... 173 Opening playlist...... 157 Opening menus ...... 194 OTA functions Setting time or temperature display ...... 194 N Breakdown Call ...... 175 Start menu ...... 124 Navigation ...... 165 Error...... 175 Using an external WiFi hotspot ...... 196 Avoiding traffic disruptions ...... 168 Function on Demand (FoD) ...... 174 Using PCM WiFi hotspot ...... 196 Charging Planner ...... 169 Update ...... 174 Configuring map content ...... 167 PCM hotspot ...... 196 Overrun recuperation ...... 238 Displaying traffic notices ...... 168 PCM set-up wizard Displaying/configuring the map display ...... 169 Overseas mode Calling up ...... 261 Entering a stopover ...... 167 Lights ...... 151 Phone ...... 182 Entering GPS coordinates...... 165 Connecting via Bluetooth® ...... 183 Entering/searching for a destination...... 165 P Connecting via Bluetooth® (known mobile phone) . . . . 184 Map view and navigation information on the instrument Paint ...... 64 Connecting via Bluetooth® (new mobile phone)...... 183 cluster ...... 169 Care...... 64 Connecting via Bluetooth® (second mobile phone) . . . . 184 Planning a tour...... 167 Care instructions ...... 64 Connecting via Bluetooth® (Windows® and iOS operating Porsche Intelligent Range Manager (PIRM) ...... 169 Polishing ...... 64 system) ...... 184 Settings ...... 170 Preserving...... 64 Connection status ...... 184 Toll devices...... 170 Removing marks ...... 64 Device Manager ...... 102 Trip overview ...... 168 Repairing damage ...... 64 Dialling a number...... 182 Functions during a phone call ...... 185 Night View Assist ...... 171 ParkAssist ...... 176 Making settings ...... 186 Animal warning ...... 171 Reversing camera ...... 177 Managing contacts ...... 186 Cleaning the camera ...... 172 Surround View ...... 178 Display elements ...... 172 Phone information in the instrument cluster ...... 185

321 Index

Storing/editing a favourite ...... 184 Porsche Stability Management (PSM) ...... 206 Opening...... 211 Stowing...... 185 Activating PSM Sport ...... 206 Rear seat Wireless charging ...... 185 Operating principle ...... 206 Child lock ...... 278 PID (Porsche InnoDrive) ...... 199 Porsche Surface Coated Brake (PSCB) ...... 61 Rear seat storage space ...... 226 Planning a tour (Navigation) ...... 167 Porsche Vehicle Tracking System (PVTS) ...... 208 Rear spoiler ...... 233 Playing media ...... 158 Operation ...... 209 Moving to cleaning position ...... 233 Plug socket (12 V) ...... 229 Service ...... 209 Operating principle ...... 233 Transport ...... 209 Porsche 360+ Lifestyle Assistant...... 56 Rear Turn Assist ...... 139 Porsche Vehicle Tracking System Plus (PVTS Plus) ...... 208 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM) ...... 187 Rear window Changing the Driver Card battery ...... 210 Selecting chassis setup ...... 187 Switching heating on/off ...... 51 Driver Card emergency deactivation ...... 209 Selecting the chassis height ...... 187 Recuperation ...... 237 Driver Card malfunction ...... 209 Switching off the levelling system (car jack mode). . . . 188 Operation ...... 209 Recuperation button...... 130 Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB)...... 61 Service ...... 209 Remote control ...... 104 Porsche Communication Management (PCM) Transport ...... 209 Lock vehicle ...... 72 Central display ...... 190, 193 Ports in the armrest ...... 103 Unlocking vehicle...... 71 Opening manual in vehicle ...... 195 Power meter ...... 125 Retrieving personal settings ...... 180 Operating ...... 190 Power windows Reversing camera ...... 177 Porsche Connect...... 197 Closing side windows using the proximity sensor in the Roof transport system Adjusting settings ...... 261 door handle (vehicles with Comfort Access) ...... 278 Closing the profile trim ...... 218 Displaying data privacy information ...... 261 Opening/closing side windows ...... 277 Fitting carrier ...... 214 Displaying the Legal Notice ...... 261 Opening/closing side windows with the driver's key Fitting mounting components ...... 218 Establishing data connection ...... 196 (remote control)...... 278 Transporting a load on the roof ...... 214 Logging in user (Porsche ID) ...... 197 Storing the end position ...... 278 Managing user (Porsche ID) ...... 197 Private mode ...... 197 Preventive occupant protection function...... 269 S Settings ...... 197 Privacy Mode SAFELOCK ...... 72 Using services ...... 196 Adjusting settings ...... 261 Deactivating with proximity sensor on door handle . . . . 73 Porsche Connect App ...... 56 Private mode ...... 197 Deactivating with the driver's key ...... 72 Connecting to PCM via WiFi ...... 56 Profile function ...... 83 Saving Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus) with LED PSM (Porsche Stability Management) ...... 206 Personal settings...... 180 headlights...... 149 Saying voice commands...... 265 Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus) with LED- Screens Q Care instructions ...... 68 Matrix headlights...... 149 Quick access bar Porsche InnoDrive (PID) ...... 199 Quick filter ...... 76 Sealant/sealing set Braking to a standstill and driving off again...... 204 For defective tyres...... 114 Changing the desired speed...... 204 Seals Controls ...... 202 R Care instructions ...... 66 Example of how it works...... 204 Race-Tex Care instructions ...... 67 Seat belts Interrupting and resuming control...... 204 Care instructions ...... 67 Radio...... 157 Operating principle ...... 201 Fastening ...... 221 Online radio ...... 157 Operating states ...... 203 Notes...... 220 Setting frequency range ...... 157 Overriding control ...... 204 Opening seat-belt buckle and removing seat belt. . . . . 222 Storing/editing a favourite ...... 158 Setting the desired distance ...... 204 Seat-belt pre-tensioners ...... 220 Tuning/storing stations ...... 157 Setting the maximum speed ...... 204 Warning light on the instrument cluster...... 220 Switching on and off ...... 203 Reading lights ...... 134 Warning message ...... 220 Porsche Intelligent Range Manager (PIRM) ...... 169 Rear fog light...... 147 Seat heating balance Porsche Road Trip app ...... 56 Adaptation of light distribution ...... 149 Setting ...... 263 Rear lid Seat memory ...... 180 Adjusting opening height ...... 212 322 Index

Seat ventilation balance Setting treble and bass...... 259 Swerve Assist ...... 268 Setting ...... 263 Spare wheel ...... 115 Switching on and off ...... 270 Seats Speed limiter (LIM) Switching exterior mirror heating on/off ...... 51 Adjusting the front seat ...... 223 Activating ...... 231 Switching hazard warning lights on and off...... 151 Adjusting the seat position...... 223 Adaptive speed limiter ...... 232 Switching seat heating on/off...... 224 Baby carrier ...... 93 Controls ...... 230 Switching seat ventilation on/off ...... 224 Folding rear seat backrest forward or back ...... 226 Display elements ...... 231 Switching steering wheel heating on/off...... 241 Storing and retrieving the seat position ...... 180 General safety instructions...... 230 Selecting a source (media) ...... 157 Operating principle ...... 230 Selecting chassis setup ...... 187 Overriding temporarily ...... 232 T Selecting the chassis height ...... 187 Setting the maximum speed ...... 232 Technical data System limitations...... 230 Filling capacities ...... 309 Sensors Tyre pressure tables ...... 310 Overview...... 19 Speed Limiter (LIM) ...... 230 Changing the maximum speed ...... 231 Weight ...... 309 Service position...... 280 Interrupt and resume ...... 232 Wheel and tyre sizes ...... 310 Setting and activating speed limit warning ...... 248 Switching on and off ...... 231 Telephone Setting automatic air-recirculation mode Spoiler ...... 233 Emergency call...... 108 Air-conditioning system ...... 50 Cleaning position ...... 233 Tether Setting the air flow ...... 48 General Safety Instructions ...... 233 Installing child restraint systems with ISOFIX tether . . . 95 Setting the fan Operating principle ...... 233 Theft protection ...... 54 Air-conditioning system ...... 48 Rear spoiler...... 233 Tie-down rings Setting the off delay...... 149 Setting the manual cleaning position ...... 259 Using...... 156 Settings Warning messages ...... 233 Tightening torque Storing and retrieving personal settings...... 180 Sport Chrono mode switch ...... 106 Wheel bolts ...... 255 Vehicle ...... 257 Sport Chrono stopwatch ...... 234 Timer function...... 83 Side lights ...... 147 Start menu...... 124 Toll devices ...... 170 Side windows Station/track Tool kit Opening/closing ...... 277 Displaying ...... 126 Removing and stowing ...... 154 Opening/closing with the driver's key (remote Steering wheel Tools ...... 154 control) ...... 278 Configuring the quick access button ...... 259 Storing the end position ...... 278 Top tether Setting ...... 241 Installing child restraint system with top tether ...... 95 SIM card Switching heating on/off ...... 241 Torque Using the phone...... 182 Stopwatch ...... 234 Siri...... 55 Tightening torque for wheel bolts ...... 255 Storage compartment Touch display Ski bag Opening in the front armrest ...... 243 Stowing skis/snowboard ...... 155 Care instructions ...... 68 Storage options ...... 243 Modifying the display ...... 258 Smartphone Storage options...... 243 Connecting via Bluetooth® ...... 183 Towing ...... 245 Glove box ...... 243 General information...... 245 Stowing...... 185 Storage compartment in front armrest...... 243 Wireless charging ...... 185 Towing lug ...... 245 Storing the end position of power windows ...... 278 Using a towing rope or towing bar ...... 245 Smoker's package ...... 228 Storing/editing a favourite Towing lug Snow chains Media ...... 158 In tool kit...... 154 General information...... 253 Phone ...... 184 TPM (Tyre Pressure Monitoring) ...... 249 Software information Stowing mobile phone ...... 185 Traffic notices ...... 168 Displaying software components ...... 261 Summer tyre Displaying version information...... 261 Traffic sign detection ...... 247 Storage ...... 254 Activating speed limit warning ...... 248 Sound settings Sun cover ...... 280 Balance and fader ...... 259 Bend ahead warning ...... 247 Sun visor ...... 244 Display elements ...... 247 323 Index

Setting speed limit warning ...... 248 Tyres...... 249 Vehicle door Speed limit display ...... 247 Fixing a flat tyre...... 114 Opening and locking from inside ...... 73 Speed limit warning display ...... 247 Sealant ...... 114 Unlocking from inside ...... 72 System limitations...... 247 Tyre-pressure plate ...... 308 Vehicle hotspot ...... 196 Warning messages ...... 247 Vehicle identification number ...... 308 Traffic sign recognition U Vehicle plug (emergency operation) ...... 86 General Safety Instructions ...... 247 Underbody protection...... 65 Vehicle settings...... 250 Operating principle ...... 247 Care instructions ...... 65 Adjusting the volume of navigation announcements. . . 258 Transport (on car trains, ferries, etc.) Unlocking Adjusting the volume of warning signals and Securing the vehicle ...... 246 Emergency unlocking of vehicle ...... 74 ParkAssist...... 258 Transverse acceleration Unlocking and opening the bonnet ...... 57 Configure Range drive mode ...... 262 Displaying ...... 126 Unlocking and opening the tailgate...... 211 Configuring...... 257 Tray (phone) ...... 185 Unlocking vehicle from inside ...... 72 Configuring Individual driving mode ...... 262 Tread depth Unlocking vehicle with Comfort Access ...... 71 Configuring keyboard settings...... 258 Tyre ...... 253 Unlocking vehicle with driver's key ...... 71 Configuring the capacitive button...... 259 Tuning/storing stations ...... 157 Unlocking options Configuring the quick access button on the steering wheel...... 259 Turn Assist...... 269 Setting ...... 259 Display ParkAssist ...... 262 Switching on and off ...... 270 Unlocking when approaching the vehicle...... 259 Displaying pressure difference...... 251 Tyre...... 250 Update Displaying trip data ...... 263 Check tyre pressure ...... 249 Download ...... 174 Modify the touch display settings ...... 258 Displaying pressure difference...... 251 Failed...... 175 Modifying the instrument cluster display ...... 258 Inscription on tyres ...... 252 Install ...... 174 Modifying the PCM display...... 258 Replacing tyres (general information)...... 252 Upper ventilation panel ...... 47 Resetting to factory settings ...... 258 Setting full load or partial load...... 251 Urgent warning (warning jolt) ...... 268 Resetting trip data...... 263 Setting tyre type and tyre size...... 251 USB connection...... 102-103 Set chassis tuning ...... 262 Snow chains (general information) ...... 253 Using lists by voice control ...... 266 Set drive mode...... 262 Storage ...... 254 Using voice control ...... 264 Set E-sound ...... 262 Teaching in new tyres in Tyre Pressure Monitoring Set recuperation ...... 262 (TPM) ...... 251 Setting chassis height...... 262 Tread depth ...... 253 V Setting date and time ...... 258 Valves ...... 253 Valves Setting door locking options ...... 259 Winter tyres (general information) ...... 253 Tyre ...... 253 Setting language ...... 258 Tyre pressure Vanity mirror ...... 244 Setting locking and unlocking options ...... 259 Check ...... 249 Vehicle Setting tyre type and tyre size...... 251 Displaying in instrument cluster ...... 249 Driving...... 236 Setting units...... 258 System is learning ...... 251 Driving off...... 237 Setting unlocking options...... 259 Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) ...... 249 Emergency locking ...... 74 Setting voice control system ...... 259 Displaying ...... 250 Emergency unlocking ...... 74 Storing on person buttons ...... 180 Teaching-in ...... 251 Exit ...... 238 Switch assistance systems on...... 262 Tyre pressure tables ...... 310 Locking from inside...... 73 Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM) ...... 250 Tyre pressure warning light ...... 126 Locking with Comfort Access ...... 73 Voice control ...... 264 Tyre sealant Locking with the driver's key ...... 72 Examples of commands ...... 266 Removing and stowing ...... 154 Starting...... 236 Saying natural voice commands ...... 265 Tyre sealant/sealing set Stop...... 238 Saying voice commands ...... 265 For defective tyres...... 114 Stopping ...... 238 Setting ...... 259 Unlocking with Comfort Access ...... 71 Settings ...... 266 Tyre selection ...... 259 Unlocking with driver's key...... 71 Siri ...... 55 Tyre-pressure plate...... 308 Vehicle data carrier ...... 308 Using voice control ...... 264 Voice Control Help ...... 266 324 Index

Voice control settings...... 266 Windows Care instructions ...... 65 Defrosting windscreen ...... 51 W Switching heated rear window on/off ...... 51 Warn and Brake Assist (WBA)...... 267 Activating and deactivating the distance warning. . . . . 269 Windscreen Brake assistance ...... 268 Defrosting...... 51 Collision warning ...... 268 Windscreen washer system Distance warning...... 268 Adding washer fluid...... 219 General Safety Instructions ...... 267 Antifreeze ...... 219 Operating principle ...... 267 Filling capacity ...... 309 Preventive occupant protection function ...... 269 Windscreen wiper ...... 279 Setting the warning time for the collision warning . . . . 269 Care instructions ...... 65 Setting the warning time for the distance warning. . . . 269 Cleaning Night View Assist camera...... 280 Swerve Assist...... 268 Cleaning the reversing camera...... 280 Switching on and off ...... 269 Controls ...... 279 Switching Serve Assist on and off...... 270 Ice and sun cover...... 280 Switching the collision warning on and off ...... 269 Replacing wiper blades ...... 280 Switching Turn Assist on and off...... 270 Spraying and wiping ...... 280 System limitations...... 267 Switching on continuous wiping ...... 279 Turn Assist ...... 269 Wiping with one-touch function ...... 280 Urgent warning (warning jolt) ...... 268 Windscreen wipers Warning messages ...... 267 Care instructions ...... 65 Warning lights ...... 126 One-touch function...... 279 Warning triangle ...... 154 Setting the rain sensor sensitivity...... 279 Washer fluid Switching on rain sensor ...... 279 Adding...... 219 Winter tyres Antifreeze ...... 219 General information...... 253 Filling capacity ...... 309 Wireless Internet Access ...... 196 Weight ...... 309 Wireless mobile phone charging ...... 185 Wheel and tyre sizes...... 310 Wheel bolts ...... 255 Wheels ...... 249 Changing...... 254 Fixing a flat tyre...... 114 Inscription on tyres ...... 252 Replacing tyres (general information)...... 252 Security wheel bolt (wrench socket)...... 255 Snow chains (general information) ...... 253 Storage ...... 254 Tightening torque ...... 255 Tyre sealant ...... 114 Tyre-pressure plate ...... 308 Valves ...... 253 Wheel bolts (care instructions) ...... 255 Winter tyres (general information) ...... 253 WiFi Device Manager ...... 102 Using an external WiFi hotspot ...... 196 Using PCM WiFi hotspot ...... 196 325